Advertisement
Advertisement
MiCOM P521
Current Differential Relay
P521/EN M/Ca4_
Software Version
Hardware Suffix
13
B
Technical Manual
Note:
The technical manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation.
However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics.
In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate Schneider Electric technical sales office and request the necessary information.
Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of Schneider Electric including settlements of warranties, result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the contents of the technical manual.
This device MUST NOT be modified. If any modification is made without the express permission of
Schneider Electric, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product unsafe.
The Schneider Electric logo and any alternative version thereof are trademarks and service marks of Schneider Electric.
All trade names or trademarks mentioned herein whether registered or not, are the property of their owners.
This manual is provided for informational use only and is subject to change without notice.
© 2017 , Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
MiCOM P521
CONTENTS
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 13
Chapter 14
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Safety Information
Introduction
Installation
User Guide
Menu Content Tables
Technical Data and Curves
Application Guide
Communication Database
Commissioning and Maintenance Guide
Connection Diagrams
Modem Configuration
Accessories
Commissioning Test and Record Sheets
Version History
Symbols and Glossary
P521/EN M/Ca4
Pxxx/EN SI/G12
P521/EN IT/B93
P521/EN IN/B93
P521/EN FT/B93
P521/EN HI/Ca4
P521/EN TD/Ca4
P521/EN AP/Ca4
P521/EN GC/B93
P521/EN CM/B93
P521/EN CO/Ca4
P521/EN MC/B93
P521/EN AC/B93
P521/EN RS/B93
P521/EN VC/Ca4
Pxxx/EN SG/A05
Contents
Page Contents-1
Contents
Notes:
MiCOM P521
Page Contents-2 P521/EN M/Ca4
MiCOM Pxxx SI Safety Information
Pxxx/EN SI/G12
SAFETY INFORMATION
CHAPTER SI
Page SI-1
SI Safety Information MiCOM Pxxx
Page SI-2 Pxxx/EN SI/G12
Contents SI Safety Information
CONTENTS
3 SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT
4 INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING
5 DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL
6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY
Pxxx/EN SI/G12 Page SI-3
SI Safety Information
Notes:
Contents
Page SI-4 Pxxx/EN SI/G12
Introduction SI Safety Information
1 INTRODUCTION
This guide and the relevant equipment documentation provide full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment. This Safety Information section also includes reference to typical equipment label markings.
Documentation for equipment ordered from Schneider Electric is dispatched separately from manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore this guide is provided to ensure that printed information which may be present on the equipment is fully understood by the recipient.
The technical data in this Safety Information section is typical only, see the technical data section of the relevant product publication(s) for data specific to a particular equipment.
WARNING Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the contents of this Safety Information section and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is installed, commissioned or serviced.
Language-specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some equipment.
Pxxx/EN SI/G12 Page SI-5
SI Safety Information
2
Health and Safety
HEALTH AND SAFETY
The information in the Safety Information section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with the contents of that Safety Information section, or this Safety Guide.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and also cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:
Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the system to which it is being connected;
Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it;
Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering practices;
Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
The equipment documentation gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manuals cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate Schneider Electric technical sales office and request the necessary information.
Page SI-6 Pxxx/EN SI/G12
Symbols and Labels on the Equipment
3
3.1
SI Safety Information
SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT
For safety reasons the following symbols and external labels, which may be used on the equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before the equipment is installed or commissioned.
Symbols
Caution: refer to equipment documentation
Caution: risk of electric shock
Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal
Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal
Note: This symbol may also be used for a Protective Conductor
(Earth) Terminal if that terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly e.g. power supply.
3.2
*CAUTION: The term “Earth” used throughout this technical manual is the direct equivalent of the North American term
“Ground”.
Labels
See Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M) for typical equipment labeling information.
Pxxx/EN SI/G12 Page SI-7
SI Safety Information
4
Installing, Commissioning and Servicing
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING
Manual Handling
Plan carefully, identify any possible hazards and determine whether the load needs to be moved at all. Look at other ways of moving the load to avoid manual handling. Use the correct lifting techniques and Personal Protective Equipment to reduce the risk of injury.
Many injuries are caused by:
Lifting heavy objects
Lifting things incorrectly
Pushing or pulling heavy objects
Using the same muscles repetitively.
Follow the Health and Safety at Work, etc Act 1974, and the Management of Health and
Safety at Work Regulations 1999.
Equipment Connections
Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety.
The equipment documentation should be consulted before installing, commissioning, or servicing the equipment.
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.
The clamping screws of all terminal block connectors, for field wiring, using M4 screws shall be tightened to a nominal torque of 1.3 Nm.
Equipment intended for rack or panel mounting is for use on a flat surface of a Type 1 enclosure, as defined by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also electronic parts may be damaged if suitable ElectroStatic voltage Discharge (ESD) precautions are not taken.
If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards.
Voltage and current connections shall be made using insulated crimp terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety.
Watchdog (self-monitoring) contacts are provided in numerical relays to indicate the health of the device. Schneider Electric strongly recommends that these contacts are hardwired into the substation's automation system, for alarm purposes.
To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used.
The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection diagram.
Protection Class I Equipment
Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment.
The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be lost.
When the protective (earth) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to terminate cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the protective (earth) conductor is checked after the addition or removal of such functional earth connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the protective (earth) connections should be ensured by use of a locknut or similar.
The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm² (3.3 mm² for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring regulations.
The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short as possible.
Page SI-8 Pxxx/EN SI/G12
Installing, Commissioning and Servicing SI Safety Information
All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.
Pre-Energization Checklist
Before energizing the equipment, the following should be checked:
Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation);
CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections;
Protective fuse rating;
Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where applicable);
Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the application.
Accidental Touching of Exposed Terminals
If working in an area of restricted space, such as a cubicle, where there is a risk of electric shock due to accidental touching of terminals which do not comply with IP20 rating, then a suitable protective barrier should be provided.
Equipment Use
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Removal of the Equipment Front Panel/Cover
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts, which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed.
UL and CSA/CUL Listed or Recognized Equipment
To maintain UL and CSA/CUL Listing/Recognized status for North America the equipment should be installed using UL or CSA Listed or Recognized parts for the following items: connection cables, protective fuses/fuseholders or circuit breakers, insulation crimp terminals and replacement internal battery, as specified in the equipment documentation.
For external protective fuses a UL or CSA Listed fuse shall be used. The Listed type shall be a Class J time delay fuse, with a maximum current rating of 15 A and a minimum d.c. rating of 250 Vd.c., for example type AJT15.
Where UL or CSA Listing of the equipment is not required, a high rupture capacity
(HRC) fuse type with a maximum current rating of 16 Amps and a minimum d.c. rating of
250 Vd.c. may be used, for example Red Spot type NIT or TIA.
Equipment Operating Conditions
The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits.
Current Transformer Circuits
Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. Generally, for safety, the secondary of the line CT must be shorted before opening any connections to it.
For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the module.
Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required, the equipment documentation should be checked to see if this applies.
For equipment with pin-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination does NOT have automatic CT shorting on removal of the module.
External Resistors, including Voltage Dependent Resistors (VDRs)
Where external resistors, including Voltage Dependent Resistors (VDRs), are fitted to the equipment, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched.
Battery Replacement
Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity to avoid possible damage to the equipment, buildings and persons.
Pxxx/EN SI/G12 Page SI-9
SI Safety Information Installing, Commissioning and Servicing
Insulation and Dielectric Strength Testing
Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.
Insertion of Modules and PCB Cards
Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized, since this may result in damage.
Insertion and Withdrawal of Extender Cards
Extender cards are available for some equipment. If an extender card is used, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized. This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender card.
External Test Blocks and Test Plugs
Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs such as the
MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM P990 types, hazardous voltages may be accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the insertion or removal of
MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
*Note: When a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM P991
Test Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically shorted, making them safe.
Fiber Optic Communication
Where fiber optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly.
Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device.
Cleaning
The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water, when no connections are energized. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally protected by petroleum jelly, which should not be removed.
Page SI-10 Pxxx/EN SI/G12
De-commissioning and Disposal
5
SI Safety Information
DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL
De-commissioning
The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to de-commissioning.
Disposal
It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided. The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits.
Particular regulations within the country of operation, may apply to the disposal of the equipment.
Pxxx/EN SI/G12 Page SI-11
SI Safety Information
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
Technical Specifications for Safety
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY
Unless otherwise stated in the equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable.
Protective Fuse Rating
The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 16A,
High Rupture Capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent. Unless otherwise stated in equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable. The protective fuse should be located as close to the unit as possible.
DANGER CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may produce lethal hazardous voltages.
Protective Class
IEC 60255-27: 2005
EN 60255-27: 2005
Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment documentation).
This equipment requires a protective conductor (earth) connection to ensure user safety.
Installation Category
IEC 60255-27: 2005
EN 60255-27: 2005
Installation Category III (Overvoltage Category III)
Distribution level, fixed installation.
Equipment in this category is qualification tested at 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 500 , 0.5 J, between all supply circuits and earth and also between independent circuits.
Environment
The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet of housing which will enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected).
Pollution Degree
Altitude
Pollution Degree 2 Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety standards.
Operation up to 2000m
Page SI-12 Pxxx/EN SI/G12
MiCOM P521 (IT) 1 Introduction
P521/EN IT/B93
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER 1
Page (IT) 1-1
(IT) 1 Introduction
Software version:
Hardware Suffix:
Connection diagram:
13
B
10P52101
MiCOM P521
Page (IT) 1-2 P521/EN IT/B93
Contents
(IT) 1 Introduction
Contents
Page (IT) 1-
1 Introduction 5
2 How to Use this Manual 6
3 Introduction to the MiCOM P521
4 Main Functions
7
8
P521/EN IT/B93 Page (IT) 1-3
(IT) 1 Introduction
Notes:
Contents
Page (IT) 1-4 P521/EN IT/B93
Introduction (IT) 1 Introduction
1 INTRODUCTION
The MiCOM P521 is a numerical current differential relay designed to control, protect and monitor overhead lines and cables of low to medium voltage systems.
P521/EN IT/B93 Page (IT) 1-5
(IT) 1 Introduction
2
How to Use this Manual
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This manual provides a description of the MiCOM P521 functions and settings. It enables the user to become familiar with the application, installation, setting and commissioning of this relay.
This manual has the following format:
7
8
3
4
5
Safety Information
1 Introduction
Contents of the manual and general introduction to the MiCOM P521.
2 Installation
Discusses the precautions to be taken when handling and installing electronic equipment.
Pxxx/EN SI
6
User Guide
A detailed description of the features of the MiCOM P521 relay.
Menu Content Tables
Relay Menu Map
Technical Data and Curves
Comprehensive details of nominal values, setting ranges, specifications and characteristics
Application Guide
P521/EN FT
P521/EN HI
P521/EN TD
P521/EN AP
Introduction to the applications of the MiCOM P521 relay including setting guidelines and explanations of special features provided.
MODBUS Database/IEC 60870-5-103
Commissioning and Maintenance Guide
Guide to commissioning, problem solving and maintenance of MiCOM
P521.
P521/EN GC
P521/EN CM
9 Connection Diagrams
All wiring connections to the relay.
P521/EN CO
10 Modem Configuration
Guide to configuration of the modem’s compatible with the MiCOM P521
P521/EN MC
11 Accessories
Comprehensive details of the accessories available for the P521
12 Commissioning Test and Record Sheets
13 Version History
Details of the Hardware / Software Version History and Compatibility
14 Symbols and Glossary
P521/EN RS
P521/EN VC
Pxxx/EN SG
Page (IT) 1-6 P521/EN IT/B93
Introduction to the MiCOM P521
3
(IT) 1 Introduction
INTRODUCTION TO THE MICOM P521
The MiCOM protection relay range follows on from the success of the MIDOS, K and
MODN ranges by incorporating the latest developments in digital technology. The
MiCOM P521 relay uses the same modular box concept but provides more protection for the most demanding applications.
The relay has a large number of functions for controlling and collecting data. This can form part of a fully integrated system covering protection, control, instrumentation, data acquisition and the recording of faults, events and disturbances. The relay front panel has a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) with 2 x 16 back-lit alphanumerical characters, a tactile 7 button keypad (to gain access to all the settings, alarms and measurements) and
8 LEDs to display the state of the MiCOM P521 relay. In addition, the use of the front
EIA(RS)232 and rear EIA(RS)485 communication ports makes it possible to read, reinitialize and change the settings of the relay, if required, from a local or remote PC equipped with the MiCOM S1 software.
Its flexibility of use, reduced maintenance requirements and ease of integration allow the
MiCOM P521 to provide an evolving solution for the problems of the protection of electric networks.
The MiCOM P521 relay provides comprehensive unit protection of overhead lines underground cables and ring mains. The integration of many protection features, including phase overcurrent and earth fault protection, allows application to wide range of medium and low voltage applications.
P521/EN IT/B93 Page (IT) 1-7
(IT) 1 Introduction Main Functions
The following table shows the functions available in the MiCOM P521 relay.
Functions
Phase segregated current differential protection
Instantaneous / time delayed overcurrent protection
Instantaneous / time delayed earth fault protection
Thermal overload protection
Broken conductor detection
Undercurrent protection
Negative sequence overcurrent protection
Direct Intertripping
Permissive intertripping
Programmable inter-trip
Trip circuit supervision
Circuit breaker monitoring and control
Circuit breaker failure detection
Current transformer supervision
Cold load pickup (O/C and E/F only)
Four Setting groups
Instantaneous/start contact (O/C and E/F only)
Latching output contacts
Blocking logic
Selective relay scheme logic
A-B-C and A-C-B phase rotation operation
Measurements (True RMS)
Peak and rolling values
Event records
Fault records
Instantaneous records
Disturbance records
EIA(RS)232 front communication
EIA(RS)485 rear communication
Commissioning features
Logic equations
50BF
86
50BF
37
46
ANSI Code
87L
50/51
50N/51N
49
46BC
Page (IT) 1-8 P521/EN IT/B93
MiCOM P521 (IN) 2 Installation
P521/EN IN/B93
INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 2
Page (IN) 2-1
(IN) 2 Installation
Software version:
Hardware Suffix:
Connection diagram:
13
B
10P52101
MiCOM P521
Page (IN) 2-2 P521/EN IN/B93
Contents (IN) 2 Installation
CONTENTS
Page (IN) 2-
1 General Considerations
2 Handling of Electronic Equipment
3 Relay Mounting
6
7
4 Unpacking 8
5 Storage
6 Case Dimensions
9
10
5
FIGURES
Page (IN) 2-
Figure 1 - MiCOM P521 relay case dimensions 10
P521/EN IN/B93 Page (IN) 2-3
(IN) 2 Installation
Notes:
Figures
Page (IN) 2-4 P521/EN IN/B93
General Considerations
1.1
1.2
(IN) 2 Installation
Receipt of Relays
Protective relays, although generally of robust construction, require careful treatment prior to installation on site. On receipt, relays should be examined immediately to ensure no damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has been sustained during transit a claim should be made to the transport contractor and Schneider Electric should be promptly notified.
Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installation should be returned to their protective polythene bags.
ElectroStatic Discharge (ESD)
The relays use components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharges.
The electronic circuits are well protected by the metal case and the internal module should not be withdrawn unnecessarily. When handling the module outside its case, care should be taken to avoid contact with components and electrical connections. If removed from the case for storage, the module should be placed in an electrically conducting antistatic bag.
There are no setting adjustments within the module and it is advised that it is not unnecessarily disassembled. Although the printed circuit boards are plugged together, the connectors are a manufacturing aid and not intended for frequent dismantling; in fact considerable effort may be required to separate them. Touching the printed circuit board should be avoided, since Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductors (CMOS) are used, which can be damaged by static electricity discharged from the body.
P521/EN IN/B93 Page (IN) 2-5
(IN) 2 Installation
2
Handling of Electronic Equipment
HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
A person’s normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices, when handling electronic circuits, can cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately apparent but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case. Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing modules unnecessarily.
Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor devices. However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, the following precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and manufactured.
1. Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the equipment by touching the case.
2. Handle the module by its frontplate, frame or edges of the printed circuit board.
Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit tracks or connectors.
3. Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands helps to achieve an equal potential.
4. Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same potential as yourself.
5. Store or transport the module in a conductive bag.
If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of any equipment in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist strap.
Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500 k – 10 M .
If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact with the case to prevent a build-up of static. Instrumentation which may be used for making measurements should be earthed to the case whenever possible.
More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be found in
BS5783 and IEC 147-OF. It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry or modification work should be carried out in a special handling area such as described in the above-mentioned BS and IEC documents.
Page (IN) 2-6 P521/EN IN/B93
Relay Mounting (IN) 2 Installation
Relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly.
If an MMLG test block is to be included it should be positioned at the right-hand side of the assembly (viewed from the front). Modules should remain protected by their metal case during assembly into a panel or rack.
For individually mounted relays an outline diagram is supplied in section 6 of Installation
(P521/EN IN) showing the panel cut-outs and hole centers.
P521/EN IN/B93 Page (IN) 2-7
(IN) 2 Installation Unpacking
4 UNPACKING
Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the parts are damaged or the settings altered. Relays must only be handled by skilled persons.
The installation should be clean, dry and reasonably free from dust and excessive vibration. The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection. Relays that have been removed from their cases should not be left in situations where they are exposed to dust or damp. This particularly applies to installations which are being carried out at the same time as construction work.
Page (IN) 2-8 P521/EN IN/B93
Storage (IN) 2 Installation
5 STORAGE
If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt, they should be stored in a place free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier bags have been included in the packing they should be retained. The action of the de-humidifier crystals will be impaired if the bag has been exposed to ambient conditions and may be restored by gently heating the bag for about an hour, prior to replacing it in the carton.
Dust which collects on a carton may, on subsequent unpacking, find its way into the relay; in damp conditions the carton and packing may become impregnated with moisture and the de-humidifier will lose its efficiency.
Storage temperature: –25°C to +70°C.
P521/EN IN/B93 Page (IN) 2-9
(IN) 2 Installation Case Dimensions
The MiCOM P521 relay is available in a MiCOM size 30TE metal case for panel or flush mounting.
Weight: 1.7 to 2.1 Kg
External size: Height case front panel
152 mm
177 mm front panel 155 mm front panel + case 252 mm
154.2
10.7
13
29.6
103.67
13
150.11
148.1
N.4 f 3.4
151.05
N.4 f 4.4
All dimensions in mm
Figure 1 - MiCOM P521 relay case dimensions
P2222ENb
Page (IN) 2-10 P521/EN IN/B93
MiCOM P521 (FT) 3 User Guide
P521/EN FT/B93
USER GUIDE
CHAPTER 3
Page (FT) 3-1
(FT) 3 User Guide
Date:
Software version:
Hardware Suffix:
Connection diagram:
January 2012
13
B
10P52101
MiCOM P521
Page (FT) 3-2 P521/EN FT/B93
Contents
CONTENTS
1 Description of the P521 Relay
2 User Interface
LCD Display and Keypad Description
The two Areas under the Top and Bottom Flaps
3 Menus
4 Wiring
Relay Hardware or Software Alarms
EIA(RS)485 Rear Communication Port
EIA(RS)232 Front Communication Port
P521/EN FT/B93
(FT) 3 User Guide
Page (FT) 3-3
Page (FT) 3-
10
72
5
6
(FT) 3 User Guide
FIGURES
Figure 1 - MiCOM P521 front panel
Figure 2 - Battery box MiCOM E1
Figure 3 - Organization of MiCOM P521 main menu
Figure 4 - EIA(RS)232 front port communication cable wiring
Figures
Page (FT) 3-
Page (FT) 3-4 P521/EN FT/B93
DESCRIPTION OF THE P521 RELAY
1
(FT) 3 User Guide
DESCRIPTION OF THE P521 RELAY
MiCOM P521 is a fully numerical relay that is designed to perform electrical protection and control functions.
3 phase and 1 earth current inputs are available at both 1 and 5 Amps ratings on the relay (4 inputs for 1 A and 4 inputs for 5 A). It is possible to use a combination of input ratings on the same relay (i.e. a mix of 1 A for earth fault and 5 A for phase connections).
All output relays can be programmed to respond to any of the available control or protection functions. Logic inputs can also be allocated to the various control functions.
The MiCOM relays are powered from either a DC or an AC auxiliary supply (2 ranges of auxiliary supply). Any short supply interruptions (< 50 ms) are filtered and regulated through the auxiliary supply.
The front panel enables the user to navigate through the menu to access data, change the settings, read the measurements, etc. Eight LEDs on the front panel allows a clear and simple indication of events. The various alarms detected are displayed on the backlit LCD display. No password is required to read or clear these alarm messages.
However, the modification of settings can only be carried out with a password.
MiCOM P521 relay continuously measures the phase and earth currents and calculates the true RMS component up to 10th harmonic.
MiCOM P521 relay has available via its rear connectors, a standard EIA(RS)485 port.
Communication protocols can be chosen at the time of order, from MODBUS RTU, IEC
60870-5-103 or DNP3.0. Using the communication channel, all stored information
(measurements, alarms and settings) can be read, and the settings can be modified if necessary.
Consultation and modification of this data can be carried out on site with a PC and the appropriate Schneider Electric software (e.g. MiCOM S1 Studio).
EIA(RS)485 based communication allows the MiCOM P521 relay to be directly linked to a digital control system (MiCOM S10 for example). All the available data is then placed at the disposal of the supervisor and can be processed either locally or remotely.
The MiCOM P521 relay gives the user more flexibility to adapt the relay to the desired applications. With regard to low installation costs, this relay offers an economic solution, providing integrated protection and control functions.
P521/EN FT/B93 Page (FT) 3-5
(FT) 3 User Guide
2
USER INTERFACE
USER INTERFACE
The MiCOM P521 relay front panel serves as an interface between the user and the protection relay. It enables the user to modify and read relay settings and to display measurements and alarms.
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.2.1
Page (FT) 3-6
Figure 1 - MiCOM P521 front panel
The front panel of the relay consists of three separate sections:
1. The LCD display and the keypad
2. The LEDs
3. The two zones under the upper and lower flaps.
LCD Display and Keypad Description
LCD Display
The front panel of the MiCOM P521 relay has a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) on which data such as settings, measured values and alarms can be viewed. The data is accessed through a menu system.
The LCD has two lines each with sixteen characters. A back-light is activated when any key is pressed and will remain lit for five minutes after the last key press. This allows the display to be read in most lighting conditions.
Keypad
The keypad has seven keys divided into two groups:
There are two keys situated immediately under the screen (keys
and ).
The Five main keys situated at the middle of the front face are for menu navigation.
Alarm Keys
The two keys
and are dedicated for reading and acknowledging the alarms. So as to display successive alarms, press on key. The alarms are presented in reverse order for their detection (the most recent first, the oldest last). So as to acknowledge the
P521/EN FT/B93
USER INTERFACE
2.1.2.2
2.2
(FT) 3 User Guide alarms, the user can either acknowledge each alarm using
or go to the end of the
ALARM menu and carry out a general acknowledgement.
Latched indications/contacts will also be reset once the
key has been pressed.
Programming Keypad
The five keys situated in the middle of the MiCOM front panel are dedicated to menu navigation and setting changes.
The keys
,
,
and
make it possible to move in the direction indicated to the various levels of the menus.
The key
validates a choice or value (modification of settings).
LEDs
The LED labels on the front panel are by default written in English, however the user also has self-adhesive labels, available with MiCOM relays, in French. Additional blank labels are provided on which it is possible to write using a ball point pen.
The top four LEDs indicate to the status of the relay (Trip condition, alarm LED, equipment failure and auxiliary supply).
The four lower LEDs can be freely programmed by the user to correspond to operation of the various thresholds and / or the state of the logic inputs.
Eight LEDs are located in the left portion of the front plate (numbered from 1 to 8 starting from the top):
LED 1 Color : RED Label : Trip
LED 1 indicates when a trip order has been issued by the relay to the circuit breaker or contactor. This LED copies the trip order issued to the Trip output (output RELAY 1). Its normal state is unlit. It is illuminated as soon as a tripping order is issued. It goes out when the associated alarm is acknowledged, provided the initiating protection element has fully reset.
LED 2 Color : ORANGE Label : ALARM
LED 2 indicates that an alarm has been registered by MiCOM P521 relay. The alarms are either threshold crossings (instantaneous), or tripping orders (possibly time delayed, depending upon which protection element operates). In addition to threshold crossings and trips an alarm will also be given in the event of a protection comms channel failure.
As soon as an alarm is registered, the LED flashes. When all the stored alarms are read
( ), the LED is illuminated continuously.
When all the alarms are acknowledged
, the LED goes out.
Note The instantaneous alarms can be selected to manual or automatic reset.
This can be set in CONFIGURATION/ALARMS/Inst. Self Reset
YES / NO
Choose YES for automatic reset. The default setting is NO.
LED 3 Color : ORANGE Label : Warning
LED 3 is dedicated to the internal alarms of the MiCOM P521. When a « non critical » internal alarm (typically a control comms fault i.e. MODBUS etc.) is detected, the LED will flash. When the fault is classed as « critical », the LED is illuminated continuously. The extinction of this LED is only possible by the disappearance of the cause that provoked it
(repair of the module, disappearance of the Fault).
P521/EN FT/B93 Page (FT) 3-7
(FT) 3 User Guide
2.3
USER INTERFACE
LED 4 Color : GREENLabel : Healthy
LED 4 indicates that the MiCOM P521 has a healthy auxiliary supply in the nominal range.
LED 5 to 8 Color : RED Label : Left Blank
These LEDs can be programmed by the user on the basis of information on available thresholds (instantaneous and time-delayed) and the state of the logic inputs. The user selects the information he wishes to see associated with each LED from the menu element. A single LED can be associated with more than one protection / control function. Each LED illuminates when the associated information is valid. The extinction of each LED occurs when the associated alarm is acknowledged.
The two Areas under the Top and Bottom Flaps
Under the upper flap, a label identifies the relay according to its model (ordering code) and serial number. This information defines the product uniquely and specifically.
In making all requests for information from Schneider Electric After Sales Department, please quote these two numbers.
Information indicated in the lower portion of this label covers the auxiliary supply voltage and the nominal earth current value.
Under the lower flap, an EIA(RS)232 port is available. This can be used to download a setting file from a PC with the MiCOM S1 setting software. Alternatively, the EIA(RS)232 port can be used to download new application software versions into the relay flash memory.
The removal of the MiCOM active part (chassis) from the case is performed by opening the two flaps, then with a 3 mm screwdriver, turn the extractor cam situated under the upper flap, and pull using the two slots situated behind these flaps.
Note: When re-inserting the chassis into the case, ensure that the extractor cam is pushed back flat, and that the chassis is then pushed fully back into the case as far as it can go.
Page (FT) 3-8 P521/EN FT/B93
USER INTERFACE
2.4 Battery Box
To MiCOM EIA(RS)232
(FT) 3 User Guide
Battery Box MiCOM E1
2.5
Input for external supply
12V dc - 24V dc
P0005ENc
Figure 2 - Battery box MiCOM E1
The battery box performs the two following functions:
4. Temporary powering of the relay in order to allow the user to view or modify data when the auxiliary power supply has failed. The battery box uses a 6LR61 (9 V) battery, which can power the relay up to 3 hours. When the battery is flat it is possible to power the battery box with an external dc supply. The dc voltage value must be between 12 Vdc and 24 Vdc.
5. EIA(RS)232 interface between the MiCOM relay and the PC equipped with the setting software MiCOM S1 Studio.
Tripping Output
The trip output for the MiCOM P521 relay is dedicated to output relay RL1. Operation of only RL1 will result in illumination of the red trip LED.
P521/EN FT/B93 Page (FT) 3-9
(FT) 3 User Guide
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
MENUS
MENUS
The menu of the MiCOM P521 relay is organized into main and sub menus, much like a
PC directory structure.
Default Display
By default, the current value (selected phase, earth or all phases and earth) is continuously displayed.
As soon as an alarm is generated by the MiCOM relay, that information is considered as priority and replaces the default value.
The default display choice is made in the CONFIGURATION/Display menu.
Access to the Menu
Complete menu access is performed by manipulation of the keys
,
,
and
. The
general arrangement of the menus is shown in Figure 3 for P521.
Reading of parameters and measurements is possible without entering the password.
However, modification of the parameters does require the password. Should an error be made in entering a parameter, press
to cancel.
Except for reading and canceling, the keys
and are inactive.
Note The letter P is displayed when the password is entered. However If no key is pressed for 5 minutes, the password mode becomes inactive.
Password
Password Protection
Password protection is applicable to the relay settings, especially to the selection of the various thresholds, time delays, communication parameters, allocation of inputs and outputs relays.
The password consists of four alphabetical capital characters. When leaving the factory, the password is AAAA. If necessary the user can define their own combination of characters.
Should the password be lost or forgotten, modification of the relay settings is prohibited.
In these circumstances the manufacturer or agent can supply a “master” password when given the relay serial number.
Note: The programming mode is indicated by a letter "P" on the lower right hand side of the display, but only when a column heading is displayed. The letter
“P” is present as long as the password is active (5 minutes if no key is pressed).
Entering the Password
The password is requested as soon as an attempt is made to modify a relay setting. The user must enter the password (4 characters/letters) and accept the entire password with
. If the password is correct “PASSWORD OK” is displayed and setting changes can the n commence. If the password is incorrect “PASSWORD NOK” displayed.
After 5 seconds, the display returns to the cell prior to password entry.
Page (FT) 3-10 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.4
3.4.1
P521/EN FT/B93
(FT) 3 User Guide
If no action is taken on the keypad for 5 minutes, the password is deactivated. A new request shall be associated with any subsequent setting change. A temporary interruption in the auxiliary supply will also serve to de-activate the password.
Note: If the password has been entered via the keypad, the following remote access is possible:
Front port None
Rear port Read access only
The relay will remain in this state until the password has been deactivated.
Changing the Password
To change the active password, go to the OP. PARAMETERS menu and then to the point of the “Password” sub menu. Enter the old password and validate. Then press
and enter the new password character by character and validate the new password using
.
The message “NEW PASSWORD OK” is displayed to indicate that the password has changed.
Deactivating the Password
To deactivate the active password, go to the OP. PARAMETERS menu and then to the point of the “Password” sub menu. Press
.
Password protection is deactivated, and remote access via all communication ports is reactivated.
Alarm Display
The presence of any alarm is displayed on the LCD. The display of alarm messages has priority over the default current value. As soon as an alarm is detected by the relay
(threshold crossing for example), the message is displayed on the MiCOM LCD and the
Alarm LED (2nd LED) lights up.
The alarm messages are classed as follows:
•
Electrical system alarm message
•
Hardware or software fault message from the relay.
Electrical System Alarms
Any crossing of a threshold (instantaneous or time delay) generates an "electrical system alarm". The threshold that has been exceeded will be displayed on the LCD together with the phase/phases (A, B or C) involved in the fault.
If several alarms are triggered, they are all stored in their order of appearance the most recent alarm first, the oldest alarm last. Each message is numbered and the total number of messages is shown.
The user can read all the alarm messages using the key without entering the password. The user can then acknowledge the alarm using the
key. The alarms can be acknowledged one by one or all of them simultaneously by going to the end of the list and pressing the
key.
The management of the ALARM LED is directly linked to the status of the stored alarms.
•
If one or several messages are NOT READ and NOT ACKNOWLEDGED, the alarm LED flashes.
•
If all the messages have been READ but NOT ACKNOWLEDGED, the alarm LED remains lights up continuously.
Page (FT) 3-11
(FT) 3 User Guide MENUS
•
If all the messages have been READ and ACKNOWLEDGED, the alarm LED goes out.
Note: The alarms concerning the instantaneous (start indications) can be selected self reset Yes or No in the CONFIGURATION/Alarms Menu
The different electrical system alarms are described below:
DIFF
e>
e>>
e>>>
e>>>>
>
>>
>>>
>>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> tIe>>>> tI> tI>> tI>>> tI>>>>
THERMAL ALARM
THERMAL TRIP
< t
<
BRKN COND. t AUX 1 t AUX 2
CB FAILURE
2> tI 2>
2>> tI2>>
DIRECT
-TRIP
DIFF
-TRIP
PERMISSIVE
T operating CB
CB CLOSE FAILURE
Differential protection trip
1 st stage earth fault pick-up
2 nd stage earth fault pick-up
3 rd stage earth fault pick-up
4 th stage earth fault pick-up
1 st stage overcurrent pick-up
2 nd stage overcurrent pick-up
3 rd stage overcurrent pick-up
4 th stage overcurrent pick-up
1 st stage earth fault time delay
2 nd stage earth fault time delay
3 rd stage earth fault time delay
4 th stage earth fault time delay
1 st stage overcurrent time delay
2 nd stage overcurrent time delay
3 rd stage overcurrent time delay
4 th stage overcurrent time delay
Thermal alarm threshold pick-up
Thermal trip threshold pick-up
Undercurrent element pick-up
Undercurrent fault time delay
Broken conductor indication.
2/I1 element pick-up for longer than tBC
(breaker fail timer). TBC is settable in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Broken
Cond. Menu.CTRL/Broken cond. menu. t AUX1 time delay t AUX2 time delay
Circuit breaker failure indication (the CB did not trip on tBf time delay) tBF is settable in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Fail menu.
Negative sequence current threshold pick-up (1 st stage)
Negative sequence current threshold time delay (1 st stage)
Negative sequence current threshold pick-up (2 nd stage)
Negative sequence current threshold time delay (2 nd stage)
Indicates that the relay received and tripped on direct intertrip.
Indicates that the relay has received an intertrip signal from the remote relay that has performed a differential trip.
Indicates that the relay has tripped due to a permissive intertrip command.
Operating (or tripping) time of the circuit breaker longer than the value set in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu.
Closing time of the circuit breaker longer than the value set in the
AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu.
Page (FT) 3-12 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
3.4.2
(FT) 3 User Guide
CB OPEN NB
Sum A n
TRIP CIRCUIT
LATCH RELAY
CB CLOSE FAILURE
COMMS ALARM
DIFF FAIL
REM TRIP
CB STATUS DB
LOOPBACK MODE
ISOLATED RELAYS
DISABLED
DIFF
Number of circuit breaker operation higher that the value set in the
AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu.
Broken current measured higher than the value set in the AUTOMAT.
CTRL/CB Supervision menu.
Trip circuit failure. Failure condition present for longer than the supervision timer tSUP, settable in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB
Supervision menu.
A least one relay is latched.
Circuit breaker closing time longer than the value set in the AUTOMAT.
CTRL/CB Supervision menu.
Differential protection communication channel failure. Back-up protection (e.g. overcurrent) can be enabled in the event of COMMS
FAILURE.
Indicates that the differential protection is not functioning due to either
COMMS FAIL or a hardware fault. Back-up protection may still be functioning.
Indicates that the circuit breaker has been given a remote trip command. A remote trip can be initiated by the front user interface, a logic input or via the remote communications link.
This alarm stands for
"Circuit Breaker Status Don’t Believe It". In the event when the 52a and 52b contacts are both open or both closed, this alarm will be given after 5 seconds.
Indicates that the protection communications are looped back on themselves for commissioning purposes. The relay will accept messages from its own address. This mode can be enabled/disabled in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning menu.
Output relays will not operate for fault conditions but alarms and LED’s function as usual. This mode can be used for commissioning purposes.
Indicates that the current differential protection has been disabled. The current differential protection can be disabled via the relay menu or via a blocking input. Blocking/Disabling either local or remote relays will cause this alarm to be displayed at both ends simultaneously.
Relay Hardware or Software Alarms
Any software or hardware fault of the MiCOM relay generates a "hardware/software alarm". If several alarms are generated they are all stored in their order of appearance.
The alarms are displayed in reverse order (the most recent first and the oldest last).
Each message is numbered and the total number of messages is indicated below.
The user can read all the alarm messages with the aid of , without entering the password.
The acknowledgement of the relay alarm messages is IMPOSSIBLE if the fault is still present. The alarm can only be acknowledged when the cause of the alarm has disappeared.
The management of the WARNING LED is directly linked to the status of the alarms stored in the memory.
•
If the fault is major (the relay cannot perform protection functions), the WARNING
LED is continuously illuminated and the watchdog contact will operate.
•
If the fault is minor (no influence on the protection and automation function e.g.
SCADA communication failure), the WARNING LED flashes. This will not cause operation of the watchdog contact.
Possible Hardware or Software alarm messages:
P521/EN FT/B93 Page (FT) 3-13
(FT) 3 User Guide
3.5
MENUS
Major Fault
SETTING ERROR:
EEPROM ERROR CALIBR.:
CT ERROR:
PROT. COMMS FAIL:
DEFAULT CONFIG.:
Setting error occurred due to data memory fault
Calibration memory faulty
Analogue channel faulty
Protections comms card faulty
Factory settings restored due to data memory fault.
This message will also be displayed following a firmware upgrade.
Minor Fault
RAM ERROR:
BATTERY FAIL:
COMM.ERROR:
CLOCK ERROR:
PROT. COMMS RECOVER:
Note
RAM supplied by battery faulty
Battery faulty (flat or not correctly fitted)
Internal communications faulty
Real time clock faulty
Recovering from transient comms fault (back-up protection available)
The “Battery backed RAM memory” and “Battery failure” alarm messages can be configured to display or not; YES or NO in
CONFIGURATION/Alarms menu. If NO is selected an alarm will not be raised in the event of a Battery Fault.
Menu Contents Description
The menu of the MiCOM P521 relay is divided into these sections:
•
OP PARAMETERS
•
ORDERS
•
•
•
•
•
•
CONFIGURATION
MEASUREMENTS
COMMUNICATION
PROTECTION G1
PROTECTION G2
PROTECTION G3
•
•
PROTECTION G4
AUTOMAT. CTRL
•
RECORDS
To access these menus from the default display use
.
To return to the default display from these menus or sub menus press
.
Page (FT) 3-14 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS (FT) 3 User Guide
P521/EN FT/B93
Default Display
1A = 1245A
OP Parameters
ORDERS
Configuration
Measurement
Communication
Protection G1
Protection G2
Protection G3
Protection G4
Automat. Ctrl
Records
P0004ENd
Figure 3 - Organization of MiCOM P521 main menu
Note The menu content tables are supplied in the Menu Content Tables section,
P521/EN HI.
Page (FT) 3-15
(FT) 3 User Guide
3.5.1
MENUS
OP Parameters Menu
To gain access to the OP PARAMETERS menu from the default display, press
.
OP PARAMETERS
Password
* * * *
Password
AAAA
Heading of the OP PARAMETERS menu
To gain access to the menu content, press
.
Entry of the password to be able to modify the MiCOM relay settings and parameters. To enter the password, press
. To deactivate the active password, press
.
Entry of the password is made letter by letter using
and
to go up or down the alphabet. After each letter, press
, to enter the following letter. At the end, press
to validate the password. If the password is correct, the message
« PASSWORD OK » is displayed on the screen.
Note The password is initially set in the factory to AAAA.
WARNING As soon as the password has been entered, no setting change using the communication (EIA(RS)485 or
EIA(RS)232) can be accepted.
LANGUAGE =
ENGLISH
Choose the language for HMI. Can be selected from the following: ENGLISH, FRANCAIS, DEFAULT, CHINESE,
POLSKI, RUSSIAN, ITALIANO, DEUTSCH and ESPANOL.
Description
P521xxxxxxxxxx
Displays the serial number of the relay.
The model number (description) displayed in “OP Parameters” should be automatically updated when firmware is upgraded, which is upgraded by the protocol option, firmware version number. The new model number can match the option of protocol, firmware version number. When the model number has been matched, no alarm shall occur.
For example, the features of this function are as below:
•
When the protocol is MODBUS, the software version is 10.A
The Description under the OP PARAMETERS should be P521xxxx1xxAAx
•
When the protocol is 103, the software version is 10.B
The Description under the OP PARAMETERS should P521xxxx3xxABx
•
When the protocol is DNP, the software version is 12.E
The Description under the OP PARAMETERS should be P521xxxx4xxCEx
SERIAL NUM =
00000001
Displays the serial number of the relay.
Reference
MiCO
Displays the name of the equipment associated with the relay. The entry of the reference is made character by character using
,
. After each character (letter, number or symbol), press
to move to the next character. At the end of entering, press
to accept the reference.
Note The reference is initially set in the factory to MiCO.
Page (FT) 3-16 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS (FT) 3 User Guide
Software version
13.A
Frequency
50 Hz
Active Group
1
Input
Status
54321
10110
Relay
Status
87654321
01011101
Date
Time
30/01/02
13:57:44
Trip and Close
No Operation
Disturb Trigger
No
Displays the version of the software.
Nominal value of the network frequency. Select either 50 or
60 Hz. To modify this value, press
followed by
,
to select the desired value. Validate your choice using
.
Display the active group (Protection G1 or G2 or G3 or G4).
-
-
Displays the state of the logic Inputs. The Logic Inputs are numbered from 1 to 5, starting from the right.
The state of each input is : state 0 : input inactive state 1 : input active
Displays the state of the logic outputs. The logic outputs are numbered from 1 to 8, starting from the right.
The state of each output is :
- state 0 : output relay not operated
- state 1 : output relay operated
Pressing the cancel key
, in this cell, will reset any latched contacts/relays, this is with the exception of trip relay RL1.
Note The Watch-dog output (RL0) is not displayed in the output status menu.
Displays the date. To modify this date press
then use
,
,
to enter the required value. Accept your choice using
.
With this example the date is : 30 January 2002.
Displays the Time. To modify this time press
then use
,
to enter the required value. Accept your choice using
. With this example the time is : 13 hours, 57 minutes, 44 seconds.
Enables the user to Trip or Close the circuit breaker. Select from “No Operation”, “Trip” or “Close”.
To Trip or Close the circuit select either “Trip” or “Close” and then press the
key. The relevant output contacts will close for the “Open Pulse” or “t Close Pulse” times found under
AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Monitoring.
Enables the user to create a disturbance record manually.
To trigger a disturbance record, press the
key and then select “Yes” using
,
.
P521/EN FT/B93 Page (FT) 3-17
(FT) 3 User Guide
3.5.2
3.5.2.1
MENUS
Orders Menu
The various sub menus are:
•
General Reset
To gain access to the ORDERS menu from the default display, press
then
.
General Reset Sub Menu
•
•
•
•
•
•
General Reset clears all the following information:
•
•
LEDs
All Fault records
All Event records
All disturbance records
All counters
All Measured values (Max & Average Phase current, thermal status…)
CB monitoring records: SA2n and Nb Operation
Latched output Relays (Under no Fault condition).
•
All alarm signals
Caution This command should be password protected. Be aware of what information will be cleared before you run this command.
GENERAL RESET
<No> Yes
Confirmation
<No> Yes
Note
This new menu gives the user an option to run the General
Reset command. The default option is No - the user needs to select Yes to run the command.
If the user selected the General Reset command, they need to confirm their choice. The default option is No - the user needs to select Yes to run the command.
The General Reset command can be run using the HMI On the device itself, or by using a remotely available protocol.
Page (FT) 3-18 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
3.5.3
3.5.3.1
(FT) 3 User Guide
Configuration Menu
•
•
•
•
•
The various sub menus are:
•
Display
CT Ratio
Led 5
Led 6
Led 7
Led 8
•
•
Group Select
Alarms
•
•
Configuration Inputs
•
Phase Rotation
To gain access to the CONFIGURATION menu from the default display, press
then
.
Display Sub Menu
CONFIGURATION
Display
Default Display
RMS I A
Phase A Text
L1
Phase B Text
L2
Phase C Text
L3
E/Gnd Text
E
Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to the DISPLAY submenu, press
.
Heading of the DISPLAY sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press
.
Edit the default display to show either Phase A, Phase B,
Phase C, Earth currents or all four simultaneously. To modify the default display, press
then use either
or
to enter the required choice. Enable your choice using
.
Edit phase A label by selecting L1, A or R. This value can be modified after entering the password and is displayed with the corresponding measurement.
Edit phase B label by selecting L2, B, S, Y or W. This value can be modified after entering the password and is displayed with the corresponding measurement.
Edit phase C label by selecting L3, C, T or B. This value can be modified after entering the password and is displayed with the corresponding measurement.
Edit earth label by selecting N, E, or o. This value can be modified after entering the password and is displayed with the corresponding measurement.
P521/EN FT/B93 Page (FT) 3-19
(FT) 3 User Guide
3.5.3.2 CT Ratio Sub Menu
CONFIGURATION
CT Ratio
Line CT primary
1000
Line CT sec
5
E/Gnd CT primary
1000
E/Gnd CT sec
5
CT Correct Ratio
1000
Vectorial Comp.
Off
MENUS
Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to the CT RATIOS menu, press
,
.
Heading of the CT RATIOS sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press
.
Display of the primary rating of the phase CT. The value consists of 4 digits : Minimum 1, Maximum 9999. Press
to modify this value and use
,
,
,
to display the new primary phase CT ratio. Enable your choice by pressing
at the end of selection.
Display of the secondary rating of the phase CT.
This value toggles between 1 and 5.
Display of the primary rating of the earth CT. The value consists of 4 digits : Minimum 1, Maximum 9999.
Press
to modify this value and use
,
,
,
to display the new primary earth CT ratio. Enable your choice by pressing
at the end of selection.
Display of the secondary rating of the earth CT.
This value toggles between 1 and 5.
Displays the ratio correction factor that the local current is multiplied by. The correction factor has a setting range of
0.05 to 10.
Press
to modify this value and use
,
,
,
to display the new correction factor. Enable your choice by pressing
at the end of selection.
Displays the vector group that is in use.
Page (FT) 3-20 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
3.5.3.3
(FT) 3 User Guide
P521/EN FT/B93
CB Fail tI2> tI2>>
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5 t Aux 1 t Aux 2 tI>>>>
e>
e>>
e>>>
e>>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> tIe>>>>
Therm Trip
Brkn Cond.
diff
diff Fail
B/up Prot
Comms Fail
Direct
-Trip
C-Diff
-Trip
PIT
>
>>
>>>
>>>> tI> tI>> tI>>>
LED 5 to 8 Configuration Sub Menus
To gain access to the LED 5 CONFIGURATION sub menu, press
,
,
followed by
twice.
To access to the others LEDs CONFIGURATION sub menus, press
3 times for LED 6,
4 times for LED 7 and 5 times for LED 8.
35 different parameters can be assigned to each LED.
These parameters are:
Text Information
Differential protection trip
Differential protection not functioning
Back-up protection is enabled
Protection comms channel failure
Relay has received and tripped on direct intertrip
Relay has tripped due to a differential intertrip
Relay has tripped due to a permissive intertrip command
First instantaneous phase threshold
Second instantaneous phase threshold
Third instantaneous phase threshold
Fourth instantaneous phase threshold
First time delayed phase threshold
Second time delayed phase threshold
Third time delayed phase threshold
Fourth time delayed phase threshold
First instantaneous earth threshold
Second instantaneous earth threshold
Third instantaneous earth threshold
Fourth instantaneous earth threshold
First time delayed earth threshold
Second time delayed earth threshold
Third time delayed earth threshold
Fourth time delayed earth threshold
Thermal overload trip
Broken conductor detected
Detection of a circuit breaker failure
Time delayed negative phase sequence (1 st threshold)
Time delayed negative phase sequence (2 nd threshold)
Status of Logic Input n° 1
Status of Logic Input n° 2
Status of Logic Input n° 3
Status of Logic Input n° 4
Status of Logic Input n° 5
Aux Timer 1 operated
Aux Timer 2 operated
Page (FT) 3-21
(FT) 3 User Guide MENUS
CB Alarm
Equation A
Equation B
Equation C
Equation D
Equation E
Equation F
Equation G
Equation H
Prgm IT 1
Prgm IT 2
Prgm IT 3
Prgm IT 4
CTS Local
CTS Remote
CTS Block
CTS Restrain
CDiff Disabled
Notes
Text
Convention Mode
Information
Circuit breaker alarm
Equation A operated
Equation B operated
Equation C operated
Equation D operated
Equation E operated
Equation F operated
Equation G operated
Equation H operated
Programmable Inter-trip 1 operated
Programmable Inter-trip 2 operated
Programmable Inter-trip 3 operated
Programmable Inter-trip 4 operated
Local CT failure detected
Remote end CT failure detected
CT failure is detected and relevant protections are blocked
(undercurrent, negative sequence overcurrent, broken conductor).
CT failure is detected and differential protection is in Restraint mode.
Protection communication uses convention mode, i.e., not extended with the functions of CTS and Programmable Intertrip.
Current differential protection is disabled.
Each parameter can be assigned to one or more LED's.
Each LED can be lit by one or more parameters (OR logic).
Example of LED 5 setting:
CONFIGURATION
Led 5
Led Idiff
No
Led Idiff Fail
No
Led B/up Prot
No
Led Comms Fail
No
Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to the LED 5 submenu, press
, followed by
2 times.
Heading of the LED 5 sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press
.
Indicates that the differential protection has tripped. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Indicates that the differential protection is not functioning. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays that the back-up protection has been enabled. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Indicates that the protection comms channel has failed. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Page (FT) 3-22 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
P521/EN FT/B93
Led Direct
I-Trip No
Led C-Diff
I-Trip No
Led PIT
No
Led
I> No
Led tI> No
Led
I>> No
Led tI>> No
Led
I>>> No
Led tI>>>
Led
I>>>>
No
No
Led tI>>>>
Led
Ie> No
Led tIe> No
No
Led
Ie>> No
Led tIe>>
Led
Ie>>>
No
No
(FT) 3 User Guide
Indicates that the relay has received and tripped on a direct intertrip. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Indicates that the relay has tripped due to a differential intertrip. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Indicates that the relay has tripped due to a permissive intertrip command. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the instantaneous threshold I> associated with LED
5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the time delay threshold tI> associated with LED 5.
To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the instantaneous threshold I>> associated with LED
5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the time delay threshold tI>> associated with LED 5.
To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the instantaneous threshold I>>> associated with
LED 5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the time delay threshold tI>>> associated with LED
5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the instantaneous threshold I>>>> associated with
LED 5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the time delay threshold tI>>>> associated with LED
5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the instantaneous threshold Ie> associated with LED
5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the time delay threshold tIe> associated with LED 5.
To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the instantaneous threshold Ie>> associated with
LED 5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the time delay threshold tIe>> associated with LED
5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the instantaneous threshold Ie>>> associated with
LED 5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Page (FT) 3-23
(FT) 3 User Guide
Led tIe>>>
Led
Ie>>>>
No
No
Led tIe>>>> No
Led Therm
Trip No
Led Brkn. Cond
No
Led CB Fail
No
Led tI2>
No
Led tI2>>
No
Led Input 1
No
Led Input 2
No
Led Input 3
No
Led Input 4
No
Led Input 5
No
Led t Aux 1
No
Led t Aux 2
No
Led CB Alarm
No
MENUS
Displays the time delay threshold tIe>>> associated with LED
5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the instantaneous threshold Ie>>>> associated with
LED 5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the time delay threshold tIe>>>> associated with
LED 5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the thermal threshold tI
trip order associated with
LED 5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the broken conductor information associated with
LED 5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the circuit breaker failure information associated with
LED 5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the negative phase sequence 1 st threshold tI2> associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the negative phase sequence 2 nd threshold tI2> associated with LED 5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the state of the logic input 1 associated with LED 5.
To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the state of the logic input 2 associated with LED 5.
To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the state of the logic input 3 associated with LED 5.
To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the state of the logic input 4 associated with LED 5.
To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the state of the logic input 5 associated with LED 5.
To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the state of the logic input delayed by t Aux 1. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the state of the logic input delayed by t Aux 2. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the state of the circuit breaker alarm. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Page (FT) 3-24 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
P521/EN FT/B93
(FT) 3 User Guide
Led Equation A
No
Led Equation B
No
Led Equation C
No
Led Equation D
No
Led Equation E
No
Led Equation F
No
Led Equation G
No
Led Equation H
No
Led Prgm IT 1
No
Led Prgm IT 2
No
Led Prgm IT 3
No
Led Prgm IT 4
No
Led CTS Local
No
Led CTS Remote
No
Led CTS Block
No
Led CTS Restrain
No
Displays the Logic Equation A information associated with
LED 5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the Logic Equation B information associated with
LED 5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the Logic Equation C information associated with
LED 5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the Logic Equation D information associated with
LED 5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the Logic Equation E information associated with
LED 5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the Logic Equation F information associated with
LED 5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the Logic Equation G information associated with
LED 5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the Logic Equation H information associated with
LED 5. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the state of Programmable Inter-tripping 1. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the state of Programmable Inter-tripping 2. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the state of Programmable Inter-tripping 3. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the state of Programmable Inter-tripping 4. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the state of local CTS failure. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the state of remote CTS failure. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the state of CTS block relevant protections. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the state of CTS restrain current differential protection. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Page (FT) 3-25
(FT) 3 User Guide
3.5.3.4
3.5.3.5
MENUS
Led Convention Mode
No
Group Select Sub Menu
CONFIGURATION
Group Select
Change Group
Input = EDGE
Setting Group
1
Alarms Sub Menu
CONFIGURATION
Alarms
Inst. Self-reset?
No
Comm.Fail-reset?
No
Displays trhe state of protection communications mode is in
Convention Mode. To modify this choice, press
and use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to the menu, press
,
,
, followed by
6 times.
Heading of the GROUP SELECT sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press
.
Displays the operation mode of the digital input associated to the change of protection setting group: "EDGE" or "LEVEL".
To change the operation mode, press
then use
and
to scroll through the available selections. Enable your choice using
.
Note If you select Change Group=EDGE, then the following appear:
Setting Group 1/2/3/4
Target Group 0/1/2/3/4.
Note If you select Change Group=LEVEL, then the following appear:
“Group if low level 1/2/3/4”
“Group if high level 1/2/3/4”.
Displays the active setting group (1 or 2 or 3 or 4). To manually change the active setting group, press
then use
and
to enter the required value (1 or 2 or 3 or 4). Enable your choice using
. Manual changes are only possible if
“EDGE” is selected in the previous cell.
Heading of the configuration menu. To gain access to alarms menu, press
,
,
, followed by
7 times.
Heading of the alarms sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press
.
Displays the reset mode of the alarms concerning the instantaneous (protection start indications): self-reset Yes or
No. If the user chooses No, the reset must be done by the push button. To change the reset mode press
then use
and
to select either Yes or No. Enable your choice using
.
Displays the reset mode of the Communication Failure alarm: self-reset Yes or No. If the user chooses No, the reset must be done by the push button. If the user chooses Yes, the
Communication Failure alarm will automatically reset when the protection communication is re-established. To change the reset mode press
then use
and
to select either Yes or No. Enable your choice using
.
Page (FT) 3-26 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
3.5.3.6
P521/EN FT/B93
(FT) 3 User Guide
CDiff Disabled Alarm?
No
Select the mode of alarm displaying when the Current
Differential is disabled. If Yes is chosen, Alarm will be raised when differential protection is disabled. Otherwise alarm will not ba raised. To change the setting press
then use
and
to select either Yes or No. Enable your choice using
.
Configuration Inputs Sub Menu
It is possible to configure individual digital inputs to be active from either a falling edge/low level, or on a rising edge/high level. This can be done using the “inputs” cell in the “CONFIGURATION” column A “0” means that the opto is active low, if the associated function is LEVEL dependent, or active for a falling edge if EDGE dependent.
Conversely, a “1” means that the opto is active high, if the associated function is LEVEL dependent, or active for a rising edge if EDGE dependent. The choice of how the digital inputs are activated it dependent upon the application.
The table below shows which functions are LEVEL or EDGE dependent.
Example: a digital input configured "blocking logic" will operate on level, on the other hand a digital input configured "cold load pick up" will operate on edge.
ONLY a digital input configured "change of setting group" can operate either on edge or on level (selectable).
Function allocated to the Digital Input
Unlatch of the output relays
Position of the CB, 52a or 52b
Blocking logic 1 & 2
Logic selectivity 1 & 2
Aux 1 & Aux 2
CB fault
Reset of the thermal state
Blocking of the auto-recluse
Cold load pick up
Start of disturbance record
Trip circuit supervision
Change of setting group
CB fail start
Operation of the Digital Input
On level
On level
On level
On level
On level
On level
On edge
On level
On edge
On edge
On level
On edge or on level
On edge
The user has to set in the CONFIGURATION Menu the auxiliary voltage (AC or DC) for the operation of the digital inputs. This setting is necessary due to the time filtering being different if DC or AC is chosen.
CONFIGURATION
Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to
Configuration Inputs menu, press
,
,
, followed by
8 times.
Configuration
Inputs
Heading of the Configuration Inputs sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press
.
Inputs 5 4 3 2 1
1 1 1 1 1
Displays how the digital Inputs are activated either on a falling edge/low level, or on a rising edge/high level:
0 = falling edge/low level
1 = rising edge/high level
To change the operation mode press
then use
,
to highlight each input followed by
and
to toggle between 0 and 1. Enable your choice using
.
Page (FT) 3-27
(FT) 3 User Guide
3.5.3.7
3.5.3.8
MENUS
Voltage input =
DC
Displays the voltage (AC or DC) on the digital Inputs. To change the voltage press
then use
and
to toggle between AC or DC. Enable your choice using
.
Output Relays Sub Menu
CONFIGURATION Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to the Phase rotation menu, press
,
,
, followed by
9 times.
OUTPUT RELAYS
Fail Safe RL1
Yes
Note
<No>
Heading of the OUTPUT RELAYS sub menu. To gain access to the Fail Safe RL1 menu, press
.
Displays the Fail Safe RL1 setting either Yes or No (it is No by default). To change the selection use
and
to toggle between Yes or No. Enable your choice using
When the user set the fail safe RL1 as “YES”, then
The RL1 shall as invert output relays.
In the maintenance mode (or if the P521 relay detects a major alarm), the fail safe RL1 is invalid.
Phase Rotation Sub Menu
CONFIGURATION
Phase Rotation
Phase Rotation
A-B-C
Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to the Phase rotation menu, press
,
,
, followed by
9 times.
Heading of the PHASE ROTATION sub menu. To gain access to the Phase Rotation menu, press
.
Displays the phase rotation either A-B-C or A-C-B. To change the phase rotation press
then use
and
to toggle between A-B-C or A-C-B. Enable your choice using
.
Page (FT) 3-28 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
3.5.4
3.5.4.1
P521/EN FT/B93
(FT) 3 User Guide
Measurements Menu
The MEASUREMENTS menu makes it possible to read the various system measurements. There are three main measurement menus, which are “Current Diff”,
“Current/Frequency” and “Communications”. The “Current Diff” menu displays measurements associated with the differential protection (e.g. Differential / Bias currents), whereas the “Current/Frequency” menu displays more general measurements such as currents and demand values etc. The “Communications” measurement menu displays error statistics for the protection communications channel.
Measurements Currents Diff Sub Menu
MEASUREMENTS
Current Diff
Heading of the MEASUREMENTS menu. To gain access to the Current Diff menu, press
,
,
,
.
Remote IA
640.10 A
Remote IB
629.00 A
Remote IC
634.50 A
Heading of the Current Diff sub menu. To gain access to the
Current Diff menu, press
.
Displays the remote A phase current (Fundamental component) taking into account the phase CT ratio
(CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub menu). Not displayed if
Vectorial Compensation is enabled.
Displays the remote B phase current (Fundamental component) taking into account the phase CT ratio
(CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub menu). Not displayed if
Vectorial Compensation is enabled.
Displays the remote C phase current (Fundamental component) taking into account the phase CT ratio
(CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub menu). Not displayed if
Vectorial Compensation is enabled.
Differential IA
0A
Differential IB
0A
Differential IC
0A
Bias IA
640.10 A
Bias IB
629.00 A
Bias IC
634.50 A
Local Angle
A-B 120 °
Local Angle
B-C 120 °
Local Angle
C-A 120 °
Displays the A phase differential current.
Displays the B phase differential current.
Displays the C phase differential current.
Displays the A phase bias current.
Displays the B phase bias current.
Displays the C phase bias current.
Displays the phase angle between the currents in phases A and B at the Local end.
Displays the phase angle between the currents in phases B and C at the Local end.
Displays the phase angle between the currents in phases C and A at the Local end..
Page (FT) 3-29
(FT) 3 User Guide
3.5.4.2
MENUS
Diff Angle A
(L-R) 0 °
Diff Angle B
(L-R) 0 °
Diff Angle C
(L-R) 0 °
Displays the differential angle between the phase A current at the Local end and the phase A current at the Remote end
(time-aligned).
Displays the differential angle between the phase B current at the Local end and the phase B current at the Remote end
(time-aligned).
Displays the differential angle between the phase C current at the Local end and the phase C current at the Remote end
(time-aligned).
Measurements Current/frequency Sub Menu
MEASUREMENTS
Current/General
I A
640.10 A
I B
I C
629.00 A
634.50 A
I N
3.15 A
I1 =
103A
I2 =
50A
RATIO I2/I1 =
50%
Heading of the MEASUREMENTS menu. To gain access to the Current/Frequency menu, press
,
,
,
,
.
Heading of the Current Frequency sub menu. To gain access to the Current/Frequency menu, press
.
Displays the A phase current (True RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub menu).
Displays the B phase current (True RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub menu).
Displays the C phase current (True RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub menu).
Displays the earth current (True RMS value) taking into account the earth CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO sub menu).
Displays the positive sequence current.
Displays the negative sequence current.
Displays the ratio of I2/I1.
I N - fn
RST = [C] 0.0A
Thermal
RST = [C] 67%
Max & Average I
RST = [C]
Max IA Rms
127.36 A
Max IB Rms
156.28 A
Max IC Rms
139.01 A
Displays the earth current (True RMS value) minus the current value at the fundamental frequency (value of the harmonics). To clear the value, press
(password needed).
Displays the % thermal state based on true RMS values. To clear the % values, press
(password needed).
Allows the user to clear the maximum (peak) and average
(rolling) memorized values of the current. To clear these values, press
(password needed).
Displays the maximum (peak) value for phase A. The value is the true RMS maximum value.
Displays the maximum (peak) value for phase B. The value is the true RMS maximum value.
Displays the maximum (peak) value for phase C. The value is the true RMS maximum value.
Page (FT) 3-30 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
3.5.4.3
P521/EN FT/B93
(FT) 3 User Guide
Average IA Rms
98.25 A
Average IB Rms
97.88 A
Average IC Rms
99.02 A
MAX. SUBPERIOD
RST = [C]
MAX. SUBPERIOD
IA Rms = 245A
MAX. SUBPERIOD
IB Rms = 240A
MAX. SUBPERIOD
IC Rms = 250A
ROLLING AVERAGE
RST = [C]
ROLLING AVERAGE
IA Rms = 0A
ROLLING AVERAGE
IB Rms = 0A
ROLLING AVERAGE
IC Rms = 0A
Displays the rolling value for phase A. The value is the true
RMS average value.
Displays the rolling value for phase B. The value is the true
RMS average value.
Displays the rolling value for phase C. The value is the true
RMS average value.
Allows the user to clear the maximum sub-period values of the 3 currents.
Displays the IA peak value demand. The value is the true
RMS maximum value on a sub-period.
Displays the IB peak value demand. The value is the true
RMS maximum value on a sub-period.
Displays the IC peak value demand. The value is the true
RMS maximum value on a sub-period.
Allows the user to clear the rolling average values of the 3 currents.
Displays the IA average value demand. The value is the true RMS average value on a number of sub-period set in
Record menu.
Displays the IB average value demand. The value is the true RMS average value on a number of sub-period set in
Record menu.
Displays the IC average value demand. The value is the true RMS average value on a number of sub-period set in
Record menu.
Measurements Communications Sub Menu
MEASUREMENTS
Heading of the MEASUREMENTS menu. To gain access to the Communications menu, press
,
,
,
followed by
2 times.
Protection Comms Heading of the Communications sub menu. To gain access to the Communications menu, press
.
CH1 Valid Msgs
00
CH1 Err Msgs
00
Displays the total number of valid messages received.
Displays the total number of errors received.
CH1 Errored secs
0.0s
CH1 Sev Err secs
0.0s
Displays the number of seconds containing 1 or more errors or lost messages.
Displays the number of seconds containing 31 or more errors or lost messages.
CH1 Prop Delay
0.0s
Displays the propagation delay.
Page (FT) 3-31
(FT) 3 User Guide
3.5.5
3.5.5.1
3.5.5.2
MENUS
Elapsed Time
0.0s
Comms Stats RST
RST =[C]
Displays the time elapsed since the communications measurement statistics were last reset.
Allows the user to clear the communications measurement statistics.
Communication Menu
There are two sub-menus under the COMMUNICATION menu: Ctrl Comms and
Protection.
The Ctrl Comms sub-menu contains the configuration parameters for the rear
EIA(RS)485 communication port, which depend on the protocol (order option): MODBUS,
IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3.0.
The Protection sub-menu contains the configuration parameters for the protection signaling interface to the remote P521.
MODBUS Communication Menu
COMMUNICATION
Heading of the COMMUNICATION menu. To gain access to the Control Comms menu, press
,
3 times then
. To gain access to the sub menu points, press
.
Ctrl Comms Heading of the Control Comms menu. To gain access to the
Control Comms menu press
.
Ctrl Comms?
Yes
Baud Rate
19200 bd
Enables / disables MODBUS RTU communication via the
EIA(RS)485 port on the rear of the relay. To activate communications, press the
key and use
to select Yes.
Enable your choice using
.
Displays the speed of the MODBUS transmission. Select from: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bauds using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Parity
None
Displays the parity in the MODBUS frame. Select Even,
Odd or None using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Stop bits
1
Relay Address
1
Date format
PRIVATE
Displays the number of stop bits in the MODBUS frame.
Select 1 or 2 using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Displays the network address of the MiCOM relay in the
MODBUS network. Select from 1 to 255 using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Displays the format of the date. Select either PRIVATE or
IEC (= IEC60870-5 Binary Time 2a format).
WARNING: A MODBUS network can only comprise 32 relay addresses on the same MODBUS sub-LAN.
IEC 60870-5-103 (VDEW) Communication Menu
COMMUNICATION
Heading of the COMMUNICATION menu. To gain access to the Control Comms menu, press
,
3 times then
. To gain access to the sub menu points, press
.
Page (FT) 3-32 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
3.5.5.3
3.5.5.4
P521/EN FT/B93
(FT) 3 User Guide
Ctrl Comms
Ctrl Comms?
Yes
Data Bits
9600 bd
Relay Address
29
Heading of the Control Comms menu. To gain access to the
Control Comms menu press
.
Enables / disables IEC 60870-5-103 communication via the
EIA(RS)485 port on the rear of the relay. To activate communications, press the
key and use
to select Yes.
Enable your choice using
.
Displays the speed of IEC 60870-5-103 transmission.
Select from: 9600, 19200 bauds using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Display of the network address of the MiCOM relay in the
IEC 60870-5-103 network. Select from 1 to 255 using
or
and enable your choice using the
key.
DNP3.0 Communication Menu
COMMUNICATION
Ctrl Comms
Ctrl Comms?
Yes
Baud Rate
19200 bd
Parity
None
Stop Bits
1
Relay Address
1
Heading of the COMMUNICATION menu. To gain access to the Control Comms menu, press
,
3 times then
. To gain access to the sub menu points, press
.
Heading of the Control Comms menu. To gain access to the
Control Comms menu press
.
Enables/disables DNP3.0 communication via the
EIA(RS)485 port on the rear of the relay. To activate communications, press the
key and use
to select Yes.
Enable your choice using
.
Displays the speed of the DNP3.0 transmission. Select from: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bauds using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Displays the parity in the DNP3.0 frame. Select Even, Odd or None using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Displays the number of stop bits in the DNP3.0 frame.
Select 1 or 2 using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Displays the network address of the MiCOM relay in the
DNP3.0 network. Select from 1 to 59999 using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Protection Communication Menu
COMMUNICATION
Protection
Protocol
SDLC
Data Rate
64 k
Relay Address
1A
Heading of the COMMUNICATION menu. To gain access to the Protection Comms menu, press
,
3 times then
and
. To gain access to the sub menu points, press
.
Heading of the Protection Comms menu. To gain access to the Protection Comms menu, press
.
Displays the currently selected protocol for the protection comms. Select from SDLC, NRZ and Inverted_NRZ using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Displays the speed of protection comms transmission.
Select from: 9.6 k, 19.2 k, 56 k and 64 kbits per second using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Displays the relays protection comms address. Select from: 1A, 2A, 3A, 1B etc. through to 16 B using
or
and enable your choice using the
key.
Page (FT) 3-33
(FT) 3 User Guide
3.5.6
3.5.6.1
MENUS
Clock Source Ch1
INTERNAL
Comm Fail Timer
0 ms
Comm Delay Tol
1 ms
Char Mod Time
1 s
FRAME MODE
Extension
Displays the source of the protection comms clock. Select from INTERNAL or EXTERNAL using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Allows a settable delay for which a comms failure must be present before an alarm is issued.
Displays the maximum allowable propagation time variation. Variations greater than the set value will result in a bias characteristic modification, in order to stabilize the relay.
Displays the duration the bias characteristic is modified for, following a variation in the propagation delay greater than the "Comm Delay Tol".
Displays the frame structure of the protection communication. Select from Extension or Convention using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Note To use the following three functions, the relay must be set in Extension mode:
CTS,
Programmable Inter-trip,
Block mode for inrush option.
While a relay of V12 communicate with earlier versions, it must be set in Convention mode.
Protection Menu
The PROTECTION menu (designated as PROTECTION G1, PROTECTION G2,
PROTECTION G3 or PROTECTION G4 menus) enables the user to program various protection functions and settings (thresholds, time delay etc.) associated with all the protection functions.
•
•
The various sub menus are:
•
[87] Current Diff
[50/51] Phase OC
[50N/51N] E/Gnd
•
•
[46] Neg Seq OC
[49] Therm OL
•
[37] Under Current
To gain access to the PROTECTION G1 menu press
then
4 times.
To gain access to the PROTECTION G2 menu press
then
5 times.
To gain access to the PROTECTION G3 menu press
then
6 times.
To gain access to the PROTECTION G4 menu press
then
7 times.
[87] Current Diff Sub Menu
PROTECTION Gx
Heading of the PROTECTION Gx menu (where x = 1, 2, 3 or 4). To gain access to the [87] Current Diff menu, press
,
4, 5, 6 or 7 times (as needed), then
.
Page (FT) 3-34 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
P521/EN FT/B93
I Diff Curve
IEC SI
IDiff Tms
1.0
IDiff Time Dial
1.0
PIT Time
200 ms
PIT I Disable
No
PIT I Selection
Remote
PIT I Threshold
0.20 In
[87] Current Diff
Current Diff?
Yes
Is1
0.2 In
Is2
2.0 In k1
30 % k2
150 %
IDiff Delay Type
DMT tIdiff
0 ms
(FT) 3 User Guide
Heading of the [87] Current Diff sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press
.
Enables / disables Current Differential protection. To activate the current differential protection, press the
key and use
to select Yes. Enable your choice using
.
Displays Is1 threshold value. The Is1threshold is adjustable from 0.1 to 2 In. To modify this value, press
followed by
or
to select the desired value. Enable your choice using the
key.
Displays Is2 threshold value. To modify this value, press
.
The Is2 threshold is adjustable from 1 to 30 In. Press
to enable your adjustment.
Displays the gradient of the K1 slope. To modify this value, press
. The k1 setting is adjustable from 0 to 150%.
Press
to enable your adjustment. If setting below 30%, see P521/EN AP section 2.1.5.3.
Displays the gradient of the k2 slope. To modify this value, press
. The k2 setting is adjustable from 30 to 150%.
Press
to enable your adjustment.
Selects the delay type for the Current Differential protection. Select from DMT or IDMT using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Displays the desired operating time for the current differential protection if the delay type is DMT. Select 0 ms for instantaneous. To modify this value, press
followed by
or
. Press
to enable your adjustment.
Displays the desired operating curve for the current differential protection if the delay type is IDMT. Select from
IEC SI, IEC STI, IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI,
CO8, IEEE VI or IEEE EI using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Displays the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) associated with the I Diff Curve. TMS is visible when any of the IEC curves are selected. To modify this value, press
followed by
or
. Press
to enable your adjustment.
Displays the Time Dial associated with the I Diff Curve. TD is visible when CO2, CO8 or IEEE curves are selected. To modify this value, press
followed by
or
. Press
to enable your adjustment.
Displays the PIT operating time. To modify this value press
. The PIT time is adjustable from 50ms to 20 seconds. Press
to enable your adjustment.
Enables / Disables the remote current check feature for the
Permissive Intertrip (PIT) function. Choose YES to disable the current check. To choose between YES or NO, Press
, followed by
or
. Press
to enable your adjustment.
Displays whether local or remote current will be used for the PIT current check feature. Visible if PIT I Disable is No.
To choose between Local or Remote, Press
, followed by
or
. Press
to enable your adjustment.
Displays the remote current threshold for the PIT current check feature. Visible if PIT I Selection is Remote. The threshold is adjustable from 0.1 to 40 In. To modify this value, press
followed by
or
. Press
to enable your adjustment.
Page (FT) 3-35
(FT) 3 User Guide MENUS
PIT OC Stages
00000000 4.0 IN
DIT Rx tDwell
100 ms
DIT Alarm
Yes
PIT Alarm
Yes
CTS Is1
0.2 IN
Inrush Option
Disabled
High Set
04.0 IN
Kr
4
Harmonic Ratio
15%
Transient Bias
No
Displays which local overcurrent stage(s) start(s) will be used for the PIT current check feature. Visible if PIT I
Selection is Local. The stages are I>, I>>, I>>>, I>>>>, Ie>,
Ie>>, Ie>>>, Ie>>>>, starting from the right. To select press
then use
,
to highlight each stage followed by
and
to toggle between 0 (not used) and 1 (used). Enable your choice using
.
Displays the dwell time associated with the Direct Intertrip
(DIT) commands received from the remote relay. To modify this value press
. The dwell time is adjustable from 0.1 to 5 seconds. Press
to enable your adjustment.
Enables / Disables the Alarm LED illumination when a DIT signal is received. Choose YES to enable the illumination of yellow Alarm LED. To choose between YES or NO press
, followed by
or
. Press
to enable your adjustment.
Enables / Disables the Alarm LED illumination when a PIT signal is received. Choose YES to enable the illumination of yellow Alarm LED. To choose between YES or NO press
, followed by
or
. Press
to enable your adjustment.
Displays the Is1 threshold value for the situation when CT failure i s detected and “Restraint” mode is chosen for differential. This Is1 threshold is adjustable from 0.2 to 4 In.
To modify this value, press
followed by
or
to select the desired value. Enable your choice using the
key.
Display options for the inrush restraint/block facility.
Choose from Disabled, Block and Restraint. To modify the setting, press
followed by
or
. Press to enable your adjustment.
Displays the Idiff High Set setting when Inrush Option is enabled. To modify this value press
. The High Set is adjustable from 4 to 32 In. Press
to enable your adjustment.
Displays the Kr setting when Restraint mode is selected.
The Kr is adjustable from 3 to 20. To modify this value press
followed by
or
. Press
to enable your adjustment.
Displays the I2/I1 setting when Block mode is selected. It is adjustable from 5% to 50%. To modify this value press
followed by
or
. Press
to enable your adjustment.
Enables/Disables the transient bias facility. Choose YES to enable transient bias facility. To choose between YES or NO press
, followed by
or
. Press
to enable your adjustment.
Page (FT) 3-36 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
3.5.6.2
3.5.6.2.1
3.5.6.2.2
(FT) 3 User Guide
[50/51] Phase OC Sub Menu
PROTECTION Gx
[50/51] Phase OC
I>?
Yes
I>
1 In
Delay Type
DMT
I> DMT Threshold Menu
Delay Type
DMT tI >
100 ms
Heading of the PROTECTION Gx menu (where x = 1, 2, 3 or 4). To gain access to the [50/51] Phase OC sub menu, press
,
4, 5, 6 or 7 times (as needed), then
and
.
Heading of the [50/51] Phase OC sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu press
.
Selection of the first phase threshold (I>). Select Yes, No or Backup. If the user enters I>(Yes or Backup), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters I> (No), go to I>> menu. If “Backup” is selected I> will only function in the event of a Protection Comms Failure.
Displays the threshold current value I>. To modify this value, press
. The threshold I> is adjustable from 0.1 to
25 In. Press
to enable your adjustment.
Selection of the I> threshold time delay type. Select DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time curves or RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve.
Displays the I> DMT time delay.
Selection of the I> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 150 s using
or
and enable your choice using
.
I> IDMT Threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI Curve Menu
Delay Type
IDMT
Curve
Tms
IEC SI
1.0
Time Dial
1.0
Display the I> inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves).
Selection of the I> curve. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI, IEC
VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI, IEEE EI using
or
and enable your choice using the key
.
Displays the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) associated with the IDMT Curve. TMS is visible when any of the IEC curves are selected. Select the curve TMS value. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Displays the Time Dial associated with the IDMT Curve.
Time Dial is visible when CO2, CO8 or IEEE curves are selected. Select from 0.1 to 100 using
or
and enable your choice using
.
P521/EN FT/B93 Page (FT) 3-37
(FT) 3 User Guide
3.5.6.2.3
3.5.6.2.4
3.5.6.2.5
3.5.6.2.6
3.5.6.2.7
MENUS
I> DMT Reset Time, IEEE/ANSI Curves Menu
Reset Type tReset
DMT
40 ms
Selection of the type of reset time delay. Select between
DMT (Definite Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Selection of the tReset value associated with the DMT reset time choice. Select from 40 ms to 100 s using
or
and enable your choice using
.
I> IDMT Reset Time, IEEE/ANSI Curves Menu
Reset Type
IDMT
Rtms 1.0
Selection of the type of reset time delay. Select between
DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Selection of the Rtms value associated with the IDMT reset time choice. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using
or
and enable your choice using
.
I> IDMT Threshold, Electromechanical RI Curve Menu
Delay Type
RI
K
1.0
Display of the I> inverse time delay (electromechanical RI curve).
Selection of the RI curve K value. Select from 0.100 to 10 using
or
and enable your choice using
.
I> DMT Reset Time, IEC / Electromechanical RI Curves Menu tReset
60 ms
Selection of the tReset value from 40 ms to 100 s using
or
and enable your choice using
.
I>> Threshold Menu
I>>?
I>>
No
10 In
I>> Delay Type
DMT tI >>
100 ms
Selection of the I>> second phase threshold. Select Yes,
No or Backup. If the user enters I>>(Yes or Backup), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters I>> (No) go to I>>> menu.
If “Backup” is selected I>> will only function in the event of a Protection Comms Failure.
Selection of the I>> second threshold current value. To modify this value, press
. The threshold I>> is adjustable from 0.5 to 40 In using
or
. Press
to enable your adjustment.
Selection of the I>> time delay type threshold. Select DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time curves, RI for electromechanical inverse time curve. According to this setting, additional settings appear, as shown for I> above.
Selection of the second threshold I>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 150 s using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Page (FT) 3-38 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
3.5.6.2.8
3.5.6.2.9
3.5.6.3
P521/EN FT/B93
(FT) 3 User Guide
I>>> Threshold Menu
I>>>?
I>>>
No
10 In tI >>>
100 ms
Selection of the I>>> third phase threshold. Select Yes, No or Backup. If the user enters I>>>(Yes or Backup), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters I>>> (No) go to I>>>> menu.
If “Backup” is selected I>>> will only function in the event of a Protection Comms Failure.
Selection of the I>>> third threshold current value. To modify this value, press
. The threshold I>>> is adjustable from 0.5 to 40 In. Press
to enable your adjustment.
Selection of the third threshold I>>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 150 s using
or
and enable your choice using
.
I>>>> Threshold Menu
I>>>>?
No
I>>>>
10 In tI >>>>
100 ms
Selection of the I>>>> fourth phase threshold. Select Yes,
No or Backup. If the user enters I>>>> (Yes or Backup), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters I>>>>
(No), the LCD display returns to the heading of the menu
[50/51] Phase OC.
If “Backup” is selected I>>>> will only function in the event of a Protection Comms Failure.
Selection of the I>>>> fourth threshold current value. To modify this value, press
. The threshold I>>>> is adjustable from 0.5 to 40 In. Press
to enable your adjustment.
Selection of the fourth threshold I>>>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 150 s using
or
and enable your choice using
.
[50N/51N] Earth OC Sub Menu
PROTECTION Gx
[50N/51N] E/Gnd
Ie>? le >
Yes
0.05 Ien
Ie> Delay Type
DMT
Heading of the PROTECTION Gx menu (where x = 1, 2, 3 or 4). To gain access to the [50N/51N] E/Gnd sub menu, press
,
4, 5, 6 or 7 times,
and
twice.
Heading of the [50N/51N] E/Gnd sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press
.
Selection of the first earth threshold (Ie>). Select Yes, No or Backup. If the user enters Ie>(Yes or Backup), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters > (No), go to Ie>> menu.
If “Backup” is selected Ie> will only function in the event of a Protection Comms Failure.
Displays the current threshold value Ie>. To modify this value, press
. The threshold Ie> is adjustable from: 0.002 to 1 Ien (0.002 to 1 Ien Range), 0.01 to Ien (0.01 to 8 Ien
Range) and 0.1 to 25 Ien (0.1 to 40 Ien Range). Press
to enable your adjustment.
Selection of the Ie> threshold time delay type. Select from
DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time curves, RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve or LABOR. for
Laborelec inverse curves. Make your selection using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Page (FT) 3-39
(FT) 3 User Guide
3.5.6.3.1
3.5.6.3.2
3.5.6.3.3
3.5.6.3.4
3.5.6.3.5
MENUS
Ie> DMT Threshold Menu
Ie> Delay Type
DMT tIe >
100 ms
Displays the Ie> DMT time delay.
Selection of the Ie> time delay. Select the time delay from
0 to 150 s using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Ie> IDMT Threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI Curves menu
Ie> Delay Type
IDMT
Ie> Curve
IEC SI
Ie> Tms
1.0
Ie> Time Dial
1.0
Displays the Ie> inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves).
Selection of the Ie> curve. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI,
IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI,
IEEE EI using
or
and enable your choice using the key
.
Displays the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) associated with the IDMT Curve. TMS is visible when any of the IEC curves are selected. Select the curve TMS value. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Displays the Time Dial associated with the IDMT Curve.
Time Dial is visible when CO2, CO8 or IEEE curves are selected. Select from 0.1 to 100 using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Ie> DMT Reset Time, IEEE/ANSI Curves Menu
Reset Type
DMT
TReset
40 ms
Selection of the type of reset time delay. Select between
DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Selection of the tReset value associated with the DMT reset time choice. Select from 40 ms to 100 s using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Ie> IDMT Reset Time, ANSI Curves Menu
Reset Type
Rtms 1.0
IDMT
Selection of the type of reset time delay. Select between
DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Selection of the Rtms value associated with the IDMT reset time choice. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using
or
and enable your choice using
.
IE> IDMT Threshold, Electromechanical RI Curve Menu
Ie> Delay type
RI
K
1.0
Displays the Ie> inverse time delay (electromechanical RI curve).
Selection of the RI curve K value. Select from 0.100 to 10 using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Page (FT) 3-40 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
3.5.6.3.6
3.5.6.3.7
3.5.6.3.8
3.5.6.3.9
(FT) 3 User Guide
Ie> DMT Reset Time, IEC/RI Curves Menu tReset
60 ms
Selection of the tReset value from 40 ms to 100 s using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Ie> IDMT Threshold, Laborelec Curve Menu
Ie> Delay type
LABOR.
Ie> Curve
1 tReset
40 ms
Displays the Ie> inverse time delay (Laborelec curve).
Selection of the Laborelec curve. Select from Curve 1, 2 or
3 using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Selection of the tReset value from 40 ms to 100 s using
or
and enable your choice using
.
Ie>> Threshold Menu
Ie>>?
No
Ie>> 5 Ien
Ie>> Delay Type
DMT tIe>>
100 ms
Selection of the Ie>> second earth threshold. Select Yes,
No or Backup. If the user enters Ie>>(Yes or Backup), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters Ie>> (No) go to Ie>>> menu.
If “Backup” is selected Ie>> will only function in the event of a Protection Comms Failure.
Selection of the Ie>> second threshold current value. To modify this value, press
. The threshold Ie>> is adjustable from : 0.002 to 1Ien (0.002 to 1 Ien Range) 0.01 to 8 Ien
(0.01 to 8 Ien Range), and 0.5 to 40 Ien (0.1 to 40 Ion
Range). Press
to validate your adjustment.
Selection of the Ie>> threshold time delay type. Select
DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time curves, RI for electromechanical inverse time curve. According to this setting, additional settings appear, as shown for I> above.
Selection of the second threshold Ie>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 150 s using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Ie>>> Threshold Menu
Ie>>>?
No
Ie>>>
10 Ien tIe>>>
100 ms
Selection of the Ie>>> third earth threshold. Select Yes,
No or Backup. If the user enters Ie>>> (Yes or Backup), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters Ie>>>
(No) go to Ie>>> menu.
If “Backup” is selected Ie>>> will only function in the event of a Protection Comms Failure.
Selection of the Ie>>> third threshold current value. To modify this value, press
. The threshold Ie>>> is adjustable from 0.5 to 40 Ien. Press
to validate your adjustment.
Selection of the third threshold Ie>>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 150 s using
or
and validate your choice using
.
P521/EN FT/B93 Page (FT) 3-41
(FT) 3 User Guide
3.5.6.3.10
3.5.6.4
3.5.6.4.1
MENUS
Ie>>>> Threshold Menu
Ie>>>>?
Yes
Ie>>>>
10 Ien tIe>>>>
100 ms
Selection of the Ie>>>> fourth earth threshold. Select Yes,
No or Backup. If the user validates Ie>>>(Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user enters Ie>>> (No), the LCD display returns to the heading of the menu
[50N/51N] E/Gnd.
If “Backup” is selected Ie>>>> will only function in the event of a Protection Comms Failure.
Selection of the Ie>>>> fourth threshold current value. To modify this value, press
. The threshold Ie>>>> is adjustable from 0.5 to 40 Ien. Press
to validate your adjustment.
Selection of the third threshold Ie>>>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 150 s using
or
and validate your choice using
.
[46] Negative Phase Sequence I2> Sub Menu
PROTECTION Gx
Heading of the PROTECTION Gx menu (where x = 1, 2, 3 or 4). To gain access to the [46] Neg Seq OC sub menu, press
,
4, 5, 6 or 7 times (as needed), then
and
3 times.
[46] Neg Seq OC
I2>?
I2>
No
0.1 In
I2> Delay Type
DMT
Heading of the [46] NEGATIVE Phase SEQUENCE I2>sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press
.
Selection of the negative phase sequence overcurrent function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user selects (No), the menu is deactivated.
Displays the negative sequence current threshold value
I2>. To modify this value, press
. The threshold I2> is adjustable from 0.1 to 40 In, in steps of 0.01 In. Press
to validate your adjustment.
Selection of the I2> threshold time delay type. Select from
DMT for definite time, IDMT for inverse time curves or RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve. To make a selection use
or
and validate your choice using
.
I2> DMT Threshold Menu
I2> Delay Type
DMT t I2 >
100 ms
Displays the I2> DMT time delay.
Selection of the I2> time delay. Select the time delay from
0 to 150 s using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Page (FT) 3-42 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS (FT) 3 User Guide
3.5.6.4.2 I2> IDMT Threshold, IEC or IEEE/ANSI Curves Menu
I2> Delay Type
IDMT
I2> Curve
IEC SI
I2> Tms
0,025
I2> Time Dial
1.0
Displays the I2> inverse time delay (IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves).
Selection of the I2> curve. Select from IEC SI, IEC STI,
IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI,
IEEE EI using
or
and validate your choice using the key
.
Displays the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) associated with the IDMT Curve. TMS is visible when any of the IEC curves are selected. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Displays the Time Dial associated with the IDMT Curve.
Time Dial is visible when CO2, CO8 or IEEE curves are selected. Select from 0.1 to 100 using
or
and enable your choice using
.
I2> DMT reset time, IEC curves menu tReset
60 ms
Selection of the tReset value from 40 ms to 100 s using
or
and validate your choice using
.
I2> DMT reset time, IEEE/ANSI curves menu
Reset Type
DMT tReset
40 ms
I2> IDMT reset time, IEEE/ANSI curves menu
Reset Type
IDMT
Selection of the type of reset time delay. Select between
DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Selection of the tReset value associated with the DMT reset time choice. Select from 40 ms to 100 s using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Selection of the type of reset time delay. Select between
DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Selection of the Rtms value associated with the IDMT reset time choice. Select from 0.025 to 1.5 using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Rtms
0.025
P521/EN FT/B93 Page (FT) 3-43
(FT) 3 User Guide MENUS
3.5.6.4.3 I2> IDMT Threshold, Electromechanical RI Curve Menu
I2> Delay Type
RI
K
2.500
Display of the I2> inverse time delay (electromechanical RI curve).
Selection of the RI curve K value. Select from 0.100 to 10 using
or
and validate your choice using
.
I2> DMT reset time, RI curves t Reset
60 ms
Selection of the t Reset value from 40 ms to 100 s using
or
and validate your choice using
.
3.5.6.4.4 I2>> Threshold Menu
I2>>?
Yes
I2>>
1 In
Selection of the 2nd threshold of the negative phase sequence overcurrent function. Select Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user selects (No), the menu is deactivated.
Displays the value of the 2nd threshold of the negative phase sequence overcurrent function. To modify this value, press
. The threshold I2>> is adjustable from 0.1
In to 40 In, in steps of 0.01 In. Press
to validate your adjustment.
Selection of the 2nd threshold I2>> time delay. Select the time delay from 0 to 150 s using
or
and validate your choice using
. tI2>>
150 ms
3.5.6.5 [49] Therm OL Sub Menu
PROTECTION Gx
[49] Therm OL
Therm OL?
Yes
I >
Te
K
0.5 In
10 mn
1.05
Heading of the PROTECTION Gx1 menu (where x = 1, 2,
3 or 4). To gain access to the [49] Thermal OL sub menu, press
,
4, 5, 6 or 7 times as needed, then
and
4 times.
Heading of the Thermal OL menu. To gain access to the sub menu content press
.
Selection of the thermal overload function. Select Yes or
No. If the user enters Yes, the following menu is displayed. If the user enters No, the menu is deactivated.
Displays the thermal current threshold value I >. To modify this value, press
. The threshold I > is adjustable from 0.1 to 3.2 In, in steps of 0.01.
Press
to validate your choice.
Displays the thermal time constant (Te) associated with the thermal overload formula. To modify this value, press
. The time constant Te is adjustable from 1 to 200 minutes, in steps of 1 min.
Press
to validate your adjustment.
Displays the k factor associated with the thermal overload function. To modify this value, press
. The k factor is adjustable from 1 to 1.5, in steps of 0.01.
Press
to validate your adjustment.
Page (FT) 3-44 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
3.5.6.6
(FT) 3 User Guide
Trip
110 %
Alarm?
Yes
Alarm
90 %
Displays the percentage applicable to the thermal overload trip threshold. To modify this value, press
.
Trip is adjustable from 50 % to 200 % in steps of 1%.
Press
to validate your adjustment.
Selection of the thermal overload alarm function. Select
Yes or No. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user selects (No), the thermal overload alarm will be disabled.
Displays the percentage applicable to the thermal overload alarm threshold. To modify this value, press
.
Trip is adjustable from 50 % to 200 % step of 1%.
Press
to validate your adjustment.
[37] Undercurrent I< Sub Menu
[37] Under
Current
I<?
I< tI<
Yes
0.2 In
200 ms
Heading of the [37] Under-Current sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press
.
Selection of the undercurrent function. Select Yes or No.
If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user selects (no) the menu is deactivated.
Displays the undercurrent threshold value I<. To modify this value, press
. The threshold I< is adjustable from
0.02 In to 1 In, in steps of 0.01 In. Press
to validate your adjustment.
Selection of the time delay associated with the undercurrent threshold. Select the time delay from 0 s to
150 s using
or
and validate your choice using
.
P521/EN FT/B93 Page (FT) 3-45
(FT) 3 User Guide
3.5.7
3.5.7.1
MENUS
Automat. Ctrl Menu
The AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu makes it possible to programme the various automation functions included in the MiCOM P521.
•
•
•
•
The various sub menus are:
•
Commissioning
Trip Commands
Latch Functions (latch of the trip output relay RL1)
Blocking Logic 1
Blocking Logic 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Logic Select. 1
Logic Select. 2
Outputs Relays
Latch Output Relays (latch of the auxiliary output relays)
Invert Output Relays
Inputs
Broken Conductor
Cold Load PU
CB Fail
•
•
CB Supervision
Logic Equations
•
•
Program. I-Trip (inter-trips)
CT Supervision
To access the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu, press
followed by
six times.
Commissioning Sub Menu
This sub menu has been designed as a commissioning tool to aid testing. It makes it possible to disable output contacts and freeze circuit breaker measurements (such as number of operation etc.). In addition, this menu allows the user to perform a contact and
LED test. A “Loopback” facility is also provided so that the relay can be fully tested in the absence of a remote relay (see also section 4.2.6 of the Commissioning and
Maintenance chapter (P521/EN CM) for more information).
AUTOMAT.CTRL
Commissioning
Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the commissioning menu, press
,
6 times then
.
Commissioning?
No
Heading of the Commissioning sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press
.
Enables / Disables of the Commissioning facilities. Select
Yes or No.
If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user selects (No) the menu is deactivated.
Page (FT) 3-46 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
3.5.7.2
P521/EN FT/B93
(FT) 3 User Guide
LED Test
Disable Relays
Trip 87654321
Test:
Contact Test
No
No
No
Disable CB Stats:
No
Loopback Test
OFF
00000000
Allows the user to illuminate all eight LED’s on the front of the P521. To illuminate the LED’s select (Yes) and Press
. The LED’s will remain illuminated for 5 seconds after the
key is pressed. If (No) is selected the relay will not perform an LED test.
Enables / Disables all outputs contacts. To disable the output contacts select (Yes). The TRIP LED and LCD will continue to function correctly even with the contacts disabled. An “ISOLATED RELAYS” ALARM
(accompanied by the alarm LED) will be generated when the contacts are disabled. The alarm can only be reset when output contacts are re-enabled by selecting (No).
Allocation of contacts to be tested.
To allocate the trip test to the output relay(s), press
, then select the desired output relay with the value 1 using
. Repeat the operation on the other output relays if desired, then validate using
.
Allows the user to operate the selected contacts. To operate the selected contacts press
followed by
to select (Yes). The contacts will remain operated whilst
(Yes) is selected. To deactivate the contacts select (No).
Allows the user to “freeze” the Circuit breaker measurements in the RECORDS/CB Monitoring menu.
To freeze the measurements press
followed by
to select (Yes). To re-activate the CB measurements, select
(No) and validate your choice using
.
Allows the user to set the Loopback Test to CHANNEL_1
(=On). In this mode the relay will only accept messages from itself and no other relay. To avoid a COMMS FAIL alarm the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) must be connected together on the protection comms channel. To enable the Loopback Test press
followed by
to select
(Yes). This will be accompanied by the LOOPBACK
MODE alarm. To deactivate the Loopback Test, select
(No).
Indicates which phase (A, B or C) is currently operating due to the current differential protection. Indication is given as soon as the current enters the “trip region” but will reset once the current exits this region.
I Diff Trip Flags
TRIP: A, B, C
Trip Commands Sub Menu
This sub menu makes it possible to assign selected thresholds to the trip output (RL1).
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Trip Commands
Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the Trip Commands menu, press
,
6 times,
, then
.
Trip Idiff
Yes
Trip Direct
I-Trip Yes
Heading of the Trip ORDER sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press
.
Allocates the current differential protection to the trip output (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, the trip output relay (RL1) will be activated when the current differential protection operates. If the user validates No, the trip output relay (RL1) will not be activated even when the current differential protection operates.
Allocates the Direct Intertrip function to the trip output.
Select Yes or No.
Page (FT) 3-47
(FT) 3 User Guide
Trip C Diff
I-Trip Yes
Trip PIT
Yes
Trip tI>
Yes
Trip tI>>
Yes
Trip tI>>>
Yes
Trip tI>>>>
Yes
Trip tIe>
Yes
Trip tIe>>
Yes
Trip tIe>>>
Yes
Trip tIe>>>>
Yes
Trip tI<
Yes
Trip tI2>
Yes
Trip tI2>>
Yes
Trip Thermal
Yes
Trip Brkn.Cond
Yes
Trip tAux 1
Yes
Trip tAux 2
Yes
TCS Block
N0
Trip Equ A
No
Page (FT) 3-48
MENUS
Allocates the Current Differential Intertrip function to the trip output relay. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Permissive Intertrip function to the trip output relay. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the first phase time delay overcurrent threshold
(tI>) to the trip output (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, the trip output relay (RL1) will be activated at the end of the time delay tI>. If the user validates No, the trip output relay (RL1) will never be activated, even at the end of the time delay tI>.
Allocates the second phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the third phase time delay overcurrent threshold
(tI>>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the fourth phase time delay overcurrent threshold (tI>>>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the first earth fault time delay threshold (tIe>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the second earth fault time delay threshold
(tIe>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the third earth fault time delay threshold (tIe>>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the fourth earth fault time delay threshold
(tIe>>>>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Allocates of the under current threshold (tI<) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the first time delayed negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold (tI2>) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the second time delayed negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold (tI2>>) to the trip output.
Select Yes or No.
Allocates the thermal overload Trip (
Trip) to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the broken conductor detection to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the auxiliary timer Aux 1 to the trip output.
Select Yes or No.
Allocates the auxiliary timer Aux 2 to the trip output.
Select Yes or No.
Allocates the TCS Block signal to the trip output. Select
Yes or No.
Allocates the Logic Equation A operate signal to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS (FT) 3 User Guide
3.5.7.3
P521/EN FT/B93
Trip Equ B
No
Trip Equ C
No
Trip Equ D
No
Trip Equ E
No
Trip Equ F
No
Trip Equ G
No
Trip Equ H
No
Allocates the Logic Equation B operate signal to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Logic Equation C operate signal to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Logic Equation D operate signal to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Logic Equation E operate signal to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Logic Equation F operate signal to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Logic Equation G operate signal to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Logic Equation H operate signal to the trip output. Select Yes or No.
Latch Functions Sub Menu
This sub menu makes it possible to latch the trip output relay RL1 after being operated by one or several thresholds.
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the Latch Functions menu, press
,
, 6 times,
, then
twice.
Latch Functions Heading of the Latch Functions sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press
.
Latch Idiff
No
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the current differential protection (Idiff) has operated (select Yes or
No). If the user validates Yes, RL1 will be latched even after Idiff has reset. If the user validates No, RL1 will
“drop off” after Idiff has reset.
Latch Direct
I-Trip No
Latch the trip output RL1 once the Direct Intertrip function has operated.
Latch C Diff
I-Trip No
Latch PIT
No
Latch the trip output RL1 once the Current Differential
Intertrip function has operated.
Latch tI>
Latch tI>>
No
No
Latch tI>>>
No
Latch tI>>>>
No
Latch the trip output RL1 once the Permissive Intertrip function has operated.
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the first time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>) has operated.
Select Yes or No.
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the second time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>) has operated.
Select Yes or No.
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the third time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>>) has operated. Select Yes or No.
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the fourth time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>>>) has operated. Select Yes or No.
Page (FT) 3-49
(FT) 3 User Guide
Latch tIe>
No
Latch tIe>>
No
Latch tIe>>>
No
Latch tIe>>>>
No
Latch tI<
No
Latch tI2>
No
Latch tI2>>
No
Latch Thermal
No
Latch Brkn.Cond
No
Latch t Aux 1
No
Latch t Aux 2
No
TCS Block
No
Latch Equ A
No
Latch Equ B
No
Latch Equ C
No
Latch Equ D
No
Latch Equ E
No
Latch Equ F
No
Latch Equ G
No
MENUS
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the first time delayed earth fault threshold (tIe>) has operated. Select
Yes or No.
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the second time delayed earth fault threshold (tIe>>) has operated. Select
Yes or No.
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the third time delayed earth fault threshold (tIe>>>) has operated.
Select Yes or No.
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the fourth time delayed earth fault threshold (tIe>>>>) has operated.
Select Yes or No.
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the time delayed under current threshold (tI<) has operated. Select Yes or
No.
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the first time delayed negative sequence over current threshold (tI2>) has operated. Select Yes or No.
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the second time delayed negative sequence over current threshold (tI2>>) has operated. Select Yes or No.
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the thermal element has operated. Select Yes or No.
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once the broken conductor protection has operated. Select Yes or No.
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once auxiliary timer 1 has operated. Select Yes or No.
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once auxiliary timer 2 has operated. Select Yes or No.
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once TCS Block has operated. Select Yes or No.
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once Logic Equation A has operated. Select Yes or No.
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once Logic Equation B has operated. Select Yes or No.
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once Logic Equation C has operated. Select Yes or No.
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once Logic Equation D has operated. Select Yes or No.
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once Logic Equation E has operated. Select Yes or No.
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once Logic Equation F has operated. Select Yes or No.
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once Logic Equation G has operated. Select Yes or No.
Page (FT) 3-50 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
3.5.7.4
(FT) 3 User Guide
Latch Equ H
No
Latches the trip output relay RL1 once Logic Equation H has operated. Select Yes or No.
Blocking Logic Sub Menu
The Blocking Logic sub menu (designated as Blocking Logic 1 and Blocking Logic 2 menus) enables the user to block any of the time delayed thresholds by allocating to a "Blk
Log" input (refer to Inputs menu).
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the Blocking Logic 1 menu, press
,
, 6 times,
, followed by
4 times (5 times for Blocking Logic 2).
Blocking Logic Heading of the Blocking Logic sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu contents, press
.
Block Idiff
No
Block tI>
No
Blocking of the current differential protection (Idiff) (select
Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, Idiff will be blocked on the transition (logic state 1) of the "Blk log" logic input.
If the user validates No, the transition of the "Blk log" logic input will not block Idiff.
Blocking of the first time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>) (select Yes or No). If the user validates
Yes, the first threshold will be blocked on the transition
(logic state 1) of the "Blk log" logic input. If the user validates No, the transition of the "Blk log" logic input will not block the first phase threshold tI>.
Block tI>>
No
Blocking of the second time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>). Select Yes or No.
Block tI>>>
No
Blocking of the third time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>>). Select Yes or No.
Block tI>>>>
No
Block tIe>
No
Block tIe>>
No
Block tIe>>>
No
Block tIe>>>>
No
Block tI2 >
No
Block tI2 >>
No
Block Thermal
No
Blocking of the fourth time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>>>). Select Yes or No.
Blocking of the first time delayed earth fault threshold
(tIe>). Select Yes or No.
Blocking of the second time delayed earth fault threshold
(tIe>>). Select Yes or No.
Blocking of the third time delayed earth fault threshold
(tIe>>>). Select Yes or No.
Blocking of the fourth time delayed earth fault threshold
(tIe>>>>). Select Yes or No.
Blocking of the first time delayed negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold (tI2>). Select Yes or No.
Blocking of the second time delayed negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold (tI2>>). Select Yes or
No.
Blocking of the thermal protection. Select Yes or No.
P521/EN FT/B93 Page (FT) 3-51
(FT) 3 User Guide
3.5.7.5
Page (FT) 3-52
MENUS
Block Brkn.Cond
No
Block t Aux 1
No
Block t Aux 2
No
Block Equation
A No
Block Equation
B No
Block Equation
C No
Block Equation
D No
Block Equation
E No
Block Equation
F No
Block Equation
G No
Block Equation
H No
Blocking of the broken conductor protection. Select Yes or No.
Blocking of the auxiliary timer 1 (tAux1). Select Yes or
No.
Blocking of the auxiliary timer 2 (tAux2). Select Yes or
No.
Blocking of the Logic Equation A. Select Yes or No.
Blocking of the Logic Equation B. Select Yes or No.
Blocking of the Logic Equation C. Select Yes or No.
Blocking of the Logic Equation D. Select Yes or No.
Blocking of the Logic Equation E. Select Yes or No.
Blocking of the Logic Equation F. Select Yes or No.
Blocking of the Logic Equation G. Select Yes or No.
Blocking of the Logic Equation H. Select Yes or No.
Logic Select Sub Menus
The Logic Select sub menus (designated as Logic Select. 1 and Logic Select. 2) sub menus enable the user to allocate a time delay threshold to the "Log sel" input (refer to
Inputs menu). When the "Log sel" input is energized the selected overcurrent and earth fault time delays will change to the tSEL1 or tSEL2 time.
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Logic Select. 1
Sel1 tI>>
No
Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the Logic Select. 1 menu, press
,
, 6 times,
, followed by
6 times (7 times for Logic Select. 2).
Heading of the Logic Select. 1 sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu contents, press
.
Logic selectivity of the second time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>) (select Yes or No). If the user validates Yes, operation of the second threshold will be delayed for tSel1 on the transition (logic state 1) of the
"Log Sel 1" logic input. If the user validates No, the transition of the "Log Sel 1" logic input will not alter the second threshold tI>>.
Sel1 tI>>>
No
Logic selectivity of the third time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>>). Select Yes or No.
Sel1 tI>>>>
No
Logic selectivity of the fourth time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>>). Select Yes or No.
P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
3.5.7.6
P521/EN FT/B93
(FT) 3 User Guide
Sel1 tIe>>
No
Sel1 tIe>>>
No
Sel1 tIe>>>>
No tSel1
0 ms
Logic selectivity of the second time delayed earth fault threshold (tIe>>). Select Yes or No.
Logic selectivity of the third time delayed earth fault threshold (tIe>>>). Select Yes or No.
Logic selectivity of the fourth time delayed earth fault threshold (tIe>>>>). Select Yes or No.
Displays the selective scheme logic time delay t Sel1. To modify this value, press
. The tSel1 is adjustable from 0 ms to 150 s in steps of 10 ms. Press
to validate your adjustment.
Output Relays Sub Menu
This sub menu makes it possible to allocate an output relay (except Watchdog RL0) to the various thresholds (instantaneous and/or time delay). Note that the TRIP contact RL1 is allocated in the “Trip Commands” menu (under AUTOMAT. CTRL).
Output relay RL2 has change over contacts, whereas relays RL3 to RL8 have only normally open contacts.
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Output Relays
Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the Output Relays menu, press
,
, 6 times,
, followed by
8 times.
Heading of the Output Relays sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu contents, press
.
Trip 8765432
0000000
Allocates any trip order to the selected output relays
(copies the trip contact onto one or several selected relays).
To select the desired output relay(s), press
, then select the desired output relay with a value 1 using
.Repeat the operation on the other output relays if desired, then validate using
.
Idiff 8765432
0000000
Allocates the current differential protection (Idiff) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Backup
Prot
Comms
Fail
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
Allocates the backup protection enabled function to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the Comms Fail alarm (protection comms) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Direct
I-TRIP
C DIFF
I-TRIP
PIT
I>
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
Allocates the Direct Intertrip received to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the Current Differential Intertrip received to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the Permissive Intertrip operation to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the first instantaneous phase overcurrent threshold (I>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Page (FT) 3-53
(FT) 3 User Guide MENUS
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
I>>>> tI>>>>
Ie> tIe>
Ie>> tIe>>
Ie>>> tI>
I>> tI>>
I>>> tI>>> tIe>>>
Ie>>>> tIe>>>> tI< tI2> tI2>>
Therm
Alarm
Allocates the first time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>) to the output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the second instantaneous phase overcurrent threshold (I>>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the second time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>) to the output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the third instantaneous phase overcurrent threshold (I>>>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the third time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the fourth instantaneous phase overcurrent threshold (I>>>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the fourth time delayed phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the first instantaneous earth fault threshold (Ie>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the first time delayed earth fault threshold (tIe>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the second instantaneous earth fault threshold
(Ie>>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the second time delayed earth fault threshold
(tIe>>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the third instantaneous earth fault threshold
(Ie>>>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the third time delayed earth fault threshold
(tIe>>>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the fourth instantaneous earth fault threshold
(Ie>>>>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the fourth time delayed earth fault threshold
(tIe>>>>) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the time delayed under current threshold (tI<) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the first negative phase sequence overcurrent time delay threshold (tI2>) to the selected output relays.
Select output relays.
Allocates of the second negative phase sequence overcurrent time delay threshold (tI2>>) to the output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the thermal alarm threshold to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Page (FT) 3-54 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
P521/EN FT/B93
(FT) 3 User Guide
Therm
Trip
CB
Alarm
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
52 Fail
Brkn.
Cond
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
CB
Fail
CB
Close tAux 1 tAux 2
Active
Group
TCS Block
N0
Input1
Input2
Input3
Input4
Input5
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
Equ A
Equ B
Equ C
Equ D
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
Allocates the thermal trip threshold to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the circuit breaker alarm function to the selected output relays (excessive CB operations,
A n , excessive tripping, closing time, CB status DBI). Select output relays.
Allocates the circuit breaker (52) trip circuit supervision function to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates of the broken conductor function to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the circuit breaker failure function to the selected output relays. Select output relays. CB Fail =
CB not open at the end of tBF timer.
Allocates the circuit breaker closing command to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates auxiliary timer 1 (Aux 1) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates auxiliary timer 2 (Aux 2) to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates setting group 2/3/4 indication to the selected output relays. Select output relays.
Allocates the TCS Block signal to the trip output. Select
Yes or No.
Allocates the Input1 signal to the selected output relays.
Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Input2 signal to the selected output relays.
Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Input3 signal to the selected output relays.
Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Input4 signal to the selected output relays.
Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Input5 signal to the selected output relays.
Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Logic Equation A operate signal to the selected output relays. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Logic Equation B operate signal to the selected output relays. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Logic Equation C operate signal to the selected output relays. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Logic Equation D operate signal to the selected output relays. Select Yes or No.
Page (FT) 3-55
(FT) 3 User Guide
3.5.7.7
MENUS
Equ E
Equ F
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
Equ G
Equ H
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
Prgm 8765432
I-Trip1 0000000
Prgm 8765432
I-Trip2 0000000
Prgm 8765432
I-Trip3 0000000
Prgm 8765432
I-Trip4 0000000
CTS
Local
CTS
Remote
CTS
Block
CTS
Res.
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
8765432
0000000
Mode 8765432
Convent 0000000
CDiff 8765432
Disable 0000000
Allocates the Logic Equation E operate signal to the selected output relays. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Logic Equation F operate signal to the selected output relays. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Logic Equation G operate signal to the selected output relays. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Logic Equation H operate signal to the selected output relays. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Programmable Inter-trip 1 signal to the selected output relays. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Programmable Inter-trip 2 signal to the selected output relays. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Programmable Inter-trip 3 signal to the selected output relays. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Programmable Inter-trip 4 signal to the selected output relays. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Local CT failure signal to the selected output relays. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the Remote CT failure signal to the selected output relays. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the signal of CTS block relevant protections to the selected output relays. Select Yes or No.
Allocates the signal of CTS Restraint differential protections to the selected output relays. Select Yes or
No.
Allocates the signal of protection communication frame in
Convention mode to the selected output relays. Select
Yes or No.
Allocates the signal of current differential disabled to the selected output relays. Select Yes or No.
Latch of the Auxiliary Output Relays
This sub menu makes it possible to latch the individual output relays. The latch can be reset by
key once the function that initiated the relay has reset.
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Latch Output
Relays
Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the Latch Output Relays menu, press
,
, 6 times,
, followed by
9 times.
Heading of the Latch Output Relays sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press
.
Output 2
No
Latch output relay RL2.
Select Yes or No.
Page (FT) 3-56 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
3.5.7.8
3.5.7.9
P521/EN FT/B93
(FT) 3 User Guide
Output 3
No
Output 4
No
Output 5
No
Output 6
No
Output 7
Output 8
No
No
Latch output relay RL3.
Select Yes or No.
Latch output relay RL4.
Select Yes or No.
Latch output relay RL5.
Select Yes or No.
Latch output relay RL6.
Select Yes or No.
Latch output relay RL7.
Select Yes or No.
Latch output relay RL8.
Select Yes or No.
Inversion of the Auxiliary Output Relays
This sub menu makes it possible to invert the state of the individual output relays while the relay is energized.
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Invert Output
Relays
Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the Invert Output Relays menu, press
,
, 6 times,
, followed by
10 times.
Heading of the Invert Output Relays sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press
.
Output 2
No
Output 3
No
Invert output relay RL2.
Select Yes or No.
Invert output relay RL3.
Select Yes or No.
Output 4
No
Output 5
No
Output 6
No
Output 7
Output 8
No
No
Invert output relay RL4.
Select Yes or No.
Invert output relay RL5.
Select Yes or No.
Invert output relay RL6.
Select Yes or No.
Invert output relay RL7.
Select Yes or No.
Invert output relay RL8.
Select Yes or No.
Inputs Sub Menu
This sub menu makes it possible to allocate any of the 5 logic inputs to either a label or an automation function. The available selections are shown in the following table:
Page (FT) 3-57
(FT) 3 User Guide MENUS
Label abstract
None
Unlatch
52a
52b
CB FLT
Aux 1
Aux 2
Blk Log 1
Blk Log 2
Strt Dist
Cold L PU
Log Sel 1
Log Sel 2
Change set
Reset
Trip Circ
Strt tBF
Permis IT
Direct IT
Comms RST
Log Trip
Log Close
TCS Block
GPS Sync
Reset LED
Inhibit CTS
Label signification
No allocation
Unlatches currently latched output contacts
Status of 52a CB auxiliary contact
Status of 52b CB auxiliary contact
Circuit Breaker SF6 low
Initiates auxiliary timer AUX 1
Initiates auxiliary timer AUX 2
Blocking logic 1
Blocking logic 2
Triggers the disturbance recorder
Enables cold load pick up functionality
Logic select 1
Logic select 2
Changes setting group (default setting group = 1)
Resets the thermal state
Assigns an input for trip circuit supervision
Starts the breaker fail timer
Initiate a permissive intertrip
Initiate a direct intertrip
Reset protection comms statistics
Assigns an input to trip the circuit breaker
Assigns an input to close trip the circuit breaker
Assigns an input to the External TCS Block function
Time synchronization
Reset LED indication
Inhibit CT supervision
In addition to the input allocation the user can specify the required operating time for auxiliary timers 1 and 2.
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Inputs
Input 1
None
Input 2
None
Input 3
None
Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the Inputs menu, press
,
, 6 times,
, followed by
11 times.
Heading of the Inputs sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press
.
Allocation of logic input 1. To allocate a function to logic input 1, press
then use
or
to select the desired function from the available list. Validate your choice using
.
Allocation of logic input 2. To allocate a function to logic input 2, press
then use
or
to select the desired function from the available list. Validate your choice using
.
Allocation of logic input 3. To allocate a function to logic input 3, press
then use
or
to select the desired function from the available list. Validate your choice using
.
Page (FT) 3-58 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
3.5.7.10
3.5.7.11
P521/EN FT/B93
(FT) 3 User Guide
Input 4
None
Input 5
None
Aux1 Time tAux1 0 ms
Allocation of logic input 4. To allocate a function to logic input 4, press
then use
or
to select the desired function from the available list. Validate your choice using
.
Allocation of logic input 5. To allocate a function to logic input 5, press
then use
or
to select the desired function from the available list. Validate your choice using
.
Displays the time delay for auxiliary timer 1 (tAux1). To adjust the time, press
. The tAux1 time is adjustable from 0 ms to 200 s in steps of 10 ms. Validate your choice using
.
Displays the time delay for auxiliary timer 2 (tAux2). To adjust the time, press
. The tAux1 time is adjustable from 0 ms to 200 s in steps of 10 ms. Validate your choice using
.
Aux2 Time tAux2 0 ms
Broken Conductor Sub Menu
This menu enables the broken conductor detection and its associated settings.
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Broken Cond.
Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the Broken Conductor menu, press
,
, 6 times,
, followed by
12 times.
Heading of the Broken Conductor sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu content, press
.
Brkn. Cond.?
Yes
Brkn. Cond Time tBC 1 ms
Ratio I2/I1
20 %
Enables the broken conductor function. Select Yes or No.
If the user selects (Yes), the following menu is displayed.
If the user selects (No), the broken conductor function is disabled.
Displays the broken conductor time delay tBC. To modify this value, press
. The tBC is adjustable from 0 to 14400 s in steps of 1 s. Press
to validate your adjustment.
Displays the broken conductor threshold. This threshold is a ratio between the negative phase sequence and the positive phase sequence currents. To modify this value, press
. The I2/I1 ratio is adjustable from 20% to 100 % in steps of 1 %. Press
to validate your adjustment.
Cold Load Pick-Up Sub Menu
The Cold Load PU allows the user to enable the cold load pick-up function and its associated settings.
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the Cold Load PU menu, press
,
, 6 times,
, followed by
13 times.
Cold Load PU Heading of the Cold Load PU sub menu.
To gain access to the sub menu points, press
.
Cold Load PU?
No
Enables the cold load pick-up function. Select Yes or No.
If the user selects (Yes), the following menu is displayed.
If the user selects (No), the cold load pick-up function is disabled.
Page (FT) 3-59
(FT) 3 User Guide
Cold Load PU tI>? No
Cold Load PU tI>>? No
Cold Load PU tI>>>? No
Cold Load PU tI>>>>? No
Cold Load PU tIe>? No
Cold Load PU tIe>>? No
Cold Load PU tIe>>>? No
Cold Load PU tIe>>>>? No
Cold Load PU tI2>? No
Cold Load PU tI2>>? No
Cold Load PU t Therm.? Yes
Page (FT) 3-60
MENUS
Associates the I> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To associate tI> with the cold load pick up function, press
and select (Yes). Select (No) if the user does not wish to associate tI> with the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using
.
Associates the I>> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To associate tI>> with the cold load pick up function, press
and select (Yes). Select (No) if the user does not wish to associate tI>> with the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using
.
Associates the I>>> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To associate tI>>> with the cold load pick up function, press
and select (Yes). Select
(No) if the user does not wish to associate tI>>> with the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using
.
Associates the I>>>> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To associate tI>>>> with the cold load pick up function, press
and select (Yes). Select
(No) if the user does not wish to associate tI>>>> with the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using
.
Associates the Ie> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To associate tIe> with the cold load pick up function, press
and select (Yes). Select (No) if the user does not wish to associate tIe> with the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using
.
Associates the Ie>> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To associate tIe>> with the cold load pick up function, press
and select (Yes). Select
(No) if the user does not wish to associate tIe>> with the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using
.
Associates the Ie>>> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To associate tIe>>> with the cold load pick up function, press
and select (Yes). Select
(No) if the user does not wish to associate tIe>>> with the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using
.
Associates the Ie>>>> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To associate tIe>>>> with the cold load pick up function, press
and select (Yes). Select
(No) if the user does not wish to associate tIe>>>> with the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using
.
Associates the I2> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To associate tI2> with the cold load pick up function, press
and select (Yes). Select (No) if the user does not wish to associate tI2> with the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using
.
Associates the I2>> time delay threshold with the cold load pick up function. To associate tI2>> with the cold load pick up function, press
and select (Yes). Select
(No) if the user does not wish to associate tI2>> with the cold load pick up function. Validate your choice using
.
Associates the thermal threshold with the cold load pick up function. To associate the thermal threshold with the cold load pick up function, press
and select (Yes).
Select (No) if the user does not wish to associate the thermal threshold with the cold load pick up function.
Validate your choice using
.
P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
3.5.7.12
3.5.7.13
(FT) 3 User Guide
Cold Load PU level 200 %
Cold Load PU tCL = 400 ms
Selection of the cold load pick up percentage scaling value associated with the selected thresholds. Select from 20% to 500% in steps of 1 % using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Selection of the cold load pick up time delay. Select from
100 ms to 3600 s in steps of 10 ms using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Circuit Breaker Failure Sub Menu
The CB Fail sub menu makes it possible to enable the circuit breaker failure detection function and its associated settings.
AUTOMAT. CTRL
CB Fail
CB Fail?
I<=
No
0.1 In
CB Fail Time tBF 100 ms
Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the CB Fail menu, press
,
, 6 times,
, followed by
14 times.
Heading of the CB Fail sub menu. To gain access to the sub-menu points, press
.
Enables / Disables the circuit breaker failure function. If the user validates (Yes), the following menu is displayed.
If the user selects (No), the breaker failure function is inactive.
Selects the under current threshold associated with the
CB failure detection function. Select from 0.02 In to 1 In in steps of 0.01 In.
Selects the circuit breaker failure time delay. Select from
30 ms to 10 s in steps of 10 ms using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Block I>?
No
Select the possibility to block the instantaneous signal I> in the event of a circuit breaker failure. Select Yes or No.
Block Ie>?
No
Select the possibility to block the instantaneous signal Ie> in the event of a circuit breaker failure detection. Select
Yes or No.
Circuit Breaker Supervision Sub Menu
The CB Supervision sub menu makes it possible to enable the circuit breaker supervision and monitoring function and the various settings associated with this function.
AUTOMAT. CTRL
CB Supervision
TC Supervision
Yes t Trip Circuit t SUP 200 ms
Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the CB Supervision menu, press
,
, 6 times,
, followed by
15 times.
Heading of the CB Supervision sub menu.
To gain access to the sub menu points, press
.
Enables / Disables the trip circuit supervision function.
Select Yes or No. If the user selects (Yes), the function is active. If the user selects (No) the TC supervision is disabled (go to CB Open Time menu).
Selects the Trip circuit supervision time. Select from 0.1 s to 10s in steps of 10 ms using
or
and validate your choice using
.
P521/EN FT/B93 Page (FT) 3-61
(FT) 3 User Guide
3.5.7.14
MENUS
CB Open S'vision
CB Open Time
CB Close S'vision
50 ms
Yes
CB Close Time
CB Open Alarm?
CB Open NB =
Yes
50 ms
Yes
0
Amps(n)?
Yes
Amps(n)?
1000 E6 n
1 t Open Pulse
100 ms t Close Pulse
100 ms
CB Man Trip Dly
0 ms
CB Man Close Dly
0 ms
Enables / Disables the CB operating time supervision function. Select Yes or No. If the user selects (Yes) the following menu is displayed. If the user selects (No) the
CB operating time supervision function is disabled (go to
CB Close menu).
Selects the maximum allowable CB operating time
(tCBO). Select from 50 ms to 1.0 s in steps of 10 ms using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Enables / Disabled the CB closing time supervision function. Select Yes or No. If the user selects (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user selects (No) the
CB closing time supervision function is disabled (go to CB
Open Alarm menu).
Selects the maximum allowable CB closing time (tCBC).
Select from 50 ms to 1.0 s in steps of 10 ms using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Enables / Disables the maximum CB operations function.
Select Yes or No. If the user selects (Yes), the following menu is displayed. If the user selects (No) the CB
Operations supervision function is disabled (go to
Amps(n) menu).
Selects the maximum number of CB operations. Select from 0 to 50000 in steps of 1 using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Enables / Disables the Summation Amps (or square
Amps) interrupted by the CB function. Select Yes or No.
If the user selects (Yes), the following menu is displayed.
If the user selects (No) the CB
Amps(n) function is disabled (go to t Open Pulse menu).
Selection of the summation Amps (or square Amps) alarm threshold. Select from 0 to 4000 E6 A (or A2) in steps of
1 E6 using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Selection of the type of summation (Amps or square
Amps). Select 1 for just Amps or 2 for Amps squared using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Selection of the tripping pulse time. Select from 100 ms to 5 s in steps of 100 ms using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Selection of the closing pulse time. Select from 100 ms to
5 s in steps of 100 ms using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Selects the circuit breaker manual closing delay. Select from 0 to 60s in steps of 0.1s using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Selects the circuit breaker manual closing delay. Select from 0 to 60s in steps of 0.1s using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Logic Equations
With the Logic Equations submenu, up to 8 complex Boolean functions can be formed using OR, OR NOT, AND, AND NOT operators. Up to 16 operands can be used in any single equation. The following logic signals are available for mapping to an equation:
Null
TEXT TEXT in HMI
Null None
Information
Page (FT) 3-62 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
P521/EN FT/B93
(FT) 3 User Guide
I2> Trip
I2>> Start
I2>> Trip
Thermal Alarm
Thermal Trip
CB Alarm
52 Fail
Broken Cond.
CB Fail
CB Close
Aux1 Trip
Aux2 Trip
Active Group
TCS Block
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
TEXT
Any Trip
CDiff Trip
Backup Enable
Comm. Fail
Direct IT
CDiff IT
Permissive IT
I> Start
I> Trip
I>> Start
I>> Trip
I>>> Start
I>>> Trip
I>>>> Start
I>>>> Trip
Ie> Start
Ie> Trip
Ie>> Start
Ie>> Trip
Ie>>> Start
Ie>>> Trip
Ie>>>> Start
Ie>>>> Trip
I< Start
I< Trip
I2> Start tI2>
I2>> tI2>>
Th Alar
Th Trip
CB Alar
52 Fail
Brk Co.
CB Fail
CB Clos tAux1 tAux2
Act Grp
TCS Blk
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
I>>> tI>>>
I>>>> tI>>>>
Ie> tIe>
Ie>> tIe>>
Ie>>> tIe>>>
Ie>>>> tIe>>>>
I< tI<
I2>
TEXT in HMI
Trip
I Diff
Backup
Comm. F
DIT
CDiffIT
PIT
I> tI>
I>> tI>>
Information
Any trip
Current differential trip
Backup protection is enabled
Protection communication failed
Direct inter-trip
Current differential inter-trip
Permissive inter-trip
Phase overcurrent stage 1 starts
Phase overcurrent stage 1 trips
Phase overcurrent stage 2 starts
Phase overcurrent stage 2 trips
Phase overcurrent stage 3 starts
Phase overcurrent stage 3 trips
Phase overcurrent stage 4 starts
Phase overcurrent stage 4 trips
Earth overcurrent stage 1 starts
Earth overcurrent stage 1 trips
Earth overcurrent stage 2 starts
Earth overcurrent stage 2 trips
Earth overcurrent stage 3 starts
Earth overcurrent stage 3 trips
Earth overcurrent stage 4 starts
Earth overcurrent stage 4 trips
Undercurrent starts
Undercurrent trips
Negative sequence overcurrent stage 1 starts
Negative sequence overcurrent stage 1 trips
Negative sequence overcurrent stage 2 starts
Negative sequence overcurrent stage 2 trips
Thermal overload alarm
Thermal overload trips
CB status discrepancy
Trip circuit alarm
Broken conductor protection trips
CB failure
CB Close
Auxiliary timer1 trips
Auxiliary timer2 trips
=1 when active setting group is group 2
Trip circuit supervision block operates
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Page (FT) 3-63
(FT) 3 User Guide MENUS
Input 5
Equ A
Equ B
Equ C
Equ D
Equ E
Equ F
TEXT
Equ G
Equ H
Prgm IT 1
Prgm IT 2
TEXT in HMI
Input 5
Equ A
Equ B
Equ C
Equ D
Equ E
Equ F
Equ G
Equ H
I-Trip1
I-Trip2
Prgm IT 3
Prgm IT 4
I-Trip3
I-Trip4
CTS Local Alarm CTS L
CTS Remote Alarm CTS R
CTS Block
CTS Restrain
Convention Mode
CDiff Disabled
CTS Blk
CTS Res
Conv Mod
Diff Esc
Information
Input 5
Logic equation A signal
Logic equation B signal
Logic equation C signal
Logic equation D signal
Logic equation E signal
Logic equation F signal
Logic equation G signal
Logic equation H signal
Programmable inter-trip signal 1
Programmable inter-trip signal 2
Programmable inter-trip signal 3
Programmable inter-trip signal 4
CT fail alarm local
CT fail alarm remote
CT fail block relevant protections
CT fail restraint differential protection
Protection communication in convention mode
Current differential protection is disabled
Example of Equation A settings for P521
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the Logic Equations menu, press
, then scroll
to reach the desired submenu.
Logic Equations
Equation A.00
= Null
Heading of Logic Equations submenu.
To access the Logic Equations submenus, press
then scroll using
to reach the relevant Equation submenu.
Heading of Equation A submenu
To navigate within the submenu, press
. To access the relevant operand submenu, scroll using
and
. To modify the setting, press
. Use
,
,
,
to scroll and set available selections. Press
to confirm the selection.
Setting choice: =, NOT
Setting choice: as in Table
Equation A.01
OR Null
Setting choice: OR, OR NOT, AND, AND NOT
Setting Choice: as in Table
Equation A.02
OR Null
Equation A.03
OR Null
Equation A.04
OR Null
Equation A.05
OR Null
Setting choice: OR, OR NOT, AND, AND NOT
Setting Choice: as in Table
Setting choice: OR, OR NOT, AND, AND NOT
Setting Choice: as in Table
Setting choice: OR, OR NOT, AND, AND NOT
Setting Choice: as in Table
Setting choice: OR, OR NOT, AND, AND NOT
Setting Choice: as in Table
Page (FT) 3-64 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS (FT) 3 User Guide
3.5.7.15
P521/EN FT/B93
Equation A.06
OR Null
Equation A.07
OR Null
Equation A.08
OR Null
Equation A.09
OR Null
Equation A.10
OR Null
Equation A.11
OR Null
Equation A.12
OR Null
Equation A.13
OR Null
Equation A.14
OR Null
Equation A.15
OR Null
Setting choice: OR, OR NOT, AND, AND NOT
Setting Choice: as in Table
Setting choice: OR, OR NOT, AND, AND NOT
Setting Choice: as in Table
Setting choice: OR, OR NOT, AND, AND NOT
Setting Choice: as in Table
Setting choice: OR, OR NOT, AND, AND NOT
Setting Choice: as in Table
Setting choice: OR, OR NOT, AND, AND NOT
Setting Choice: as in Table
Setting choice: OR, OR NOT, AND, AND NOT
Setting Choice: as in Table
Setting choice: OR, OR NOT, AND, AND NOT
Setting Choice: as in Table
Setting choice: OR, OR NOT, AND, AND NOT
Setting Choice: as in Table
Setting choice: OR, OR NOT, AND, AND NOT
Setting Choice: as in Table
Setting choice: OR, OR NOT, AND, AND NOT
Setting Choice: as in Table
Program. I-Trip Sub menu
This sub menu makes it possible to assign functions to any of the 4 inter-trip commands, to initiate an inter-trip to the remote relay without additional wiring of logic inputs or output relays.
The available selections are shown in the following table:
Label abstract tI> tI>> tI>>> tI>>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> tIe>>>> tI< tI2> tI2>>
CB Fail
Broken Cond. tAux1 tAux2
Label signification
Phase overcurrent stage 1 trips
Phase overcurrent stage 2 trips
Phase overcurrent stage 3 trips
Phase overcurrent stage 4 trips
Earth overcurrent stage 1 trips
Earth overcurrent stage 2 trips
Earth overcurrent stage 3 trips
Earth overcurrent stage 4 trips
Undercurrent trips
Negative sequence overcurrent stage 1 trips
Negative sequence overcurrent stage 2 trips
CB fail operates
Broken conductor trips
Auxiliary timer 1 trips
Auxiliary timer 2 trips
Page (FT) 3-65
(FT) 3 User Guide
3.5.7.16
MENUS
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Equ A
Equ B
Equ C
Equ D
Equ E
Equ F
Equ G
Equ H
Label abstract Label signification
Logic input 1
Logic input 2
Logic input 3
Logic input 4
Logic input 5
Logic equation A operates
Logic equation B operates
Logic equation C operates
Logic equation D operates
Logic equation E operates
Logic equation F operates
Logic equation G operates
Logic equation H operates
In addition to the input allocation the user can specify the required dwell time for programmable inter-trip command 1 to 4.
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the Program. I-Trip Functions menu, press
, followed by
16 times.
Program. I-Trip Heading of the Program. I-Trip sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press
.
Program. I-Trip1
Program. I-Trip2
Program. I-Trip3
Program. I-Trip4
Heading of the Program. I-Trip 1 sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press
.
Heading of the Program. I-Trip 2 sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press
.
Heading of the Program. I-Trip 3 sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press
.
Dwell Timer
100ms
Heading of the Program. I-Trip 4 sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press
.
Set the dwell timer for the inter-trip command.
To adjust the time, press
. The dwell time is adjustable from 0.1s to 5s in steps of 0.05s. Validate your choice using
CT Supervision Sub Menu
The CT Supervision sub menu makes it possible to enable the current transformer supervision function and the various settings associated with this function.
AUTOMAT. CTRL
CT Supervision
Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the CT Supervision menu, press
,
, 6 times,
, followed by
18 times.
Heading of the CB Supervision sub menu.
To gain access to the sub menu points, press
.
Page (FT) 3-66 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
CTS?
No
CTS Reset mode
Manual
CTS Reset
RST = [C]
CTS I1>
0.1IN
CTS I2/I1>
5%
CTS I2/I1>>
40%
CTS TIME DLY
5.0s
CTS Restrain ?
No
(FT) 3 User Guide
Enables / Disables the current transformer supervision function. Select Yes or No. If the user selects (Yes), the function is active. If the user selects (No) the CT supervision is disabled.
Selects the CTS reset mode. Select from Manual or Auto using
or
and validate your choice using
.
To clear the CTS alarm, press
.
Selects the CTS positive current threshold for local current. Select from 0.05In to 4In in steps of 0.01In using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Selects the CTS low positive/negative current ratio threshold. Select from 5% to 100% in steps of 5% using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Selects the CTS high positive/negative current ratio threshold. Select from 5% to 100% in steps of 5% using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Selects the time delay for raising CTS alarm. Select from
0 to 10s in steps of 0.01s using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Enables / Disables the restraint function of current differential protection when a CT failure is detected.
Select Yes or No by press
, followed by
or
and validate your choice using
.
P521/EN FT/B93 Page (FT) 3-67
(FT) 3 User Guide
3.5.8
3.5.8.1
3.5.8.2
Page (FT) 3-68
MENUS
Records Menu
The RECORDS menu makes it possible to read the various records generated by the relay The various sub menus are:
•
•
CB Monitoring
Fault Record
•
•
Instantaneous
Disturb Record
•
•
Time Peak Value
Rolling Demand
To gain access to the RECORDING menu, press
then
7 times.
CB Monitoring Sub Menu
The CB Monitoring sub menu makes possible to read and clear the parameters and measurements associated to this function.
RECORDS
CB Monitoring
CB Opening Time
95 ms
CB Closing Time
115 ms
CB Operations
RST = [C] 5489
Amps (n)
RST = [C]
Amps (n) IA
4 E4
Amps (n) IB
2 E4
Amps (n) IC
8 E3
Heading of the RECORD Menu. To gain access to the
CB Monitoring menu, press
,
, 7 times followed by
.
Heading the CB Monitoring sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press
.
Displays the most recent circuit breaker opening time in ms.
Displays the most recent circuit breaker closing time in ms.
Displays the number of opening commands executed by the circuit breaker. To reset these values, press
.
Allows the user to clear the memorized summation of interrupted currents. All 3 phase currents are clear simultaneously. To clear these values, press
.
Displays the summation of the Amps (or Amps squared) interrupted by the A phase circuit breaker.
Displays the summation of the Amps (or Amps squared) interrupted by the B phase circuit breaker.
Displays the summation of the Amps (or Amps squared) interrupted by the C phase circuit breaker.
Fault Record Sub Menu
The FAULT RECORD sub menu makes it possible to read the various parameters and measurements for each of the five faults stored in the MiCOM P521.
RECORD
Heading of the RECORD Menu. To gain access to the
Fault Record menu, press
,
, 7 times,
, followed by
once.
P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
Fault Record
Record Number
2
Fault Time
12:05:23:42
Fault Date
12/11/99
Active Set Group
1
Faulted Phase
Phase A
Fault Flags
I>>
Magnitude
1200 A
IA Magnitude
1200 A
IB Magnitude
500 A
IC Magnitude
480 A
IN Magnitude
103 A
IA Differential
1200 A
IB Differential
500 A
IC Differential
480 A
Max I Bias
103 A
Chann 1 Status
Comms OK
(FT) 3 User Guide
Heading of the Fault Record sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press
.
Selection of the fault record number (by selecting from 1 to 25) to be displayed. To select the fault record number, press
then using
or
enter the required number.
Validate your choice using the key
.
Displays the time of the fault record. The format of the time is HH:MM:SS:ms. In this example the fault appeared at 12 hundred hours, 05 minutes, 23 seconds and 420 ms.
Displays the date of the fault record. The format of the date is DD/MM/YY. In this example, the fault appeared on 12 November 1999.
Displays the active setting group (1 or 2 or 3 or 4).
Displays the faulty phase / phases for the chosen fault record. The list of possibilities are: NONE, Phase A, B, C,
EARTH, AB, AC, BC, or ABC.
Displays the origin of the fault that has generated the trip order.
Display the magnitude of the fault current. This value is the 50/60 Hz amplitude.
Displays the magnitude of the A phase current at the time of the fault.
Displays the magnitude of the B phase current at the time of the fault.
Displays the magnitude of the C phase current at the time of the fault.
Displays the magnitude of the earth fault current at the time of the fault.
Displays the magnitude of the A phase differential current at the time of the fault.
Displays the magnitude of the B phase differential current at the time of the fault.
Displays the magnitude of the C phase differential current at the time of the fault.
Displays the largest bias current of the three phases at the time of the fault.
Displays the status of the protection comms channel.
Relays display either “Comms OK” or Comms Fail”.
P521/EN FT/B93 Page (FT) 3-69
(FT) 3 User Guide
3.5.8.3
3.5.8.4
MENUS
Instantaneous Sub Menu
The INSTANTANEOUS sub menu makes is possible to read the various parameters for each of the last five “starts”.
RECORDS
Instantaneous
Number
Time
Date
5
13:07:15:53
09/01/01
Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. To gain access to the CB Monitoring menu, press
,
,
, 7 times,
, followed by
twice.
Heading of the Instantaneous sub menu.
To gain access to the sub menu points, press
.
Selection of the Instantaneous record number (by selecting either 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5) to be displayed. To select the Instantaneous record number, press
then using
or
enter the required number. Validate your choice using
.
Display the time of the instantaneous record. The format is HH:MM:SS:ms. In this example the start information appeared at 13 hundred hours, 07 minutes, 15 seconds and 530 ms.
Display the date of the instantaneous record. The format is DD/MM/YY. In this example the start information appeared on 09 January 2001.
Origin
Ie>
Displays the origin of the start signal.
Length
57 ms
Trip
No
Displays the length of the start information.
Displays if a trip has occurred due to the start.
Disturbance Record Sub Menu
The DISTURBANCE sub menu makes it possible to set the various parameters and thresholds associated with this recording function.
RECORD
Disturb Record
Record Number
5
Pre-Time
100 ms
Post-Time
100 ms
Heading of the RECORD Menu. To gain access to the
Disturbance Record menu, press
,
, 7 times,
, followed by
3 times.
Heading of the Disturb Record sub menu.
To gain access to the sub menu points, press
.
Set the number of disturbance records that the relay can be stored (from 1 to 5). To set the number, press
then using
or
to input the required number.
Selection of the disturbance record pre-trigger time.
Select from 100 ms to 3s in steps of 100 ms using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Selection of the disturbance record post-trigger time.
Select from 100ms to 3s in steps of 100 ms using
or
and validate your choice using
.
WARNING: The Total Disturbance Recording Time is 3, 5, 7 or 9 seconds (Pre-Time + Post-Time).
Page (FT) 3-70 P521/EN FT/B93
MENUS
3.5.8.5
3.5.8.6
(FT) 3 User Guide
Disturb Rec Trig
ON INST.
Selects the start criteria for the disturbance recorder function. Select between ON INST. (start from instantaneous thresholds) or ON Trip (start from trip conditions) using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Time Peak Value Sub Menu
The Time Peak Value sub menu makes it possible to set parameters associated with the
Peak and Average values displayed in the Measurements menu.
RECORD
Time Peak Value
Time Window
5 mn
Heading of the RECORD Menu. To gain access to the
Time Peak Value menu, press
,
, 7 times,
, followed by
4 times.
Heading of the Time Peak Value sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press
.
Selects the length of the time window over which the peak and average values are stored. Select from either 5mn,
10mn, 15mn, 30mn, or 60mn using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Rolling Demand Sub Menu
The Rolling Demand sub menu makes it possible to set the rolling sub-period and the number of the sub-periods for the calculation of the 3 phase Rolling Average and Peak
Demand values, available in the Measurement menu.
RECORDS
Rolling Demand
Sub period
5 mn
Heading of the RECORD Menu. To gain access to the
Rolling Demand menu, press
,
, 7 times,
, followed by
5 times.
Heading of the Rolling Demand sub menu. To gain access to the sub menu points, press
.
Selects the duration of the sub-period during over which the rolling average values are calculated. Select from either 5mn, 10mn, 15mn, 30mn, or 60mn using
or
and validate your choice using
.
Num of Sub Per
1
Selects the number of sub-periods for the calculation of the average of the average values.
P521/EN FT/B93 Page (FT) 3-71
(FT) 3 User Guide
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
WIRING
WIRING
The connection diagrams for the MiCOM P521 are provided in section P521/EN CO of this Technical Guide.
Auxiliary Supply
The auxiliary supply of the MiCOM P521 relay can be either AC or DC (the ranges are
24-250 Vdc, 48-250 Vdc or 48-240 Vac 50-60 Hz). The auxiliary voltage range is specified on the relay data plate under the upper flap on the front plate. Supply must only be connected to terminals 33 (+ve) and 34 (-ve).
Current Measurement Inputs
The MiCOM P521 relay has eight current inputs. The nominal current value of these measuring inputs is either 1 Ampere or 5 Amperes (labeled in the connection diagrams).
For the same relay the user can mix the 1 and 5 Ampere inputs between phases and earth.
Note All phases must have the same rated current value (1 or 5 Amps).
Logic Inputs
The MiCOM P521 relay has 5 opto-isolated logic inputs. Each input is electrically isolated from all other inputs.
Refer to the Technical Data (P521_EN_TD) for the voltage range of the inputs.
The automation operations and signaling functions to which these logic inputs respond can be selected from the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu.
Note Do not forget to select in the CONFIGURATION/Configuration Inputs Menu if the voltage input is "AC" or "DC".
Output Relays
Nine output relays are available on MiCOM P521.
The first output relay (RL0) is dedicated to indicate a relay fault (Watchdog). It is normally closed (NC) and cannot be configured.
Relay RL1 is the main trip output. The trip functions which will operate RL1 are selected in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Trip Commands menu.
RL2 to RL8 are freely programmable. The protection and control functions to which these relays respond can be selected by means of the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.
RL1 and RL2 have changeover contacts (1 common, 1 normally open contact, 1 normally closed contact). The other relays (RL3 to RL8) are of the normally open (NO) type.
Page (FT) 3-72 P521/EN FT/B93
WIRING
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
(FT) 3 User Guide
Communication
EIA(RS)485 Rear Communication Port
All MiCOM relays have an EIA(RS)485 rear communication port.
The connection of communications is allocated to terminals 29-30-31-32, shown in the connection diagrams in section P521/EN CO of this Technical Guide.
EIA(RS)232 Front Communication Port
MiCOM P521 relay provides the user with an EIA(RS)232 communication port. This link is dedicated to the MiCOM Setting software MiCOM S1.
A standard EIA(RS)232 shielded cable should be used to connect the P521 front
EIA(RS)232 port to a PC. The connecter on the P521 side must be male in gender.
The wiring of this EIA(RS)232 cable must follow the following scheme.
P521/EN FT/B93
Figure 4 - EIA(RS)232 front port communication cable wiring
Page (FT) 3-73
(FT) 3 User Guide
Notes:
WIRING
Page (FT) 3-74 P521/EN FT/B93
MiCOM P521 (HI) 4 Menu Content Tables
P521/EN HI/Ca4
MENU CONTENT TABLES
CHAPTER 4
Page (HI) 4-1
(HI) 4 Menu Content Tables
Date:
Software version:
Hardware Suffix:
Connection diagram:
August 2017
13
B
10P52101
MiCOM P521
Page (HI) 4-2 P521/EN HI/Ca4
Contents (HI) 4 Menu Content Tables
CONTENTS
1 P521 – V13 Software Menu Content
FIGURES
Page (HI) 4-
5
Figure 1 - OP Parameters, Orders and Configuration menu
Figure 2 - Configuration menu (continued)
Figure 3 - Configuration menu (continued) and Measurements menu
Figure 4 - Measurements menu (continued) and Communication menu
Figure 6 - Protection menu (continued)
Figure 7 - Protection menu (continued) and Automatic Control menu
Figure 8 - Automatic Control menu (continued)
Figure 9 - Automatic Control menu (continued)
Figure 10 - Automatic Control menu (continued)
Figure 12 - Records menu (continued)
Page (HI) 4
P521/EN HI/Ca4 Page (HI) 4-3
(HI) 4 Menu Content Tables
Notes:
Figures
Page (HI) 4-4 P521/EN HI/Ca4
P521 – V13 SOFTWARE MENU CONTENT (HI) 4 Menu Content Tables
1
OP
PARAMETERS
Password
****
Language =
ENGLISH
P521 – V13 SOFTWARE MENU CONTENT
DEFAULT DISPLAY
A = 1245 A
ORDERS
CONFIGURATION
General Reset
Yes/No
Display
Default Display
RMS
A
Phase A Text
L1
Phase B Text
L2
Phase C Text
L3
E/Gnd Text
E
CT Ratios
Line CT primary
1000
Line CT sec
5
E/Gnd CT primary
1000
E/Gnd CT sec
5
CT Correct Ratio
1.0
Vectorial Comp.
Off
Relay 87654321
Status 01011101
No
Figure 1 - OP Parameters, Orders and Configuration menu
P4972ENa
P521/EN HI/Ca4 Page (HI) 4-5
(HI) 4 Menu Content Tables P521 – V13 SOFTWARE MENU CONTENT
DEFAULT DISPLAY
A = 1245 A
CONFIGURATION
LED 5/6/7/8 Group Select
Led
diff diff Fail
B/up Prot.
Comms Fail
Direct I-Trip
C-Diff I-Trip t t t t t t
PIT
>
>>
>>>
>>>>
>
>>
>>>
>>>> t
t e> e>>
e>>>
e>>>>
e> e>>
e>>> e>>>>
Therm Trip
Brkn. Cond.
t t
CB Fail
2>
2>>
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5 tAux 1 tAux 2
CB Alarm
Equation A-H
Prgm IT 1-4
CTS Local
CTS Remote
CTS Block
CTS Restrain
Convention Mode
Cdiff Disabled
Change Group
Input = EDGE
Setting Group
1
Figure 2 - Configuration menu (continued)
Alarms
Inst. Self-reset?
No
Comm.Fail-reset?
No
Alarm?
Yes
Configuration
Inputs
Inputs 54321
11111
Voltage Input =
DC
P4973ENa
Page (HI) 4-6 P521/EN HI/Ca4
P521 – V13 SOFTWARE MENU CONTENT (HI) 4 Menu Content Tables
DEFAULT DISPLAY
A = 1245 A
CONFIGURATION MEASUREMENTS
Phase Rotation
Current Diff Current/General
Phase Rotation
A-B-C
Remote
A
640.10A
Remote
B
629.00A
Remote
C
634.50A
Differential
A
0A
Differential
B
0A
Differential
C
0A
Bias
A
640.10A
Bias
B
629.00A
Bias
C
634.50A
Local Angle
A-B
Local Angle
B-C
Local Angle
C-A
120
120
120 o o o
Diff Angle A
(L-R)
Diff Angle B
(L-R)
0
1 o o
Diff Angle C
(L-R) 2 o
Figure 3 - Configuration menu (continued) and Measurements menu
A
640.10A
B
629.00A
C
634.50A
N
3.15A
1 =
103A
2 =
50A
RATIO
2/
I
50%
N - fn
RST = [C] 0.0A
Thermal
RST = [C] 67%
Max & Average
RST = [C]
Max
A RMS
127.36A
Max
B RMS
156.28A
Max
C RMS
139.01A
Average
A RMS
98.25A
Average
B RMS
97.88A
Average
C RMS
99.02A
MAX. SUBPERIOD
RST = [C]
MAX. SUBPERIOD
A RMS = 245A
MAX. SUBPERIOD
B RMS = 240A
MAX. SUBPERIOD
C RMS = 250A
ROLLING AVERAGE
RST = [C]
ROLLING AVERAGE
I A RMS = 0.00A
ROLLING AVERAGE
I B RMS = 0.00A
ROLLING AVERAGE
I C RMS = 0.00A
P4974ENa
P521/EN HI/Ca4 Page (HI) 4-7
(HI) 4 Menu Content Tables
DEFAULT DISPLAY
A = 1245A
P521 – V13 SOFTWARE MENU CONTENT
Note:
Menu for MODBUS protocol only. For menus on other protocols see User
Guide (P521/EN FT)
P4975ENa
Figure 4 - Measurements menu (continued) and Communication menu
Page (HI) 4-8 P521/EN HI/Ca4
P521 – V13 SOFTWARE MENU CONTENT
DEFAULT DISPLAY
(HI) 4 Menu Content Tables
Current Diff
s1
n
s2
2.0
PIT
PIT
PIT
Threshold
diff Delay Type t t
diff
diff Curve
IEC S
Diff Time Dial
>
>
1.0
n
> Delay Type
IEC S
>>>
>>> t t
>>>
>>>>
10
10
>>
10
>> Delay Type
P4976ENa
Figure 5 - Protection menu
P521/EN HI/Ca4 Page (HI) 4-9
(HI) 4 Menu Content Tables
DEFAULT DISPLAY
A = 1245 A
PROTECTION
G1/G2/G3/G4
P521 – V13 SOFTWARE MENU CONTENT
e >
e >
0.05
en
e > Delay Type
DMT
EC S
e > Tms
2 >
2 >
0.1
n
2 > Delay Type
DMT
2 > Curve
EC S
Therm OL
>
0.1
n
e >>
e >>
1.0
en
e >> Delay Type t t
e >>
e >>>
e >>>
1.0
n
2>>
t t
2>>
0.5
n
t t
e >>>>
1.0
Figure 6 - Protection menu (continued)
P4977ENa
Page (HI) 4-10 P521/EN HI/Ca4
P521 – V13 SOFTWARE MENU CONTENT (HI) 4 Menu Content Tables
DEFAULT DISPLAY
A = 1245 A
PROTECTION
G1/G2/G3/G4
AUTOMAT. CTRL.
[37] Under Current Commissioning Trip Commands
<
< t
<
Yes
0.2
n
200ms
Commissioning
No
LED Test
Disable Relays
Yes
Trip
Test
No
87654321
00000000
Trip
diff
Yes
Direct
-Trip
Yes
C Diff
-Trip
Yes
P
T
Yes
Trip t
>
Yes
Trip t
e >>>
Yes
Trip t
e >>>>
Yes
Trip t
<
Yes
Trip t
2 >
Yes
Trip t
2 >>
Yes
Contact Test
No
Disable CB Stats:
No
Trip t
>>
Yes
Trip Thermal
Yes
Loopback Test
Off
Trip t
>>>
Yes
Trip Brkn. Cond.
Yes
Diff Trip Flags
Trip:
Trip t
>>>>
Yes
Trip tAux1
Yes
Trip t
e > Trip tAux2
Yes Yes
Trip t
e >>
Yes
Trip TCS Block
Yes
P4978ENa
Figure 7 - Protection menu (continued) and Automatic Control menu
Trip Equ A-H
Yes
P521/EN HI/Ca4 Page (HI) 4-11
(HI) 4 Menu Content Tables P521 – V13 SOFTWARE MENU CONTENT
DEFAULT DISPLAY
A = 1245 A
AUTOMAT. CTRL.
Latch Functions
Latch
diff
No
Latch Direct
-Trip
No
Latch C Diff
-Trip
No
Latch P
T
No
Latch t
>
No
Latch t
>>
No
Latch t
>>>
No
Latch t
>>>>
No
Latch t
e >
No
Latch t
e >>
No
P4979ENa
Latch t
e >>>
No
Latch t
e >>>>
No
Latch t
<
No
Latch t
2 >
No
Latch t
2 >>
No
Latch Thermal
No
Latch Brkn. Cond.
No
Latch tAux1
No
Latch tAux2
No
Latch TCS Block
No
Latch Equ A-H
Yes
Blocking Logic 1/2
Block
diff
No
Block t
>
No
Block t
>>
No
Block t
>>>
No
Block t
>>>>
No
Block t
e >
No
Block t
e >>
No
Block t
e >>>
No
Block t
e >>>>
No
Block t
2 >
No
Block t
2 >>
No
Block Thermal
No
Block Brkn. Cond.
No
Block tAux1
No
Block tAux2
No
Block Equation A-H
No
Logic Select 1/2
Sel 1 t
>>
No
Sel 1 t
>>>
No
Sel 1 t
>>>>
No
Sel 1 t
e>>
No
Sel 1 t
e>>>
No
Sel 1 t
e>>>>
No tSel 1
0ms
Output Relays
Trip 8765432
1000100
diff
Back-up Prot . t
>>>>
>>>>
e> t
e>
e>> t
e>>
e>>> t
e>>>
Comms Fail
Direct
-T rip
-Trip C-diff
P
T
> t
>
>> t
>>
>>> t
>>>
e>>>> t
e>>>> t
< t
2 > t
2 >>
Therm Alarm
Therm Trip
CB Alarm
52 Fail
Brkn. Cond.
CB Fail
CB Close tAux1 tAux2
Active Group
TCS Block
Input 1-5
Equ A-H
Prgm I-Trip
1-4
CTS Local
CTS Remote
CTS Block
CTS Res.
Mode
Convent
Cdiff Disable
Figure 8 - Automatic Control menu (continued)
Page (HI) 4-12 P521/EN HI/Ca4
P521 – V13 SOFTWARE MENU CONTENT
DEFAULT DISPLAY
A = 1245 A
AUTOMAT. CTRL.
(HI) 4 Menu Content Tables
Figure 9 - Automatic Control menu (continued)
None
Unlatch
52a
52b
CB Fail
Brkn. Cond.
Brkn. Cond. Time tBC 1ms
Ratio
2/
1
Change Set
Permiss
Direct
T
Comms RST
Log Trip
Log Close
TCS Block
GPS Sync
Reset LED
Inhibit CTS
P4980ENa
P521/EN HI/Ca4 Page (HI) 4-13
(HI) 4 Menu Content Tables
DEFAULT DISPLAY
A = 1245 A
P521 – V13 SOFTWARE MENU CONTENT
CB Fail CB Supervision
Cold Load PU
t t
Cold Load PU
>
t t
Cold Load PU
>>
t t
Cold Load PU
>>>
t t
Cold Load PU
>>>>
t t
Cold Load PU
e >
t t
Cold Load PU
e >>
CB Fail
No
< =
0.1
n
CB Fail Time tBF 100ms
Block
>
No
Block
e >
No
TC Supervision
Yes tTrip Circuit tSup 200ms
CB Open S ’vision
Yes
CB Open Time
50ms
CB Close S ’vision
Yes
CB Close Time t t
Cold Load PU
e >>>
t t
Cold Load PU
e >>>>
t t
Cold Load PU
2 >
t t
Cold Load PU
2 >>
Cold Load PU
Figure 10 - Automatic Control menu (continued)
CB Open Alarm
Yes
CB Open NB =
0
Amps (n)
Yes
Amps (n)
1000 E6 n t Open Pulse
100ms
1 t Close Pulse
100ms
CB Man Trip Dly
0ms
CB Man Close Dly
0ms
Logic Equations
Equation A-H
Equation A.00-15
= NULL
T Operate =
0ms
T Reset =
0ms
P4981ENa
Page (HI) 4-14 P521/EN HI/Ca4
P521 – V13 SOFTWARE MENU CONTENT (HI) 4 Menu Content Tables
DEFAULT DISPLAY
A = 1245 A
RECORDS
Program. I-Trip
Program. I-Trip 1-4 tl> tl>> tl>>> tl>>>> tle> tle>> tle>>> tle>>>>
Therm Trip tl< tl2< tl2>>
CB Fail
Brkn. Cond.
tAux1 tAux2
Input 1-5
Equ A-H
Dwell Timer
5.0s
CT Supervision
CTS ?
No
CTS Reset Mode
Manual
CTS Reset
RST=[C]
CTS I1>
0.1 IN
CTS I2/I1>
10%
CTS I2/I1>>
40%
CTS TIME DLY
5.0 s
CTS Restrain?
No
CB Monitoring
CB Opening Time
95ms
CB Closing Time
115ms
CB Operations
RST = [C] 5489
Amps(n)
RST = [C]
Amps (n)
A
4E4
Amps (n)
B
2E4
Amps (n)
C
8E3
P4982ENa
Figure 11 - Records menu
Fault Record
Record Number
2
Fault Time
12 : 05 : 23 : 42
Fault Date
12/11/99
Active Set Group
1
Faulted Phase
Phase A
Fault Flags
>>
Magnitude
1200A
A Magnitude
1200A
B Magnitude
500A
C Magnitude
480A
N Magnitude
103A
A Differential
1200A
B Differential
500A
C Differential
480A
Max
Bias
103A
Chann 1 Status
Comms OK
P521/EN HI/Ca4 Page (HI) 4-15
(HI) 4 Menu Content Tables P521 – V13 SOFTWARE MENU CONTENT
DEFAULT DISPLAY
A = 1245 A
RECORDS
Instantaneous Disturb Record
Number
Time
12 : 05 : 23 : 42
Date
5
09/01/01
Origin
e >
Length
57ms
Record Number
Pre-time
100ms
Disturb Rec Trig
On Inst
Trip
No
Figure 12 - Records menu (continued)
Time Peak Value
Time Window
5mn
Rolling Demand
Sub Period
5mn
Num of Sub Per
1
P4983ENa
Page (HI) 4-16 P521/EN HI/Ca4
MiCOM P521 (TD) 5 Technical Data
P521/EN TD/Ca4
TECHNICAL DATA
CHAPTER 5
Page (TD) 5-1
(TD) 5 Technical Data
Date:
Software version:
Hardware Suffix:
Connection diagram:
August 2017
13
B
10P52101
MiCOM P521
Page (TD) 5-2 P521/EN TD/Ca4
Contents (TD) 5 Technical Data
CONTENTS
1 Protection Functions
Current Differential Protection
Neutral/Ground/Earth Overcurrent Protection
Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection
2 Automation Functions
Circuit Breaker Control and Monitoring
3 Recording Functions
4 Relay Communications 14
5 Protection Communications
15
Maximum Allowable Propagation Delay 15
Maximum Propagation Delay Difference between Send and Receive Communications
6 Inputs and Outputs
7 Accuracy
8 CT Data
9 High Voltage Withstand
18
19
20
16
Page (TD) 5-
7
12
13
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-3
(TD) 5 Technical Data
10 Electrical Environment
Auxiliary Supply Tests, DC Interruption, etc.
AC Voltage Dips and Short Interruptions
AC Voltage Short Interruptions
Radiated Immunity from Digital Radio Telephones
Power Frequency Magnetic Field
Damped Oscillatory Magnetic Field Immunity
Surge Withstand Capability (SWC)
11 Atmospheric Environment
12 Mechanical Environment
13 EC EMC Compliance
14 Ec LVD Compliance
Page (TD) 5-4
Contents
21
26
27
29
30
P521/EN TD/Ca4
Figures
15 Battery Life
16 Frequency Response
17 Curves
Pick-up IDMT Mathematical Formula
Reset Timer IDMT Mathematical Formula
FIGURES
Figure 3 - Short Time Inverse (IEC)
Figure 4 - Standard Inverse (IEC)
Figure 6 - Extremely Inverse (IEC)
Figure 7 - Long Time Inverse (UK)
Figure 9 - ANSI/IEEE & CO curves
Figure 10 - Short Time Inverse (CO2)
Figure 11 - Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE)
Figure 13 - Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE)
Figure 14 - Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE)
Figure 16 - Thermal Overload Tripping curve
(TD) 5 Technical Data
31
32
33
Page (TD) 5-
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-5
(TD) 5 Technical Data
TABLES
Table 1 - Inverse curve factors
Table 2 - Laborelec curve factors
Table 3 - Inverse curve factors
Tables
Page (TD) 5-
Page (TD) 5-6 P521/EN TD/Ca4
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
1
1.1
(TD) 5 Technical Data
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
Current Differential Protection
−
−
Current
Characteristic
Fundamental only
Ι
Standard two slope s1 0.1 Ι n to 2.0 Ι n, steps of 0.05 Ι n
Default value 0.2 Ι n (see note)
Ι s2 1.0 Ι n to 30.0 Ι n, steps of 0.05 Ι n
Default value 2.0 Ι n (see note) k1 0% to 150%, steps of 5%
Default value 30% (see note) k2 30% to 150%, steps of 5%
Default value 150% (see note)
Note: Use of default setting values is recommended.
−
−
Hysteresis
Instantaneous Time
75%
< 45 ms + signaling delays *
Note: Valid for X/R ratios up to 120 and fault levels between 0.5 In and 25
In
< 60 ms + signaling delays * − Drop-off Time
Note: Valid for X/R ratios up to 120 and fault levels between 0.5 In and 25
In
−
−
Time Delays:
DMT
IDMT Curves:
Time Multiplier Setting (TMS)
Time Dial Setting (TD)
IDMT Curve Tolerance
Intertrip Operating Times
Permissive Intertrip Time
Direct Intertrip Time
Current Differential Intertrip Time
0 s to 150 s, steps of 0.01 s
IEC:
Short Time Inverse (IEC),
Standard Inverse (IEC),
Very Inverse (IEC),
Extremely Inverse (IEC),
Long Time Inverse (UK).
0.025 to 1.5, steps of 0.025
IEEE/ANSI:
Short Time Inverse (CO2),
Moderately Inverse (ANSI),
Inverse (CO8),
Very Inverse (ANSI),
Extremely Inverse (ANSI).
0.1 to 100, steps of 0.1
± 2% (or 50 ms whichever is greater) at greater than 2
Ι s1.
≤ 15 ms + PIT Time + signaling delay *
≤ 15 ms + signaling delay *
≤ 5 ms + signaling delay *
* Refer to Accuracy section for calculation of signaling delays.
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-7
(TD) 5 Technical Data
1.2
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Phase Overcurrent Protection
Current
Current Range
Thresholds
Fundamental only
0.1 to 40 x rated current, steps of 0.01 Ι n
4 Independent ( Ι >, Ι >>, Ι >>>, Ι >>>>)
0.1 Ι n to 25 Ι n (see note)
Ι >>
Ι >>>
Ι >>>>
0.5 Ι n to 40 Ι n (see note)
0.5 Ι n to 40 Ι n
0.5 Ι n to 40 Ι n
Note: When Ι > or Ι >> is associated with an IDMT curve, the maximum setting recommended should be 2.0 Ι n.
Hysteresis
Instantaneous Time
Drop-off Time
Time Delays:
DMT
IDMT Curves:
Time Multiplier Setting (TMS)
Time Dial Setting (TD)
RI:
K Factor Setting (K)
IDMT Curve Tolerance
Reset Time
IEEE Time Delay:
RTMS
DMT
IEC Time Delay:
DMT
Transient Overreach
Stages 1 & 2 ( Ι > & Ι >>)
Stages 3 & 4 ( Ι >>> & Ι >>>>)
95%
< 40 ms
< 30 ms
(t Ι >, t Ι >>, t Ι >>>, t Ι >>>>)
0 s to 150 s, steps of 0.01 s
IEC:
Short Time Inverse (IEC),
Standard Inverse (IEC),
Very Inverse (IEC),
Extremely Inverse (IEC),
Long Time Inverse (UK).
0.025 to 1.5, steps of 0.025
IEEE/ANSI:
Short Time Inverse (CO2),
Moderately Inverse (ANSI),
Inverse (CO8),
Very Inverse (ANSI),
Extremely Inverse (ANSI).
0.1 to 100, steps of 0.1
Electromechanical Type
0.1 to 10, steps of 0.005
± 2% (or 50 ms whichever is greater) at >2 Ι n
0.025 to 3.2, steps of 0.025
0.04 s to 100 s, steps of 0.01 s
0.04 s to 100 s, steps of 0.01 s
< 4% for X/R ratios up to 90
< 12% for X/R ratios up to 90
Page (TD) 5-8 P521/EN TD/Ca4
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
1.3
(TD) 5 Technical Data
−
−
−
−
−
Neutral/Ground/Earth Overcurrent Protection
−
−
−
Current
Current Ranges
Thresholds:
Range:
Range:
Range:
Fundamental only
0.002 to 1 x rated current, steps of 0.001 Ι en
0.01 to 8 x rated current, steps of 0.005 Ι en
0.1 to 40 x rated current, steps of 0.005 Ι en
4 Independent ( Ι e>, Ι e>>, Ι e>>>, Ι e>>>>)
0.002 to 1 x Ι en
Ι e> 0.002 Ι en to 1 Ι en (see note 1)
Ι e>> 0.002 Ι en to 1 Ι en (see note 1)
Ι e>>> 0.002 Ι en to 1 Ι en
Ι e>>>> 0.002 Ι en to 1 Ι en
0.01 to 8 x Ι en
Ι e> 0.01 Ι en to 1 Ι en (see note 2)
Ι e>> 0.01 Ι en to 8 Ι en (see note 2)
Ι e>>> 0.01 Ι en to 8 Ι en
Ι e>>>> 0.01 Ι en to 8 Ι en
Ι
0.1 to 40 x Ι en e> 0.1 Ι en to 25 Ι en (see note 2)
Ι e>> 0.5 Ι en to 40 Ι en (see note 2)
Ι e>>> 0.5 Ι en to 40 Ι en
Ι e>>>> 0.5 Ι en to 40 Ι en
Note 1:
Note 2:
When Ι e> or Ι e>> is associated with an IDMT curve the maximum setting recommended should be 0.05 Ι en.
When Ι e> or Ι e>> is associated with an IDMT curve, the maximum setting recommended should be the maximum of the range / 20.
Hysteresis
Instantaneous Time
Drop-off Time
Time Delays:
DMT
IDMT Curves:
Time Multiplier Setting (TMS)
Time Dial Setting (TD)
RI:
K Factor Setting (K)
LABORELEC:
IDMT Curve Tolerance
Reset Time
IEEE Time Delay:
RTMS
DMT
IEC Time Delay:
DMT
95%
< 40 ms
< 30 ms
(t Ι e>, t Ι e>>, t Ι e>>>, t Ι e>>>>)
0 s to 150 s, steps of 0.01 s
IEC:
Short Time Inverse (IEC),
Standard Inverse (IEC),
Very Inverse (IEC),
Extremely Inverse (IEC),
Long Time Inverse (UK).
0.025 to 1.5, steps of 0.025
IEEE/ANSI:
Short Time Inverse (CO2),
Moderately Inverse (ANSI),
Inverse (CO8),
Very Inverse (ANSI),
Extremely Inverse (ANSI).
0.1 to 100, steps of 0.1
Electromechanical Type
0.1 to 10, steps of 0.005
Curves 1, 2 and 3 (0.01 to 8 Range only)
± 2% (or 50 ms whichever is greater) at >2 Ι en
0.025 to 3.2, steps of 0.025
0.04 s to 100 s, steps of 0.01 s
0.04 s to 100 s, steps of 0.01 s
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-9
(TD) 5 Technical Data
1.4
1.5
1.6
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
−
Transient Over-reach
Figures quoted are for X/R ratios up to 90
0.1 to 40 Ι n earth fault board:
Stages 1 & 2 ( Ι e> & Ι e>>)
Stages 3 & 4 ( Ι e>>> & Ι e>>>>)
0.01 to 80 Ι n earth fault board:
Stages 1 & 2 ( Ι e> & Ι e>>)
Stages 3 & 4 ( Ι e>>> & Ι e>>>>)
0.002 to 1 Ι en earth fault board:
Stages 1 & 2 ( Ι e> & Ι e>>)
Stages 3 & 4 ( Ι e>>> & Ι e>>>>)
< 4%
< 12%
< 3%
< 12%
< 2 %
< 5%
Thermal Overload Protection
−
−
−
−
−
Current
Current Threshold ( Ιθ >)
Thermal State (alarm and trip)
Constant Time (Te)
K Factor
RMS
0.1 to 3.2 x rated current, steps of 0.01
50% to 200% x θ steps of 1%
1 min to 200 mins, steps of 1 min
1 to 1.5, steps of 0.01
Undercurrent Protection
−
−
−
−
Current
Phase Current Range ( Ι <)
Time Delay (t Ι <)
Hysteresis
Fundamental only
2% to 100% x rated current, steps of 1%
0 s to 150 s, steps of 0.01 s
105%
−
−
−
Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection
−
−
−
Current
Current Range
Thresholds
Fundamental only
0.1 to 40 x rated current, steps of 0.01 Ι n
Ι
2 Independent ( Ι 2>, Ι 2>>)
2>
Ι 2>>
0.1
0.1
Ι
Ι n to 40 n to 40
Ι
Ι n (see note) n
Note:
Hysteresis
Instantaneous Time
Drop-off Time
When Ι 2> is associated with an IDMT curve the maximum setting 6 recommended should be 2 Ι n.
95%
< 40 ms
< 30 ms
Page (TD) 5-10 P521/EN TD/Ca4
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
−
−
Time Delays:
DMT
IDMT Curves:
Time Multiplier Setting (TMS)
Time Dial Setting (TD)
RI:
K Factor Setting (K)
IDMT Curve Tolerance
Reset Time
IEEE Time Delay:
RTMS
DMT
IEC Time Delay:
DMT
(TD) 5 Technical Data
(t Ι 2>, t Ι 2>>)
0 s to 150 s, steps of 0.01 s
IEC:
Short Time Inverse (IEC),
Standard Inverse (IEC),
Very Inverse (IEC),
Extremely Inverse (IEC),
Long Time Inverse (UK).
0.025 to 1.5, steps of 0.025
IEEE/ANSI:
Short Time Inverse (CO2),
Moderately Inverse (ANSI),
Inverse (CO8),
Very Inverse (ANSI),
Extremely Inverse (ANSI).
0.1 to 100, steps of 0.1
Electromechanical Type
0.1 to 10, steps of 0.005
± 2% (or 50 ms whichever is greater) at default values.
0.025 to 3.2, steps of 0.025
0.04 s to 100 s, steps of 0.01 s
0.04 s to 100 s, steps of 0.01 s
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-11
(TD) 5 Technical Data
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS
AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS
Cold Load Pickup
−
−
Range
Time Delay (tCL)
20% to 500% x nominal settings, steps of 1%
0.1 s to 3600 s, steps of 0.1 s
Auxiliary Timers
−
−
Auxiliary Timer Numbers tAux1 & tAux2 Range
−
−
−
Circuit Breaker Failure
− Undercurrent Threshold ( Ι <)
Threshold Accuracy
Threshold Hysteresis
CB Failure Time (tBF)
2 independent associated to the Logic Inputs Aux 1 and Aux2
0 s to 200 s, steps of 0.01 s
−
−
−
Broken Conductor Detection
Principle Used
Threshold
Time Delay (tBC)
Ι 2/ Ι 1
20% to 100%, steps of 1%
0 s to 14400 s, steps of 1 s
2% to 100% x rated current, step of 1% from 0.02
Ι n to 0.1 Ι n from 0.1 Ι n to 1 Ι n
: 0.006
: 2% Ι s
Ι n
Max. 0.008 Ι n or 0.95 Ι s
0.03 s to 10 s, steps of 0.01 s
Trip Circuit Supervision
− Time Value (tSUP)
−
−
Logic Selectivity
Timer Number tSel1 & tSel2 Range
0.1 s to 10 s, steps 0.05 s
−
−
−
−
−
−
Circuit Breaker Control and Monitoring
CB Opening Time (tOpen)
CB Closing Time (tClose)
CB Opening Alarm Threshold
∑ Amps Alarm Threshold
CB Trip Time Alarm Threshold
CB Close Time Alarm Threshold
0.05 s to 1 s, steps of 0.01 s
0.05 s to 1 s, steps of 0.01 s
0 to 50000 Operations
0 to 4x109, steps of 106
0.1 s to 5 s, steps of 0.1 s
0.1 s to 5 s, steps of 0.1 s
2 Independent : tSel1 and tSel2
0 to 150 s, steps of 0.01 s
Page (TD) 5-12 P521/EN TD/Ca4
RECORDING FUNCTIONS
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
(TD) 5 Technical Data
RECORDING FUNCTIONS
−
−
−
Event Recorder
Capacity
Time-Tag
Triggers
250 Events to 1 millisecond
Any selected Protection Alarm and Threshold
Logic input state change
Self test events
Setting changes
−
−
−
−
Fault Recorder
Capacity
Time-Tag
Triggers
Data Stored
−
−
−
Instantaneous Recorder
Capacity
Time-Tag
Triggers
− Data Stored
25 Faults to 1 millisecond
Any selected protection alarm and threshold
Fault date
Protection thresholds
Setting group
AC inputs measurements (RMS)
Fault magnitudes
5 Starting records (instantaneous threshold pick-up)
1 millisecond resolution
Any selected phase or earth threshold
Time and date
Origin of fault (threshold)
Duration of the instantaneous flag
Trip (Yes or No)
−
−
−
−
−
Disturbance Recorder
Capacity
Sampling Rate
Settings: Pre-Time
Post-Time
Triggers
Data Stored
5 Records of up to 3s each
32 Samples per frequency cycle
0.1 s to 3 s. steps of 0.1 s
0.1 s to 3 s. steps of 0.1 s
Any selected protection alarm and threshold
Logic input
Remote command
AC Input channels
Digital input/output states
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-13
(TD) 5 Technical Data
4
RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
−
−
RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
EIA(RS)485 Port:
Connectors
Protocols
Data Rate
EIA(RS)232 Port:
Connector
Protocol
Data Rate
Rear Port, Screened Twisted Pair
Screws or Snap-On
MODBUSTM RTU
IEC 60870-5-103
300 to 38400 Baud (Programmable)
Front Port, Screened twisted cable
Sub-D 9 pin female connector
MODBUSTM RTU
19200 Baud
Asynchronous
Page (TD) 5-14 P521/EN TD/Ca4
PROTECTION COMMUNICATIONS
5
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
(TD) 5 Technical Data
PROTECTION COMMUNICATIONS
−
−
−
−
−
EIA(RS)485 Port:
Connectors
Transmission Mode
Data Rate
EIA(RS)232 Port:
Connector
Transmission Mode
Data Rate
Fiber Port:
Connector:
Transmission Mode
Data Rate
Errored Secs
Time Available
Severe Error Secs
Time Available
Rear Port, Screened twisted pair
Full Duplex Connection
Phoenix Contact model KGG-MC 1,5/ 7
NRZ (recommended)
SDLC
9600 to 64000 Baud (Programmable)
Rear Port, Screened twisted cable
Phoenix Contact Model KGG-MC 1,5/ 7
NRZ (recommended)
SDLC
9600 to 64000 Baud (Programmable)
850 nm Multi-Mode
1300 nm Multi-Mode
1300 nm Single-Mode
ST Type Fiber Connector
NRZ
SDLC (recommended)
9600 to 64000 Baud (Programmable)
<0.02 ITU-T G.821
<0.008 ITU-T G.821
Propagation Delays
Maximum Allowable Propagation Delay
System
Frequency
50 Hz
60 Hz
9.6 kB/s
162 ms
158 ms
19.2 kB/s
94 ms
80 ms
Data Rate
56 kB/s
29 ms
24 ms
64 kB/s
29 ms
24 ms
Maximum Propagation Delay Difference between Send and Receive
Communications Paths
System
Frequency
50 Hz
60 Hz
2 ms
9.6 kB/s
1 ms
19.2 kB/s
2 ms
1 ms
Data Rate
2 ms
56 kB/s
1 ms
1 ms
64 kB/s
1 ms
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-15
(TD) 5 Technical Data INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
6
6.1
INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
−
−
−
−
−
AC Inputs
Phase Current Inputs
Earth Current Inputs
Frequency:
Nominal
Range
Current Inputs Burden:
Phase
Earth
Thermal Withstand
1 and 5 Amps by connection
1 and 5 Amps by connection
50 or 60 Hz by setting selection
Nominal ± 5 Hz
<0.025 VA (1 A)
<0.3 VA (5 A)
<0.008 VA at 0.1
Ι e (1 A)
<0.01 VA for 0.1
Ι e (5 A)
1s @ 100 x Rated Current with 400 A Maximum
2s @ 40 x Rated Current
Continuous @ 4 x Rated Current
6.2 Logic Inputs and Outputs
6.2.1 Logic Input
The logic inputs should be powered with a DC voltage, except for the A, F, T auxiliary voltage range which accepts both DC and AC voltage.
Ordering
Code
(Cortec)
A
F
T
H
V
W
Z
RELAY AUXILIARY POWER
SUPPLY
Nominal voltage range
Vx
Operating range
24 - 60 Vdc 19.2 - 76 Vdc
38.4 - 300 Vdc
38.4 - 264 Vac
LOGIC INPUT VOLTAGES
Nominal voltage range
24 - 250 Vdc
24 - 240 Vac
24 - 250 Vdc
24 - 240 Vac
Minimal polarization voltage
19.2 Vdc
19.2 Vac
19.2 Vdc
19.2 Vac
Maximum polarization current
35 mA
35 mA
Holding current after 2ms
2.3 mA
2.3 mA
48 - 250 Vdc
48 - 240 Vac
48 - 250 Vdc
48 - 240 Vac
Special EA (**)
48 - 250 Vdc
48 - 240 Vac
48 - 250 Vdc
48 - 240 Vac
48 - 250 Vdc
48 - 240 Vac
24 - 250 Vdc
48 - 240 Vac
38.4 - 300 Vdc
38.4 - 264 Vac
38.4 - 300 Vdc
38.4 - 264 Vac
38.4 - 300 Vdc
38.4 - 264 Vac
38.4 - 300 Vdc
38.4 - 264 Vac
19.2 - 300 Vdc
38.4 - 264 Vac
24 - 250 Vdc
24 - 240 Vac
129 Vdc
110 Vdc
220 Vdc
24 - 250 Vdc
24 - 240 Vac
19.2 Vdc
19.2 Vac
105 Vdc
77 Vdc
154 Vdc
19.2 Vdc
19.2 Vac
35 mA
3.0 mA @ 129 Vdc
7.3 mA @ 110 Vdc
3.4 mA @ 220 Vdc
35 mA
2.3 mA
2.3 mA
Maximum continuous withstand
300 Vdc
264 Vac
300 Vdc
264 Vac
300 Vdc
264 Vac
145 Vdc
132 Vdc
262 Vdc
300 Vdc
264 Vac
Note
Note
The Ordering options A and F (Cortec) cannot be provided for any versions of the P521 product which are later than Phase I software.
(**) Logic input recognition time for EA approval. Dedicated filtering on 24 samples (15 ms at 50 Hz).
Page (TD) 5-16 P521/EN TD/Ca4
INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
6.2.2
6.3
(TD) 5 Technical Data
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Logic Output
Type
Rating:
Make
Carry
Break
Operation Time
Mechanical Durability
Power Supply
Auxiliary Voltages, Vaux
Power Supply Variations
Ripple
DC Interruption
Burden
Dry Contact Ag CdO
30 Amps and carry for 3 s
5 Amps continuous
135 Vdc, 0.3 Amps (L/R=30 ms)
250 Vdc, 50 W resistive or 25 W inductive (L/R=40 ms)
220 Vac, 5 Amps (cos ϕ =0.6)
<7 ms
>100 000 Operations
24 – 60 Vdc
24 – 250 Vdc
48 - 250 Vdc
48 – 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz dc ± 20% ac –20%, +10%
12%
50 ms
3 W Standby + 0.4 W per Energized Relay + 10 mA per logic input
6 VA Standby + 0.4 VA per Energized Relay + 10 mA per logic input
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-17
(TD) 5 Technical Data
7
ACCURACY
ACCURACY
−
−
−
−
Protection Thresholds
Time Delay
Measurements
Additional Error Due to Frequency Variation
± 2% (5% - current differential)
± 3% for thermal overload
± 2 % with a minimum of 0.05 s
± 5% +100…200ms (I θ >: 0.15 to 3.2 In*) for thermal overload
* The maximum error can be up to 13% when I θ > is set to minimum value 0.1 In.
Typical ± 0.5% at Ι n
± f -fn where f = actual frequency fn = nominal frequency (e.g. 50/60 Hz)
− Calculation of Signaling Delay
Signaling Delay (in seconds) =
2
Integer
NB/BR
KF
Where:
BR =
NB =
Dp =
Integer
KF =
FS =
Baud rate setting (e.g. 9600, 19200, 56000, 64000)
Number of bits in the message (NRZ = 210 bits, SDLC = 204 bits)
Propagation delay of system (select zero seconds for direct fiber connected systems, or refer to modem configuration section for typical modem propagation delays)
=
1
4 . FS
Nearest whole number (rounded up)
System frequency setting (50 Hz or 60 Hz)
Page (TD) 5-18 P521/EN TD/Ca4
CT DATA
8
(TD) 5 Technical Data
CT DATA
−
−
−
−
−
−
Phase CT Primary
Earth CT Primary
Phase CT Secondary
Earth CT Secondary
CT Correction Factor
Earth Current
1 to 9999, steps of 1
1 to 9999, steps of 1
1 or 5
1 or 5
0.05 to 10.0, steps of 0.01
Residual Connection or Core Balanced CT (preferred in isolated and compensated neutral systems)
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-19
(TD) 5 Technical Data
9
9.1
9.2
9.3
HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND
HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND
Dielectric Withstand
IEC 60255-5: 2000
2.0 kVrms for one minute between all terminals and case earth (including
EIA(RS)485/EIA(RS)232 socket SK1).
2.0 kVrms for one minute between all terminals of each independent circuit grouped together, and all other terminals (including EIA(RS)485/EIA(RS)232 socket SK1).
1.0 kVrms for one minute across dedicated normally open contacts of output relays.
1.0 kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts of changeover and watchdog output relays.
Impulse
IEC 60255-5: 2000
The product will withstand without damage impulses of 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 µ s, 0.5J across:
Each independent circuit and the case with the terminals of each independent circuit connected together.
Independent circuits with the terminals of each independent circuit connected together.
Terminals of the same circuit except normally open metallic contacts.
Insulation Resistance
IEC 60255-5: 2000
The insulation resistance is greater than 100 M Ω at 500 Vdc.
Page (TD) 5-20 P521/EN TD/Ca4
ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT
10
10.1
10.1.1
10.1.2
10.1.3
10.2
10.2.1
10.2.2
(TD) 5 Technical Data
ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT
Performance Criteria
The following three classes of performance criteria are used to specify the performance of the MiCOM relay when subjected to the electrical interference. The performance criteria are based on the performance criteria specified in EN 50082-2:1995.
Class A
During the testing, the relay will not mal-operate and upon completion of testing the relay will function as specified. A mal-operation will include a transient operation of the output contacts, operation of the watchdog contacts, reset of any of the relay’s microprocessors or an alarm indication.
The relay communications must continue uncorrupted via the communications ports during the test, however, relay communications may be momentarily interrupted, provided they recover with no external intervention.
Class B
During the testing, the relay will not mal-operate and upon completion of the testing, the relay will function as specified. A mal-operation will include a transient operation of the output contacts, operation of the watchdog contacts, reset of any of the relay’s microprocessors or an alarm indication. Transitory operation of the output LEDs is acceptable, provided no permanent false indications are recorded.
The relay communications must continue uncorrupted via the communications ports during the test. However, relay communications may be momentarily interrupted, provided they recover with no external intervention.
Class C
The relay will power down and power up again in a controlled manner within 5 seconds.
The output relays are permitted to change state during the test as long as they reset once the relay powers up.
Communications to the relay may be suspended during the testing, as long as communication recovers with no external intervention after the testing.
Auxiliary Supply Tests, DC Interruption, etc.
DC Voltage Interruptions
IEC 60255-11: 1979.
DC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 2, 5, 10, 20, 50 ms.
Performance criteria - Class A.
DC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 100, 200 ms, 40 s.
Performance criteria - Class C.
DC Voltage Fluctuations
IEC 60255-11: 1979.
AC 100 Hz ripple superimposed on the DC max. and min. auxiliary supply at 12% of highest rated DC.
Performance criteria - Class A.
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-21
(TD) 5 Technical Data
10.3
10.3.1
10.3.2
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.6.1
ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT
AC Voltage Dips and Short Interruptions
AC Voltage Short Interruptions
IEC 61000-4-11: 1994.
AC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 2, 5, 10, 20, 50 ms.
Performance criteria - Class A.
AC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 100, 200 ms, 1 s, 40 s.
Performance criteria - Class C.
AC Voltage Dips
IEC 61000-4-11: 1994
AC Auxiliary Supply 100% Voltage Dips 2, 5, 10, 20, 50 ms.
Performance criteria - Class A.
AC Auxiliary Supply 100% Voltage Dips 100, 200 ms, 1 s, 40 s.
Performance criteria - Class C.
High Frequency Disturbance
IEC 60255-22-1: 1988 Class III.
1 MHz burst disturbance test.
IEC 61000-4-12: 1995 Class III.
100 kHz burst disturbance test.
2.5 kV common mode.
Power supply, CTs, opto inputs, output contacts, rear EIA(RS)485 protection communications port.
1 kV differential mode.
Power supply, CTs, opto inputs and output contacts.
Performance criteria Class A.
Fast Transients
IEC 60255-22-4: 2002 (EN 61000-4-4: 1995), Class III and Class IV.
2 kV 5 kHz (Class III) and 4 kV 2.5 kHz (Class IV) direct coupling.
Power supply, opto inputs, output contacts, CTs.
2 kV 5 kHz (Class III) and 4 kV 2.5 kHz (Class IV) capacitive clamp.
EIA(RS)485 / EIA(RS)232 protection communications port.
Performance criteria Class A.
Conducted/Radiated Emissions
Conducted Emissions
EN 55022: 1995 Class A, IEC 60255-25: 2000 Class A.
0.15 - 0.5 MHz, 79 dB µ V (quasi peak) 66 dB µ V (average).
0.5 – 30 MHz, 73 dB µ V (quasi peak) 60 dB µ V (average).
Page (TD) 5-22 P521/EN TD/Ca4
ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT
10.6.2
10.7
10.7.1
10.7.2
10.7.3
10.8
10.9
10.10
(TD) 5 Technical Data
Radiated Emissions
EN 55022: 1995 Class A, IEC 60255-25: 2000 Class A.
30 – 230 MHz, 40 dB µ V/m at 10 m measurement distance.
230 – 1000 MHz, 47 dB µ V/m at 10 m measurement distance.
Conducted/Radiated Immunity
Conducted Immunity
IEC 60255-22-6: 1996/A1 2001, IEC 61000-4-6: 2002 Level 3.
10 V emf @ 1 kHz 80% AM, 150 kHz to 80 MHz. Spot tests at 27 MHz, 68 MHz.
Performance criteria Class A.
Radiated Immunity
IEC 60255-22-3: 2000 Class III, IEC 61000-4-3: 1995 Level 3.
10 V/m 80 MHz - 1GHz @ 1 kHz 80% AM.
Spot tests at 80 MHz, 160 MHz, 450 MHz, 900 MHz (10 V/m).
Performance criteria Class A.
Radiated Immunity from Digital Radio Telephones
IEC 60255-22-3: 2000 Class III, IEC 61000-4-3: 2002 Class 4.
30 V/m 800 MHz – 960 MHz @ 1 kHz 80% AM.
30 V/m 1.4 GHz - 2.0 GHz @ 1 kHz 80% AM.
10 V/m 900 MHz ± 5 MHz and 1.89 GHz ± 5 MHz, 200 Hz rep. Freq., 50% duty cycle pulse modulated.
Performance criteria Class A.
Electrostatic Discharge
IEC 60255-22-2: 1996 Class 3 & Class 4, IEC 61000-4-2: 1995.
Class 4: 15 kV air discharge (front panel excluding front comms.).
Class 3: 8 kV air discharge (communications port).
Class 3: 6 kV contact discharge (front panel).
Performance criteria Class A.
Surge Immunity
IEC 60255-22-5: 2002, IEC 61000-4-5: 1995 Levels 3 and 4.
Level 4 - AC/DC PSU, CTs, optos, output contacts.
Level 3 - DC PSU, EIA(RS)485 rear protection communications channel.
Performance criteria Class A under reference conditions.
Power Frequency Magnetic Field
IEC 61000-4-8: 1993 Level 5.
100 A/m field applied continuously in all planes with the EUT configured in its quiescent and tripping states.
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-23
(TD) 5 Technical Data
10.11
10.12
10.13
10.14
10.15
ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT
1000 A/m field applied for 3 s in all planes with the EUT configured in its quiescent and tripping states.
Performance criteria Class A.
Pulse Magnetic Field Immunity
IEC 61000-4-9: 1993 Level 5.
6.4 µ s/16 µ s magnetic pulse, 1000 A/m, applied in both polarities in each plane with the
EUT configured in its quiescent state.
Performance criteria Class A.
Damped Oscillatory Magnetic Field Immunity
IEC 61000-4-10: 1993 Level 5.
0.1 MHz and 1 MHz damped oscillatory pulses, 100 A/m, applied in both polarities in each plane with the EUT configured in its quiescent state.
Performance criteria Class A.
Power Frequency Interference
IEC 60255-22-7: 2003
NGTS* 2.13 Issue 1 Dec 2000, section 7.55
EATS 48-5, Issue 2: 2000.
300 Vrms common mode.
250 Vrms differential mode.
Voltage applied to all non-mains frequency inputs. Permanently connected communications circuits tested to Class 3 (100-1000 m) test level 50 mV.
Performance criteria Class A.
* National Grid Technical Specification
Surge Withstand Capability (SWC)
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 (2002)
Oscillatory SWC Test
2.5 kV – 3 kV, 1 - 1.5 MHz - common and differential mode - applied to all circuits except for terminal block communications, which are tested common mode only via the cable screen.
Fast Transient SWC Tests
4 – 5 kV crest voltage - common and differential mode - applied to all circuits except for terminal block communications, which are tested common mode only via the cable screen.
Performance criteria Class A
Radiated Immunity
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 1995
35 V/m 25 MHz – 1 GHz, no modulation, applied to all sides.
35 V/m 25 MHz – 1 GHz, 100% pulse modulated, to front only.
Page (TD) 5-24 P521/EN TD/Ca4
ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT
Performance criteria Class A.
(TD) 5 Technical Data
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-25
(TD) 5 Technical Data
11
11.1
11.2
11.3
ATMOSPHERIC ENVIRONMENT
ATMOSPHERIC ENVIRONMENT
Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1: 2007
-25°C storage (96 hours)
-40°C operation (96 hours)
IEC 60068-2-2: 2007
+70°C storage (96 hours)
+85°C operation (96 hours)
Humidity
IEC 60068-2-3: 1969
Damp heat, steady state, 40 ° C ± 2 ° C and 93% relative humidity (RH) +2% − 3%, duration 56 days.
IEC 60068-2-30: 1980
Damp heat cyclic, six (12 + 12 hour cycles) of 55 ° C ± 2 ° C 93% ± 3% RH and 25 ° C
± 3 ° C 93% ± 3% RH.
Enclosure Protection
IEC 60529: 2001
IP52 Category 2
IP5x – Protected against dust, limited ingress permitted.
IPx2 – Protected against vertically falling drops of water with the product in 4 fixed positions of 15 ° tilt with a flow rate of 3 mm/minute for 2.5 minutes.
Page (TD) 5-26 P521/EN TD/Ca4
MECHANICAL ENVIRONMENT
12
12.1
12.1.1
12.1.2
12.1.3
MECHANICAL ENVIRONMENT
(TD) 5 Technical Data
Performance Criteria
The following two classes of performance criteria are used within sections to (where applicable) to specify the performance of the MiCOM relay when subjected to mechanical testing.
Severity Classes
The following table details the Class and Typical Applications of the vibration, shock bump and seismic tests detailed previously
Class
1
2
Typical Application
Measuring relays and protection equipment for normal use in power plants, substations and industrial plants and for normal transportation conditions
Measuring relays and protection equipment for which a very high security margin is required or where the vibration (shock and bump) (seismic shock) levels are very high, e.g. shipboard application and for severe transportation conditions.
Vibration (Sinusoidal)
IEC 60255-21-1: 1988
Cross over frequency - 58 to 60 Hz
Vibration response
2
Severity
Class
Peak Displacement
Below Cross Over
Frequency (mm)
0.075 1
Peak Acceleration
Above Cross Over
Frequency (gn )
Number of
Sweeps in
Each Axis
1
Frequency
Range (Hz)
10 – 150
Vibration endurance
2
Severity Class Peak Acceleration (gn ) Number of Sweeps in
2.0 20
Frequency Range
(Hz)
10 – 150
Shock and Bump
IEC 60255-21-2: 1988
Type of Test
Shock Response 2
Shock Withstand
Bump
1
1
Severity
Class
10
15
10
Peak
Acceleration ( gn )
11
11
16
Duration of
Pulse ( ms )
Number of
Pulses in Each
Direction
3
3
1000
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-27
(TD) 5 Technical Data
12.1.4
MECHANICAL ENVIRONMENT
Seismic
IEC 60255-21-3: 1993
Cross over frequency - 8 to 9 Hz x = horizontal axis, y = vertical axis
2
Severity
Class
7.5
Peak Displacement
Below Cross Over
Frequency (mm) x y
3.5 2.0
Peak Acceleration
Above Cross Over
Frequency (gn) x y
1.0
Number Of
Sweep
Cycles In
Each Axis
1
Frequency
Range (Hz)
1- 35
Page (TD) 5-28 P521/EN TD/Ca4
EC EMC COMPLIANCE
13
(TD) 5 Technical Data
EC EMC COMPLIANCE
Compliance to the European Community Directive 89/336/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC is claimed via the Standards route.
The following Product Specific Standard was used to establish conformity:
EN 50263: 2000
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-29
(TD) 5 Technical Data
14
EC LVD COMPLIANCE
EC LVD COMPLIANCE
Compliance with European Community Directive on Low Voltage 73/23/EEC is demonstrated by reference to generic safety standards:
EN 61010-1: 2001
EN 60950-1: 2001
Page (TD) 5-30 P521/EN TD/Ca4
BATTERY LIFE
15
(TD) 5 Technical Data
BATTERY LIFE
Battery life (assuming relay energized for >90% of time) > 10 years.
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-31
(TD) 5 Technical Data
16
FREQUENCY RESPONSE
FREQUENCY RESPONSE
With exception of the RMS measurements and thermal overload protection all other measurements are based upon the Fourier derived fundamental component. The fundamental component is extracted by using a 16 sample Discrete Fourier Transform
(DFT). This gives good harmonic rejection for frequencies up to the 15th harmonic. The
15th is the first predominant harmonic that is not attenuated by the Fourier filter and is known as an ‘Alias’. The Alias, however, is attenuated by approximately 70% by an additional analogue, ‘anti-aliasing’ filter (low pass filter). The combined affect of the anti-
aliasing and Fourier filters is shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1 - Frequency Response
Page (TD) 5-32 P521/EN TD/Ca4
CURVES (TD) 5 Technical Data
17 CURVES
17.1 IDMT Curves
17.1.1 Pick-up IDMT Mathematical Formula
Inverse Time Curves Formulae:
The first and second stage phase and earth overcurrent threshold can be selected with a dependent time characteristic. The time delay is calculated with a mathematical formula.
There are eleven inverse time characteristics available.
The mathematical formula applicable to the first ten curves is: t = T x
K
( Ι / Ι s)
α
- 1
Where: t =
K =
Ι =
Operating time (secs)
Coefficient (see table)
Value of measured current
Ι S =
α =
L =
T =
Value of the programmed threshold (Pick-up value)
Coefficient (see table)
ANSI/IEEE coefficient (zero for IEC curves)
Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for IEC curves or Time Dial (TD) for ANSI/IEEE curves.
Type of curve
Short Time Inverse
Standard Inverse
Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Long time Inverse
Short Time Inverse
Moderately Inverse
Inverse
Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Table 1 - Inverse curve factors
Standard
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
UK
CO2
ANSI/IEEE
CO8
ANSI/IEEE
ANSI/IEEE
K Factor
0.05
0.14
13.5
80
120
0.02394
0.0515
5.95
19.61
28.2
The RI curve (electromechanical) is given by the following formula:
1 t = K x
0.339 - 0.236 /( Ι / Ι s)
when 1.1 < = ( Ι / Ι s) < = 20
α Factor
0.04
0.02
1
2
1
0.02
0.02
2
2
2
Although the curves tend towards infinity when the current approaches Ι s, the minimum guaranteed value of the operating current for all the curves with the inverse time characteristic is 1.1 Ι s (with a tolerance of ± 0.05 Ι s).
L Factor
0
0
0
0
0
0.01694
0.114
0.18
0.491
0.1215
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-33
(TD) 5 Technical Data CURVES
Laborelec Curves:
α b
Ι
The first and second earth thresholds can be selected with dedicated Laborelec curves.
There are 3 curves available with the following formula: t = αΙ + b
Where: t = Tripping time
=
=
=
Coefficient (see table)
Coefficient (see table)
Primary residual current (between 1 and 40A)
Type of Curve
LABORELEC 1
LABORELEC 2
LABORELEC 3
α
– 0.0897
– 0.0897
– 0.0897 b
4.0897
4.5897
5.0897
Table 2 - Laborelec curve factors
In order to be compliant with the Laborelec specifications the relay must be used with:
•
•
An earth current range 0.01 Ι en to 8 Ι en
A rated current wiring 1 A
• A core balanced CT with a ratio 20/1.
For a complete operating of the curve, the relay must be set to 0.05
Ι en (secondary residual current).
Page (TD) 5-34 P521/EN TD/Ca4
CURVES (TD) 5 Technical Data
17.1.2 Reset Timer IDMT Mathematical Formula
Reset Timer Description:
The first and second phase and earth overcurrent stages are provided with a timer hold facility ‘tReset’, which may be set to a definite time value or to an inverse time characteristic (IEEE/ANSI curves only). This may be useful in certain applications, for example when grading with upstream electromechanical overcurrent relays which have inherent reset time delays.
Another possible situation where the timer hold facility may be used to reduce fault clearance times is where intermittent faults occur. An example of this may occur in a plastic insulated cable. In this application, it is possible that the fault energy melts and reseals the cable insulation, thereby extinguishing the fault. This process repeats to give a succession of fault current pulses, each of increasing duration with reducing intervals between the pulses, until the fault becomes permanent.
When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is minimum the relay will be repeatedly reset and not be able to trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the Timer Hold facility the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time.
The reset timer ‘tReset’ facility can be found in the following menu configurations:
If the threshold is selected with an IDMT IEC or RI curve, the reset timer ‘tReset’ with
DMT characteristic is settable in the menu and can be found at the following locations:
Phase fault reset timer setting:
Protection → [50/51] Phase OC → tReset
Earth fault reset timer setting:
Protection → [50N/51N] E/Gnd → tReset
If the threshold is selected with an IDMT IEEE or CO curve, the reset timer ‘tReset’ with a
DMT or IDMT characteristic is settable in the menu at the following locations:
Phase fault reset timer setting:
Protection → [50/51] Phase OC → Reset Type
Earth fault reset timer setting:
Protection → [50N/51N] E/Gnd → Reset Type
Inverse Time Curves Formulae:
The mathematical formula applicable to the five curves is:
K t = T x
1 - ( Ι / Ι s)
α
Where: t
K
=
=
Ι =
Ι S =
α
T
=
=
Reset time
Coefficient (see table)
Value of the measured current
Value of the programmed threshold (pick-up value)
Coefficient (see table)
Reset Time Multiplier (Rtms) between 0.025 and 3.2
Type of Curves
Short Time Inverse
Moderately Inverse
CO2
Standard
ANSI/IEEE
K Factor
2.261
4.85
2
2
α Factor
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-35
(TD) 5 Technical Data CURVES
Type of Curves
Inverse
Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Table 3 - Inverse curve factors
CO8
Standard
ANSI/IEEE
ANSI/IEEE
5.95
K Factor
21.6
29.1
2
2
2
α Factor
Page (TD) 5-36 P521/EN TD/Ca4
CURVES
17.1.3 IEC Curves
(TD) 5 Technical Data
Figure 2 - IEC & UK curves
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-37
(TD) 5 Technical Data CURVES
Figure 3 - Short Time Inverse (IEC)
Page (TD) 5-38 P521/EN TD/Ca4
CURVES (TD) 5 Technical Data
Figure 4 - Standard Inverse (IEC)
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-39
(TD) 5 Technical Data CURVES
Figure 5 - Very Inverse (IEC)
Page (TD) 5-40 P521/EN TD/Ca4
CURVES (TD) 5 Technical Data
Figure 6 - Extremely Inverse (IEC)
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-41
(TD) 5 Technical Data CURVES
Figure 7 - Long Time Inverse (UK)
Page (TD) 5-42 P521/EN TD/Ca4
CURVES
17.1.4 RI Curves
(TD) 5 Technical Data
Figure 8 - RI Curves
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-43
(TD) 5 Technical Data
17.1.5 IEEE/ANSI & CO Curves
CURVES
Figure 9 - ANSI/IEEE & CO curves
Page (TD) 5-44 P521/EN TD/Ca4
CURVES (TD) 5 Technical Data
Figure 10 - Short Time Inverse (CO2)
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-45
(TD) 5 Technical Data CURVES
Figure 11 - Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE)
Page (TD) 5-46 P521/EN TD/Ca4
CURVES (TD) 5 Technical Data
Figure 12 - Inverse (CO8)
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-47
(TD) 5 Technical Data CURVES
Figure 13 - Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE)
Page (TD) 5-48 P521/EN TD/Ca4
CURVES (TD) 5 Technical Data
Figure 14 - Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE)
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-49
(TD) 5 Technical Data
17.1.6 Laborelec Curve
CURVES
Figure 15 - Laborele Curve
Page (TD) 5-50 P521/EN TD/Ca4
CURVES
17.2
17.2.1
(TD) 5 Technical Data
Thermal Overload Curves
Mathematical Formula
The thermal time characteristic is given by:
Where: t
τ
=
=
Ι =
Ι FLC =
Time to trip, following application of the overload current, Ι
Heating and cooling time constant of the protected plant
Largest phase current (RMS value)
Full load current rating (relay setting 'Thermal Trip') k = 1.05 constant, allows continuous operation up to < 1.05 Ι FLC
Ι P = Steady state pre-loading before application of the overload
The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from "hot" or "cold".
Mathematical formula applicable to the MiCOM Relays:
The calculation of the time to trip is given by:
Error! Objects cannot be created from editing field codes.
Where:
Ttrip =
Te =
Time to trip (in seconds)
Thermal time constant of the protected element (in seconds)
Ix = Thermal overload equal to
Ι eq k . Ιθ >
Ι eq =
Ιθ > = k =
Equivalent current corresponding to the RMS value of the largest phase current
Full load current rating ( Ι FLC) given by the national standard or by the supplier
Factor associated to the thermal state formula
θ 2 = Initial thermal state. If the initial thermal state = 30% then θ 2 = 0.3
θ trip = Trip thermal state. If the trip thermal state is set at 100%, then θ trip = 1
The calculation of the thermal state is given by the following formula:
θι +1 =
Ι eq
(k . Ιθ >)
2
.
1 - loge
-t
Te +
θι . loge
-t
Te where θ is being calculated every 0.1 s.
P521/EN TD/Ca4 Page (TD) 5-51
(TD) 5 Technical Data
17.2.2 Tripping Curve
CURVES
Figure 16 - Thermal Overload Tripping curve
Page (TD) 5-52 P521/EN TD/Ca4
MiCOM P521 (AP) 6 Application Guide
P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION GUIDE
CHAPTER 6
Page (AP) 6-1
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Date:
Software version:
Hardware Suffix:
Connection diagram:
August 2017
13
B
10P52101
MiCOM P521
Page (AP) 6-2 P521/EN AP/Ca4
Contents
CONTENTS
1 Introduction
2 Application of Individual Protection Functions
Current Differential Protection
Current Differential Characteristics
Time Alignment of Current Vectors
Additional Protection Considerations
Protection of Transformer Feeders
Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection
Instantaneous (Start) Function (50/50N)
Thermal Overload Characteristic
Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (CBF)
Circuit Breaker Failure Protection Operation
Breaker Fail Undercurrent Settings
Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection
Undercurrent Protection Function
Blocked Overcurrent Protection
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Page (AP) 6-
9
11
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-3
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Air Conditioning/Resistive Heating Loads
Earth Fault Protection Applied TO Transformers
Switch OnTo Fault (SOTF) Protection
3 Application of Non-Protection Functions
Auxiliary Timers (tAux 1 and tAux 2)
Change of Setting Group by a Logic Input
Manual Setting Group Change via Front Interface
Circuit Breaker State Monitoring
CB Trip and Close Via User Interface
CB Trip and Close Via Opto Inputs
CB Manual Trip and Close Delays
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring Features
Setting the Operating Time Thresholds (CB Open Time/CB Close Time)
Setting the Number of Operations Thresholds (CB Open NB =)
Setting the Trip and Close Pulse Times (t Open Pulse/t Close Pulse)
MiCOM P521 Trip Circuit Supervision Mechanism
Calculation of External Resistor R1
Rolling and Peak Demand Values
Current transformer supervision
4 Current Transformer Requirements
Current Differential Protection
Contents
57
78
Page (AP) 6-4 P521/EN AP/Ca4
Contents (AP) 6 Application Guide
Typical Equations for Current Differential Protection
Selection of X/R Ratio and Fault Level
SEF Protection – as Fed by Core-Balance CT
5 Communication Between Relays
80
Communications Link Options 80
Direct Optical Fiber Link, 850 nm Multi-Mode Fiber
Direct Optical Fiber Link, 1300 nm Multi-Mode Fiber
Direct Optical Fiber Link, 1300 nm Single-Mode Fiber
Switched Communication Networks
Multiplexer Link via P59x Optical Fiber to Electrical Interface Units
Multiplexer Link with G.703 Electrical Interface Using Auxiliary Optical Fibers and Type
Multiplexer Link with V.35 Electrical Interface Using Auxiliary Optical Fibers and Type
Multiplexer Link with X.21 Electrical Interface Using Auxiliary Optical Fibers and Type
Unconditioned 4 Wire Pilot Communications for Distances greater than
Unconditioned 2 wire Pilot Communications for Distances greater than 1.2 km 89
89 Leased Line Modem Set Up (e.g. TD36 Modem)
Baseband Modem Set Up (Patton “Netlink” 1095 mDSL Modem, Patton “Campus”
Conditioned Pilot Communications
Direct 4 wire EIA(RS)485 up to 1.2 km 91
Protection Communications Address
Internal Clock Source Signaling
Communication Error Statistics
Communications Delay Tolerance Timer
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-5
(AP) 6 Application Guide
TABLES
Table 1 - Current differential settings
Table 2 - Typical cable/line charging currents (UK, 50 Hz)
Table 3 - Vector compensation settings
Table 4 - Examples of selection of phase compensation factors
Table 5 - Overcurrent protection settings
Table 6 - Earth fault protection settings
DMT characteristic coefficients
Table 8 - Laborelec curve coefficients
Table 9 - Reset curve coefficients
Table 10 - Thermal overload settings
Table 11 - Circuit breaker fail settings
Table 12 - Broken conductor detection settings
Table 13 - Programmable I-Trip Command menu
Table 14 - Negative sequence overcurrent settings
Table 15 - Undercurrent protection settings
Table 16 - Selective logic settings
Table 17 - Cold load pick-up settings
Table 18 - Latch functions menu
Table 19 - Blocking logic menu
Table 20 - CB supervision menu
Table 21 - Disturbance record menu
Table 24 - X.21 circuits supported by P593 unit
Tables
Page (AP) 6-
Page (AP) 6-6 P521/EN AP/Ca4
Figures (AP) 6 Application Guide
FIGURES
Page (AP) 6-
Figure 1 - Relay bias characteristic
Figure 2 - Propagation delay measurement
Figure 3 - Typical plain feeder circuit
Figure 4 - Plain feeder with unmatched CTs
Figure 5 - Magnetizing inrush waveforms
Figure 6 - Need for zero-sequence current filtering
Figure 7 - First stage phase overcurrent protection (
Figure 8 - Logic for overcurrent stages two, three and four
Figure 9 - CB fail detection principle
Figure 10 - CB open before TBF expired
Figure 11 - CB not yet open before TBF expired
Figure 12 - De-energization of the phase CT
Figure 13 - Circuit breaker failure protection logic
Figure 14 - Permissive intertrip
Figure 16 - Digital signal transfer
Figure 17 - Undercurrent protection logic
Figure 18 - Blocked overcurrent scheme
Figure 19 - Typical scheme logic
Figure 20 - Blocking logic for selected protection features
Figure 21 - CB Status DBI logic diagram
Figure 22 - Trip circuit supervision logic diagram
Figure 23 - Trip coil monitoring
Figure 24 - Trip coil and auxiliary contact monitoring 66
Figure 25 - Trip coil and auxiliary contact monitoring regardless of CB position 67
Figure 26 - Example of logic equation 75
Figure 27 - Current transformer supervision
Figure 28 - Switched communication network
Figure 29 - Modified bias characteristic
Figure 30 - MT-RS485 connection diagram
Figure 31 - Communications failure logic
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-7
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Notes:
Figures
Page (AP) 6-8 P521/EN AP/Ca4
INTRODUCTION (AP) 6 Application Guide
1
1.1
INTRODUCTION
The MiCOM P521 relay has been designed to provide more functionality in terms of protection, measuring, automatic operation and control in any low/medium voltage electrical network.
These relays can be used at industrial and distribution levels to overcome grading difficulties in complex networks. For distribution systems, continuity of supply is of paramount importance. Faults within the protected zone will be cleared very quickly by the MiCOM P521, therefore minimizing damage and disruption to the rest of the system.
The majority of overhead line faults are semi-permanent in nature. Multi-shot autoreclose can therefore be used in conjunction with the P521 once again minimizing disruption to the system. The relay also has various other protection features such as overcurrent and earth fault protection. These features can be either permanently enabled or enabled when the differential communication channel fails. The phase and earth fault protection have four stages that can be set either instantaneous or
DMT (stages 1 and 2 only). There is also a wide choice of operating time curves (
EC, UK, ANSI/IEEE, C0,
LABORELEC and Rectifier) which makes it possible to adapt these relays to an existing protection scheme, irrespective of the other relays already installed on the network.
A choice of protection communications mediums are also available; these include electrical (i.e. pilot wires etc.), modem communications, multiplexed networks and direct fiber optic links.
The P521 also offers the ability to change the protection communications interface from electrical to fiber optic without the need for a software/firmware upgrade. This allows the
P521 to be applied to networks that are to have their protection communication upgraded in the future.
P521 Protection Features
•
•
•
The P521 has the following protection features:
•
Phase current differential protection [87] - Phase segregated biased differential protection provides the main protection element for the relay. Provides high speed, discriminative protection for all fault types.
•
Phase fault overcurrent protection [50/51] - Four stage time delayed or instantaneous backup protection.
•
Earth fault protection [50N/51N] - Four stage backup time delayed or instantaneous protection. (Normal, sensitive and very sensitive earth fault ranges are available at the ordering stage).
•
True RMS thermal protection [49] - Thermal protection for overhead lines and cables.
Undercurrent protection [37] - To detect loss of load conditions.
Broken conductor protection - To detect open circuit faults
Negative sequence overcurrent protection [46] - This can be selected to provide remote backup protection for phase to phase or phase to earth faults.
•
Circuit breaker fail protection - To take remedial action in the event of slow or inoperable circuit breaker.
•
Trip circuit supervision - Checks the integrity of the trip circuit and the trip circuit supply voltage. In the event that the trip circuit becomes open circuit, or the trip circuit supply voltage is lost, the relay will issue a trip circuit fail alarm.
•
Direct/permissive intertrip - Independent intertripping facility using the relay's protection communications channels.
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-9
(AP) 6 Application Guide
1.2
INTRODUCTION
•
•
•
•
•
Programmable inter-trip commands – Four independent inter-trip commands are provided in addition to the Direct/permissive inter-trips. Protection, binary input and logic equation signals can be assigned to initiate an inter-trip.
Protection communications supervision - To detect failure of protection communications and enable remedial action to be taken, i.e. switch in communication independent backup protections (e.g. overcurrent and earth fault protection).
Cold load pick-up logic - May be used to transiently raise the setting for both the phase and the earth fault protection.
Selective overcurrent logic - Provides the capability of temporarily altering the time settings of stages 2, 3 and 4 of the phase overcurrent and earth fault elements.
CTS – Current transformer supervision can detect CT failures and prevent differential, negative sequence overcurrent and undercurrent protection from maloperation.
Non-Protection Features
•
•
•
•
Below is a summary of the P521 relay non-protection features.
•
Local/remote measurements - Various measurement values from the local and remote line ends available for display on the relay or accessed from the serial communications.
Front EIA(RS)232 communication port (MODBUS only).
Rear EIA(RS)485 communication port - Provides remote serial communications.
The following communications protocols are supported: MODBUS, IEC 60870-5-
103, DNP3.0.
•
Fault/event/disturbance records - Available from the serial communications or on the relay LCD (fault and event records only).
•
Four setting groups - Independent setting groups to cater for switched feeding or customer specific applications.
Selectable phase rotation.
Circuit breaker control - Control of the circuit breaker can be achieved either locally via the user interface or remotely.
•
Circuit breaker condition monitoring - Provides records/alarm outputs regarding the number of CB operations, cumulative interruption duty, and the breaker operating / closing time.
•
Commissioning test facilities - Allows the user to test the LEDs, energize selected output relays, freeze circuit breaker measurements and enable LOOPBACK mode.
•
Continuous self-monitoring - Power on diagnostics and self checking routines to provide maximum relay reliability and availability.
•
Logic equations – Eight Boolean logic equations are available, each with maximum
16 variants, which can be chosen from signals of protection, binary input, alarm and output of other logic equations.
Page (AP) 6-10 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
(AP) 6 Application Guide
2
2.1
2.1.1
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
The following sections detail the individual protection functions in addition to where and how they may be applied. Each section also gives an extract from the respective menu columns to demonstrate how the settings are actually applied to the relay.
Current Differential Protection
The primary protection element of the P521 relay is the current differential protection.
This technique involves the comparison of the currents at each end of the line. A communications path is therefore an essential requirement of any such scheme. The
P521 relay utilizes a 9.6/19.2/56/64 kbits/s digital communications system either for direct optical fiber between ends, direct EIA(RS)485 link, modem connections, or via a multiplexed link.
Current Differential Characteristics
The basic operating principle of differential protection is to calculate the difference between the currents entering and leaving a protected zone. The protection operates when this difference exceeds a set threshold.
Differential currents may also be generated during external fault conditions due to CT saturation. To provide stability for through fault conditions, the relay adopts a biasing technique. This method effectively raises the setting of the relay in proportion to the
value of through fault current to prevent relay maloperation. Figure 1 shows the
operating characteristics of the P521 phase differential element.
The differential current is calculated as the vector summation of the currents entering the protected zone. The bias current is the average of the measured current at each line end. It is found by the scalar sum of the current at each terminal, divided by two. Both of these calculations are based upon the fundamental component of the line currents only.
Each of these calculations is done on a phase by phase basis. The level of bias used for each element is the highest of the three calculated for optimum stability.
I
1
I
2
I diff =
I
1 +
I
2
Percentage bias k2
Operate
P521/EN AP/Ca4
I s1
Percentage bias k1
Restrain
I s2
I bias =
| I
1
|
+
| I
2
|
2
Figure 1 - Relay bias characteristic
The characteristic is determined by four protection settings:
P1001ENd
Page (AP) 6-11
(AP) 6 Application Guide APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
[87] Current Diff
Current Diff
s1
s2 k1 k2
Diff Delay Type t
diff
Diff Curve
Diff Tms
Diff Time Dial
P
T Time
P
T
Disable
P
T
Selection
DIT Rx tDwell
DIT Alarm
s1 The basic differential current setting which determines the minimum pick-up level of the relay. k1 The lower percentage bias setting used when the bias current is below
s2. This provides stability for small CT mismatches, whilst ensuring good sensitivity to resistive faults under heavy load conditions.
s2 A bias current threshold setting, above which the higher percentage bias k2 is used. k2 The higher percentage bias setting used to improve relay stability under heavy through fault current conditions.
The tripping criteria can be formulated as:
1. for |
bias| <
s2,
|
diff| > k1.|
bias| +
s1
2. for |
bias| >
s2,
|
diff| > k2.|
bias| - (k2 - k1).
s2 +
s1
When a trip is issued by the differential element, in addition to tripping the local breaker, the relay will send a differential intertrip signal to the remote relay. This will ensure tripping of both ends of the protected line, even for marginal fault conditions. The relay receiving the intertrip signal will indicate that it has operated due to a differential intertrip by displaying “
DIFF
TRIP”.
The differential protection can be time delayed using either a definite or inverse time characteristic by selecting either DMT or
DMT in the delay type cell. Table 1 details the
settings available for the Current Differential protection element. The following settings can be found in the PROTECTION G1 (G2 (G3) (G4))/[87] Current Diff menu.
It is possible to block operation of the current differential element by energizing a chosen digital input (see Blocking functions section). If the “Block diff” input is energized, the current differential element is prevented from operating. Furthermore, the relay will ignore any current differential intertrip signals (
DIFF
-TRIP) sent by the remote relay.
The direct and permissive intertrip functions, however, will continue to function even if the current differential protection is blocked by the digital input.
Default Setting
Yes
0.2
n
2
n
30%
150%
DMT
0s
EC S
1
1
0.2s
No
Remote
0.1 s
No
Min Max Step
No
0.1
n
1
n
0%
30%
DMT
Yes
2
n
30
n
150%
150%
DMT
N/A
0.05
n
0.05
n
5%
5%
N/A
0s 150s 0.01s
EC ST
,
EC S
,
EC V
,
EC E
,
EC LT
, CO2,
EEE M
, CO8,
EEE
V
0.025
0.1
0.05s
No
1.5
100
2s
Yes
0.025
0.1
0.01s
N/A
Local
0.1 s
No
Remote
5 s
Yes
N/A
0.05 s
N/A
Page (AP) 6-12 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
(AP) 6 Application Guide
[87] Current Diff
PIT Alarm
Inrush Restraint
High Set
Kr
Harmonic Ratio
Transient Bias
No
No
4
n
Default Setting
4
15%
No
No
No
4
n
3
5%
No
Min
Yes
Yes
32
n
20
50%
Yes
Max
N/A
N/A
0.01
n
Step
1
1%
N/A
Table 1 - Current differential settings
The High Set element is an unrestrained element designed to provide high speed operation in the event of CT saturation or where a fault occurs during an inrush condition in a transformer feeder application. Where transformer inrush restraint is used, the resultant second harmonic current produced from transformer inrush or CT saturation may cause slow relay operation.
The High Set element is only visible and activated when Inrush Restraint is enabled, to overcome this condition. The High Set element should be set in excess of 40% of the peak magnetizing inrush current.
Transient Bias is a new feature that increases relay stability during local-end primary CT saturation under external fault conditions.
When CT saturation occurs, the waveforms sampled by the relay can become distorted, leading to unwanted differential currents. The CT saturation will normally dissipate over time, so it is transient in nature.
It is not necessary for differential protection to be blocked when CT saturation is detected
- the P521 ensures stability under this condition by temporarily raising the differential current characteristic threshold by applying an additional bias component.
This additional bias component is allowed to decay to ensure it is transient in nature and mimics the behavior of the CT saturation. As a result the relay is able to withstand larger amounts of CT saturation without tripping. The Transient Bias function can be used to mitigate transient CT saturation only, as sustained saturation will remain after the decay has elapsed.
2.1.2 Time Alignment of Current Vectors
To calculate differential current between line ends it is necessary that the current samples from each end are taken at the same moment in time. This can be achieved by time synchronizing the sampling, or alternatively, by the continuous calculation of the propagation delay between line ends. The P521 relay has adopted this second technique.
Consider the two-ended system as shown in Figure 2.
Two identical relays, A and B are placed at the two ends of the line. Relay A samples its current signals at time tA1, tA2 etc., and relay B at time tB1, tB2 etc.
Note The sampling instants at the two ends will not, in general, be coincidental or of a fixed relationship, due to slight drifts in sampling frequencies.
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-13
(AP) 6 Application Guide APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
Page (AP) 6-14
Figure 2 - Propagation delay measurement
Assume that at time tA1, relay A sends a data message to relay B. The message contains a time tag, tA1, together with other timing and status information and the current vector values calculated at tA1. The message arrives at end B after a channel propagation delay time, tp1. Relay B registers the arrival time of the message as tB*.
Since relays A and B are identical, relay B also sends out data messages to end A.
Assume relay B sends out a data message at tB3. The message therefore contains the time tag tB3. It also returns the last received time tag from relay A (i.e. tA1) and the delay time, td, between the arrival time of the received message, tB*, and the sampling time, tB3, i.e. td = (tB3 - tB*).
The message arrives at end A after a channel propagation delay time, tp2. Its arrival time is registered by relay A as tA*. From the returned time tag, tA1, relay A can measure the total elapsed time as (tA* - tA1). This equals the sum of the propagation delay times tp1, tp2 and the delay time td at end B.
Hence,
(tA* - tA1) = (td + tp1 + tp2)
The relay assumes the transmit and receive channels follow the same path so they have the same propagation delay time. This time is calculated as follows: tp1 = tp2 = ½ (tA* - tA1 - td)
Note The propagation delay time is measured for each received sample and this can be used to monitor any change on the communication link.
As the propagation delay time has now been deduced, the sampling instant of the
received data from relay B (tB3*) can be calculated. As shown in Figure 2, the sampling
time tB3* is measured by relay A as: tB3* = (tA* - tp2)
P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
(AP) 6 Application Guide
In Figure 2, tB3* is between tA3 and tA4. To calculate the differential and bias currents,
the vector samples at each line end must correspond to the same point in time. It is necessary therefore to time align the received tB3* data to tA3 and tA4. This can be achieved by rotating the received current vector by an angle corresponding to the time difference between tB3* and tA3 (and tA4). For example a time difference of 1ms would require a vector rotation of 1/
20
* 360° = 18° for a 50Hz system.
As two data samples can be compared with each data message, this process will have the effect of increasing the operating speed for any given bandwidth.
Note The current vectors of the three phases need to be time aligned separately.
2.1.3 Capacitive Charging Current
The charging current of a line or cable will be seen as differential current. If this current is of a sufficiently high magnitude, as is the case for cables and long feeders, then relay maloperation could occur. Two issues are apparent with charging current; the first being inrush during line energization and the second being steady state charging current.
Inrush charging current is normally a high order harmonic (9th or 11th for example). The
Fourier filtering used by the P521 relay will remove these frequency components and hence provide stability.
Steady state charging current is nominally at fundamental frequency and hence may cause relay maloperation.
To overcome this problem it must be ensured that the base current setting on the relay
(
s1) is set to at least 2.5x the steady state line charging current to avoid possible maloperation.
Table 2 shows some typical steady state charging currents for various lines and cables.
Voltage (kV)
11 kV Cable
33 kV Cable
33 kV Cable
66 kV Cable
132 kV Overhead Line
132 kV Overhead Line
132 kV Cable
132 kV Cable
275 kV Overhead Line
275 kV Overhead Line
275 kV Cable
275 kV Cable
400 kV Overhead Line
400 kV Overhead Line
400 kV Cable
400 kV Cable
Core Formation and Spacing Conductor Size in mm 2
Three-core 120
Charging Current
A/km
1.2
Three-core
Close-trefoil
Flat, 127 mm
120
300
630
1.8
2.5
10
-
-
Three-core
Flat, 520 mm
-
-
Flat, 205 mm
175
400
500
600
2 x 175
2 x 400
1150
0.22
0.44
10
20
0.58
0.58
19
Flat, 260 mm
-
-
Flat, 145 mm
Tref., 585 mm
2000
2 x 400
4 x 400
2000
3000
24
0.85
0.98
28
33
Table 2 - Typical cable/line charging currents (UK, 50 Hz)
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-15
(AP) 6 Application Guide
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.5.1
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
Ratio Compensation
To ensure correct operation of the differential element, it is important that under load and through fault conditions, the currents into the differential element of the relay are balanced. In some cases, the current transformer primary ratings at each end of the line will not exactly match. A ratio correction factor (CONFIGURATION/CT Ratio/CT Correct
Ratio) is therefore provided which is adjustable from 0.05 to 10 in steps of 0.01. The CT ratio correction factor is applied to ensure that the signals to the differential algorithm are correct.
Ideally, the compensated current values should be arranged to be as close as possible to the relay rated current to provide optimum relay sensitivity. The corrected currents should not, however, be arranged to exceed relay rated current under through load conditions.
In general, CT Correction Ration can be calculated as below.
For end each end a and b, their Correction Ration k a
and k b
can be defined as: k a
=
I n , a
I ref , a k b
=
I n , b
I ref , b
Where,
I n,a
Rated current of CT primary at end a
I n,b
Rated current of CT primary at end b
I ref,a
Reference current of end a
I ref,b
Reference current of end b
Reference currents are determined as follows:
I ref , a
=
S ref
3 V n , a
I ref , b
=
S ref
3 V n , b
Where
S ref
Reference power. For feeder application, it can be determined by rated current multiplying rated voltage. Alternatively, use the rated current of the feeder as I ref
. For transformer application, the rated power of the transformer can be used.
Note CT rated current I n
and reference current I ref
in above calculation are all in primary values. Secondary values can also be used in calculation, see
section 2.1.6.2 as an example.
Additional Protection Considerations
Minimum Operating Current
Note The minimum operating current is related, but not equal to, the
I s1 setting.
Consider a single end fed fault with no load but fault current, I :
Page (AP) 6-16 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
2.1.5.2
(AP) 6 Application Guide
|
diff| =
|
bias|= ½
Assuming |
bias| <
s2, then, using the equation 1 from section 2.1.1, the relay will
operate if:
|
diff| > k1.|
bias| +
s1 or
> k1.½
+
s1
>
s1 / (1 - 0.5 k1) or
The minimum operating current is therefore a function of the
s1 and k1 settings. Since k1 is recommended to be set to 30%, the minimum operating current will be:
min
= 1.176
s1
For most applications a minimum setting of 0.2 pu is recommended. This will give the relay a sensitivity of 0.235 pu.
Relay Sensitivity under Heavy Load Conditions
The sensitivity of the relay is governed by its settings and also the magnitude of load current in the system. For a two-ended system, with relays X and Y, the following applies:
|
diff| = |(
X
+
Y
)|
|
bias| = 0.5 (|
X
| + |
Y
|)
Assume a load current of
L
flowing from end X to Y. Assume also a high resistance fault of current
F
being singly fed from end X. For worst case analysis, we can assume also
F to be in phase with
L
:
X
=
L
+
F
Y
=
L
|
diff| = |
F
|
|
bias| = |
L
| + 0.5 |
F
|
Relay sensitivity when |
bias| <
s2:
For |
bias| <
s2, the relay would operate if |
diff| > k1 |
bias| +
s1 or |
F
| > k1 (|
L
| + 0.5 |
F
|) +
s1 or (1 - 0.5 k1) |
F
| > (k1 |
L
| +
s1) or |
F
| > (k1 |
L
| +
s1) / (1 - 0.5 k1)
For
s1 = 0.2 pu, k1 = 30% and
s2 =2.0 pu, then
For |
L
| = 1.0 pu, the relay would operate if |
F
| > 0.59 pu
For |
L
| = 1.59 pu, the relay would operate if |
F
| > 0.80 pu
If |
F
| = 0.80 pu and |
L
| = 1.59 pu, then |
bias| = 1.99 pu which reaches the limit of the low percentage bias curve.
Relay sensitivity when |
bias| > I s2:
For |
bias| >
s2, the relay would operate if
|
diff| > k2 |
bias| - (k2 - k1)
s2 +
s1 or |
F
| > k2 (|
L
| + 0.5 |
F
|) - (k2 - k1)
s2 +
s1 or or
(1 - 0.5 k2) |
F
| > (k2 |
L
| - (k2 - k1)
s2 +
s1)
|
F
| > (k2 |
L
| - (k2 - k1)
s2 +
s1) / (1 - 0.5 k2)
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-17
(AP) 6 Application Guide
2.1.5.3
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
For
s1 = 0.2 pu, k1 = 30%,
s2 = 2.0 pu and k2 = 100%, then, for |
L
| = 2.0 pu, the relay would operate if |
F
| > 1.6 pu for |
L
| = 2.5 pu, the relay would operate if |
F
| > 2.6 pu
Fault Resistance Coverage:
Assuming the fault resistance, R
F
, is much higher than the line impedance and source impedance, then for a 33kV system and 400/1 CT:
|
F
| = ( Vph-n /R
F
) * ( 1/CT ratio) pu
= ((33000 / 3 ) / R
F
) / 400 pu
= 47.63/R
F
pu
Based on the above analysis, the relay will detect a fault current in excess of 0.59 pu with a load current of 1 pu flowing. The fault resistance would have to be less than 47.63/0.59
= 81
in this case.
With a short time overload current of 2.0 pu, the relay will be able to detect a fault resistance of 47.63/1.6 = 30
or lower.
Setting k1 Less than 30%
If desired, k1 can be set to less than the recommended setting of 30%, down to a minimum of 0%, to increase relay sensitivity. However, if doing so the user should consult Schneider Electric concerning the CT requirements. This is because under certain conditions on systems with high X/R ratio and low fault currents there may be stability issues with a very low k1 setting.
Page (AP) 6-18 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
2.1.6
2.1.6.1
Example Settings
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Differential Element (Is1)
All four settings are user adjustable. This flexibility in settings allows the relay characteristic to be tailored to suit a particular sensitivity and CT requirements. To simplify the protection engineer’s task, we strongly recommend three of the settings be fixed to:
s2 k1 k2
=
=
=
2.0 pu
30%
150%
These settings will give a relay characteristic suitable for most applications. It leaves only the I s1 setting to be decided by the user. The value of this setting should be in excess of any mismatch between line ends although the CT ratio correction factor can be used to alleviate this problem. The effects of capacitive line charging current, if any, must also be considered when deciding the
s1 setting.
By considering the circuit shown in Figure 3, the settings for the current differential
element can be established.
33kV 25km 33kV
400/1 400/1
2.1.6.2
Digital communications link
P5xx P5xx
Steady state charging current = 2.5 A/km - cable
= 0.1 A/km
– overhead line
P1010ENa
Figure 3 - Typical plain feeder circuit
The following settings should be set as follows:
s2 = 2.0 pu k1 = 30 % k2 = 150 % (for a two terminal application)
This leaves the setting of
s1 to be established.
The Is1 setting for the P521 relay must be set above 2.5 times the steady state line charging current value. In this example, assume a cable is used:
s1 > 2.5 x
ch
s1 > 2.5 x (25 km x 2.5 A/km)
s1 > 156.25 A
The line CTs are rated at 400 amps primary. The setting of
s1 must therefore exceed
156.25/400 = 0.391 pu.
Therefore select:
s1 = 0.4 pu
CT Ratio Correction
In cases where different CT ratios are used at each line end the relay can be set with a
CT ratio correction factor “CT Correct Ratio” (CONFIGURATION/CT Ratio) . Assuming
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-19
(AP) 6 Application Guide APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
the relay is applied to the system shown in Figure 4 and the maximum full load current
was 375 Amps the relay can be set as follows.
33kV
400/1
375A
350/1
33kV
0.94A
Relay 1
Digital communications link
1.07A
Relay 2
P2055ENa
Figure 4 - Plain feeder with unmatched CTs
It is good practice to correct the mismatched current to rated current to maintain good sensitivity for high resistance faults. In this example the current entering relay 1 must be scaled upwards, whereas the current entering relay 2 must be scaled down.
To calculate the correction factor for relay 1:
Current entering relay 1 = 375 / 400 = 0.938 A
To correct to rated current our correction factor must be 1/0.938 = 1.071
The same can be done for relay 2.
To calculate the correction factor for relay 2:
Current entering relay 1 = 375 / 350 = 1.071 A
To correct to rated current our correction factor must be 1/1.071 = 0.938
The differential spill current will now be reduced to practically zero instead of 0.133 A
(1.071-0.938) which was the current before the any correction.
Page (AP) 6-20 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
2.1.7
2.1.7.1
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Protection of Transformer Feeders
In applying the well-established principles of differential protection to transformers, a variety of considerations have to be taken into account. These include compensation for any phase shift across the transformer, possible unbalance of signals from current transformers either side of windings, and the effects of the variety of earthing and winding arrangements. In addition to these factors, which can be compensated for by correct application of the relay, the effects of normal system conditions on relay operation must also be considered. The differential element must restrain for system conditions which could result in maloperation of the relay, such as high levels of magnetizing current during inrush conditions.
In traditional transformer feeder differential schemes, the requirements for phase and ratio compensation were met by correct selection of the line current transformers. The
P521 (from software version 2.A) provides software Interposing Current Transformers
(ICTs) to give the required vector compensation. The advantage of having replica ICTs is that they give the P521 relays the flexibility to cater for line CTs connected in either star or delta, as well as being able to compensate for a variety of system earthing arrangements.
A further consideration is the operation of differential protection for faults during transformer inrush conditions. An unrestrained differential High Set element is provided to ensure high speed operation under these conditions, as well as in the event of CT saturation, which produces second harmonics.
Ratio compensation, however, is provided by adjusting a software CT ratio correction
Transformer Magnetizing Inrush
The magnetizing inrush current to a transformer appears as a large operating signal to the differential protection. Special measures are taken with the relay design to ensure that no maloperation occurs during inrush.
Under normal steady state conditions, the magnetizing current associated with the operating flux level is relatively small (usually less than 1% of rated current). However, if a transformer winding is energized at a voltage zero, with no remnant flux, the flux level during the first voltage cycle (2 x nominal flux maximum) will result in core saturation and in a high, non-sinusoidal magnetizing current waveform. This current is commonly referred to as magnetizing inrush current and may persist for several cycles. The magnitude and duration of magnetizing inrush current waveforms are dependent upon a number of factors, such as transformer design, size, system fault level, point on wave of
switching, number of banked transformers, etc. Figure 5 shows typical transformer
magnetizing currents for steady state and inrush conditions.
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-21
(AP) 6 Application Guide APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
Page (AP) 6-22
Figure 5 - Magnetizing inrush waveforms
The magnetizing inrush current contains a high percentage of second harmonic. The
MiCOM P521 relay filters out this component of the waveform and makes use of it to achieve stability. There are two options available, Restrain and Block. To enable the inrush option facility the user can select from the menu cell PROTECTION G1 (G2 (G3)
(G4))/[87] Current Diff/ Inrush Option.
Restrain mode:
In this mode, the relay uses the second harmonic component as an additional bias quantity. The multiplying factor used to ensure stability is set by Kr.
When set correctly it will ensure stability under magnetizing inrush conditions. Kr is described by the following equations, and it is our recommendation that it is set taking into account the level of 2nd harmonic likely to be generated by the transformer under typical inrush conditions. Section 2.1.7.4 gives an example of calculation of Kr.
The additional bias is calculated by:
I additional bias
= Kr × Ih 2
I bias’
=
I bias
+
I additional bias
Now the tripping criteria can be formulated as:
When I bias’
≤
Is 2
Idiff
>
Is 1
+ k 1
×
I bias’
When I bias’
>
Is 2
Idiff
>
Is 1
+ k 2
×
I bias’
−
( k 2
− k 1
)
×
Is 2
P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
2.1.7.2
2.1.7.3
(AP) 6 Application Guide
The value of Ih2 used above is the maximum second harmonic in three phases, obtained from both local and remote ends.
As Kr directly affects the bias curve, it should be noted that it operates as a restrain function, and in the absence of any information on 2nd harmonic content, setting Kr too high to ensure stability may result in longer operating times for internal faults currents below the high set value.
Block mode:
For any of the three phases, if the level of phase current is above 5% In, and if the ratio of
Ih2 to fundamental in the line is above the Harmonic Ratio setting, the differential protection will be blocked at both local and remote end, unless the differential current is larger than the high set value.
Note 1
Note 2
If block mode is required, it should be set at both ends. If block mode is set at only one end, an alarm “Conf. Alarm Inrush” will be generated on the front panel LCD at both end relays. The relay that is not set in block mode will not be blocked by the local nor remote end inrush current.
To work in Block mode, the relays must be set in Extension communication mode in the menu COMMUNICATION/Protection/FRAME MODE.
Ratio Correction
To ensure correct operation of the differential element, it is important that under load and through fault conditions, the currents into the differential element of the relay balance. In many cases, the HV and LV current transformer primary ratings will not exactly match the transformer winding rated currents. Ratio correction factors are therefore provided to
ensure that the signals to the differential algorithm are correct. Section 2.1.6.2 explains
how this feature can be applied to a plain feeder with different CT ratios at each end of the line. The same method can be used when applying the relay to a transformer feeder, although extra attention must be paid to transformers with tap changers. To minimize unbalance due to tap changer operation, current inputs to the differential element should be matched for the mid-tap position. Ideally, the compensated current values should be arranged to be as close as possible to relay rated current to provide optimum relay sensitivity. The corrected currents should not, however, be arranged to exceed relay rated current under through load conditions.
Phase Correction and Zero Sequence Current Filtering
To compensate for any phase shift between two windings of a transformer, it is necessary to provide phase correction. This was traditionally provided by the appropriate delta connection of main line CTs.
Phase correction is provided in the P521 relay via software interposing CTs. The phase correction (vector compensation) settings available in the P521 relay
(CONFIGURATION/CT Ratio/Vector Comp)
Off
Yy0
Yd1
Yy2
Yd3
Setting
-
0
30
lag
60
lag
90
lag
Phase Shift Action
None
None
Ia = (IA - IC) /
3
Ib = (IB - IA) /
3
Ic = (IC - IB) /
3
Yy8 and Invert
Ia = (IB - IC) /
3
Ib = (IC - IA) /
3
Ic = (IA - IB) /
3
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-23
(AP) 6 Application Guide APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
Yy4
Yd5
Yy6
Yd7
Yy8
Yd9
Yy10
Yd11
Ydy0
Setting
120
lag
150
lag
180
lag
150
lead
90
lead
60
lead
30
lead
0
Phase Shift
120
lead
Action
Ia = IB
Ib = IC
Ic = IA
Yd11 and Invert
Invert currents
Yd1 and Invert
Ia = IC
Ib = IA
Ic = IB
Yd3 and Invert
Yy4 and Invert
Ia = (IA - IB) /
3
Ib = (IB - IC) /
3
Ic = (IC - IA) /
3
Ia = IA - (IA + IB + IC) / 3
Ib = IB - (IA + IB + IC) / 3
Ic = IC - (IA + IB + IC) / 3
Ydy0 and Invert Ydy6 180
lag
Table 3 - Vector compensation settings
Note 1
Note 2
Ia, Ib and Ic are the corrected currents and IA, IB and IC are the uncorrected phase currents.
Any setting other than “OFF” will disable the remote current measurements and they will become invisible.
In addition to compensating for the phase shift of the protected transformer, it is also necessary to mimic the distribution of primary zero sequence current in the protection scheme.
Figure 6 shows the need for zero sequence current filtering for differential protection
across a transformer. The power transformer delta winding acts as a ‘trap’ to zero sequence current. This current is therefore only seen on the star connection side of the transformer and hence as differential current.
The filtering of zero sequence current has traditionally been provided by appropriate delta connection of main line CT secondary windings. In the P521 relay, zero sequence current filtering is automatically implemented in software when a delta connection is set for a software interposing CT. Where a transformer winding can pass zero sequence current to an external earth fault, it is essential that some form of zero sequence current filtering is employed. This would also be applicable where in-zone earthing transformers are used.
Page (AP) 6-24 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
P521
(AP) 6 Application Guide
P521
2.1.7.4
P521/EN AP/Ca4
P1008ENb
Figure 6 - Need for zero-sequence current filtering
Some examples of selection of phase compensation factors are shown in Table 4.
Dy1
Yd1
Dy5
Yd5
Transformer
Connection
Dy7
Yd7
Dy11
Yd11
Transformer
PHASE Shift
- 30 o
- 30 o
- 150 o
- 150 o
+ 150 o
+ 150 o
+ 30 o
+ 30 o
Vectorial Compensation (Relay Setting)
HV
Yy0 (0 deg)
Yd1 (-30 deg)
Yy0 (0 deg)
Yd5 (-150 deg)
Yy0 (0 deg)
Yd7 (+150 deg)
Yy0 (0 deg)
Yd11 (+30 deg)
LV
Yd11 (+30 deg)
Yy0 (0 deg)
Yd7 (+150 deg)
Yy0 (0 deg)
Yd5 (-150 deg)
Yy0 (0 deg)
Yd1 (-30 deg)
Yy0 (0 deg)
Table 4 - Examples of selection of phase compensation factors
Setting example of transformer feeders
If we consider a transformer feeder with the following parameters of the transformer to be protected by P521 (as in Figure 6 ):
Rated capacity: 7.5MVA
Connection type: Dyn11
Rated voltage and CT ratio:
HV side: 22kV, 1200:1
LV side: 6.3kV, 1250:1
Additionally, the maximum inrush current will reach up to 5In, with 2nd harmonic component in the rage of 20~60% with respect to the fundamental.
The CT correction factors are calculated as:
HV side:
LV side:
Page (AP) 6-25
(AP) 6 Application Guide APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
The vector compensation can be set as per Table 4:
HV side: Yy0 (0 deg)
LV side: Yd1 (-30 deg)
There are two options regarding inrush: Restrain and Block.
If Block mode is selected, the default setting of Harmonic Ratio (15%) is appropriate.
If Restrain mode is selected, the multiplying factor Kr should be calculated based on the setting, inrush current and 2nd harmonic component.
It can be derived from the equations in 2.1.7.1 that to keep relay stable during transformer inrush, Kr should satisfy:
2.1.8
For the default P521 settings this gives the following Kr factors for different inrush levels.
Kr % Ih2
12%
15%
20%
25%
In summary, the relay could be set as below:
17
14
10
8
Setting parameter
Is 1
Is 2
K1
K2
Inrush Option
High Set
Kr
(for Inrush Option = Restrain)
Harmonic Ratio
(for Inrush Option = Block)
Transient Bias
CT Correction factor
Vector compensation
HV side
0.2 In
2.00 In
30 %
150 %
Restrain/Block
7
10
15%
Yes
6.10
Yy0 (0 deg)
LV side
0.2 In
2.00 In
30 %
150 %
Restrain/Block
7
10
15%
Yes
1.82
Yd1 (-30 deg)
In Zone ‘Teed’ Loads
Many rural feeders have small fuse protected loads tapped off the line within the zone of protection. In most cases the load is small enough to be ignored when setting the
s1 threshold. The problem, however, is when a fault occurs downstream of the fuse. The current differential protection would assume the fault was on the feeder, instead of at the load, and may trip before the fuse has a chance to blow. This could cause considerable and unnecessary disruption to rest of the system.
To prevent this from occurring the operating time of the current differential element can be time delayed to grade with the fuse. The time delay can be either definite time (DMT) or Inverse time (ID MT), selectable in the “IDiff Delay Type” cell under PROTECTION G1
(G2) (G3) (G4)/ [87] Current Diff . If DMT is chosen, the relay can be set with a definite
Page (AP) 6-26 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
(AP) 6 Application Guide time delay setting. If, however, IDMT is chosen a curve and its associated TMS/Time dial can be selected to grade with the fuse. To reduce fault clearance times for heavy internal faults the IDMT delay type is preferable as the operating time reduces for larger fault currents.
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-27
(AP) 6 Application Guide
2.2
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection
The overcurrent and earth fault protection is provided as an alternative form of back-up protection. The P521 relay has four stages overcurrent and four stages of earth fault.
The first two stages have a selectable
DMT or DMT characteristic. The third and fourth stages have a DMT characteristic only. The overcurrent and earth fault protection can be selectively enabled or disabled in the “
>
” cell (Yes = enabled, No = disabled). A feature also exists whereby the protection can be enabled upon failure of the differential protection communication channel (select “backup” in the “
>
” cell).
The overcurrent protection stages are labeled
e>>>/t
e>>> and
e>>>>/t
e>>>>.
>/t
>,
>>/t
>>,
>>>/t
>>> and
>>>>/t
>>>>. The earth fault protection stages are labeled
e>/t
e>,
e>>/t
e>>,
Figure 7 shows the logic associated with the first stage phase overcurrent protection
(
>/t
>). Figure 8 shows the logic for overcurrent stages two, three and four (logic is
duplicated for each stage). The logic diagrams in Figure 7 and 8 are identical, which is why the earth fault logic is not shown.
Page (AP) 6-28
Figure 7 - First stage phase overcurrent protection (
>/t
>) logic
P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
(AP) 6 Application Guide
P521/EN AP/Ca4
Figure 8 - Logic for overcurrent stages two, three and four
Note Both the overcurrent and earth fault protection operate from only the fundamental component of the line current.
The overcurrent and earth fault elements will need to be co-ordinated with any other protection elements on the system, in order to provide discriminative fault clearance. The
overcurrent menu column is shown in Table 5 below followed by the earth fault settings in
[50/51] Phase OC
>
>
> Delay Type t
>
> Curve
Default Setting
No
1
n
DMT
40 ms
EC S
Yes, No, Backup
0.1
n
Min
DMT,
DMT, R
25
n
Max
0.01
0.01 s
0.025
0.05
n
0.01 s
Step n
0 s 150 s 0.01 s
EC ST
,
EC S
,
EC V
,
EC E
,
EC LT
, CO2,
EEE
M
, CO8,
EEE V
,
EEE E
0.025 1.5 0.025
> Tms
> Time Dial
K
Reset Type
1
1
0.1
DMT
0.1
0.1
DMT
100
10
DMT
100 s tReset 40 ms 40 ms
Rtms
>
0.025
No
0.025
Yes, No, Backup
3.2
>> 1
n 0.5
n
{Remaining
>> cells are identical to
> above}
>>>
No Yes, No, Backup
40
n
20
n 0.5
n 40
n
>>> t
>>>
>>>>
>>>>
10 ms
No
20
n
0 s
Yes, No, Backup
0.5
n
150 s
40
n
0.1
0.005
N/A
0.05
0.05
n n
Page (AP) 6-29
(AP) 6 Application Guide APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
[50/51] Phase OC t
>>>>
Default Setting
10 ms 0 s
Table 5 - Overcurrent protection settings
Min
150 s
Max Step
0.01 s
t
[50N/51N] E/Gnd e> e> e> Delay Type e>
e> Curve
Default Setting
Yes
0.1
en*,
0.01
en**,
0.002
en***
DMT
40 ms
EC S
Min Max
Yes, No, Backup
0.1
en*,
0.01
en**,
0.002
en***
25
en*,
1
en**,
1
en***
DMT,
DMT, R
, LABOR
0.01
0.005
Step en*,
en**,
0.001***
0 s 150 s 0.01 s
EC ST
,
EC S
,
EC V
,
EC E
,
EC LT
, CO2,
EEE
M
, CO8,
EEE E
; 1, 2, 3
e> Tms
e> Time Dial
1
1
0.025
0.1
1.5
100
K
Reset Type
0.1
DMT
0.1
DMT
10
DMT
100 s tReset 40 ms 40 ms
Rtms 0.025 0.025 3.2
e>>
No Yes, No, Backup
e>> 1
n
0.5
en*,
0.01
en**,
0.002
en***
{Remaining
e>> cells are identical to
e> above}
40
en*,
8
en**,
1
en***
e>>> e>>>
No
1
n
Yes, No, Backup
0.5
en*,
0.01
en**,
0.002
en***
40
en*,
8
en**,
1
en***
t
e>>> e>>>> e>>>>
10 ms
No
20
n
0 s 150 s
Yes, No, Backup
0.5
en*,
0.01
en**,
0.002
en***
40
en*,
8
en**,
1
en*** t
e>>>>
*
**
***
10 ms 0 s 150 s denotes the standard earth fault board (0.1 to 40
en) denotes the sensitive earth fault board (0.01 to 8
en) denotes the very sensitive earth fault board (0.002 to 1
en)
0.025
0.1
0.005
N/A
0.01 s
0.025
0.01
0.005
en**,
0.001
en***
0.01
0.01
en*,
0.005
en**,
0.001
en***
0.01s en*, en*,
0.005
en**,
0.001
en***
0.01 s
Table 6 - Earth fault protection settings
Page (AP) 6-30 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.3.1
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Instantaneous (Start) Function (50/50N)
As soon as a phase (earth) threshold is exceeded, the instantaneous (start) output associated with this threshold is active. This output indicates that the protection has detected a phase (earth) fault and that the time delay associated with the threshold has started. This time delay can be blocked via the logic input "Blk Log" associated with this threshold. If this blocking input is activated by an output contact of a downstream relay, operation is blocked so that the relay closest to the fault can trip. This principle is known as «Blocking logic» or merely «Blocking». It is described in more detail later in this document.
Definite Time Operation (DMT)
The four phase (earth) overcurrent thresholds can be selected with a definite time delay.
The operating time is equal to the set time delay, plus the operating time of the output contact (typically 20 to 30 ms; 20 ms for a current greater than or equal to twice the threshold) and the time required to detect the overcurrent state (maximum 20 ms at 50 Hz and 16.7 ms at 60 Hz).
DMT Thresholds
Inverse Time Curves
The first and second phase (earth) overcurrent thresholds can be selected with an inverse time characteristic (
DMT). There are eleven
DMT characteristics in total. The operating time for all but the RI curve can be calculated with the following equation. The sensitive earth fault protection (0.01 to 8
en) has 3 additional LABORELEC curves.
These are explained in section 2.2.4.
t = T x
K
(
/
s)
- 1
+ L
Where: t = Operating time (seconds)
K
= Value of measured current
S
= Value of the selected threshold (Pick-up value)
L = ANSI/IEEE coefficient (zero for
EC curves)
T = Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for
EC curves or Time Dial for
EEE/CO2/CO8 curves.
Type of Curve
EC STI (Short Time Inverse)
EC SI (Standard Inverse)
EC VI (Very Inverse)
EC EI (Extremely Inverse)
UK LTI (Long Time Inverse)
CO2 (Short Time Inverse)
EEE MI (Moderately Inverse)
CO8 (Inverse)
EEE VI (Very Inverse)
Standard
EC
EC
EC
EC
UK
CO2
ANSI/
EEE
CO8
ANSI/
EEE
K Factor
0.05
0.14
13.5
80
120
0.02394
0.0515
5.95
19.61
Factor
0.04
0.02
1
2
1
0.02
0.02
2
2
L Factor
0
0
0
0
0
0.01694
0.114
0.18
0.491
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-31
(AP) 6 Application Guide
2.2.4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
Type of Curve
EEE EI (Extremely Inverse)
Standard
ANSI/
EEE
Table 7 -
DMT characteristic coefficients
K Factor
28.2 2
Factor L Factor
0.1215
The operating time for the RI curve (electromechanical) is given by the following formula: t = K x
1
0.339 - 0.236 /(
/
s)
With K adjustable from 0.10 to 10 in steps of 0.05
This equation is valid for 1.1<= ( I / I s) <= 20
Although the curves tend towards infinity, as the current approaches Is, the minimum guaranteed current, for all inverse time characteristics, is 1.1
s (with a tolerance of
0.05
s). If DMT (definite time characteristic) is chosen the minimum operating current is equal to the selected threshold, which also has a tolerance of
0.05
s.
Laborelec Curves
The first and second earth thresholds (sensitive version only) can be selected with one of three dedicated Laborelec curves.
The three Laborelec curves have the following formula: t = a
+ b
Where: t a and b
I
=
=
=
Operating time (seconds)
Primary residual current
Type of Curve
LABORELEC 1
LABORELEC 2
LABORELEC 3
– 0.0897
– 0.0897
– 0.0897
Table 8 - Laborelec curve coefficients a
4.0897
4.5897
5.0897 b
In order to be compliant with the Laborelec specifications the relay must be used with:
An earth current range of 0.01
en to 8
en
A rated current of 1 A
A core balanced CT with a ratio of 20/1.
For a complete operating curve, the relay must be set to 0.05
en (secondary residual current).
Page (AP) 6-32 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
2.2.5
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Reset Timer
The first and second phase and earth overcurrent stages in the P521 relay are provided with a timer hold facility "t Reset", which may be set to a definite time value or to an inverse time characteristic (IEEE/ANSI curves only). This may be useful in certain applications when the current differential protection has failed. For example, when grading with upstream electromechanical overcurrent relays which have inherent reset time delays.
Another possible situation where the timer hold facility may be used to reduce fault clearance times is where intermittent faults occur when the current differential protection has failed. An example of this may occur in a plastic insulated cable. In this application it is possible that the fault energy melts and reseals the cable insulation, thereby extinguishing the fault. This process repeats to give a succession of fault current pulses, each of increasing duration with reducing intervals between the pulses, until the fault becomes permanent. If the reset timer had been set to minimum the relay would repeatedly reset and not be able to trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the
Timer Hold facility the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time.
If the first and second phase (earth) threshold is selected with an IDMT IEC or RI curve, the reset timer "t Reset" has a definite time characteristic, settable between 40 ms and
100 s in steps of 10 ms. The reset time “tReset” can be found in the following locations:
PROTECTION G1 (G2) (G3) (G4)/[50/51] Phase OC /t Reset and
PROTECTION G1 (G2) (G3) (G4)/[50N/51N] E/Gnd /t Reset
If the first phase (earth) threshold is selected with an IDMT IEEE or CO curve, the reset timer can be set either DMT or ID MT in the “Reset Type” cell. If DMT is chosen the reset time becomes definite time with the time set in the "t Reset" cell. If IDMT is chosen the reset time is based upon an inverse curve which is current dependent. A time multiplier
“Rtms” can also be applied to this curve so that it can be tailored to the application. The reset function menu cells are located as follows:
PROTECTION G1 (G2) (G3) (G4)/[50/51] Phase OC /Reset Type
PROTECTION G1 (G2) (G3) (G4)/[50/51] Phase OC /t Reset (if Reset Type = DMT)
PROTECTION G1 (G2) (G3) (G4)/[50/51] Phase OC /Rtms (if Reset Type =
DMT) and
PROTECTION G1 (G2) (G3) (G4)/[50N/51N] E/Gnd /Reset Type
PROTECTION G1 (G2) (G3) (G4)/[50N/51N] Phase OC /t Reset (if Reset Type =
DMT)
PROTECTION G1 (G2) (G3) (G4)/[50N/51N] Phase OC /Rtms (if Reset Type =
DMT)
The
DMT reset time is dependent upon the chosen operating time curve and the selected “Rtms” value. The
DMT reset time formula, applicable to the 5 CO/ANSI/IEEE curves, is as follows: t = T x
K
1 - (
/
s)
2
Where: t =
K =
Reset time
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-33
(AP) 6 Application Guide
2.2.6
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
=
S
=
T =
Value of the measured current
Value of the selected threshold (pick-up value)
Reset Time Multiplier (Rtms) between 0.025 and 3.2
Type of Curves
CO2 (Short time inverse)
IEEE MI (Moderately inverse)
CO8 (Inverse)
IEEE VI (Very inverse)
IEEE EI (Extremely inverse)
Table 9 - Reset curve coefficients
Standard
CO2
ANSI/IEEE
CO8
ANSI/IEEE
ANSI/IEEE
K Factor
2.261
4.85
5.95
21.6
29.1
Time Graded Protection
Inverse definite minimum time relays are time graded such that the relay nearer to the fault operates faster than the upstream relays. This is referred to as relay co-ordination because if the relay nearest to the fault fails operate, the upstream relay will trip in a slightly longer time. The time grading steps are typically 400 ms, therefore the operating time for each upstream relay becomes progressively longer.
Where difficulty is experienced in arranging the required time grading steps the use of a blocked overcurrent scheme should be considered (described in a later section).
Page (AP) 6-34 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
2.3
2.3.1
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Thermal Overload Protection
Thermal overload protection can be used to prevent electrical plant from operating at temperatures in excess of the designed maximum withstand. Prolonged overloading causes excessive heating, which may result in premature deterioration of the insulation, or in extreme cases, insulation failure.
The MiCOM P521 incorporates a current based thermal replica, using the RMS load current to model the heating and cooling of the protected plant. The element can be set with both alarm and trip stages.
The heat generated within an item of plant, such as a cable or a transformer, is created by the resistive loss (
2 R x t). Thus, heating is directly proportional to current squared.
The thermal time characteristic used in the relay is therefore based on current squared, integrated over time. MiCOM relays automatically use the largest phase current for input to the thermal model.
Equipment is designed to operate continuously at a temperature corresponding to its full load rating, where heat generated is balanced with heat dissipated by radiation etc. Overtemperature conditions therefore occur when currents in excess of rating are allowed to flow for a period of time. It can be shown that temperatures during heating follow exponential time constants and a similar exponential decrease of temperature occurs during cooling.
In order to apply this protection element, the thermal time constant for the protected item of plant is therefore required. The settings associated with the thermal menu are shown in
Table 10. These settings can found under
PROTECTION G1 (G2) (G3) (G4)/[49] Therm
OL .
[49] Thermal OL
Therm OL
>
Te
Default Setting
No
1
n
1 mn
Min
Yes, No
0.1
n
1 mn
K
Trip
Alarm
Alarm
1.05
100%
No
90%
Table 10 - Thermal overload settings
1
50%
Yes, No
50%
Max
3.2
n
200 mn
1.5
200%
200%
0.01
n
1 mn
0.01
1%
1%
Step
The following sections will show that different items of plant possess different thermal characteristics, due to the nature of their construction.
Thermal Overload Characteristic
This characteristic is used to protect cables, dry type transformers (e.g. type AN), and capacitor banks. When protecting these devices, the trip time varies depending on the load current carried before application of the overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from “hot” or “cold”.
Curves of the thermal overload time characteristic are given in the Technical Data and
Curve Characteristics ( P521/EN TD ) section of the service manual.
The operating time of the thermal element is given by:
Ttrip = Te. log e
K
2
-
( p/
>
K
2
- Trip
2
) 2
With:
Ttrip = Time to trip (in seconds).
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-35
(AP) 6 Application Guide
2.3.2
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
Te =
K =
eq =
> =
Thermal time constant of the protected element (in seconds).
Thermal overload equal to
eq/k
>.
Equivalent current, corresponds to the RMS value of the largest phase current. k
p
=
=
Thermal current setting.
Overload factor by which the determine the trip threshold.
> setting must be multiplied to
Trip =
Steady state pre-loading before application of the overload.
Trip thermal state. If the trip thermal state is set at 100%, then Trip = 1
The calculation of the thermal state is given by the following formula:
+
= ( eq/ I
>) 2 [1- exp(-t/Te)] +
exp(-t/Te)
being calculated every 100 ms
Setting Guidelines
The thermal trip level in terms of current can be determined as follows:
Thermal trip =
Trip x K
2
x 1
>
100
Note The ‘Trip’ setting must be entered as a percentage i.e. 90 for 90%.
There are two methods of setting the
> and ‘k’ settings in the P521. The selected method may depend upon company standards or personal preference. This also assumes that the ‘Trip’ value is set to 100%.
The first method assumes that the
> setting is set to the maximum current that the plant can withstand before it becomes damaged. This is normally greater than the permissible continuous load current. In this case the plant can not tolerate any further loading, which means the overload factor ‘k’ should be set to 1. Hence the thermal trip level, in amps, will be equal to
>.
If, however, the
> setting was set equal to the permissible continuous load current, an overload factor ‘k’ may be applied, since it is likely that the plant has been designed to tolerate a current in excess of this amount. For example, if a line has a permissible continuous load current of 762 A (
>’.
> setting), but the line can actually tolerate 800 A, the
‘k’ factor can set to 1.05 (800 A/762 A). Hence the thermal trip level, in amps, will be ‘k x
The thermal trip threshold can also be modified by the ‘Trip’ setting if necessary. This sets the thermal threshold in terms of the thermal state (i.e. a percentage). If the ‘Trip’ threshold is set to 100% the relay will operate a thermal state of K 2 x 100%. For example, if the relay is has a ‘K’ factor of 1.05 and ‘Trip’ threshold of 100% the relay will trip at a thermal state of 110% (1.05
2 x 100%).
The relay also has a thermal alarm that can be used to indicate that the trip threshold has almost been exceeded. The alarm is also set in terms of the thermal state, as with the
‘Trip’ setting. It is common to set the alarm lower than the trip threshold (say 90%) in order to give a warning of an impending overload. Much like the ‘Trip’ setting the alarm threshold is also modified by the ‘K’ factor. Hence the actual alarm message will occur at
K 2 x alarm setting.
The thermal state can be viewed in MEASUREMENTS/Current/General/Thermal
. If necessary the thermal state can be manually reset by pressing the (C) key when in this cell. The thermal state can also be reset by energizing an opto input that has been assigned to the ‘ Reset’ command (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs/Input #) .
Page (AP) 6-36 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Note The thermal state is stored in none-volatile memory. In the event of a DC supply interruption the thermal state, prior to the interruption, will be recovered once the DC has been restored.
As mentioned earlier, to accurately model thermal characteristics of a piece of plant, it is necessary to set a thermal time constant. The manufacturer of the plant should be able to supply this information but some typical time constants are given in the following tables.
Paper insulated lead sheathed cables or polyethylene insulated cables, placed above ground or in conduits. The table shows the time constant in minutes, for different cable rated voltages and conductor cross-sectional areas:
CSA mm 2
25 - 50
70 - 120
150
185
240
300
10
15
25
25
40
40
6 -11 kV
15
25
40
40
40
60
22 kV 33 kV
40
40
40
60
60
60
Time Constant Te (Minutes)
-
60
60
60
60
90
66 kV
Other Plant Items:
Dry-type transformers
Air-core reactors
Capacitor banks
Time Constant
(Minutes)
40
60 – 90
40
10
Overhead lines
Busbars
10
60
Limits
Rating < 400 kVA
Rating 400 - 800 kVA
Cross section
100 mm 2 Cu or 150 mm 2 Al
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-37
(AP) 6 Application Guide
2.4
2.4.1
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (CBF)
Following inception of a fault one or more main protection devices will operate and issue a trip output to the circuit breaker(s) associated with the faulted circuit. Operation of the circuit breaker is essential to isolate the fault, and prevent damage/further damage to the power system.
For transmission/sub-transmission systems, slow fault clearance can also threaten system stability. It is therefore common practice to install Circuit Breaker Failure (CBF) protection, which monitors that the circuit breaker has opened within a reasonable time.
If the fault current has not been interrupted following a set time delay from circuit breaker trip initiation, CBF protection will operate.
CBF operation can be used to backtrip upstream circuit breakers to ensure that the fault is isolated correctly. CBF operation can also reset all start output contacts, ensuring that any blocks asserted on upstream protection are removed.
The settings associated with the circuit breaker fail protection is shown in Table 11. They
can be found in AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Fail.
CB Fail
CB Fail
<
Default Setting
No
0.1
n
Min
0.02
n
CB Fail Time tBF
Block
>
Block
e>
100 ms
No
No
Table 11 - Circuit breaker fail settings
30 ms
Max
1
n
Yes, No
10 s
Yes, No
Yes, No
Step
0.01
n
0.01 s
Circuit Breaker Failure Protection Operation
When a trip order is given through the output relay RL1, the t BF timer is started. The trip order can be issued either from a protection element, or a logic input. In order to initiate the tBF timer by a logic input the ‘Start tBF’ command must be assigned to that input
(AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs/Input #) . The MiCOM relay then monitors the currents in each phase and compares them with the zone defined by the undercurrent
< threshold (not to be confused with the [37] under current protection function). This threshold value is settable within the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Fail menu .
Following the start of the t BF timer, the relay detects the first time that current goes out of the
< zone. On detection of this transition, the relay starts another timer which has a nonsettable duration of 20 samples.
Since the relay sampling rate is 32 samples by cycle, this timer duration is 12.5 ms for a
50 Hz system and 10.4 ms for a 60 Hz system. During this time, the relay is checking if the current goes out of the
< zone again. In the case where the current is not switched off (CB has failed to trip), the current signal should again go out of the
< zone at a time equal to 16 samples after the former detection (i.e. half a cycle).
Each time the relay detects the current going out of the
< zone, the relay once again starts a timer which has a duration of 20 samples and it checks if the current goes out of the
< zone once again.
In the window of 20 samples, the relay checks that the current signal going out of the
< zone is in the opposite direction.
•
If there is no current signal going out in the opposite direction within the 20 sample duration, the relay states that the CB pole has opened. The « CB pole open » internal signal is then initiated.
Page (AP) 6-38 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
(AP) 6 Application Guide
•
If there is a current signal going out in opposite direction within the 20 sample duration the relay states that the CB pole has not yet opened. The « CB pole closed » internal signal is maintained.
Once the t BF time delay has elapsed, the relay checks the status of the « CB pole » internal signal for each pole of the circuit breaker. If one or more internal signals indicate that their CB poles have not yet opened, the relay initiates the CB FAIL signal. The CB fail signal can be arranged to remove the start signals of the
> and
e> elements, in order to remove blocking signals from any upstream protection. Alternatively, the CB fail signal can operate a selectable contact (AUTOMAT. CTRL/ Output relays/ CB Fail) .
This contact can be used to backtrip upstream switchgear, generally tripping all infeeds connected to the same busbar section.
To remove the
> and
e> start signals once the breaker fail timer has elapsed the following cells must be set to ‘Yes’:
AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Fail/Block
>
and
AUTOMAT. CTRL /CB Fail/Block
e>
As mentioned earlier the CB fail timer can be started by an external input that can be connected to external protection equipment. Note the option to start the CB fail detection function by a digital input (labeled Strt TBF) without a trip order given by the MiCOM relay. In this case the tBF timer starts from the digital input. If the CB is not opened (by an another protection relay) at the end of tBF, the MiCOM relay outputs the CB FAIL signal.
It is possible to automatically send a direct intertrip command to the remote relay whenever a CB fail condition occurs. This is enabled by selecting ‘Yes’ in the “I-Trip CB
Fail” cell ( AUTOMAT. CTRL/I-Trip Commands ).
Figure 9 shows a CB Fail detection start following a trip command:
P521/EN AP/Ca4
Figure 9 - CB fail detection principle
Figure 10 shows a normal CB operation before tBF expires. No CB fail signal is given.
Page (AP) 6-39
(AP) 6 Application Guide APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
Figure 10 - CB open before TBF expired
Figure 11 shows a CB failure condition. At the drop off of the t BF timer, the relay has not
detected an opening of the CB pole, hence a CB FAIL signal is initiated.
Page (AP) 6-40
Figure 11 - CB not yet open before TBF expired
Figure 12 shows another case of normal CB operation. On fault clearance, the removal of
the phase current signal takes time, often due to the de-energization of the phase CT.
This is a typical case for TPY class CTs which are built with an air gap in their magnetic core. Before the drop off of the t BF timer, the relay has detected an opening of the CB pole, thus no CB failure signal is given. A basic Breaker Failure element based on a simple undercurrent element would detect a false CB failure condition as the current signal value is still outside the
< zone after the t BF timer has elapsed.
Note Both « CB pole closed » and « CB pole opened » internal signals mentioned in the above diagrams are derived from the Circuit Breaker Failure function algorithm. They are not affected by the status of the relay opto-inputs wired to the 52a and 52b CB auxiliary contacts.
P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
(AP) 6 Application Guide
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
Figure 12 - De-energization of the phase CT
Breaker Fail Timer Settings
A typical timer setting used with a 2½ cycle circuit breaker is around 150 ms.
Breaker Fail Undercurrent Settings
The phase undercurrent settings (
<) must be set to less than load current, to ensure that
< operation indicates that the circuit breaker pole is open. A typical setting for overhead lines or cable circuits is 20%
n.
CBF Fail Logic
Figure 13 shows the logic associated with circuit breaker failure protection.
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-41
(AP) 6 Application Guide APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
Page (AP) 6-42
Figure 13 - Circuit breaker failure protection logic
P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
2.5
2.5.1
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Broken Conductor Detection
The majority of faults on a power system occur between one phase and ground or two phases and ground. These are known as shunt faults and arise from lightning discharges and other overvoltages which initiate flashovers. Alternatively, they may arise from other causes such as birds on overhead lines or mechanical damage to cables etc. Such faults result in an appreciable increase in current and in the majority of applications are easily detectable.
Another type of unbalanced fault, which can occur on the system, is the series or open circuit fault. These can arise from broken conductors, maloperation of single phase switchgear, or the operation of fuses. Series faults will not cause an increase in phase current on the system and hence are not readily detectable by standard overcurrent relays. However, they will produce an unbalance and a resultant level of negative phase sequence current, which can be detected.
It is possible to apply a negative phase sequence overcurrent relay to detect the above condition. However, on a lightly loaded line, the negative sequence current resulting from a series fault condition may be very close to, or less than, the full load steady state unbalance arising from CT errors, load unbalance etc. A negative sequence element therefore would not operate at low load levels.
The MiCOM P521 relay incorporates an element which measures the ratio of negative to positive phase sequence current (
2/
1). This will be affected to a lesser extent than the measurement of negative sequence current alone, since the ratio is approximately constant with variations in load current. Hence, a more sensitive setting may be achieved.
The settings associated with the broken conductor detection is shown in Table 12 below.
Broken Conductor Default Setting
Brkn. Cond
No tBC
Ratio
2/
1
1 s
20%
Min
Yes, No
0 s
20%
Table 12 - Broken conductor detection settings
Max
14400 s
100%
1 s
1%
Step
Setting Guidelines
In the case of a single point earthed power system, there will be little zero sequence current flow and the ratio of
2/
1 that flows in the protected circuit will approach 100%. In the case of a multiple earthed power system (assuming equal impedances in each sequence network), the ratio
2/
1 will be 50%.
It is possible to calculate the ratio of
2/
1 that will occur for varying system impedances, by referring to the following equations:
1F
=
E g
(Z
2
+ Z
0
)
Z
1
Z
2
+ Z
1
Z
0
+ Z
2
Z
0
Where:
E g
=
Z
0
=
Z
1
=
2F
=
-E g
Z
0
Z
1
Z
2
+ Z
1
Z
0
+ Z
2
Z
0
System Voltage
Zero sequence impedance
Positive sequence impedance
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-43
(AP) 6 Application Guide
2.5.2
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
Z
2
= Negative sequence impedance
Therefore:
2F
1F
=
Z
0
Z
0
+ Z
2
It follows that, for an open circuit in a particular part of the system,
2/
1 can be determined from the ratio of zero sequence to negative sequence impedance. It must be noted however, that this ratio may vary depending upon the fault location. It is desirable therefore to apply as sensitive a setting as possible. In practice, this minimum setting is governed by the levels of standing negative phase sequence current present on the system. This can be determined from a system study, or by making use of the relay measurement facilities at the commissioning stage. If the latter method is adopted, it is important to take the measurements during maximum system load conditions, to ensure that all single phase loads are accounted for.
Since sensitive settings are employed, it can be expected that the element will operate for any unbalance condition occurring on the system (for example, during a single pole autoreclose cycle). Therefore, a long time delay is necessary to ensure co-ordination with other protective devices. A 60 second time delay setting may be typical.
Example Setting
The following information was recorded by the relay during commissioning;
full load
2 =
=
50 A
500 A
Therefore the quiescent
2/
1 ratio is given by:
2/
1 = 50/500 = 0.1
To allow for tolerances and load variations a setting of 200% of this value may be typical:
Therefore set RATIO
2/
1 = 20%
Set tBC = 60 s to allow adequate time for short circuit fault clearance by time delayed protections.
Page (AP) 6-44 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
2.6
2.6.1
Intertripping Facilities
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Permissive Intertrip
The P521 relay includes a facility to send a permissive intertrip command over the
protection communication channel, as shown in Figure 14.
P521/EN AP/Ca4
Figure 14 - Permissive intertrip
An opto input can be assigned for this purpose (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs/Input # ext/
Permis
T) . When the associated opto input is energized at END B, the P
T flag is set in the communication message. On receipt of this message the relay at END A (receiving end) initiates the P
T timer. When this timer expires, the receiving end relay will operate user-specified output contact(s), as selected in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Output
Relays/P
T menu cell, conditional on the current check if enabled. The receiving end relay provides the “PERMISSIVE” electrical system alarm indicating a permissive intertrip has occurred.
The permissive intertrip timer “P T Time” is settable between 0 ms and 2 s. For standard permissive intertrip functionality, this time should be set to provide discrimination with
other protection. For example, in Figure 14, the time delay should be set to allow the
busbar protection to clear the fault in the event of a genuine busbar fault. A typical setting may be 100 – 150 ms.
If the current check is enabled , the receiving end relay can be set using the “P
T
Selection” menu cell, to either check the sending end (=“Remote”) current against a preconfigured threshold, or check the receiving end (=“Local”) overcurrent and/or earth fault stages’ start statuses. When “Remote” is selected, the receiving end relay will operate the user-specified PIT output contact(s) if any of the sending end phase currents is above the value of the receiving end “P
T
Threshold” setting. When “Local” is selected, the receiving end relay will operate the user-specified PIT output contact(s) if any of the selected receiving end overcurrent or earth fault stages have started. The selection of overcurrent and earth fault stages for this check is made using the “P T OC Stages” setting. This local current check facility is intended to allow PIT functionality to be applied to sensitive earth fault systems.
In some circumstances it may be desirable to disable the current check from the P
T function. This would give the user a second multipurpose direct intertrip if required.
Disabling the current check facility makes the P
“P
T
Disable” menu cell.
T function operate much the same as the
Direct Intertrip command. The current check can be disabled by selecting ‘Yes’ in the
•
The P
T function menu cells are located as follows:
▪ PROTECTION G1 (G2) (G3) (G4)/[87] Current Diff /P
T Time
Page (AP) 6-45
(AP) 6 Application Guide
2.6.2
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
▪
▪
▪
▪
PROTECTION G1 (G2) (G3) (G4)/[87] Current Diff /P
T
Disable
PROTECTION G1 (G2) (G3) (G4)/[87] Current Diff /P
T
Selection
PROTECTION G1 (G2) (G3) (G4)/[87] Current Diff /P
T OC Stages
PROTECTION G1 (G2) (G3) (G4)/[87] Current Diff /P
T
Threshold
Direct Intertrip
This is an example of user defined intertripping. The P521 relay includes a facility to send a direct intertrip command over the protection communication channel as shown in
Transformer protection
DDT = 1
P1022ENa
Figure 15 - Direct intertrip
An opto input can be assigned for this purpose. When energized, the DIT flag is set in the communication message. Upon receipt of this message the receiving end remote relay will operate user specified output contact(s) for a time not less than the value in the
“DIT Rx tDwell” cell ( PROTECTION G1 (G2) (G3) (G4)/[87] Current Diff ). The receiving end remote relay will also provide indication of the direct intertrip by displaying the
“DIRECT I-TRIP” system alarm.
Page (AP) 6-46 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
2.6.3
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Programmable Inter-Trip
In certain applications it may be desirable to send a digital signal to the remote end. For example, operation of overcurrent or earth fault protection will trip the local circuit breaker, but not the remote side. To initiate a remote trip, a digital signal should be transferred. Another example is circuit breaker operation inter-locking. As shown in
Figure 16, when try to close the circuit breaker at End A, it is necessary to obtain the
status of the earth switch at End B. Some users will also take into accounting the voltage signal status at End B. These signals can be collected by the P521 at End B and transferred to End A via the digital link.
ES ES
CB P521 P521 CB
End A End B
Voltage relay
Voltage relay
P4970ENa
Figure 16 - Digital signal transfer
Since software version 12.A, P521 relay provides totally four programmable inter-trip signals. User can initiate any of the four programmable inter-trips by using of the
“Program. I-Trip” menu under AUTOMAT. CTRL. By selecting a given function, the relay will initiate an inter-trip command when that function operates. The list of available
functions that can be selected is shown in Table 13:
I-Trip Commands
I-Trip tI>
I-Trip tI>>
I-Trip tI>>>
I-Trip tI>>>>
I-Trip tIe>
I-Trip tIe>>
I-Trip tIe>>>
I-Trip tIe>>>>
I-Trip Thermal
I-Trip tI<
I-Trip tI2>
I-Trip tI2>>
I-Trip CB Fail
I-Trip Brkn. Cond
I-Trip tAux1
I-Trip tAux2
I-Trip Input 1
I-Trip Input 2
I-Trip Input 3
I-Trip Input 4
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Default Setting
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Settings
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-47
(AP) 6 Application Guide APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
I-Trip Commands
I-Trip Input 5
I-Trip Equ A
I-Trip Equ B
I-Trip Equ C
I-Trip Equ D
I-Trip Equ E
I-Trip Equ F
I-Trip Equ G
I-Trip Equ H
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Default Setting
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Settings
Table 13 - Programmable I-Trip Command menu
After an Inter-trip signal is received, the relay will generate an event, but will not raise any
Alarm. The received inter-trip signal can be mapped to output relays, LEDs and logic equations.
A time dwell setting is provided, which can be used to adjust the output width upon receiving an inter-trip signal.
Note 1
Note 2
Programmable Inter-trip function will work only when the relays are set in
Extension communication mode in the menu
COMMUNICATION/Protection/FRAME MODE.
Since software version V12.A, the “Selective inter-tripping” menu is removed, as its function can be fully implemented by the programmable inter-trip commands.
Page (AP) 6-48 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
2.7
2.7.1
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection
When applying traditional phase overcurrent protection, the overcurrent elements must be set higher than maximum load current, thereby limiting the element’s sensitivity. Most protection schemes also use an earth fault element operating from residual current, which improves sensitivity for earth faults. However, certain faults may arise which can remain undetected by such schemes.
Any unbalanced fault condition will produce negative sequence current of some magnitude. Thus, a negative phase sequence overcurrent element can operate for both phase-to-phase and phase to earth faults.
This section describes how negative phase sequence overcurrent protection may be applied in conjunction with standard overcurrent and earth fault protection in order to alleviate some less common application difficulties.
•
Negative phase sequence overcurrent elements give greater sensitivity to resistive phase-to-phase faults, where phase overcurrent elements may not operate.
•
In certain applications, residual current may not be detected by an earth fault relay due to the system configuration. For example, an earth fault relay applied on the delta side of a delta-star transformer is unable to detect earth faults on the star side. However, negative sequence current will be present on both sides of the transformer for any fault condition, irrespective of the transformer configuration.
Therefore, a negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be employed to provide time-delayed back-up protection for any un-cleared asymmetrical faults.
•
Where rotating machines are protected by fuses, a blown fuse produces a large amount of negative sequence current. This is a dangerous condition for the machine due to the heating effects of negative phase sequence current at double frequency. A negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be applied to provide efficient back-up protection for dedicated motor protection relays.
•
It may also be required to simply alarm for the presence of negative phase sequence currents on the system. Operators are then prompted to investigate the cause of the unbalance.
The negative phase sequence overcurrent e lement has a current pick up setting ‘ 2>’, and is time delayed in operation by the adjustable timer ‘t 2> Delay Time.’
2> and
2>> Setting Guidelines
The current pick-up threshold (PROTECTION G1 (G2) (G3) (G4)/[46] Neg Seq OC menu) must be set higher than the normal negative phase sequence current due to the normal load unbalance on the system. This can be set at the commissioning stage, making use of the relay measurement function to display the standing negative phase sequence current, and apply a setting at least 20% above this figure.
Where the negative phase sequence element is required to operate for specific uncleared asymmetric faults, a precise threshold setting has to be based on an individual fault analysis for that particular system due to the complexities involved. However, to ensure operation of the protection, the current pick-up setting must be set approximately
20% below the lowest calculated negative phase sequence fault current for a specific remote fault condition.
The correct setting of the time delay for this function is vital. It should also be noted that this element is applied primarily to provide back-up protection to other protective devices or to provide an alarm. Therefore, it would be associated with a long time delay.
It must be ensured that the time delay is set greater than the operating time of any other protective device (at minimum fault level) on the system which may respond to unbalanced faults, such as:
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-49
(AP) 6 Application Guide APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
•
•
Phase overcurrent elements
Earth fault elements
•
•
Broken conductor elements
Negative phase sequence influenced thermal elements
The
2> element can be set to either DMT, IDMT, RI inverse or definite time delay in the
“ 2> Delay Type” cell. The
2>> threshold is definite time only. The
2 settings are located in the PROTECTION G1 (G2) (G3) (G4)/[46] Neg Seq OC menu . The time multiplier setting, time dial, curve selection and reset time, associated with the
2> threshold, are set in much the same way as the [50] phase overcurrent menu.
The settings associated with the negative sequence overcurrent protection are shown in
[46] Neg Seq OC
2>
2>
2> Delay Type t
2>
2> Curve
2> Tms
2> Time Dial
K
Reset Type tReset
Rtms
2>>
2>> t
2>>
Default Setting
No
1
n
DMT
0 ms
IEC S
1
0.1
0.1
DMT
40 ms
0.025
No
1
n
0 ms
Min Max
Yes, No
40
n
Step
0.1
n 0.01
n
0 s
DMT, IDMT, RI
150 s 0.01 s
IEC STI, IEC SI, IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE
MI, CO8, IEEE VI, IEEE EI
0.025 1.5 0.025
0.1
0.1
DMT
40 ms
0.025
0.1
0 s
n
100
10
IDMT
100 s
3.2
Yes, No
40
n
150 s
0.1
0.005
N/A
0.01 s
0.025
0.01
n
0.01 s
Table 14 - Negative sequence overcurrent settings
Page (AP) 6-50 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
2.8
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Undercurrent Protection Function
The MiCOM P521 relay includes two undercurrent elements, one of which is dedicated to the CB fail detection (see CB failure protection section). Another undercurrent element is provided as a protection function to detect loss of load conditions.
Protection
Undercurrent Elements
I a<
>=1 I b<
I c<
& RELAY I < TRIP
INPUT 52a
P2002ENb
Figure 17 - Undercurrent protection logic
The undercurrent protection function is available only if the 52a auxiliary contact, indicating the CB status, is connected to one of the 5 logic inputs in the relay. The chosen logic input should be energized via the 52a contact of the circuit breaker.
To allocate a logic input to the 52a auxiliary contact, ‘52a’ must be selected in the following location:
•
AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs/Input #/ 52a
An “ <” alarm is given when at least one of the 3 phase current falls below the
< threshold and the CB is closed (indicated by the 52a input). When the alarm condition has been present for longer than the set time t
<, one or more output relays can be energized.
See the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Trip Commands/ Trip t
< menu for the allocation of t
< to the trip output relay RL1.
See the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Output Relays/ t
< menu for the allocation of t
< to the auxiliary output relays RL2 to RL8.
Table 15 below shows the undercurrent protection settings:
[37] Undercurrent
<
< t
<
Default Setting
No
0.2
n
0 ms
Min
0.02
n
0 s
Table 15 - Undercurrent protection settings
Max
1
n
Yes, No
150 s
Step
0.01
n
0.01 s
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-51
(AP) 6 Application Guide
2.9
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
Blocked Overcurrent Protection
This type of protection is applicable for radial feeder circuits where there is a little or no back feed. However, for parallel feeders, ring circuits or where there can be a back feed from generators blocked overcurrent protection should not be used. In the case of the
P521, blocked overcurrent protection is more likely to be used for back-up purposes only.
Figure 18 shows a typical arrangement for blocked overcurrent protection.
This application relies on the up-stream IDMT relay being blocked by the start output from a down-stream relay that detects the presence of fault current above its setting. Both the up-stream and down-stream relays can then have the same current and time settings with grading being provided by the blocking feature. If the breaker failure protection is active, the block on the up-stream relay will be released if the down-stream circuit breaker fails to trip (see Circuit breaker failure section).
For a fault below relay C, the start contact from relay C will block operation of relay B.
Furthermore, the start contact of relay B will block operation of relay A. Hence all 3 relays could have the same time and current settings, with the grading being obtained by the blocking signal received from a relay closer to the fault. This gives a constant, close time grading, but there will be no back-up protection in the event of the pilots being short circuited.
It is important to note that there is a small window where operation may not occur with this arrangement. This occurs because the start relay picks-up at the current setting (
>), but the
DMT curve requires the current to be 1.05
> before it operates. Hence the upstream relay should have a slightly lower current setting than the downstream relay to prevent this situation arising. However, the up-stream relay may have an increased current flowing through it due to the load current for other feeders and this may provide a solution.
X
A
X
B
X
C
P1251ENa
Figure 18 - Blocked overcurrent scheme
The blocking functions can be allocated in the "Blocking Logic 1 or 2" functions in the
AUTOMAT. CTRL menu . For more information on blocking functions refer to the blocking functions section.
Page (AP) 6-52 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
2.10
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Selective Scheme Logic
The blocked overcurrent protection section describes the use of non-cascade protection schemes which use the start contacts from downstream relays to block operation of upstream relays. In the case of Selective Overcurrent Logic (SOL), the start contacts are used to temporarily increase the time delays of upstream relays, instead of blocking them. This provides an alternative approach to achieving a non-cascade type of overcurrent scheme. It may be more familiar to some utilities than the blocked overcurrent arrangement.
X
A
X
B
X
C
P1251ENa
Figure 19 - Typical scheme logic
The SOL function temporarily changes the time delay settings of the second, third and fourth stages of phase overcurrent and earth fault elements (
>>,
>>>,
>>>>,
e>>,
e>>> and
e>>>>) to the tSel1 or tSel2 timer settings. The choice of timers will depend upon which selective logic function is enabled, either Log Sel1 or Log Sel 2. The Log
Sel1 or Log Sel2 functions are enabled by selecting, then energizing, one of the 5 opto inputs (AUTOMAT.CTRL/Inputs/Input #) .
The Logic Select 1 settings (AUTOMAT. CTRL)
are shown in the Table 16 below. These
settings are identical to the Logic Select 2 menu.
Logic Select. 1 (2)
Sel1 t
>>
Sel1 t
>>>
Sel1 t
>>>>
Sel1 t
e>>
Sel1 t
e>>>
Sel1 t
e>>>> tsel1
Default Setting
No
No
No
No
No
No
0 ms 0 s
Table 16 - Selective logic settings
Note
Min Max
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
150 s
Step
0.01 s
Choosing ‘Yes’ selects the function to modified by the Logic Select function.
To allow time for a start contact to initiate a change of setting, the time settings of the second, third and fourth stages should include a nominal delay. Guidelines for minimum time settings are identical to those given for blocked overcurrent schemes.
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-53
(AP) 6 Application Guide
2.11
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
Cold Load Pick-Up
The cold load pickup feature enables the selected settings of the MiCOM P521 relay to be changed to cater for temporary overload conditions that may occur during cold starts, such as switching on large heating loads after a sufficient cooling period, or loads that draw high initial starting currents.
When a feeder is energized, the current levels for a period of time following energization may differ greatly from the normal load levels. Although this will not affect the current differential protection, the back-up overcurrent settings that have been applied may not be suitable during this period.
The Cold Load Pick-up (CLP) logic serves to raise the settings of selected stages for a selectable duration. This allows the protection settings to be set closer to the load profile by automatically increasing them after energization. The CLP logic provides stability, without compromising protection performance during starting. Note that any of the disabled overcurrent stages in the main relay menu will not appear in the Cold Load PU
Menu.
below shows the relay menu for the ‘ Cold Load Pick-up ’ logic, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults.
Cold Load PU
Cold Load PU
t
>
t
>>
t
>>>
t
>>>>
t
e>
t
e>>
t
e>>>
t
e>>>> t
2>
t
2>>
tTherm
Level tCL
No
No
No
No
No
50%
1 s
No
No
No
No
Default Setting
No
No
No
20%
0.1 s
Min Max
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
500%
3600 s
1%
0.1 s
Step
Table 17 - Cold load pick-up settings
The tCL timer controls the time for which the relevant overcurrent and earth fault settings are altered following an external input (e.g. circuit breaker closure). When the set tCL time has elapsed, all of the relevant settings revert back to their original values. The tCL timer is initiated via a dedicated logic input (refer to AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs/Input #/
Cold L PU ) signal generated by connecting an auxiliary contact from the circuit breaker or starting device to the relay’s opto-inputs.
The Level setting indicates by what percentage the current thresholds are modified. For example, a 0.8 A setting will be increased to 1.6 A if the Level setting is 200%.
The following sections describe applications where the CLP logic may be useful and the settings that need to be applied.
Page (AP) 6-54 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
2.11.1
2.11.2
2.11.3
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Air Conditioning/Resistive Heating Loads
Where a feeder is used to supply air conditioning or resistive heating loads there may be a conflict between the ‘steady state’ overcurrent settings and those required following energization. This is due to the temporary increase in load current that may arise during starting. The CLP logic is used to alter the applied settings during this time.
With the Cold Load PU enabled, the affected thresholds are selected to be adjusted for the required time to allow the start condition to subside. A percentage value is selected as the amount by which the selected threshold is increased/decreased.
The time for which the adjusted thresholds are valid is defined by the tCL setting. After this time, the settings return to normal.
It may not be necessary to alter the protection settings following a short supply interruption. In this case the CLP function is not activated.
Motor Feeders
In general, feeders supplying motor loads would be protected by a dedicated motor protection device, such as the MiCOM P220 or P241 relay. However, if no specific protection has been applied (possibly due to economic reasons) then the CLP function in the MiCOM P521 relay may be used to modify the overcurrent settings accordingly during starting.
Depending upon the magnitude and duration of the motor starting current, it may be sufficient to simply block operation of instantaneous elements or, if the start duration is long, the time delayed protection settings may also need to be raised. Hence, a combination of both blocking and raising of settings of the relevant overcurrent stages may be adopted. The CLP overcurrent settings in this case must be chosen with regard to the motor starting characteristic.
As previously described, the CLP logic includes the option of raising the current settings of the overcurrent and earth fault protection. This may be useful where instantaneous earth fault protection needs to be applied to the motor. During conditions of motor starting, it is likely that incorrect operation of the earth fault element would occur due to asymmetric CT saturation. This is a result of the high level of starting current causing saturation of one or more of the line CT’s feeding the overcurrent/earth fault protection.
The resultant transient imbalance in the secondary line current quantities is thus detected by the residually connected earth fault element. For this reason, it is normal to either apply a nominal time delay to the element, or to utilize a series stabilizing resistor.
The CLP logic may be used to allow reduced operating times or current settings to be applied to the earth fault element under normal running conditions. These settings could then be raised prior to motor starting, via the logic.
Earth Fault Protection Applied TO Transformers
Where an earth fault relay is residually connected on the primary side of a delta-star transformer, no time delay is required for co-ordination purposes, due to the presence of the delta winding. However, a nominal time delay or stabilizing resistor is recommended to ensure transient stability during transformer energization.
The CLP logic may be used in a similar manner to that previously described for the motor application.
It should be noted that this method will not provide stability in the event of asymmetric CT saturation which occurs as a result of an unbalanced fault condition. If problems of this nature are encountered, the best solution would still be the use of a stabilizing resistor.
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-55
(AP) 6 Application Guide
2.11.4
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
Switch OnTo Fault (SOTF) Protection
In some feeder applications, fast tripping may be required if a fault is present on the feeder when it is energized.
Such faults may be due to a fault condition not having been removed from the feeder, or due to earthing clamps having been left on following maintenance. In either case, it may be desirable to clear the fault condition in an accelerated time, rather than waiting for the time delay associated with
DMT overcurrent protection.
The above situation may be catered for by the CLP logic. Selected overcurrent/earth fault stages could be set to a lower threshold (typically 30% of the nominal threshold) for a defined period following circuit breaker closure (typically 200 ms). Hence, fault clearance would be achieved for a Switch OnTo Fault (SOTF) condition.
Page (AP) 6-56 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
3
3.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.3
(AP) 6 Application Guide
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
Auxiliary Timers (tAux 1 and tAux 2)
The active group can also be assigned to an output relay by selecting “Active Group” in
AUTOMAT.CRTL/OUTPUTS menu.
Setting Group Selection
The MiCOM P521 relay has four setting groups related to the protection functions named
PROTECTION G1 and G2 and G3 and G4. Only one group is active at any one time.
Changes between the groups are done via the front interface ( CONFIGURATION/Group
Select/Setting Group 1, 2 3 or 4) , a dedicated logic input ( AUTOMAT CTRL/Inputs/Input
#/Changeset ) where # is the chosen logic input or through the communication ports (refer to Communication Mapping Guide P521/EN GC for more detailed information).
The relative priority of the different ways of changing the active setting group is listed below:
ORIGIN OF THE ORDER
FRONT PANEL
LOGIC INPUT
REMOTE COMMUNICATION
HIGHEST
MEDIUM
LOWEST
PRIORITY LEVEL
To avoid nuisance tripping the setting group change is only executed when no protection function (except for current differential and thermal overload functions) or automation function is running. If a setting group change is received during any protection or automation function it is stored and executed after the last protection timer has elapsed.
The active group is displayed in the OP PARAMETERS menu.
The active group can also be assigned to an output relay by selecting “Active Group” in
AUTOMAT. CTRL/Output relays.
Change of Setting Group by a Logic Input
It is possible to configure how the digital inputs are activated, either on a falling edge/ low level or on a rising edge/ high level. The choice is made in the
CONFIGURATION / Configuration Inputs / Inputs menu (0=falling edge/ low level,
1=rising edge/ high level). The setting group input mode (EDGE or LEVEL) can be selected in the CONFIGURATION / Group Select / Change Group Input menu .
Manual Setting Group Change via Front Interface
The setting group can be selected to be 1, 2, 3 or 4 in the CONFIGURATION / Group
Select / Setting group menu. Manual changes can only be made if “EDGE” is selected in the “Change Group Input” cell.
Latch Functions
Following a protection trip the trip contact (RL1) remains closed until the current falls below the undercurrent threshold or for the “tOpen Pulse” time ( AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB
Supervision menu), whichever is the greater. Some applications, however, demand that the trip contact must latch following a protection trip. The MiCOM P521 caters for this requirement by allowing the user to latch RL1 after being operated by one or several thresholds. This means, for example, that RL1 can be latched for a current differential
trip, but could be selected not to latch for an overcurrent trip. Table 18 below shows the
“Latch Functions” menu; to latch a given function, following a trip, select “Yes”. Selecting
“No” means that the function will not be latched.
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-57
(AP) 6 Application Guide
3.4
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
Th e “Latch Functions” menu can be found under AUTOMAT. CTRL.
Latch Functions
Latch
diff
Latch Direct I-Trip
Latch C Diff I-Trip
Latch PIT
Latch t
>
Latch t
>>
Latch t
>>>
Latch t
>>>>
Latch t
e>
Latch t
e>>
Latch t
e>>>
Latch t
e>>>>
Latch t
<
Latch t
2>
Latch t
2>>
Latch Thermal
Latch Brkn. Cond
Latch t Aux 1
Latch t Aux 2
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Default Setting
Table 18 - Latch functions menu
The latched RL1 contact can be reset by reading ( ) and clearing ( C ) the relevant protection alarm.
Yes, No
Choices
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Blocking Functions
The P521 allows the user to block operation of any protection function by energizing a selected digital input. To block operation of a protection function the user must first select the function to be blocked, followed by a digital input to perform the block.
The Blocking Logic 1 and Blocking Logic 2 (AUTOMAT. CTRL) contain a list of protection functions that can be blocked. Selecting ‘Yes’ adds the chosen function to the list of
functions that will be blocked when the appropriate input is energized. Table 19 shows a
list of the protection functions available in the Blocking Logic 1 and Blocking Logic 2 menus.
Blocking Logic 1 (2)
Block
diff
Block t
>
Block t
>>
Block t
>>>
Block t
>>>>
Block t
e>
Block t
e>>
Block t
e>>>
Block t
e>>>>
Block t
2>
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Default Setting
Yes, No
Choices
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Page (AP) 6-58 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS (AP) 6 Application Guide
Blocking Logic 1 (2)
Block t
2>>
Block Therm
Block Brkn. Cond
Block t Aux 1
Block t Aux 2
No
No
No
No
No
Default Setting
Yes, No
Choices
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Table 19 - Blocking logic menu
Energizing the chosen digital input will block every protection function that has been selected. To perform the blocking function the digital input must be allocated to either Blk
Log 1 or Blk Log 2.
Figure 20 illustrates the blocking logic for selected protection features.
P521/EN AP/Ca4
Figure 20 - Blocking logic for selected protection features
Page (AP) 6-59
(AP) 6 Application Guide
3.5
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
Circuit Breaker State Monitoring
An operator at a remote location requires a reliable indication of the state of the switchgear. Without an indication that each circuit breaker is either open or closed, the operator has insufficient information to decide on switching operations. The MiCOM P521 relay incorporates circuit breaker state monitoring, giving an indication of the position of the circuit breaker. This indication is available either at the front of the relay or via the communication network.
The position of the circuit breaker is determined by wiring the 52a and 52b, circuit breaker auxiliary, contacts to the digital inputs ( AUTOMAT.CTRL/Inputs/Input #/52a or 52b) .
The programmable LEDs on the front of the relay can be configured to indicate the position of the circuit breaker. This can be done by selecting the appropriate digital input in the LEDs menu ( CONFIGURATION/Led #/Led Input #) .
Once the 52a and 52b contacts have been assigned to a digital input the P521 automatically checks that the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are not simultaneously in the same state for more than 5 seconds (i.e. both open or both closed). This could only occur if there was a fault with the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts or if the circuit breaker becomes jammed whilst operating. In the event that both auxiliary contacts are in the same state for more than 5 seconds the relay issues the “CB STATUS DBI” latched alarm
(‘DBI’ meaning “Don’t Believe It”). If necessary the “CB Alarm” output relay can be used to signal this condition to the annunciator. The logic behind this feature is shown in
Figure 21 - CB Status DBI logic diagram
Page (AP) 6-60 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
(AP) 6 Application Guide
CB Control
The P521 allows the circuit breaker to be manually tripped or closed by any one of these methods:
•
•
•
Via user interface
Via opto inputs
Via control communications (SCADA etc.)
Methods 1 and 2 are explained below. Method 3, via control communications, is described in the P521 communication mapping guide ( P521/EN GC ).
If an attempt to close the breaker is being made, and a protection trip signal is generated, the protection trip command overrides the close command.
CB Trip and Close Via User Interface
To manually trip or close the circuit breaker via the user interface the user must first locate the “Trip and Close” cell in the OP PARAMETERS menu. Pressing the
key in this cell, followed by
or
will display either “Trip”, “Close” or “No Operation”. If “No
Operation” is selected a CB trip or close will not be performed. Selecting “Trip” will cause the trip contact (RL1) to operate for a duration equal to the “t Open Pulse” time
(AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision). The operation will be accompanied by the illumination of the Trip LED and the “REM TRIP” alarm (indicating a remote trip has been performed). An event and fault record will be generated every time a remote trip is performed.
If “Close” is selected in the “Trip and Close” cell the relay closes the output contact assigned to “CB Close” for a duration equal o the “t Close Pulse” time. The “CB Close” command will also generate a protection event.
CB Trip and Close Via Opto Inputs
If necessary, the circuit breaker can be tripped or closed by energizing the appropriate opto input. To assign an opto to either of these functions the user must select either “Log
Trip” or “Log Close” in the inputs column (AUTOMAT. CTRL). Energizing the Log Trip input will cause the trip contact to operation for a dur ation equal to the “t Trip Pulse” time
+ the total time the opto input is energized. The operation will be accompanied by the
TRIP LED illuminating and the “REM TRIP” alarm being displayed. An event and fault record will be generated every time a remote trip is performed.
Energizing the “Log Close” input causes the contact assigned to “CB Close” to operate for a duration equal to “t Close Pulse” time + the total time the opto input is energized.
Closing the breaker via an opto input will also generate a protection event.
CB Manual Trip and Close Delays
The P521 relay also offers the facility of delaying the manual trip or close operation. This would give personnel time to move away from the circuit breaker following a trip or close command. The associ ated delays are set using the “CB Man Trip Dly” and “CB Man
Close Dly” settings (AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision). Once a manual trip or close has been initiated the relay displays either “Tripping” or “Closing” for the duration of the selected delays. Pressing the
key, while either of the messages are being displayed, will cancel the operation. The manual delay time will apply to all manual CB trip or close commands from any interface (keypad, opto input, front port or rear port).
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-61
(AP) 6 Application Guide
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.2
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring
Periodic maintenance of circuit breakers is necessary to ensure that the trip circuit mechanism operates correctly and also that the interrupting capability has not been compromised due to previous fault interruptions. Generally such maintenance is based on a fixed time interval or a fixed number of fault current interruptions. These methods of monitoring circuit breaker condition give a rough guide only and can lead to excessive maintenance.
The relay records various statistics related to each circuit breaker trip operation, allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be determined. These monitoring features are discussed in the following section.
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring Features
For each circuit breaker trip operation the relay records statistics as shown in the following table, taken from the relay menu. The RECORDS/CB Monitoring menu cells shown, are counter values only. In the event that any of the counters exceed a settable threshold (explained later), an output contact or LED can be operated (both labeled “CB
Alarm”). In addition to operating an LED or contact, the relay will also display an alarm message, on the LCD, which is unique to each monitoring feature.
These cells are read only:
MENU TEXT
CB Monitoring
CB Opening Time Displays the most recent CB opening time.
CB Closing Time
CB Operations
Amps(n)
Amps(n)
A
B
Displays the most recent CB closing time.
Displays the number of opening commands executed by the CB.
Displays the summation of the Amps (or Amps squared) interrupted by the phase A CB.
Displays the summation of the Amps (or Amps squared) interrupted by the phase B CB.
Amps(n)
C
Displays the summation of the Amps (or Amps squared) interrupted by the phase C CB.
The counters may be reset to zero by pressing the (C) key in the relevant cell. The user may wish to reset the counters following a circuit breaker maintenance inspection or overhaul.
If necessary the counters can be frozen during commissioning or maintenance testing of the relay. To disable the counters select ‘Yes’ in the “Disable CB Stats” cell
(AUTOMAT.CTRL/Commissioning).
CB Supervision Settings
Table 20 below, details the CB supervision settings that affect the CB condition
monitoring functions. It includes the setup of the current broken facility and those features that can be set to raise an alarm.
All the settings are available in the AUTOMAT.CTRL/CB supervision menu.
CB supervision
TC Supervision
t trip circuit tSUP
CB Open S’vision
CB Open Time
Default Setting
No
100 ms
No
50 ms
Min
100 ms
50 ms
Max
Yes, No
10 s
Yes, No
1s
Step
50 ms
50 ms
Page (AP) 6-62 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
3.7.3
3.7.4
(AP) 6 Application Guide
CB supervision
CB Close S’vision
CB Close Time
CB Open Alarm
CB Open NB =
Amps (n)
Amps (n) n t Open Pulse t Close Pulse
CB Man Trip Dly
CB Man Close Dly
Default Setting
No
50 ms
No
0
No
0
1
100 ms
100 ms
0 s
0 s
50 ms
0
Min
0
1
100 ms
100 ms
0 s
0 s
Max
Yes, No
1s
Yes, No
50000
Yes, No
4000 E6
2
5 s
5 s
60 s
60 s
50 ms
1
1 E6
1
50 ms
50 ms
0.1 s
0.1 s
Step
Table 20 - CB supervision menu
For more information on the TC supervision refer the trip circuit supervision section.
Setting the Operating Time Thresholds (CB Open Time/CB Close Time)
Slow CB operation is also indicative of the need for mechanism maintenance. Therefore, two alarms are provided to indicate that the breaker is either slow to trip or slow to close.
These timers are set in relation to the specified interrupting and closing times of the circuit breaker.
In the event that the opening time of the breaker exceeds the “CB Open Time” setting the relay will display the “T Operating CB” alarm message. If, however the circuit breaker closing time is no longer than the “CB Close Time” the relay will display the “CB CLOSE
FAILURE” alarm message.
Note The 52a auxiliary contact must be mapped to a digital input in order for this feature to work. The feature will be automatically disabled if the 52a contact is not mapped to a digital input.
Setting the Number of Operations Thresholds (CB Open NB =)
Every operation (opening or closing) of a circuit breaker results in some degree of wear for its components. Thus, routine maintenance, such as oiling of mechanisms, may be based upon the number of operations. Suitable setting of the maintenance threshold will allow an alarm to be raised, indicating when preventative maintenance is due.
Certain circuit breakers, such as oil circuit breakers (OCB’s) can only perform a certain number of fault interruptions before requiring maintenance attention. This is because each fault interruption causes carbonizing of the oil, degrading its dielectric properties.
The circuit breaker condition monitoring counters will be updated every time the relay issues a trip command (RL1 operating) or when a remote trip is performed (see section
3.6). In cases where the breaker is tripped by an external protection device it is also
possible to update the CB operations counter. This is achieved by allocating one of the logic inputs to close RL1 via an auxiliary timer (tAUX1 to tAUX2).
In the event that the number of circuit breaker operations exceeds the “CB Open NB =” settin g the relay will display the “CB Open NB” alarm message.
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-63
(AP) 6 Application Guide
3.7.5
3.7.6
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
Setting the
n
thresholds (
Amps (n))
Where overhead lines are prone to frequent faults and are protected by Oil Circuit
Breakers (OCBs), oil changes account for a large proportion of the life cycle cost of the switchgear. Generally, oil changes are performed at a fixed interval of circuit breaker fault operations. However, this may result in premature maintenance where fault currents tend to be low, and hence oil degradation is slower than expected.
The
n counter monitors the cumulative severity of the duty placed on the interrupter, allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be made.
For OCBs, the dielectric withstand of the oil generally decreases as a function of
2 t.
This is where ‘ ’ is the fault current broken, and ‘t’ is the arcing time within the interrupter tank (not the interrupting time). As the arcing time cannot be determined accurately, the relay would normally be set to monitor the sum of the broken current squared, by setting n = 2.
For other types of circuit breaker, especially those operating on higher voltage systems, practical evidence suggests that the value of n = 2 may be inappropriate. In such applications n may be set to 1.
An alarm in this instance may be indicative of the need for gas/vacuum interrupter HV pressure testing, for example.
It is imperative that any maintenance programme must be fully compliant with the switchgear manufacturer’s instructions.
The P521 relay records the fault current at the instant the trip output (RL1) is initiated.
This current is then summed with the value previously recorded. If the summed current exceeds the “ Amps (n)” threshold the relay will display the “Sum A n” alarm message.
In cases where the circuit breaker is tripped by an external protection device it is also possible to update the
n counter. This is achieved by allocating one of the logic inputs to close RL1 via an auxiliary timer (tAUX1 and tAUX2).
Setting the Trip and Close Pulse Times (t Open Pulse/t Close Pulse)
The length of the trip or close pulse can be set via the ‘t Open Pulse’ and ‘t Close Pulse’ settings respectively. These should be set long enough to ensure the breaker has completed its open or close cycle before the pulse has elapsed.
The duration of the opening time is measured from the trip pulse being issued to the opening of the 52a auxiliary contact. Conversely, the duration of the closing time is measured from the close pulse being issued to the 52a closing.
Page (AP) 6-64 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
3.8
3.8.1
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Trip Circuit Supervision
The trip circuit extends beyond the relay enclosure and passes through more components, such as fuse, links, relay contacts, auxiliary contacts and so on. These complications, coupled with the importance of the circuit, have directed attention to its supervision.
MiCOM P521 Trip Circuit Supervision Mechanism
The Trip Circuit Supervision function included in the MiCOM P521 relay is performed as follows:
A logic input can be assigned in the AUTOMAT.CTRL
/ Inputs/ Input #/Trip Circ menu cell. This logic input must be inserted in the trip circuit according to one of the typical application diagrams, shown later.
When the function TC Supervision is enabled by selecting ‘Yes’ within the
AUTOMAT.CTRL
/ CB Supervision sub-menu, the relay continuously checks the trip circuit continuity whatever the CB status – opened CB or closed CB. This function is enabled when the trip output contact (relay RL1) is not energized and it is disabled as long as the trip output contact is operating.
A “TRIP CIRCUIT” alarm signal (trip circuit failure) is generated if the opto-input detects no voltage signal for a time longer than the settable timer tSUP (AUTOMAT.CTRL
/ CB
Supervision) . The “52 Fail” contact can be selectively closed in the event of a trip coil failure.
As the TC supervision function is disabled when the trip output contact is operating, this function is suitable for use with the product latching logic on.
The TC supervision function can be selectively blocked from an external trip contact, so that any external trip (not using the P521 to trip the CB) can be used, without the P521 giving the “TRIP CIRCUIT” alarm. The external trip contact is wired into a logic input, which is assigned in the AUTOMAT.CTRL
/ Inputs/ Input #/TCS Block menu cell.
The following table shows the setting associated with the trip circuit supervision function:
Menu
TC Supervision
tSUP
Yes
100 ms
Min
Setting Range
No
10 s
Max
50 ms
Step
Figure 22 - Trip circuit supervision logic diagram
Three application examples are shown below.
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-65
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Example 1
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
In this example only the 52a auxiliary contact is available, the MiCOM P521 relay monitors the trip coil whatever the CB status (CB open or CB closed). However, in this example the relay does not supervise the trip circuit prior to the trip contact.
Example 2
Figure 23 - Trip coil monitoring
In this example both the 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts are available, the MiCOM P521 relay monitors the whole of the trip circuit when the CB is closed and part of the trip circuit when the CB is open. When the circuit breaker is open the supervision current bypasses the trip coil via the 52b contact, thus trip coil supervision is not provided whilst in this condition. If the circuit breaker is open, a fault in the trip path will only be detected on CB closing, after the tSUP delay time (typically set to 400 ms).
In this example resistor R1 needs to be placed in series with the 52b contact to prevent damage if the trip contact (RL1) is latched, stays involuntarily closed, or a long trip pulse time is programmed.
Example 3
Page (AP) 6-66
Figure 24 - Trip coil and auxiliary contact monitoring
As with example 2, both the 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts are available. The MiCOM
P521 relay monitors the whole of the trip circuit whatever the CB status (CB open or CB closed).
P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS (AP) 6 Application Guide
In this example resistor R1 needs to be fitted to prevent permanent trip coil energization, if the trip contact (RL1) is latched, stays involuntarily closed, or a long trip pulse time is programmed.
Figure 25 - Trip coil and auxiliary contact monitoring regardless of CB position
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-67
(AP) 6 Application Guide APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
3.8.2 Calculation of External Resistor R1
The calculation of the R1 resistor value takes into account a minimum current value flowing through the opto-input. This minimum current value is a function of the relay auxiliary voltage range.
1 - Case of example No 2:
The R1 resistor maximum value (in Ohms) is defined by the following formula:
R1
(0.8 x Vdc – V min
) /
min
Where:
Vdc =
V min
=
min
= auxiliary voltage value (dc voltage) minimum voltage required for opto-input operation minimum current required for opto-input operation
24 – 60 Vdc
Relay Auxiliary Voltage Range
48
R1
– 150 Vdc
(0.8 x Vdc - 25)/0.0035
130 – 250 Vdc/
110-250 Vac
R1
(0.8 x Vdc - 38)/0.0022 R1
(0.8 x Vdc – 15) /0.0035
In addition, the R1 resistor withstand value (in Watts) is defined below:
P
R1
> 2 x (1.2 x Vdc) 2 / R1
2 - Case of example No 3:
The R1 resistor maximum value (in Ohm) is defined by the following formula:
R1
(0.8 x Vdc - V min
)
min
- R coil
Where:
Vdc = auxiliary voltage value (dc voltage).
V min
=
min
=
R coil
= minimum voltage required for opto-input operation minimum current required for opto-input operation
Trip coil resistance value
Relay Auxiliary Voltage Range
24
– 60 Vdc
48
– 150 Vdc
130 – 250 Vdc/
110-250 Vac
R1
(0.8 x Vdc - 15)
0.0035
- R coil
R1
(0.8 x Vdc - 25)
0.0035
- R coil
R1
(0.8 x Vdc - 38)
In addition, the R1 resistor withstand value (in Watts) is defined below:
0.0022
P
R1
> 2 * (1,2 * Vdc) 2 / (R1 + R coil
)
- R coil
Note Any additional series impedances, such as anti-pumping relays, must be taken into account when calculating the value of resistor R1.
It is assumed that the maximum auxiliary voltage variation is
20%.
Page (AP) 6-68 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
3.9
3.10
3.11
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Event Records
The relay records and time tags up to 250 events and stores them in non-volatile memory. This enables the system operator to establish the sequence of events that occurred within the relay following a particular power system condition, switching sequence etc. When the available space is exhausted, the oldest event is automatically overwritten by the new one.
The real time clock within the relay provides the time tag to each event, to a resolution of
1ms.
The event records are available for viewing either via the front panel EIA(RS)232 port or remotely, via the rear EIA(RS)485 port.
For extraction from a remote source via communications, refer to the Communications
Mapping Guide P521/EN GC , where the procedure is fully explained.
Fault Records
Each time any programmed threshold is exceeded a fault record is created and stored in memory. The fault record logs up to 25 faults and stores them in non-volatile memory.
This enables the system operator to read and analyze information regarding the network failures. When the available space is exhausted, the oldest fault is automatically overwritten by the new one.
Any of the 25 stored fault records can be viewed in the RECORDS/Fault Record menu.
The desired fault record can be selected in the “Record Number” cell which is selectable from up to 25 records, 25 being the most recent record and 1 being the oldest. These records consist of fault flags, fault measurements etc. Also note that the time stamp given in the fault record itself will be more accurate than the corresponding stamp given in the event record as the event is logged some time after the actual fault record is generated.
The fault records are available for viewing either on the display, or via the front panel
EIA(RS)232 port or remotely, via the rear EIA(RS)485 port.
For extraction from a remote source via communications, refer to the Communications
Mapping Guide P521/EN GC , where the procedure is fully explained.
Instantaneous Recorder
Each time any programmed threshold is crossed an instantaneous record is created and displayed in the RECORDS/Instantaneous menu. The last five protection starts, with the duration of the information are available. The number of the faults, hour, date, origin (
>,
>>,
>>> or
e>,
e>>,
e>>>), length (duration of start signal), trip (a trip has appeared, yes or no) are displayed.
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-69
(AP) 6 Application Guide
3.12
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
Disturbance Recorder
The integral disturbance recorder has an area of memory specifically set aside for record storage. A total of 5 records can be stored while the total duration is 15s. The user can select the total number of disturbance records in the setting and then the duration of each record is determined, as below:
Number of Record Duration of Each Record
5
4
3 s
3 s
3
2
5 s
7 s
1 9 s
Disturbance records continue to be recorded until the available memory is exhausted, at which time the oldest record(s) are overwritten to make space for the newest one.
The recorder stores actual samples which are taken at a rate of 32 samples per cycle.
Each disturbance record consists of analogue data channels and digital data channels.
The relay also provides the relevant CT ratios for the analogue channels, to enable scaling to primary quantities.
The RECORDS/Disturb Record
settings are shown in Table 21:
Disturb Record
Pre-Time
Default Setting
0.1 s 0.1 s
Min
3 s
Max
0.1 s
Step
Note From V12.A the Post-Time setting cell is removed from setting.
Post-Time
Disturb Rec Trig
0.1 s
ON INST
0.1 s 3 s
ON INST, ON TRIP
0.1 s
Table 21 - Disturbance record menu
The total recording time consists of a combination of the pre and post fault recording times. For example, the default settings show that the total record number is 5 and the pre-time time is set to 100 ms, then post fault time is:
3 - 0.1 = 2.9 s.
The disturbance recorder can be triggered by a trip condition (operation of RL1) by selecting “ON TRIP”, in the disturbance recorder trigger cell. Alternatively, the disturbance recorder can be triggered by any start condition by selecting “ON INST”. It is also possible to trigger the disturbance recorder by energizing one of the programmable opto inputs
(labeled “Strt Dist”), or via the remote control communications, or via the HMI in the menu
OP Parameter/Disturb Trigger.
Page (AP) 6-70 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
3.13
3.13.1
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Rolling and Peak Demand Values
The MiCOM P521 relay is able to store the rolling average and peak values for the 3 phase currents. The calculation is performed over a selectable sub-period between 1 and
60 minutes. The calculation principle is described below.
Rolling Demand
There are two settings associated with the Rolling demand measurements, which are
“Sub Period” and “Num of Sub Per”. These settings can be found under
RECORDS/Rolling Demand . The “Sub Period” setting determines the time over which the average RMS current values are calculated. The “Num of Sub Per” (Number of Sub
Periods) setting, sets the number of sub periods (maximum 24) used in the calculation.
The calculation principle of the
A,
B and
C rolling demand values is as follows:
•
Relay calculates the average value over the duration set by the sub period. The relay then displays the results at the end of the sub-period. The Rolling Average measurements can be found under the MEASUREMENTS/Current/General menu i.e.
Rolling Average
A RMS
Rolling Average
B RMS
Rolling Average
C RMS
•
If the number of sub periods is set to 1, the average will be calculated based upon the 1 sub period. If, however, the number of sub-periods is set to 2 or more (24 being the maximum), the calculation determines the rolling average value based upon the averages of the chosen number of sub-periods.
•
The calculation can be reset by hand (press (C) key in the ROLLING AVERAGE cell) without use of the password, or a remote command. A modification of the settings (either "Sub Period" or "Num of Sub Periods" settings) will also reset the calculation.
Note In case of loss of power supply the rolling demand value is not stored.
Example:
Sub Period =
Num of Sub Period =
Sub Period 1
5 mn
2
Sub Period 2 Sub Period 3
5 mn 5 mn
At the end of the Sub Period 2:
Rolling average value = (average value 1 + average value 2)/2
At the end of the Sub Period 3:
New Rolling average value = (average value 2 + average value 3)/2
5 mn
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-71
(AP) 6 Application Guide
3.13.2
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
Peak Value Demand
The Peak demand value calculation principle, for
A,
B and
C currents, is as follows:
Every "Rolling Sub Period", a new average value is calculated and compared with the value calculated during the previous "Rolling Sub Period". If this new value is greater than the previous value already stored, then the previous value is overwritten with the new one. However, if this new value is lower than the previous value, already stored, then the previous value is kept. In this way, an average peak value will be refreshed each Sub
Period;
The Sub Period setting, used for the peak value calculation, is the same as that used for the rolling average calculation ( RECORDS/Rolling Demand).
The 3 phase Peak value demand are displayed in the
MEASUREMENTS/Current/General menu:
MAX SUBPERIOD
A RMS
MAX SUBPERIOD
B RMS
MAX SUBPERIOD
C RMS
•
The calculation can be reset by hand (press (C) key in the MAX. SUBPERIOD cell) without use of the password, or a remote command. A modification of the "Sub
Period" setting will also reset the calculation.
Note In case of loss of power supply the Peak average values are stored in nonvolatile memory.
Page (AP) 6-72 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
3.14
3.14.1
3.14.2
3.14.2.1
3.14.2.2
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Measurements
The MiCOM P521 relay has three different measurement columns, each one dedicated to specific relay functions. The three measurement columns are as follows:
•
•
•
Current Diff
Current/General
Protection Comms
The following section describes the contents of the three measurement columns.
Note All measurements listed below are updated on a per second basis.
Current Diff
The measurements contained with the Current Diff column are associated with the current differential protection. These include remote phase currents and per phase differential and bias currents. Relays with firmware version 3 provide additional phase angle measurements: the phase angles between the currents in adjacent phases at the
Local end, and the differential angles between each phase current at the Local end and the same phase current at the Remote end (time-aligned).
All measurements within this column are based upon the fundamental frequency only. All measurements contained within this column are multiplied by the local CT ratio setting, with the exception of the remote phase currents, which are scaled as follows:
Local CT Ratio
Remote Current (primary) = Remote Secondary Current x
CT Correct Ratio
This calculation accounts for any CT mismatch between ends.
Current/General
•
•
•
•
•
The relay produces a variety of directly measured and calculated power system quantities. The list of measurements include:
•
•
Local Phase and Neutral RMS Currents
Positive and negative sequence currents (
1 and
2 respectively)
Ratio of
2/
1
Residual harmonic currents
Thermal state (%)
Peak and average currents
Demand values
The following section describes some of these measurements in more detail.
Measured Currents
The RMS phase and earth currents are calculated by using the sum of the samples squared over a cycle of data.
Ratio of
2/
1
The ratio of
2/
1 is used to detect broken conductors. Refer to the broken conductor section for more information.
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-73
(AP) 6 Application Guide
3.14.2.3
3.14.2.4
3.14.2.5
3.14.3
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
Residual Harmonic Currents (
N – fn)
This measurement allows the user to determine the harmonic currents (typically 3 rd harmonic) flowing in the earth path. On pressing the (C) key, in the “
N – fn” cell, the relay will update the measurement of the actual RMS earth current minus the fundamental component. This measurement will only be updated on subsequent presses of the (C) key.
Peak and Average Currents
These measurements display the peak and average RMS currents over a settable time window of 5 to 60 minutes. The time window is set in the “Time Window” cell under the
RECORDS/Time Peak Value menu. Once the time window has elapsed, the peak and average measurements will be stored until they are reset. To reset these measurements, and trigger another time window, the user must either press the (C) key, in the “Max &
Average” cell, or modify the “Time Window” setting.
Note The peak and average measurements will be lost in the event of an auxiliary supply interruption.
Demand Values
See “Rolling and peak demand values” section.
Protection Comms
This column allows the user to view various statistics relating to the protection communications channel.
A brief explanation of every measurement, contained in this column, can be found in section 3.5.3.3 of the User Guide ( P521/EN FT ).
The protection comms statistics can be reset (with the exception of the propagation delay) by either pressing the (C) key, in the “Comms Stats RST cell” or by energizing an opto input, which has been assigned to “Comms RST”.
Page (AP) 6-74 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
3.15
3.16
P521/EN AP/Ca4
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Logic Equations
The logic equations can be used to construct complex Boolean logic using the following operators: OR, OR NOT, AND, AND NOT.
An example logic implementation using Equation A is shown below:
CB Fail
Input 1
&
0
1 Output tAux1
0.5s
P4952ENb
Figure 26 - Example of logic equation
There are 8 equations of 16 operands chosen within all instantaneous and time delayed events (thresholds and protections flags, tAux ...) and all inputs.
Every result of equation can be time delayed and assigned to any output relays, trip command, trip latching and/or HMI LEDs.
Every equation has a pick up time delay settable from 0 s to 600 s with a step of 0.01 s.
Every equation has a drop off time delay settable from 0 s to 600 s with a step of 0.01 s.
Current transformer supervision
Failure of current transformer circuit will result in mal-operation of any current depending protections, such as current differential, negative sequence, broken conductor and undercurrent. Now the P521 relay includes a current transformer supervision, which is called “Differential CTS”.
There are two modes of operation, Indication and Restrain. In Indication mode, a CTS alarm is raised but no effect on tripping. In Restrain mode, the differential protection is blocked during 20 ms after CT failure detection and then the Is1 setting for Current
Differential is raised to above load current. Local Broken Conductor, Under Current and
Negative Sequence Overcurrent protections are blocked immediately after local CT failure detection.
The Differential CTS uses the following principle to detect a single phase or two phases
CT failure: when a CT failure happens, the negative sequence current reflected into the relay will occur at only one side.
The CTS function works on two current detectors:
I1 level detector – positive sequence current detector
The value of I1 shall be calculated compared with a user setting (I1>). The purpose of this element is to detect there is load current flowing in the line.
The output of this element shall be transferred to the remote ends via the signaling message.
I2/I1 level detector – negative to positive ratio
The value of I2/I1 will be calculated and compared with two user settings (low set is
I2/I1>, and high set is I2/I1>>). If the result is lower than I2/I1>, it means that the currents are balanced. When the result is higher than I2/I1>>, it means that a significant unbalanced current has occurred.
If there is only end of P521 has detected I2/I1>> asserted while the other end has I2/I1> not asserted, it means only one end has detected a high unbalance current while the other end has not detected any unbalance current at all. Under these circumstances
Page (AP) 6-75
(AP) 6 Application Guide APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS there is actually no unbalance current on the primary side. This very end of P521 which has local I2/I1 asserted has a CT failure.
The output from each element will be transferred to the remote ends via the signaling message.
The purpose of these elements is to discriminate CT problems from asymmetrical faults including Broken Conductor fault.
P4 9 7 1ENb
Figure 27 - Current transformer supervision
The logic diagram is shown in Figure 27 . The “CTS Block” signal is used to inhibit the
operating of broken conductor, negative sequence and undercurrent protections in local
P521.
Opto inputs can be used to temporarily inhibit CTS function. However, this inhibit does not work when CTS has already started.
To use the CTS function, choose “Yes” under the menu AUTOMATIC. CTRL/CT
Supervision/CTS ?. The settings are as below.
CT Supervision Default Setting
CTS ? No
Min Max
Yes, No
Step
Page (AP) 6-76 P521/EN AP/Ca4
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS (AP) 6 Application Guide
CT Supervision Default Setting Min Max Step
CTS Reset mode Manual
CTS Reset
RST=[C]
Manual, Auto
Press key (C) to reset CTS alarm. Visible only when CTS Reset mode is set in Manual.
CTS I1>
CTS I2/I1>
CTS I2/I1>>
CTS TIME DLY
CTS Restrain?
0.1 In
5%
40%
5 s
No
0.050 In
5%
5%
0 s
4 In
100%
100%
10 s
Yes, No
0.01 In
5%
5%
0.01 s
Note CTS function will work only when the relays are set in Extension communication mode in the menu COMMUNICATION/Protection/FRAME
MODE.
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-77
(AP) 6 Application Guide
4
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
Current Differential Protection
For accuracy, class X or class 5P current transformers (CTs) are strongly recommended, with a knee point voltage that complies with the requirements of the formula shown
below. Simplified versions of the formula are shown in section 4.2, but these should only
be used within the specified limits.
Vk
Ks . Kt . In (Rct + 2RL)
Where:
Vk
Ks
=
=
Kt
In
=
=
Rct =
RL =
Required IEC knee point voltage
Dimensioning factor
Operating time factor
CT nominal secondary current
CT dc resistance
One-way lead impedance from CT to relay
Ks Calculation
Ks is a constant depending upon:
If =
X/R =
Maximum value of through fault current for stability (multiple of In)
Primary system X/R ratio
Ks is determined as follows:
For X/R < 40
Ks =
For X/R
40
Ks =
0.023 x If (X/R + 55) + 0.9 (X/R+26)
0.024 x If (X/R + 44) + 0.06 (X/R+725)
Kt Calculation
Kt is a constant depending upon:
X/R = tIdiff =
Primary system X/R ratio
Current differential operating time setting (seconds)
For applications where the CT knee point is critical (e.g. a retrofit application where the
CTs already exists), it may be possible to reduce the CT requirements by adding a small time delay to the relay. The ‘tIdiff’ (PROTECTION G1 (G2) (G3) (G4)/[87] Current
Diff/tIdiff) setting allows the user to increase the relay operating time thus making the relay more stable. For some applications a time setting of 50ms may reduce the required
CT knee point voltage by as much as 30%. Further reductions in CT knee point are possible with longer time delays.
Kt is determined as follows:
For X/R < 40
Kt
Kt
=
=
For X/R
40
Kt =
1 – (6.2 x tIdiff) for tIdiff
0.07 for tIdiff > 0.15s
0.15s
1 – (2.5 x tIdiff) for tIdiff not exceeding 0.25s
For applications where the relay is set to instantaneous (tIdiff=0), a Kt value of 1 should be used.
Page (AP) 6-78 P521/EN AP/Ca4
CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
4.2
4.3
4.4
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Typical Equations for Current Differential Protection
The following equations can be applied for simplicity. Care must be taken to ensure that
X/R and fault levels conform to the limits specified. If the calculated Vk appears to be too large, it may be necessary to ‘fine tune’ the calculation by using the equations specified in
For X/R
20 and a fault level
25 In
Vk
85 . Kt . In (Rct + 2RL)
For X/R < 40 and a fault level
25 In
Vk
99 . Kt . In (Rct + 2RL)
Where Kt is determined as follows:
Kt = 1 – (6.2 x tIdiff) for tIdiff
0.15 s
Kt = 0.07 for tIdiff > 0.15 s
Note The equations shown in this section are based upon the equations in
section 4.1 with the associated X/R and fault level figures already
substituted.
Selection of X/R Ratio and Fault Level
The value of X/R ratio and fault level will vary from one system to another, but selecting the correct value for the CT requirements is critical. In the case of single end fed (radial) systems the through fault level and X/R ratio should be calculated assuming the fault occurs at the location of the remote CT. For systems where the current can feed through the protected feeder in both directions, such as parallel feeders and ring main circuits, further consideration is required. In this case the fault level and X/R ratio should be calculated at both the local and remote CT’s. In doing this the X/R ratio and fault level will be evaluated for both fault directions. The CT requirements, however, should be based upon the fault direction that gives the highest knee point voltage. Under no circumstances should the X/R ratio from one fault direction and the fault level from the other be used to calculate the knee point. Doing this may result in exaggerated and unrealistic CT requirements.
SEF Protection
– as Fed by Core-Balance CT
Core balance current transformers of metering class accuracy are required and should have a limiting secondary voltage satisfying the formula given below:
Vk
fn x (Rct + 2RL + Rrn)
Where:
Vk
I fn
=
=
Rct =
RL =
Rrn =
Required IEC knee point voltage
Maximum prospective secondary earth fault current
CT dc resistance
One-way lead impedance from CT to relay
Impedance of neutral current input
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-79
(AP) 6 Application Guide COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RELAYS
5
5.1
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RELAYS
Communications Link Options
A number of communications options are available for the communication channel between P521 system ends. The various connection options are described below.
Choosing between each of these options will depend on the type of communications equipment that is available.
Where existing suitable multiplexer communication equipment is installed, for other communication between substations, interfaces conforming to the G.703, V.35, and X.21 recommendations are available, by using the 850 nm fiber interface in the P521 plus a
P591, P592 or P593 interface unit. For further information on the P591, P592 and P593
optical fiber to electrical interface units, refer to section 5.3.
Where no multiplexer is installed, the direct optical fiber connection can be used. The type of fiber used (multi-mode or single-mode) will be determined by the distance
between the ends of the P521 relay system, refer to section 5.2.5.
For multiplexed or direct fiber communications the data rate may be selected as either 56 kbit/sec or 64 kbit/sec using the SDLC protocol. Slower data rates can be selected for these applications, but this is not recommended, as it would result in increased relay operating times.
Where a 2 wire unconditioned pilot wire circuit is available (i.e. pilot wires without any signal equalization equipment), baseband or mDSL modems can be used in conjunction
with the P521 relays to communicate at 64 kbit/sec, refer also to section 5.5.
Where a 4 wire unconditioned pilot wire circuit is available a P595 can be used, refer also
For 2 wire conditioned pilots (provided by a telecommunications company), a suitable type of modem must be used, and there is no strict limit to the distance. Refer to section
For distances of 1.2 km or less and two twisted pairs of wires are available, EIA(RS)485 can be utilized at data rates of 64 kbit/sec, 56 kbit/sec, 19.2 kbit/sec and 9.6 kbit/sec,
In certain circumstances the user may want to change the relay protection communications interface. For example, from electrical (EIA(RS)485/232) to fiber optic, when the P521 is fitted in a substation with existing pilot/telephone wires, which are to be replaced with fiber optic cables at a later date. With a minor hardware change the relay can be upgraded without the need for a software/firmware change. Refer to section 9.4.4 of the Commissioning and Maintenance section of this manual ( P521/EN CM ) for information regarding communications interface changes.
Page (AP) 6-80 P521/EN AP/Ca4
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RELAYS
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
P521/EN AP/Ca4
Direct Optical Fiber
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Direct Optical Fiber Link, 850 nm Multi-Mode Fiber
The relays are fitted with the 850 nm multi-mode fiber interface, and connected directly using two 850 nm multi-mode optical fibers for the signaling channel.
Multi-mode fiber type 50/125
m or 62.5/125
m is suitable. BFOC/2.5 type fiber optic connectors are used. These are commonly known as “ST” connectors (“ST” is a registered trademark of AT&T).
Optical Fibre (multi-mode)
P521
850nm
P521
850nm
P2087ENa
This is typically suitable for connection up to 1 km.
Direct Optical Fiber Link, 1300 nm Multi-Mode Fiber
The relays are fitted with the 1300 nm multi-mode fiber interface, and connected directly using two 1300 nm multi-mode fibers for the signaling channel. Multi-mode fiber type
50/125
m or 62.5/125
m is suitable. BFOC/2.5 type fiber optic connectors are used.
Optical Fibre (multi-mode)
P521
1300nm
P521
1300nm
P2088ENa
This is typically suitable for connection up to approximately 50 km (from December 2008).
Pre-December 2008 relays were suitable for connection up to approximately 30 km.
Direct Optical Fiber Link, 1300 nm Single-Mode Fiber
The relays are fitted with the 130 nm single-mode fiber interface, and connected directly using two 1300 nm single-mode fibers, type 9/125
m for the signaling channel.
BFOC/2.5 type fiber optic connectors are used.
Optical Fibre (single-mode)
P521
1300nm
P521
1300nm
P2088ENb
This is typically suitable for connection up to approximately 100 km (from December
2008). Pre-December 2008 relays were suitable for connection up to approximately 60 km.
Switched Communication Networks
The P521 relay makes use of digital communication signaling channels for the differential protection. For the P521 a requirement of this link is that ‘go’ (tp1) and ‘return’ (tp2) times are similar (a difference of up to 1 ms can be tolerated). Times greater than this can result in relay instability.
Where switched communications networks are used, it is possible that during switching, a transient time period may exist with different ‘go’ and ‘return’ times. The P521 relay includes a facility to ensure protection stability during this transient period.
One of the checks performed on the communications link is a check on the calculated propagation delay for each data message. During normal operation the difference in calculated time should be minimal (possible delays being introduced by multiplexers or other intermediary communication equipment). If successive calculated propagation delay times exceed a user settable value (200 – 10000 s) then the data message is discarded. This check is used to overcome switching problems.
Page (AP) 6-81
(AP) 6 Application Guide COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RELAYS
Figure 28 shows a possible scenario for a switched network. Initially the P521 relays are
communicating via path 1. The go and return times for this path are 2 ms and hence the calculated propagation delay is (2 + 2)/2 = 2 ms. When the channel is switched to path 2, a small time period exists where the P521’s could be sending messages via path 1 and returning via path 2.
The calculated propagation delay will now be (2 + 5)/2 = 3.5 ms. The resultant 1.5 ms error at each line end may cause the relay to maloperate due to incorrect time alignment
of current vectors (see section 2.1.2
). After a short delay, both ‘go’ and ‘return’ paths will
follow route 2 and the calculated propagation delay will be (5 + 5)/2 = 5 ms. The relay will now be stable as correct current vector time alignment exists at each line end.
The P521 relay uses the change in calculated propagation delay to initiate a change in relay characteristic for a short time period ( COMMUNICATION/Protection/ Char Mod
Time setting) to overcome any switching delay. The Char Mod timer is settable in the range 0 to 100 seconds, default 10 seconds. The change in characteristic is shown in
whereby the relay
s1 setting is increased to 200% of
s2 and the k1 slope is changed to 0%. This characteristic provides stability for all load conditions and will still allow tripping for most internal fault conditions.
The Char Mod timer is started when a change in propagation delay is detected. Any subsequent change during this period will not cause the timer to restart. In the above example the timer will start for the first change (2 to 3.5 ms). The second change (3.5 ms to 5 ms) will not cause the timer to restart, which would prolong the setting change.
Any transient “jitter” occurring on the communications path, which affected the propagation delay time, could therefore unnecessarily desensitize the relay. To overcome this possible problem, the P521 relay includes a feature whereby the Char Mod timer is reset if a change is detected during its timing period that returns the propagation
delay to its original value. The dotted line of Figure 28 shows this, where the propagation
delay changes from 2 to 3.5 ms and back to 2 ms.
‘go’ = 5 ms
Path 2
‘return’ = 5 ms
P5xx
Communication equipment
‘go’ = 2 ms
Path 1
‘return’ = 2 ms
Communication equipment
P5xx
Calculated propagation delay tp
5 ms
Possible relay maloperation
3.5 ms
2 ms
Reset transient timer
< Transient time period >
(Char Mod Time)
Figure 28 - Switched communication network
Time
P1031ENa
Page (AP) 6-82 P521/EN AP/Ca4
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RELAYS
5.2.5
(AP) 6 Application Guide
I
1
I
2
I diff =
I
1 +
I
2
Operate
2I s1
Percentage bias k2
I s1
Percentage bias k1
Restrain
I s2
I bias =
| I
1
|
+
| I
2
|
2
P1001ENd
Figure 29 - Modified bias characteristic
Optical Budgets
When applying the P521 current differential relay, it is important to select the appropriate
fiber interface. This will depend on the fiber used and distance between devices. Table
22 shows the optical budgets of the available communications interfaces.
From December 2008
Min. transmit output level (average power)
Receiver sensitivity (average power)
Optical budget
Less safety margin (3 dB)
Typical cable loss
Max. transmission distance
Table 22 - Optical budgets
850 nm
Multi-Mode
-19.8 dBm
-25.4 dBm
5.6 dB
2.6 dB
2.6 dB/km
1 km
1300 nm
Multi-Mode
1300 nm
Single-Mode
-6 dBm
-49 dBm
43.0 dB
-6 dBm
-49 dBm
43.0 dB
40.0 dB
0.8 dB/km
50.0 km
40.0 dB
0.4 dB/km
100.0 km
Note From December 2008, the optical budgets and hence also the maximum transmission distances of the 1300 nm multi-mode and 1300 nm single-
mode fiber interfaces have been increased, to the values shown in Table
The new interface cards are identified by “43dB” marked in the centre of the backplate, visible from the rear of the relay. These new fiber interfaces are fully backwardcompatible with the original equivalent interface. However, in order to achieve the increased distance, both ends of the P521 scheme would need to use the new interface.
Pre-December 2008 relays will have the original optical budgets and maximum
transmission distances, as shown in Table 23.
Pre-December 2008
Min. transmit output level (average power)
Receiver sensitivity (average power)
850 nm
Multi Mode
-19.8 dBm
-25.4 dBm
1300 nm
Multi Mode
1300 nm
Single Mode
-10 dBm
-37 dBm
-10 dBm
-37 dBm
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-83
(AP) 6 Application Guide COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RELAYS
Pre-December 2008
Optical budget
Less safety margin (3dB)
Typical cable loss
Max. transmission distance
850 nm
Multi Mode
5.6 dB
2.6 dB
2.6 dB/km
1 km
1300 nm
Multi Mode
27.0 dB
24.0 dB
0.8 dB/km
30.0 km
1300 nm
Single Mode
27.0 dB
24.0 dB
0.4 dB/km
60.0 km
Table 23 - Optical budgets
The total optical budget is given by the transmitter output level minus the receiver sensitivity and will indicate the total allowable losses that can be tolerated between
devices. A safety margin of 3 dB is also included in Table 23. This allows for
degradation of the fiber as a result of ageing and any losses in cable joints. The remainder of the losses will come from the fiber itself. The figures given are typical only and should only be used as a guide.
In general, the 1300 nm interfaces will be used for direct connections between relays.
The 850 nm would be used where multiplexing equipment is employed.
Page (AP) 6-84 P521/EN AP/Ca4
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RELAYS
5.3
5.3.1
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Multiplexer Link via P59x Optical Fiber to Electrical Interface Units
In order to connect the P521 relay via a Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) multiplexer network or digital communication channel the P59x interface units are required. The following interface units are available:
•
P591 interface to multiplexing equipment supporting ITU-T (formerly CCITT)
Recommendation G.703 co-directional electrical interface
•
P592 interface to multiplexing equipment supporting ITU-T Recommendation V.35 electrical interface
•
P593 interface to multiplexing or ISDN equipment supporting ITU-T
Recommendation X.21 electrical interface
The data rate for each unit can be 56kbit/sec or 64kbit/sec as required for the data
communications link, refer to section 5.11.
One P59x unit is required per relay signaling channel (i.e. for each transmit and receive signal pair). It provides optical to electrical and electrical to optical signal conversion between the P521 relay and the multiplexer. The interface unit should be located as close to the PCM multiplexer as possible, to minimize any effects on the data of electromagnetic noise or interference.
The units are housed in a 20 TE MiCOM case.
Fiber optic connections to the unit are made through BFOC/2.5 type connectors, more commonly known as ‘ST’ connectors.
The optical characteristics are similar to the P521 850 nm multi-mode fiber optic interface
(refer to section 5.2.5 above).
Multiplexer Link with G.703 Electrical Interface Using Auxiliary Optical
Fibers and Type P591 Interface
The relays are fitted with the 850 nm optical interface, and connected to a P591 unit by
850 nm multi-mode optical fiber. Multi-mode fiber type 50/125
m or 62.5/125
m is suitable. BFOC/2.5 type fiber optic connectors are used. The P591 unit converts the data between optical fiber and ITU-T compatible G.703 co-directional electrical interface.
The G.703 output must be connected to an ITU-T compatible G.703 co-directional channel on the multiplexer.
P521
850 nm
O/F
P591
G703
MUX MUX
G703
P591
O/F
P521
850 nm
P2090ENb
The P591 unit supports the ITU-T Recommendation G.703 co-directional interface.
The P591 interface unit should be located as close to the PCM multiplexer as possible, to minimize any effects on the data of electromagnetic noise or interference.
The G.703 signals are isolated by pulse transformers to 1kV.
Since the G.703 signals are only of ±1V magnitude, the cable connecting the P591 unit and the multiplexer must be properly screened against electromagnetic noise and interference. The interface cable should consist of twisted pairs of 24 AWG, overall shielded, and have a characteristic impedance of about 120
. It is generally recommended that the interface cable shield should be connected to the multiplexer frame ground only. The choice of grounding depends upon the local codes of practice.
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-85
(AP) 6 Application Guide
5.3.2
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RELAYS
Electrical connections to the P591 unit are made via a standard 28-way Midos connector.
Please refer to P521/EN CO for the external connection diagram.
The P521 must be set with Clock Source as ‘External’, refer to section 5.10.
Multiplexer Link with V.35 Electrical Interface Using Auxiliary Optical Fibers and Type P592 Interface
The relays are fitted with the 850 nm optical interface, and connected to a P592 unit by
850 nm multi-mode optical fiber. Multi-mode fiber type 50/125
m or 62.5/125
m is suitable. BFOC/2.5 type fiber optic connectors are used. The P592 unit converts the data between optical fiber and ITU-T compatible V.35 electrical interface. The V.35 output must be connected to an ITU-T compatible V.35 channel on the multiplexer.
V35 V35
P521
850 nm
O/F
P592 MUX MUX P592
O/F
P521
850 nm
P2091ENb
The P592 unit supports the ITU-T Recommendation V.35 interface.
The P592 interface unit should be located as close to the PCM multiplexer as possible, to minimize any effects on the data of electromagnetic noise or interference.
Connections of V.35 signals to the P592 unit are made via a standard female 34 pin ‘M’ block connector. Since the V.35 signals are either of ±0.55 V or ±12 V magnitude, the cable connecting the unit to the multiplexer must be properly screened against electromagnetic noise and interference. The interface cable should consist of twisted pairs of wires which are shielded, and have a characteristic impedance of about 100
. It is generally recommended that the interface cable shield is connected to the multiplexer frame ground. The choice of grounding depends upon the local codes of practice.
The P592 front panel consists of five indicating LEDs and six DIL (dual in line) switches.
The switch labeled ‘Clockswitch’ is provided to invert the V.35 transmit timing clock signal if required.
The switch labeled ‘Fiber-optic Loopback’ is provided to allow a test loopback of the communication signal across the fiber optic terminals. When switched on, the red LED labeled 'Fiber-optic Loopback' is illuminated.
The switch labeled ‘V.35 Loopback’ is provided to allow a test loopback of the communication signal across the X.21 terminals. It loops the incoming V.35 ‘Rx’ data lines internally back to the outgoing V.35 ‘Tx’ data lines. When switched on, the red LED labeled ‘V.35 Loopback’ is illuminated.
The switch labeled ‘DSR’ is provided to select/ignore the DSR (Data Set Ready) handshaking control signal. The red LED labeled DSR Off is extinguished either when
DSR is asserted or when overridden by setting the DSR switch On.
The switch labeled ‘CTS’ is provided to select/ignore the CTS (Clear To Send) handshaking control signal. The red LED labeled CTS Off is extinguished either when
CTS is asserted or when overridden by setting the CTS switch On.
The switch labeled ‘Data Rate’ is provided to allow the selection of 56 or 64 kbit/sec data rate, as required by the PCM multiplexing equipment.
The green LED labeled ‘Supply Healthy’ provides indication that the unit is correctly powered.
Please refer to P521/EN CO for the external connection diagram.
Page (AP) 6-86 P521/EN AP/Ca4
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RELAYS
5.3.3
(AP) 6 Application Guide
The P521 may be set either with Clock Source as ‘External’ for a multiplexer network which is supplying a master clock signal, or with Clock Source as ‘Internal’ for a
multiplexer network deriving its signal timing from the equipment. Refer to section 5.10.
Multiplexer Link with X.21 Electrical Interface Using Auxiliary Optical Fibers and Type P593 Interface
The P593 unit supports the ITU-T Recommendation X.21 interface. It is approved as line interface equipment by the British Approvals Board for Telecommunications (BABT) for connection to the services described in this section; License Certificate Number
NS/1423/1/T/605362.
The relays are fitted with the 850 nm optical interface, and connected to a P593 unit by
850 nm multi-mode optical fiber. Multi-mode fiber type 50/125
m or 62.5/125
m is suitable. BFOC/2.5 type fiber optic connectors are used. The P593 unit converts the data between optical fiber and ITU-T compatible X.21 electrical interface. The X.21 output must be connected to an ITU-T compatible X.21 channel on the multiplexer or
ISDN digital data transmission link.
P521
850 nm
O/F
P593
X.21
Mux or
Modem
Mux or
Modem
X.21
P593
O/F
P521
850 nm
P2092ENb
The P593 interface unit should be located as close to the PCM multiplexer as possible, to minimize any effects on the data of electromagnetic noise or interference.
The P521 relays require a permanently open communications channel. Consequently, no communications handshaking is required, and it is not supported in the P593 unit.
The signals supported are shown in Table 23.
ITU-T Recommendation X.21 is closely associated with specifications EIA(RS)422 and
EIA(RS)449. The P593 can be used with EIA(RS)422 or EIA(RS)449 communications
channels which require only the signals shown in Table 24.
-
G
T
T
R
R
S
S
ITU-T Designation Description
Case earth
Common return
Transmit data A
Transmit data B
Receive data A
Receive data B
Signal element timing A
Signal element timing B
Table 24 - X.21 circuits supported by P593 unit
Connector Pin
1
8
2
9
4
11
6
13
Direction
-
-
From P593
From P593
To P593
To P593
To P593
To P593
Connections of X.21 signals to the P593 unit are made via a standard male 15 way Dtype connector, wired as a DTE device. The interface cable should consist of twisted pairs of 24 AWG, overall shielded, and have a characteristic impedance of about 100
.
It is generally recommended that the interface cable shield is connected to the multiplexer frame ground. The choice of grounding depends upon the local codes of practice.
Refer to P521/EN CO for the external connection diagram.
The P521 must be set with Clock Source as ‘External’, refer to section 5.10.
The P593 front panel consists of four indicating LEDs and two switches.
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-87
(AP) 6 Application Guide
5.4
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RELAYS
The green LED labeled ‘Supply healthy’ provides indication that the unit is correctly powered.
The green LED labeled ‘Clock’ provides indication that an appropriate X.21 signal element timing signal is presented to the unit.
One of the switches is labeled ‘Fiber Optic Loopback’. This is provided to allow a test loopback of the communication signal across the fiber optic terminals. When switched on, the red LED labeled ‘Fiber Optic Loopback’ is illuminated.
The second switch is labeled ‘X.21 Loopback’. This is provided to allow a test loopback of the communication signal across the X.21 terminals. It loops the incoming X.21 ‘Rx’ data lines internally back to the outgoing X.21 ‘Tx’ data lines, and also loops the incoming fiber optic ‘Rx’ data line (via the X.21 signal conversion circuitry) back to the outgoing fiber optic ‘Tx’ data line. When switched on, the red LED labeled ‘X.21 Loopback’ is illuminated.
Unconditioned 4 Wire Pilot Communications for Distances greater than 1.2 km (P595)
In order to increase the transmission distance of EIA(RS)485 up to 25 kilometres the
P595 Interfacing Device can be used at each end of the line. To gain maximum performance of the P521, the data rate must be set to 19.2 kbit/sec and the protocol set to “NRZ” (Non Return to Zero).
The relays are fitted with the EIA(RS)485 interface, and connected using two pairs of unconditioned pilot wires of 0.4 mm (26 AWG) or larger gauge, twisted and shielded to ensure secure and reliable communications.
Pilot isolation must also be considered, when connecting the P595. If the longitudinal voltage exceeds 900 V the PCM-FLÜ 10 kV or 20 kV isolating transformers must be fitted in series with the P595. The PCMFLÜ isolating transformer has “a”, “m” and “b” taps on both primary and secondary windings. For all P521 applications, connection must be made between taps ‘a’ and ‘m’, which has a maximum frequency of 2 MHz. Connection between ‘a’ and ‘b’ may result in unreliable communications as the maximum frequency for this tap configuration is 6 kHz. Connection to ‘a’ and ‘m’ taps must be adhered to on both primary and secondary so as to maintain a 1:1 ratio.
Refer to section P521/EN CO for connection diagrams.
Refer to the P595 manual ( P595/EN M ) for further information.
Note The P595 interface device is identical to the Schneider Electric PZ511 interface except that the P595 has accessible setting switches. The switch settings, to allow communications between P521 relays, can be found in the
P595 manual.
Page (AP) 6-88 P521/EN AP/Ca4
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RELAYS
5.5
5.5.1
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Unconditioned 2 wire Pilot Communications for Distances greater than 1.2 km
When communicating via a pair of unconditioned pilots for distances greater than 1.2 km, a leased line or baseband modem can be used. For maximum security and performance it is strongly recommended that a screened twisted pair of 0.5 mm (or greater) conductors are used. Typical connection diagrams are shown in section P521/EN CO .
When choosing between leased line or baseband modems the following aspects should be considered:
•
Leased line modems have a maximum transmission speed of 19.2 kbit/sec, whereas baseband modems can transmit at 64 kbit/sec.
•
Baseband modems have longer re-training times, typically between 10 to 60 s. If the connection between is temporarily lost, the protection communications will be interrupted until the re-training period has elapsed.
•
Since baseband modems use synchronous communication protocols, there is typically a 20% performance gain over leased line modems that use asynchronous protocols.
•
•
•
Modems tested:
•
Westermo TD-32 leased line and dial-up modem. This model is obsolete and its replacement is:
TD-36 modem
Patton “Netlink” 1095 mDSL Baseband modem.
Patton “Campus” 1092A Baseband Modem. This model is obsolete and its replacement is:
•
Keymile LineRunner DTM modem with V36 interface.
Modem summary table. For full information see the modem configuration document
P521/EN MC .
Type
Max Distance
(km)
Recommended Data
Rate (kbit/sec)
20 9.6
Typical Re-train
Time (Seconds)
14 TD32 (Obsolete)
TD36
“Netlink”1095
“Campus” 1092A (Obsolete)
20
9.4
17.2
19.2
64
64
5
25
10
LineRunner DTM 19.8 64
The “Campus” 1092A modem may also be used for 4 wire pilot communications, giving extra security and a slightly improved maximum distance (18.2 km).
-
Leased Line Modem Set Up (e.g. TD36 Modem)
The data rate can be set to either 9.6 or 19.2 kbit/sec and the protocol set to “NRZ” (Non
Return to Zero). Since the transmission speed is limited to 19.2 kbit/sec, connections to the modem can be made via EIA(RS)232 or EIA(RS)485 depending upon the type of modem.
Refer to P521/EN MC (modem configuration) for more information on setting up the modem.
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-89
(AP) 6 Application Guide
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.6
5.6.1
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RELAYS
Baseband Modem Set Up ( Patton “Netlink” 1095 mDSL Modem, Patton
“Campus” 1092A Modem)
The data rate must be set to 64 kbit/sec, the protocol set to “NRZ”. For more information, on setting up the modem, refer to P521/EN MC (modem configuration).
Modem Isolation
Pilot isolation must be considered when connecting modems to unconditioned circuits.
Additional isolation can be provided by the PCM-FLÜ 10 kV or 20 kV isolating transformers. The PCM-FLÜ isolating transformer has “a”, “m” and “b” taps on both primary and secondary windings. For all P521 applications, connection must be made between taps ‘a’ and ‘m’, which has a maximum frequency of 2 MHz. Connection between ‘a’ and ‘b’ may result in unreliable communications as the maximum frequency for this tap configuration is 6 kHz. Connection to ‘a’ and ‘m’ taps must be adhered to on both primary and secondary so as to maintain a 1:1 ratio.
Refer to P521/EN AC for more information.
Clock Source Settings
Set relay Clock Source setting (COMMUNICATION/Protection/Clock Source CH1).
Modem Type Clock Source Setting
Synchronous
Asynchronous
External
Internal
Conditioned Pilot Communications
When communicating via conditioned pilot wires (i.e. leased telecom circuits that run through signal equalization equipment) the P521 should be connected to leased line modems at each end of the line. The data rate can be set to either 9.6 or 19.2 kbit/sec.
The protocol must be set to “NRZ” (Non Return to Zero).
Modem summary table: For full information see the modem configuration document
P521/EN MC .
Type Max Distance (km)
Recommended Data
Rate (kbit/sec)
Typical Re-train Time
(Seconds)
TD36 n/a 9.6 5
Connection to the modem can be made via the EIA(RS)485 or EIA(RS)232 outputs (of
SK1), depending upon the type of modem. Typical connection diagrams are shown in section P521/EN CO . For more information on setting up the modem refer to P521/EN
MC (modem configuration).
Gas Discharge Tubes (GDTs)
Gas Discharge Tubes (GDTs) are commonly used to provide overvoltage/surge protection for conditioned pilots circuits. These are dispersed at intervals along the pilot circuit to limit the voltage between pilots and ground during heavy earth faults. The GDTs limit the high potential by transiently shorting the pilots to both each other and ground.
This, however, will temporarily interrupt the protection communications, thus preventing the protection from operating when required to do so. To prevent interruptions in the protection communications it is recommended that either:
•
The earth fault level is checked to ensure that the resulting pilot voltage is less than
the voltage threshold of the GDTs (use equations from section 5.8)
or
•
The GDTs be removed and replaced with pilot isolation transformers
Page (AP) 6-90 P521/EN AP/Ca4
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RELAYS
5.7
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Direct 4 wire EIA(RS)485 up to 1.2 km
Direct connection between two P521 relays using 4 wire EIA(RS)485 can be used at data rates of 9.6, 19.2, 56 and 64 kbit/sec. The protocol for this communication method can be either “SDLC” or “NRZ”. Ideally the interconnecting wires should be 2 screened twisted pairs.
For the direct EIA(RS)485 connections up to 1.2 km it is strongly recommended that the
MT-RS485 be fitted. The MT-RS485 protects the relay communications interface from excessive transverse voltages (voltage between pilot cores) and static spikes. However, for reliable communications it must be ensured that the longitudinal voltage never exceeds 600 V as the MT-RS485 surge protection may corrupt the protection signaling.
Figure 30 shows the connection diagram for the MT-RS485.
5.8
P521/EN AP/Ca4
Figure 30 - MT-RS485 connection diagram
Refer to section P521/EN CO for application diagram.
Pilot Isolation
During primary earth faults the strong magnetic field generated can induce a significant voltage between the pilots and ground (longitudinal voltage). To prevent damage to any equipment connected to the pilot circuit it must be ensured that the modem can provide an adequate isolation barrier between the pilot itself and all other electrically isolated circuits. Although it may be difficult to accurately predict the induced pilot voltage during an earth fault, the following equations can be used to give an approximation:
Induced voltage for un-screened pilots
0.3 x
F
x L
Induced voltage for screened pilots
0.1 x
F
x L
Where:
F
= Maximum prospective earth fault current in amperes
L = Length of pilot circuit in miles
In cases where the calculated voltage exceeds, typically 60% of the relay/modem isolation level, additional isolation must be added. Schneider Electric offer the PCM-FLÜ
10kV or 20kV isolating transformers (see P521/EN AC for more information). If necessary, these can be used in conjunction with leased line or mDSL modems. The choice of 10 kV or 20 kV will depend upon the magnitude of the induced voltage. Typical
Page (AP) 6-91
(AP) 6 Application Guide
5.9
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RELAYS application diagrams of the PCM-FLÜ isolating transformer are shown in section
P521/EN CO (connection diagrams).
Protection Communications Address
The protection communication messages include an address field to ensure correct scheme connection.
There are 32 addresses arranged into 16 groups (COMMUNICATION/ Protection/Relay
Address) to select from. Each protection system has a single group applied to it.
All the address patterns are carefully chosen so as to provide optimum noise immunity against bit corruption. There is no preference as to which address group is better than another.
The groups of addresses available for a “2 Terminal” scheme are shown in Table 25:
Relay A Relay B
Address Group 1
Address Group 2
Address Group 3
Address Group 4
Address Group 5
Address Group 6
Address Group 7
Address Group 8
Address Group 9
Address Group 10
Address Group 11
Address Group 12
Address Group 13
Address Group 14
Address Group 15
Address Group 16
8A
9A
10A
11A
12A
13A
14A
15A
16A
1A
2A
3A
4A
5A
6A
7A
8B
9B
10B
11B
12B
13B
14B
15B
16B
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
Table 25 - Relay addresses
For two relays to communicate with one another their addresses have to be in the same address group. One relay should be assigned with address A and the other with address
B. For example, if the group 1 addresses are to be used, the one relay should be set to address “1A” and the other relay should be set to address “1B”.
A relay with address “1A” will only accept messages from a relay with address “1B”, and vice versa.
Page (AP) 6-92 P521/EN AP/Ca4
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RELAYS
5.10
5.10.1
5.10.2
5.11
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Clock Source
A Clock Source is required to synchronize data transmissions between the system ends.
This may be provided either by the P521 relay (internal) or may be a function of the telecommunications equipment (external). The P521 relay has a setting that allows the
Clock Source to either “Internal” or “External” according to the communications system configuration (COMMUNICATION/Protection/Clock Source Ch1) .
Internal Clock Source Signaling
The Clock Source should be set to “Internal” at all system ends, where they are connected by direct optical fiber as the P521 at each end has to supply the clock.
External Clock Source
The Clock Source should be set to “External” at all system ends, where the ends are connected by multiplexer equipment which is receiving a master clock signal from the multiplexer network. It is important that there is a single master Clock Source on the multiplexer network and that the multiplexer equipment at each end is synchronized to this clock.
Data Rate
The Data Rate for signaling between the two ends is application specific
(COMMUNICATION/Protection/Data Rate).
If there is a direct fiber connection between the ends, the data rate would usually be set to 64kbit/sec, as this gives a slightly faster trip time.
If there is a multiplexer network between the ends, then this will determine the Data Rate to be used by the P521 system. The electrical interface to the multiplexer (G.703 codirectional, V.35, or X.21) will be provided on either a 64 kbit/sec or 56 kbit/sec channel, and the P521 at each end must be set to match this data rate.
Generally, North American multiplexer networks are based on 56 kbit/sec (and multiples thereof) channels, whereas multiplexer networks in the rest of the world are normally based on 64 kbit/sec (and multiples thereof) channels.
Refer to sections 5.4 to 5.7 for typical data rates for metallic/modem communications.
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-93
(AP) 6 Application Guide
5.12
5.12.1
5.12.2
5.12.3
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RELAYS
Communication Failure
An internal communication failure flag is raised if a valid message is not received by the time three power system cycles have elapsed. The flag is used to trigger the communications fail timer. The flag and timer reset when the first valid message is received.
‘I DIFF FAIL’ Alarm
The ‘ DIFF FAIL’ alarm is generated when the communication failure flag is raised (if a valid message is not received by the time three power system cycles have elapsed). At this time, the current differential protection is inhibited.
If the CONFIGURATION/Alarms/Inst.Self-reset?
menu cell is set to “Yes”, then the ‘
DI FF FAIL’ alarm automatically resets when the internal communication flag is reset; otherwise the alarm reset must be done by the push button.
‘COMMS ALARM CH1’ Alarm
The communication fail timer ( COMMUNICATION/Protection/Comm Fail Timer ) is the time for which communication errors must be continuously detected before the channel is declared failed. Expiry of the communication fail timer results in the generation of the
‘COMMS ALARM CH1’ alarm. The COMMUNICATION/Protection/Comm Fail Timer setting is normally set to the maximum of 9.9 seconds so that the alarm will not be given for short bursts of noise or interruptions.
If the CONFIGURATION/Alarms/Comm.Fail-reset?
menu cell is set to “Yes”, then the
‘COMMS ALARM CH1’ alarm automatically resets when the internal communication flag is reset; otherwise the alarm reset must be done by the push button.
Communications Failure Logic
Figure 31 details the operation of the communications fail logic.
ALARM
COMMS ALARM
CH1
No valid messages received for 3 protection cycles
T Comms fail
(Comms Fail Timer)
RELAY COMMS Fail
LED COMMS Fail
Back-up Mode
Activated
- All back-up protection enabled
E.g. Phase O/C + E/
Gnd
RELAY
LED
Back-up Protection
Back-up Protection
Idiff Fail
- Current differential protection inhibited
ALARM
LED
IDIFF FAIL
IDIFF FAIL
P1447ENa
Figure 31 - Communications failure logic
Page (AP) 6-94 P521/EN AP/Ca4
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RELAYS
5.13
5.14
5.15
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Communication Error Statistics
To aid the bit error evaluation of the communication link, communication error statistics are kept by the relay. These give the number of Errored messages detected and the number of Valid Messages received for the communications channel. The number of errored messages detected complies with ITU-T G.821.
Valid messages
Errored messages
Errored seconds
Severely errored seconds
Propagation delay
Elapsed time since reset
The stored error statistics are:
- Number of messages received OK
- Number of messages received and rejected
-
Number of seconds containing 1 or more errored messages. This is not updated for severely errored seconds
- Number of seconds containing
30% errored messages
- The delay introduced by the communications channel
-
The number of seconds since the communications error statistics were last reset
The error statistics are automatically restored on power-up. They can also be cleared using the Clear Statistics setting in Measurements column of the menu.
Communications Delay Tolerance Timer
The communications delay tolerance timer ( COMMUNICATION/Protection/ Comms
Delay Tol) is the maximum difference in the measured channel propagation delay time between consecutive messages that the relay will tolerate before switching the settings,
as described in section 5.2.4.
It is settable in the range 200 µs to 10 ms. The default value is 10 ms, which is suitable for protection communications using metallic/modem communications at lower data rates.
A setting of 200
s is more appropriate for a data rate of 56 or 64 kbit/sec. It can be increased to a suitable value if the propagation delay time is expected to vary considerably such as in the case of a microwave link with multiple repeaters.
Communication Compatibility
The compatibilities among various software versions are (also refer to the chapter
P521_EN_VC):
•
•
•
Among phase 1: all V1 up to V5.A
Between phase 1 and phase 2: V5.B and later to V10.A and later
Among all phase 2: V10.A and later
P521/EN AP/Ca4 Page (AP) 6-95
(AP) 6 Application Guide
Notes:
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RELAYS
Page (AP) 6-96 P521/EN AP/Ca4
MiCOM P521 (GC) 7 Communications
COMMUNICATIONS
MODBUS AND DNP3.0 DATABASE
IEC 60870-5-103
CHAPTER 7
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-1
(GC) 7 Communications
Date:
Software version:
Hardware Suffix:
Connection diagram:
January 2012
13
B
10P52101
MiCOM P521
Page (GC) 7-2 P521/EN GC/B93
Contents (GC) 7 Communications
CONTENTS
1 Introduction
2 MODBUS Protocol
Technical Characteristics of the MODBUS Connection
MODBUS Functions of MiCOM Relays
Format of the P521 Response to a Request from a Master
3 MODBUS Implementation
Page 1: Non Protection Settings
Page 2h: Group 1 Protection Settings
Pages 5h and 6h: Boolean Equation
Page 6h: Boolean Equation Timers, Programmable Inter-trip and CTS
Page 7h: Quick Read Relay Status (MODBUS 07 Function)
Page 24: Group 3 Protection Settings
Page 25: Group 4 Protection Settings
Diagnostics and Communications Event Counters
3-Dimensional MODBUS Registers
Specific Event Record Extraction
Oldest Non-Acknowledged Fault Record
Page (GC) 7-
7
8
13
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-3
(GC) 7 Communications
Channel Selection and Configuration
Disturbance Recorder Index Frame
Commonly Required Functionality
4 IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol
Technical Characteristics of the IEC 60870-5-103 Connection
IEC 60870-5-103 Compatible Application Functions
5 IEC 60870-5-103 Detailed Implementation
Compatible Range Information Numbers in Monitor Direction
Compatible Range Information Numbers in Control Direction
Private Range Information Numbers in Monitor Direction
Private Range Information Numbers in Control Direction
6 DNP3.0 Introduction
Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Block
Contents
81
86
90
Page (GC) 7-4 P521/EN GC/B93
Tables (GC) 7 Communications
TABLES
Page (GC) 7-
Table 1 - Selectable parity and stop bits parameters
Table 3 - Overview of memory pages
Table 4 - Page 0H: Product Information
Table 5 - Page 1: Non Protection Settings
Table 6 - Page 2h: Group 1 Protection Settings
Table 7 - Page 4h: Remote Control Words
Table 8 - Pages 5h and 6h: Boolean Equation
Table 9 - Page 6h: Boolean Equation Timers, Programmable Inter-trip and CTS 34
Table 10 - Page 7h: Quick Read Relay Status (MODBUS 07 Function)Page 8h: Time
Table 13 - MODBUS sub-functions supported by MODBUS Diagnostics
Table 15 - Event record format
Table 16 - MODBUS Events and Alarms table
Table 17 - Event acknowledgement control
Table 18 - Page 37h: fault record mapping
Table 20 - Fault element meanings
Table 22 - Sensitivity Ranges and internal CT values
Table 23 - Remote control words, bits and functions
Table 24 - Word numbers and content
Table 25 - Addresses and disturbance records
Table 26 - Disturbance word numbers and formats
Table 27 - Page 9h to 21h: Channel Data Mapping
Table 28 - Channel names and formats
Table 29 - Sensitivity range and Internal CT Values
Table 30 - Format Of Logic Channel 1 and Channel 2
Table 31 - Index frame formats
Table 34 - Change Setting Group
Table 35 - Change Setting Group Request
Table 36 - Binary Channel 1 and 2 Mapping
Table 37 - Information about reading and writing settings
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-5
(GC) 7 Communications
Table 38 - Additional information about reading and writing settings
Table 39 - Compatible Range Information Numbers in Monitor Direction
Table 40 - Compatible Range Information Numbers in Control Direction
Table 41 - Private Range Information Numbers in Monitor Direction
Table 42 - Private Range Information Numbers in Control Direction
Table 43 - Device Profile Document
Table 44 - Implementation Table
Table 45 - Binary Input Points
Table 46 - Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Block
Table 47 - Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21)
Tables
Page (GC) 7-6 P521/EN GC/B93
INTRODUCTION
1
1.1
(GC) 7 Communications
INTRODUCTION
Purpose of this Document
This chapter describes the data model of the different communication protocols of the
P521 relay.
•
•
The available communication protocols of the MiCOM P521 relay are as follows:
•
MODBUS RTU
IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3.0
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-7
(GC) 7 Communications
2
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
MODBUS PROTOCOL
MODBUS PROTOCOL
MiCOM P521 relays can communicate by an EIA(RS)485 link behind the unit following the MODBUS RTU protocol.
Technical Characteristics of the MODBUS Connection
MODBUS Setting Parameters
•
•
•
Isolated two-point EIA(RS)485 connection (2 kV 50 Hz)
MODBUS line protocol using RTU mode
▪
▪
▪
▪
▪
Selectable baud rate
▪ 300
▪ 600
▪ 1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
•
Selectable parity and No of stop bits parameters
No. of Start Bits
(Fixed at 1)
No. of Data Bits (Fixed at 8)
1
1
8
8
Parity No Stop Bits
None 1
Even 1
10
11
Total Word
Length
1
1
8
8
Odd 1
None 2
11
11
Table 1 - Selectable parity and stop bits parameters
Message Synchronization
A firm start is defined as an absence of data transmission after the last transmission for a time equal or greater to that required to send 3 characters.
Message Validity Check
The frame validity checking used is a 16-bit cyclical redundancy code (CRC).
The generator polynomial used is:
1 + x 2 + x 15 + x 16 = 1010 0000 0000 0001 binary = A001h
MiCOM Relay Addressing
MiCOM relay addresses on the same MODBUS network should be set between 1 and
255. The 0 address is reserved for broadcast messages.
Page (GC) 7-8 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS PROTOCOL
2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.2.1
2.3.2.2
(GC) 7 Communications
MODBUS Functions of MiCOM Relays
The MODBUS functions implemented on the MiCOM relays are:
Function No.
Function 1
Function 2
Function 3
Function 4
Function 5
Function 6
Function 7
Function 8
Function 11
Function 15
Function 16
Table 2 - MODBUS functions
Function Name
Read Coils
Read Discrete Inputs
Read Holding Registers
Read Input Registers
Write Single Coil
Write Single Register
Read Exception Status
Diagnostics
Get Comm Event Counter
Write Multiple Coils
Write Multiple Registers
Description
Read n bits
Read n bits
Read n words
Read n words
Write 1 bit
Write 1 word
Fast 1 byte read
Communications Diagnostics
No. of Message Completions
Write n bits
Write n words
MODBUS Function Operation
Introduction
MODBUS is a master/slave protocol that requires a data model of each slave device it is to communicate with. The master initiates all communication therefore the slave can only respond with either the requested data or an exception.
Request by the Master
Slave Address
1 byte
Function Code
1 byte
Information n bytes
16 Bit CRC
2 bytes
Slave Address
The slave number can be between 1 and 255.
A network broadcast frame is available in MODBUS and has an address of 0 but is unsupported in the P521.
Function Codes
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-9
(GC) 7 Communications
2.3.2.3
2.3.2.4
2.3.3
2.3.3.1
2.3.3.2
MODBUS PROTOCOL
Structure of the Information Field by MODBUS Function
Functions 1 to 4
Starting Address
2 bytes 2 bytes
No. of Registers Requested (N)
Functions 5 and 6
Register Address
2 bytes
Function 8
Sub-Function code
2 bytes
2 bytes
Register Value
Loopback Data
N * 2 bytes
Functions 15 and 16
Starting Address
No. of Registers to be
Written to (N)
No. of Bytes
Requested
2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte
The information field is blank for MODBUS functions 7 and 11.
Register Value
N * 2 bytes
CRC16
Format of the P521 Response to a Request from a Master
Frame sent by the MiCOM relay (response).
Slave Number
1 byte
Function Code
1 byte n bytes
Data
2 bytes
CRC16
Slave Number
The slave number is situated between 1 and 255.
Function Code
Page (GC) 7-10 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS PROTOCOL
2.3.3.3
2.3.3.4
2.3.3.5
(GC) 7 Communications
Structure of the Data Field by MODBUS Function
Functions 1 and 2
Byte Count (N)
1 byte
N
* 1 byte
8
Functions 3 and 4
Byte Count (N)
1 byte
Functions 5 and 6
Register Address
2 bytes
Function 7
N * 2 bytes
2 bytes
Output Data
1 byte
Function 8
Sub-Function Code
2 bytes
Function 11
Status
2 bytes
Functions 15 and 16
Starting Address
2 bytes
N * 2 bytes
N * 2 bytes
2 bytes
Coil Value
Register Value
Register Value
Data
Event Count
No. of Register Written
Byte and Word Order
Each MODBUS word consists of 2 bytes. The bytes are transmitted in the order, low byte then high byte. If a MODBUS register consists of 2 words then the high word is transmitted before the low word.
CRC16
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-11
(GC) 7 Communications
2.3.4
2.3.4.1
2.3.4.2
2.3.4.3
2.3.4.4
2.3.4.5
2.3.5
MODBUS PROTOCOL
Messages Validity Check
When MiCOM P521 relays receive a master query, it validates the frame:
If the CRC is incorrect, the frame is invalid. MiCOM P521 relays do not reply to the query. The master must re-transmit its query.
If the CRC is correct but the MiCOM relay can not process the query, it sends an exception response.
Exception Response
Slave Number
1 byte
Function Code
1 byte
Slave Number
The slave number can be between 1 and 255.
Exception Code
1 byte 2 bytes
CRC16
Function Code
The function code returned by the MiCOM relay in the exception response is the function code sent by the master but with the most significant bit (Bit 7) forced to 1.
•
Exception Code
The MiCOM P521 relay supports 4 exception codes.
•
•
Code 01 Illegal Function: The function code received in the request is invalid
Code 03 Illegal Data Value: A value contained in a request data field is invalid
The No. of registers written to/read from is incorrect
The address of registers written to/read from is incorrect
Code 05 Acknowledge: If the MiCOM P521 is processing a request from the master and a further request is sent from the master this exception code is sent to prevent any timeouts occurring in the master device.
•
Code 0F: No disturbance record available
CRC16
Slave Access Control
The front panel access takes priority over rear panel control communication. While the password is active due to a front panel setting change, access via the front and rear control communications is prevented by the P521 responding to all requests with an exception.
Page (GC) 7-12 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
3
3.1
3.2
(GC) 7 Communications
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
The MODBUS implementation of the relay is based on a number of memory pages being available for access via one or more MODBUS functions.
Overview
Page
Page 0
Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
Page 4
Page 5
Page 6
Page 7
Page 8
Address Range Access Rights
0000-00FF h Read only
MODBUS
Function
1, 2, 3 or 4
0100-01FF h
0200-02FF h
0300-03FF h
0400-0403 h
0500-05FF h
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read only
Read/Write
3, 4, 6 or 16
3, 4, 6 or 16
3, 4, 6 or 16
5 or 6 or 15
3, 4, 6 or 16
0600-06FF h
0700 h
0800-0803 h
Pages 9 to 21 0900-21FA h
Page 22
Page 24
Page 25
Page 35
Page 36
Page 37
Pages 38 to 3C 3800-3C06 h
Page 3D
Page 3E
2200 h
2400-2479 h
2500-2579 h
3500-35F9 h
3600 h
3700 – 3704 h
3D00 h
3E00 h
Read/Write
Read only
Write only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
3, 4, 6 or 16
7
16
3 or 4
3 or 4
3, 4, 6 or 16
3, 4, 6 or 16
3 or 4
3 or 4
3 or 4
3 or 4
3 or 4
3 or 4
Usage
Product information, event flags and measurements
Non-protection settings
Group 1 protection settings
Group 2 protection settings
Remote control words
Operators & Operands of
Logic Equations
Delay Timers of Logic
Equations and CTS
Settings
Quick read status byte
Time synchronization
Disturbance record channel data
Disturbance record index frame
Group 3 protection settings
Group 4 protection settings
Event records
Oldest event records
Fault records
Disturbance recorder channel selection and configuration
Summary disturbance records
Oldest fault record
Note The recommended MODBUS functions for each page are in bold type.
Table 3 - Overview of memory pages
3-Dimensional MODBUS Registers
MODBUS registers from page 9 onwards i.e. event, fault and disturbance records are three-dimensional. In order to read all the data the register contains, the specified number of words must be read. If an incorrect number of words are requested then a
MODBUS exception code 03 will be returned. The number of words contained and the format of the data to be read has been documented in the format section included with each register type.
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-13
(GC) 7 Communications MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
3.3 Mapping
The detailed mapping of the relay pages 0 to 8 are shown in sections 3.3.1 to 3.3.8.
The codes shown in the cell types columns are detailed in the table of register formats in
3.3.1 Page 0H: Product Information
Modbus Description
Modbus
Address
Start End
Cell
Type
Product Information
Reserved
Reference
Software Version
Communications Type
Internal Phase Ratio
0000 0002 -
0003 0004 F10
0005 0005 F21
0006 0006 F41
0007 0007 F1
Address Value
Min
-
32
10
0
N/A
Max
-
127
65536
2
N/A
Internal Earth Ratio 0008 0008 F1
Reserved
Active Setting Group
Password Active
Hardware Alarm Status
Remote Signalling
0009 000C -
000D 000D F1
000E 000E F24
000F 000F F45
Logic Input States 0010 0010 F12
Logic Inputs Functions Status (Word 1) 0011 0011 F20
Logic Inputs Functions Status (Word 2) 0012 0012 F20'
Trip Condition Control Logic
Output Contact Hardware State
Idiff Status Flags
I> Status Flags
0013
0014
0015
0016
0013
0014
0015
0016
F22
F13
F52
F17
I>> Status Flags
I>>> Status Flags
I>>>> Status Flags
Ie> Status Flags
Ie>> Status Flags
Ie>>> Status Flags
Ie>>>> Status Flags
Idiff Alarm Flags
Intertrip Alarm Flags
Reserved
I> Alarm Flags
I>> Alarm Flags
I>>> Alarm Flags
I>>>> Alarm Flags tI> Alarm Flags
0017
0018
0019
001A
001B
001C
001D
0017
0018
0019
001A
001B
001C
001D
F17
F17
F17
F16
F16
F16
F16
001E 001E F53
001F 001F F54
0020 0020 -
0021 0021 F17
0022 0022 F17
0023 0023 F17
0024 0024 F17
0025 0025 F17
N/A
-
1
N/A
0
N/A
-
2
N/A
FFFF
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
0
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
-
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
-
2N
Step
-
1
1
1
N/A
N/A
-
1
N/A
2N
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Units Default
1
0
-
-
"SE "
13.A
-
800
See Note
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Page (GC) 7-14 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
Modbus Description tI>> Alarm Flags tI>>> Alarm Flags tI>>>> Alarm Flags
Thermal State Status Flags
I< Status Flags
I2> Status Flags
I2>> Status Flags
Broken Conductor / CB Failure / CB
Status Flags
I< Alarm Flags
General Alarm Flags (Word 1)
General Alarm Flags (Word 2)
Number of Available Disturbance
Records
Type of Fault Record Generated for the
Fault
CB Supervision Status Flags
Output Contact Latching Status
Command Status to UnLatch Latched
Output Contacts
Commissioning Status Flags
All Protection Elements Tripped During the Fault (Word 1)
All Protection Elements Tripped During the Fault (Word 2)
Output Contact Function State
Boolean Equation Status Flags
Boolean Equation Alarm Flags
Programmable Intertrip Status Flags
Reserved
Remote Measurements
Phase A Current RMS Value
Phase B Current RMS Value
Phase C Current RMS Value
Earth Current RMS Value
Thermal State
Reserved
Phase A Current Peak RMS Value
Phase B Current Peak RMS Value
Phase C Current Peak RMS Value
Phase A Current Rolling RMS Value
Phase B Current Rolling RMS Value
Phase C Current Rolling RMS Value
Ie Harmonique
Modbus
Address
Start
0026 0026 F17
0027 0027 F17
0028 0028 F17
0029
002A
002B
002C
End
0029
002A
002B
002C
Cell
Type
F37
F17
F16
F16
002D 002D F38
002E 002E F17
002F 002F F36
0030 0030 F44
0031 0031 F31
0032 0032 F1
0033 0033 F43
0034 0034 F13
0035 0035 F1
0036 0036 F56
0037 0037 F64
0038 0038 F65
0039 0039 F13
003A 003A F81
003B 003B F81
003C 003C F82
003D 003F -
0040 0041 F18
0042 0043 F18
0044 0045 F18
0046 0047 F18
0048 0048 F1
0049 0049 -
004A 004B F18
004C 004D F18
004E 004F F18
0050 0051 F18
0052 0053 F18
0054 0055 F18
0056 0057 F18
0
0
0
0
0
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Address Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
-
Max
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
5
18
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
6000000
6000000
6000000
1200000
1000
-
6000000
6000000
6000000
6000000
6000000
6000000
6000000
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
-
1
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
1
Step
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Units
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Default
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1/100 A
1/100 A
1/100 A
1/100 A
%
-
1/100 A
1/100 A
1/100 A
1/100 A
1/100 A
1/100 A
1/100 A
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-15
(GC) 7 Communications MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
Modbus Description
Modbus
Address
Cell
Type
Start End
Negative Phase Sequence Current Value
0058 0059 F18
(Fundamental)
Positive Phase Sequence Current Value
(Fundamental)
005A 005B F18
Ratio of Positive to Negative Sequence
Current
005C 005C F1
005D 005F - Reserved
Current Differential Measurements
Phase A Local Current 0060 0061 F18
Phase B Local Current
Phase C Local Current
Reserved
Phase A Remote Current
Reserved
Phase B Remote Current
Reserved
0062
0064
0066
006C
006E
0070
0072
0063
0065
006B
006D
006F
0071
0073
F18
F18
-
F18
-
F18
-
Phase C Remote Current
Reserved
Phase A Differential Current
Phase B Differential Current
Phase C Differential Current
Phase A Bias Current
Phase B Bias Current
Phase C Bias Current
Channel 1 Valid Messages
Channel 1 Error Messages
Channel 1 Errored Seconds
Channel 1 Severely Errored Seconds
Reserved
Channel 1 Propagation Delay
Reserved
0074
0076
0084
0086
0088
008A
008C
008E
0090
0092
0094
0075
0083
0085
0087
0089
008B
008D
008F
0091
0093
0095
F18
-
F18
F18
F18
F18
F18
F18
F57
F57
F57
0096 0097 F57
0098 0099 -
009A 009B F57
009C 00A7 -
Elapsed Communications Time
Phase A Local Angle
Phase B Local Angle
Phase C Local Angle
Phase A Differential Angle
Phase B Differential Angle
Phase C Differential Angle
Fourier Module
Modulus IA
Modulus IB
Modulus IC
Modulus IE
00A8 00A9 F57
00AA 00AA F2
00AB 00AB F2
00AC 00AC F2
00AD 00AD F2
00AE 00AE F2
00AF 00AF F2
00B0
00B1
00B2
00B3
00B0
00B1
00B2
00B3
F1
F1
F1
F1
0
0
0
-
0
0
0
0
Address Value
Min
0
-
0
-
0
-180
-180
-180
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-180
-180
-180
0
-
0
0
-
0
-
0
0
0
-
0
6000000
6000000
1000
-
Max
65534
65534
65534
65534
1
1
1
-
6000000
6000000
6000000
-
6000000
-
6000000
-
6000000
-
6000000
6000000
6000000
6000000
6000000
6000000
4294967294 1
4294967294 1
4294967294 1
1
1
1
1
4294967294 1
- -
12000000 1
- -
4294967294 1
179 1
179
179
1
1
179
179
179
1
1
1
1
-
1
1
-
1
-
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
1
Step
%
-
-
-
-
-
Units
1/100 A -
1/100 A -
-
-
-
-
-
-
Default
1/100 A -
1/100 A -
1/100 A -
- -
1/100 A -
- -
1/100 A -
- -
1/100 A -
- -
1/100 A -
1/100 A -
-
- s
1/100 A -
1/100 A -
1/100 A -
1/100 A -
-
-
- s
- ms
-
-
-
-
- s - degrees 400 (Error) degrees 400 (Error) degrees 400 (Error) degrees 400 (Error) degrees 400 (Error) degrees 400 (Error)
Page (GC) 7-16 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
Modbus Description
Modbus
Address
Start End
Cell
Type
Fourier Argument
Argument IA
Argument IB
Argument IC
Argument IE
Module I2
Module I1
Recloser Statistics
00B4 00B4 F1
00B5 00B5 F1
00B6 00B6 F1
00B7
00B8
00B9
00B7
00B8
00B9
F1
F1
F1
Reserved
Rolling Demand
00BA 00C0 -
RMS IA Average Value for Rolling Menu 00C1 00C2 F18
RMS IB Average Value for Rolling Menu 00C3 00C4 F18
RMS IC Average Value for Rolling Menu 00C5 00C6 F18
RMS IA Max Value for Rolling Menu 00C7 00C8 F18
RMS IB Max Value for Rolling Menu 00C9 00CA F18
00CB 00CC F18 RMS IC Max Value for Rolling Menu
Inrush
Inrush Block Control Flags
Inrush Block Alarm Flags
00CD
00CE
00CD
00CE
F70
F71
CTS
CTS Control Flags
CTS Alarm Flags
Frame Mode
Frame Mode Flag
Frame Mode Alarm Flag
CORTEC Information
Model Number
Serial Number auxiliary powers supply analogic inputs transformer
Reserved
Note 1:
Sensitivity Range
Internal CT Value
00CF
00D0
00D1
00D2
00D3 00DA F86
00DB 00DE F86
00DF 00DF F98
00E0 00E0 F99
00E1
0.1 to 40 Ien Range
00CF
00D0
00D1
00D2
00FF
Internal CT Value is 800
F72
F73
F87
F87
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
-
0
0
-
Address Value
Min
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
-
6000000
6000000
6000000
6000000
6000000
6000000
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
1
1
-
-
FFFF
FFFF
-
0.01 to 8 Ien Range
Max
Internal CT Value is 3277
Table 4 - Page 0H: Product Information
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
2N
2N
2N
2N
1
1
-
-
2N
2N
-
Step
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Units
-
1/100 A -
1/100 A -
1/100 A -
1/100 A -
1/100 A -
1/100 A -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Default
0.002 to 1 Ien Range
Internal CT Value is 32700
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-17
(GC) 7 Communications MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
3.3.2 Page 1: Non Protection Settings
Modbus Description
Modbus
Address
Start End
Cell
Type
Non Protection Settings - Remote
Parameters
Address
Language
Password
Frequency
Phase A Label
Phase B Label
Phase C Label
Earth Label
Default Display
0100 0100 F1
0101 0101 F1
0102
0104
0105
0103
0104
0105
F10
F1
F25
0106 0106 F25
0107 0107 F25
0108 0108 F25
0109 0109 F26
User Reference (Characters 1 and 2)
Fault Record to Display in Menu
010A
010C
010B
010C
F10
F31
Logic Inputs Edge Configuration Setting 010D 010D F12
Instantaneous Fault Record to Display in
Menu
Logic Inputs Voltage Input Setting
Non Protection Settings - CB Monitoring
Measurements
Number of CB Operations Value
010E
010F
010E
010F
F31
F50
CB Opening Time Value
IA Summation Current Value
IB Summation Current Value
IC Summation Current Value
CB Closing Time Value
CB Trip and Close Control
Manual CB Tripping Delay Time Value
0110 0110 F1
0111
0112
0114
0111
0113
0115
F1
F18
F18
0116 0117 F18
0118 0118 F1
0119 0119 F63
011A 011A F1
011B 011B F1
011C 011E -
Manual CB Closing Delay Time Value
Reserved
Enabled/Disabled State of the Output
Relay Latching
Non Protection Settings - Ratio
Primary Phase CT Value
011F 011F F14
Secondary Phase CT Value
Primary Earth CT Value
Secondary Earth CT Value
CT Correction Ratio
0120 0120 F1
0121
0122
0123
0124
0121
0122
0123
0124
F1
F1
F1
F1
Vectorial Compensation
Reserved
0125 0125 F66
0126 012E -
Direction of Phase Rotation
Non Protection Settings - Communications
012F 012F F51
Speed 0130 0130 F4
L2
L3
N
1
48
1
0
1
0
65
50
L1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
50
0
-
0
0
Address Value
Min
255
7
90
60
A-R
B-W
C-B o-E
4
90
5
FFFF
5
1
Max
FFFF
9999
5
9999
5
10000
14
-
1
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
2N
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
Step
600000 1
600000 1
600000 1
600000 1
600000 1
600000 1
2
6000
1
10
6000
-
10
-
2N
1
-
1
1
1
4
1
4
1
Units
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Hz
-
-
-
- -
1/100 s -
An -
An -
An -
1/100 s -
- 0
1/100 s 0
1/100 s 0
- -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1/1000
5
0
0
Default
1
1
AAAA
50
L1
L2
L3
N
1
"AAAA"
5
0
0
-
0
6
1000
1
1000
1
1000
Page (GC) 7-18 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
Modbus Description
Parity
Stop Bits
COM Available
Data Format
Reserved
Non Protection Settings - Protection
Communications
Protocol
Modbus
Address
Start End
0131 0131 F5
0132 0132 F29
0133 0133 F30
0134
0135
0134
013F
Cell
Type
F48
Data Rate
Relay Address
Channel 1 Clock Source
Reserved
Communications Fail Timer
Communications Delay Tolerance
0140 0140 F58
0141
0142
0143
0141
0142
0143
F59
F60
F61
0144 0147 -
0148 0148 F1
0149 014A F57
Characteristic Modification Time
Reserved
014B 014C F57
014D 014E -
Non Protection Settings - Configuration
Comms Fail Auto-Reset Enable 014F 014F F1
Active Setting Group Selection
Self-Reset Alarm Enabled State
Change Group Input Level Type
Battery Alarm Enabled State
0150 0150 F1
0151 0151 F1
0152 0152 F47
0153 0153 F1
Non Protection Settings - LED Allocation
LED 5 Function Allocation (Word 1) 0154 0154 F19
LED 6 Function Allocation (Word 1) 0155 0155 F19
LED 7 Function Allocation (Word 1)
LED 8 Function Allocation (Word 1)
LED 5 Function Allocation (Word 2)
LED 6 Function Allocation (Word 2)
LED 7 Function Allocation (Word 2)
LED 8 Function Allocation (Word 2)
LED 5 Function Allocation (Word 3)
LED 6 Function Allocation (Word 3)
LED 7 Function Allocation (Word 3)
LED 8 Function Allocation (Word 3)
Non Protection Settings - Commissioning
Options
Commissioning Options ?
Initiate LED Test
0156 0156 F19
0157 0157 F19
0158 0158 F19'
0159 0159 F19'
015A 015A F19'
015B 015B F19'
015C 015C F19''
015D 015D F19''
015E 015E F19''
015F 015F F19''
Disable Output Contact Operation
Output Contacts Selected for Test
Perform Output Contact Test
Inhibit Circuit Breaker Measurements
0160 0160 F24
0161 0161 F24
0162 0162 F24
0163 0163 F62
0164 0164 F24
0165 0165 F24
0
0
0
0
0
0
Address Value
2
1
1
1
Max
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
4
1
1
1
FFFF
FFFF
2
3
31
1
-
999
1000
10000
-
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
-
0
-
0
20
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
1
1
1
FFFF
1
1
1
1
1
2N
1
1
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
1
1
1
1
2N
2N
-
1
2
10
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
1
1
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1/100s
1/100s
-
1/100s
-
-
-
-
-
Units
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
-
999
1000
10000
-
0
0
Default
0
1
0
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-19
(GC) 7 Communications MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
Modbus Description
Enable Communications Loopback
Modbus
Address
Start
0166
End
0166
Cell
Type
F75
Non Protection Settings - Logic Input
Allocation
Logic Input 1 Function Allocation (Word 1) 0167 0167 F15
Logic Input 2 Function Allocation (Word 1) 0168 0168 F15
Logic Input 3 Function Allocation (Word 1) 0169 0169 F15
Logic Input 4 Function Allocation (Word 1) 016A 016A F15
Logic Input 5 Function Allocation (Word 1) 016B 016B F15
Reserved 016C 016F -
Logic Input 1 Function Allocation (Word 2) 0170 0170 F15'
Logic Input 2 Function Allocation (Word 2) 0171 0171 F15'
Logic Input 3 Function Allocation (Word 2) 0172 0172 F15'
Logic Input 4 Function Allocation (Word 2) 0173 0173 F15'
Logic Input 5 Function Allocation (Word 2) 0174 0174 F15'
Reserved
Auxiliary Timer 1
Auxiliary Timer 2
Reserved
Non Protection Settings - Output Relay
Allocation
Broken Conductor Detection
0175
0179
017A
017B
0180
0178
0179
017A
017F
0180
-
F1
F1
-
F14
CB Failure
I<
I2>
I2>>
Thermal Overload Alarm
Thermal Overload Trip tAux1
0181
0182
0183
0184
0185
0186
0187
0181
0182
0183
0184
0185
0186
0187
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14 tAux2
CB Close
CB Alarm
Trip Circuit Supervision Failure
Active Group
Trip Relay tI> tI>> tI>>> tI>>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> tIe>>>>
I>
0188 0188 F14
0189 0189 F14
018A 018A F14
018B 018B F14
018C 018C F14
018D 018D F14
018E 018E F14
018F 018F F14
0190 0190 F14
0191 0191 F14
0192 0192 F14
0193 0193 F14
0194 0194 F14
0195 0195 F14
0196 0196 F14
0
0
0
0
-
0
0
-
0
0
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Address Value
Min
1
Max
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
-
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
-
20000
20000
-
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
1
Step
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
-
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
-
1
1
-
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Units
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -
1/100 sec 0
1/100 sec 0
- -
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
0
0
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Page (GC) 7-20 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
Modbus Description
I>>
I>>>
I>>>>
Ie>
Ie>>
Ie>>>
Ie>>>>
Idiff Trip
Backup Protection On
Protection Communications Fail
Direct Intertrip
Current Differential Intertrip
Modbus
Address
Start
0197
0198
0199
019A
End
0197
0198
0199
019A
Cell
Type
F14
F14
F14
F14
019B 019B F14
019C 019C F14
019D 019D F14
019E 019E F14
019F 019F F14
01A0 01A0 F14
01A1 01A1 F14
01A2 01A2 F14
Permissive Intertrip
Output Contact Inversion
Trip Circuit Supervision Block
01A3 01A3 F14
01A4 01A4 F14
01A5 01A5 F14
Non Protection Settings - Trip Relay Logic
Trip Relay Function Allocation (Word 1) 01A6 01A6 F6
Trip Relay Function Allocation (Word 2) 01A7 01A7 F6'
Trip Relay Latching Function Allocation
(Word 1)
01A8 01A8 F8
Trip Relay Latching Function Allocation
(Word 2)
01A9 01A9 F8'
Blocking Logic 1 Function Allocation(Word
1)
01AA 01AA F8''
Blocking Logic 2 Function Allocation(Word
1)
01AB 01AB F8''
Non Protection Settings - Broken
Conductor Detection
Broken Conductor Detection ? 01AC 01AC F24 tBC Value
I2 / I1 Threshold
01AD 01AD F1
01AE 01AE F1
Non Protection Settings - Cold Load Start
Cold Load Start ? 01AF 01AF F24
Cold Load Start Function Allocation
Cold Load Start %
Cold Load Start Delay
Non Protection Settings - Selective
Scheme Logic
Selective Scheme Logic 1 Function
Allocation tSEL1 Value
01B0
01B1
01B2
01B3
01B4
01B0
01B1
01B2
01B3
01B4
F33
F1
F1
F40
F1
Selective Scheme Logic 2 Function
Allocation tSEL2 Value
Reserved
01B5
01B6
01B7
01B5
01B6
01BF
F40
F1
0
0
0
0
Address Value
0
0
20
0
0
20
1
0
0
0
0
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
1
14400
100
1
FFFF
500
36000
FFFF
15000
FFFF
15000
Max
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
Step
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
1
1
1
1
2N
1
1
2N
1
2N
1
-
-
-
-
- s
%
-
%
1/10s
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Units
-
0
0
0
- 0
1/100 s 0
- 0
1/100 s 0
0
5
20
0
0
200
400
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
FFFF
000F
0
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-21
(GC) 7 Communications MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
Modbus Description
Modbus
Address
Start End
Cell
Type
Non Protection Settings - Disturbance
Records
Pre-Time Value
Reserved
01C0 01C0 F1
01C1 01C1
01C2 01C2 F32 Disturbance Record Starting Condition
Non Protection Settings - Circuit Breaker
Supervision
TC Supervision ?
Trip Circuit Time Value
CB Open Supervision ?
CB Opening Time Threshold
CB Close Supervision ?
CB Closing Time Threshold
CB Open Alarm ?
CB Number of Opens Threshold
Summation Amps (n) ?
Summation Amps (n) Threshold
01C3 01C3 F24
01C4 01C4 F1
01C5 01C5 F24
01C6
01C7
01C8
01C9
01C6
01C7
01C8
01C9
F1
F24
F1
F1
01CA 01CA F1
01CB 01CB F24
01CC 01CC F1
Summation Amps N Type
Open Pulse Time Value
01CD 01CD F1
01CE 01CE F1
Close Pulse Time Value
Non Protection Settings - Time Peak Value
01CF 01CF F1
Time Window Value
Non Protection Settings - CB Fail
CB Failure ?
I< Threshold tBF Value
Block Phase Start
Block Earth Start
01D0
01D1
01D2
01D3
01D4
01D5
01D0
01D1
01D2
01D3
01D4
01D5
F42
F24
F1
F1
F24
F24
Non Protection Settings - Rolling Demand
Sub Period Value 01D6 01D6 F1
Number of Sub Periods 01D7 01D7 F1
Non Protection Settings - Output Relay
Allocation (Addtional)
Equation A
Equation B
01D8
01D9
01D8
01D9
F14
F14
Equation C
Equation D
Equation E
Equation F
Equation G
Equation H
Input 1
Input 2
01DA
01DB
01DC
01E0
01E1
01DA
01DB
01DC
01E0
01E1
F14
F14
F14
01DD 01DD F14
01DE 01DE F14
01DF 01DF F14
F14
F14
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Address Value
Min
3
0
0
5
0
2
1
1
0
0
0
1
10
10
5
0
5
0
0
10
0
90
1
Max
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
60
1
100
1000
1
1
60
24
50000
1
4000
2
500
500
1
10000
1
100
1
100
1
1
1
Step
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
1
1
1
TI
1
1
1
1
1
5
5
1
1
1
5
1
5
2
1
5
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Units
1/10 s
-
1
1
Default
-
1/100s
-
1/100s
-
1/100s
-
-
-
MA^n
0
0
0
- 1
1/100 s 10
1/100 s 10
5
0
5
0
0
40
0
Mins 5
- 0
1/100In 10
1/100s
-
-
10
0
0
Mins
-
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Page (GC) 7-22 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
Modbus Description
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Programmable Intertrip A
Programmable Intertrip B
Programmable Intertrip C
Programmable Intertrip D
CTS local CT Alarm
CTS remote CT Alarm
CTS Block
CTS Cdiff Restrain
Convention Mode
Modbus
Address
Cell
Type
Start End
01E2 01E2 F14
01E3 01E3 F14
01E4 01E4 F14
01E5 01E5 F14
01E6 01E6 F14
01E7 01E7 F14
01E8 01E8 F14
01E9 01E9 F14
01EA 01EA F14
01EB 01EB F14
01EC 01EC F14
01ED 01ED F14
Non Protection Settings -Block Allocation
(Addtional)
Blocking Logic 1 Function Allocation (Word
01EE 01EE F8'''
2)
Blocking Logic 2 Function Allocation (Word
01EF 01EF F8'''
2)
Non Protection Settings - LED Allocation
(Addtional)
LED 5 Function Allocation (Word 4)
LED 6 Function Allocation (Word 4)
LED 7 Function Allocation (Word 4)
01F0
01F1
01F2
01F0
01F1
01F2
F19'''
F19'''
F19'''
0
0
0
0
0
01F3 01F3 F19''' 0 LED 8 Function Allocation (Word 4)
Non Protection Settings - Record
(Addtional)
Disturb Trigger
Frame Mode
Record Number
01F4
01F5
01F6
01F4
01F5
01F6
F24
F80
F1
0
0
1
Non Protection Settings - Configuration
(Addtional)
Diff Disable Alarm
Non Protection Settings - Output Relay
Allocation (Addtional2)
Diff Disable (Output Relay Allocation)
01F7 01F7 F24
01F8 01F8 F14
Active setting group after a group swap 01F9 01F9 F1
Active setting group when logical input = 0 01FA 01FA F1
Active setting group when logical input = 1 01FB 01FB F1
Fail safe mode Enabled ?
Reserved
01FC 01FC F1
01FD 01FF
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Address Value
Min
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
1
1
5
1
FFFF
4
4
4
1
Max
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
Table 5 - Page 1: Non Protection Settings
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
Step
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
1
1
1
2N
2N
2N
2N
1
2N
1
1
1
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Units
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Default
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
5
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-23
(GC) 7 Communications MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
3.3.3 Page 2h: Group 1 Protection Settings
Modbus Description
Protection Settings - Current Differential
Modbus
Address
Start End
Current Diff. ?
Is1
Is2 k1
0200
0201
0202
0203
0200
0201
0202
0203
Cell
Type
F24
F1
F1
F1 k2
Time Delay Type tIdiff Value
IDMT Curve Type
TMS
Time Dial
PIT Time
0204
0205
0206
0204
0205
0206
F1
F27
F1
0207 0207 F3
0208 0208 F1
0209 020A F57
020B 020B F1
020C 020C F24
020D 020D F72
020E 020E F1
020F 020F F1
PIT I Disabled
Inrush Restraint
Received DIT Dwell Time
Inrush High Set
Protection Settings - Phase Fault
Overcurrent
I> ?
I> Threshold
I> Time Delay Type
I> IDMT Curve Type
I> TMS Value
I> TD Value
I> K value (RI curve) tI> Value
I> Reset Type
I> RTMS Value
I> tReset Value
I>> ?
I>> Threshold
I>> Time Delay Type
I>> IDMT Curve Type
I>> TMS Value
I>> TD Value
I>> K Value (RI Curve) tI>> Value
I>> Reset Type
I>> RTMS Value
I>> tReset Value
I>>> ?
0210
0211
0212
0213
0214
0215
0217
0210
0211
0212
0213
0214
0216
0217
F24
F1
F27
F3
F1
F57
F1
0218 0218 F1
0219 0219 F27
021A 021A F1
021B 021B F1
021C 021C F24
021D 021D F1
021E 021E F27
021F 021F F3
0220 0220 F1
0221 0222 F57
0223
0228
0223
0224 0224 F1
0225 0225 F27
0226 0226 F1
0227 0227 F1
0228
F1
F24
Address Value
30
0
0
0
25
100
5
Min
0
10
100
0
0
0
10
400
0
50
0
0
0
0
25
4
0
10
0
0
25
100
100
25
100
100
0
0
25
4
0
15000
1
3200
10000
2
4000
2
9
2
2500
2
9
1
1
1
1
1500 25
100000 100
10000 5
1
5
1
1
1
1
25
1
1500 25
100000 100
10000 5
15000
1
3200
10000
2
1
1
25
1
1
Max
1
200
3000
150
150
1
15000
5
1
1
9
1500
1
25
100000 100
200 1
1
2
500
3200
1
1
5
1
1
5
5
5
Step
-
-
- 0
1/100 In 100
0
1
1/1000
1/1000
1000
100
1/1000 s 100
1/100 s 4
- 0
1/1000 25
1/100 s 4
-
-
- 0
1/100 In 100
0
1
1/1000
1/1000
1/1000
1000
100
100
1/100 s 1
- 0
1/1000 25
1/100 s 4
- 0
Units
-
1/100
1/100
%
%
-
150
0
1/100 s 0
-
1/1000
1
1000
1/1000 1000
1/100 s 20
Default
1
20
200
30
-
-
0
0
1/100s 10
1/100In 400
Page (GC) 7-24 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
Ie>> ?
Ie>>>> ?
Modbus Description
I>>> Value tI>>> Value
I>>>> ?
I>>>> Value tI>>>> Value
Protection Settings - Earth Fault
Overcurrent
Ie> ?
Ie> Value
Ie> Time Delay Type
Ie> IDMT Curve Type
Ie> TMS Value
Ie> TD Value
Ie> K Value (RI Curve) tIe> Value
Ie> Type Tempo Reset
Ie> RTMS Value
Ie> tReset Value
Ie> Laborelec
Ie>> Value
Ie>> Time Delay Type
Ie>> IDMT Curve Type
Ie>> TMS Value
Ie>> TD Value
Ie>> K Value (RI Curve) tIe>> Value
Ie>> Type Tempo Reset
Ie>> RTMS Value
Ie>> tReset Value
Ie>> Laborelec
Ie>>> ?
Ie>>> Value tIe>>> Value
Ie>>>> Value
Start
0229
022A 022A F1
022B 022B F24
022C 022C F1
022D
022E 022E F24
022F
0230
0231
0232
0233
0235
0236
0237
0238
0239
023A 023A F3'
023B 023B F24
023C 023C F1
023D 023D F1
023E
023F
0240
0242
0243
0244
0245
Modbus
Address
0246
0247
0248
0249
End
0229
022D
022F
0230
0231
0232
0234
0235
0236 F1
0237 F27
0238 F1
0239 F1
023E
023F
0241
0242
0243
0244
0245
0246
0247
0248
0249
Cell
Type
F1
F1
F1
F27
F3
F1
F57
F1
F3
F1
F57
F1
F1
F27
F1
F1
F3'
F24
F1
024A 024A F1
024B 024B F24
024C 024C F1 tIe>>>> Value
Protection Settings - Thermal Overload
024D 024D F1
Ith> ?
Ith> Value
024E
024F
024E
024F
F24
F1
Reserved
Ith> K Value
Ith> Trip Threshold
0250
0251
0252
0250 -
0251 F1
0252 F1
Address Value
Min
50
0
0
50
0
Max
4000
15000
2
4000
15000
4
0
0
10
100
0
0
25
0
0
10
0
0
25
100
0
10
0
0
25
100
100
0
0
25
4
0
0
10
0
0
10
-
100
50
15000
2
8000
15000
1
320
-
150
200
2
1000
3
9
1
5
1
1
1500 25
100000 100
10000 5
15000
1
3200
10000
1
1
25
1
10000
15000
1
3200
10000
2
2
8000
2
2
8000
3
1
1
5
1
9
1500
1
25
100000 100
1
1
1
5
5
1
1
25
1
1
1
1
1
5
-
1
1
5
Step
1
1
5
1
- 0
1/1000 Ion 10
- 0
- 1
1/1000
1/1000
1/1000
1/100
-
1/1000
1/100s
1000
100
100
4
0
25
4
-
-
0
0
1/1000 Ion 100
- 0
-
1/1000
1/1000
1
1000
100
1/1000
1/100
-
1/1000
100
1
0
25
1/100s
-
4
0
- 0
1/1000 Ion 100
1/100
-
1
0
1/1000 Ion 100
1/100
-
1/100
1
0
100
- -
1/100 % 105
% 100
Units Default
1/100 In 2000
1/100 s 1
- 0
1/100 In 2000
1/100 s 1
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-25
(GC) 7 Communications MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
Modbus Description
Modbus
Address
Start End
0253 0253 F24
0254 0254 F1
0255 0255 F1
0256 0256 -
Cell
Type
Ith> Alarm
Ith> Alarm Threshold
Ith> Te1
Reserved
Protection Settings - Negative Sequence
Overload
I2> ?
I2> Threshold
I2> Time Delay Type
I2> IDMT Type
I2> TMS Value
I2> TD Value
I2> K Value (RI) tI2> Value
I2> Reset Type
I2> RTMS Value
I2> tReset Value
I2>> ?
0257 0257 F24
0258 0258 F1
0259 0259 F27
025A 025A F3
025B 025B F1
025C
025E
025F
025D
025E
025F
F57
F1
F1
0260 0260 F27
0261 0261 F1
0262 0262 F1
0263 0263 F27
I2>> Threshold
I2>> Time Delay Type
Protection Settings - Undercurrent
I< ?
I< Threshold tI2< Value
Reserved
0264
0265
0266
0267
0268
0269
0264
0265
0266
0267
0268
026F
F1
F1
F24
F1
F1
-
Protection Settings - Current Differential
(Additional)
PIT Local or Remote Current Selection 0270 0270 F68
PIT Remote Current Threshold 0271 0271 F1
PIT Local Current Overcurrent Mapping 0272 0272 F69
Transient Bias Enable/Disable 0273 0273 F24
DIT Alarm
PIT Alarm
Kr
Harmonic Ratio
Reserved
CTS Is1
0274
0275
0276
0277
0278
0279
0274
0275
0276
0277
0278
0279
F24
F24
F1
F1
-
F1
Table 6 - Page 2h: Group 1 Protection Settings
Address Value
0
0
3
5
-
20
0
10
0
0
100
100
0
0
25
4
0
0
10
0
0
25
2
0
-
10
0
0
Min
0
50
1
-
Max
1
200
200
-
1
4000
FFFF
1
1
1
20
50
-
400
4000
15000
1
100
15000
-
1
4000
2
9
1500
100000 100
10000 5
15000 1
1
3200
10000
1
1
25
1
1
1
1
1
1
25
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
5
1
1
2N
1
1
Step
1
1
-
Units
-
%
Mins
-
- 0
1/100 In 100
-
-
1/1000
0
1
1000
1/1000
1/1000
1/100s
100
100
0
-
1/1000
0
25
1/100 s 4
- 0
-
1/100 In 100
1/100s 0
0
1/100
1/100
-
20
0
-
- 0
1/100 In 20
- 0
- 1
-
-
-
1%
1
1
4
15
- -
1/100 In 120
0
Default
90
1
-
Page (GC) 7-26 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
3.3.4 Page 4h: Remote Control Words
MODBUS Text
Remote Control
Remote Control Word 1
Reserved
Remote Control Word 3
Remote Control Word 4
Start
0400
0401
0403
0404
Table 7 - Page 4h: Remote Control Words
MODBUS Address
End
0400
0402
0403
0404
Min
F9
-
F46
F46A
0
-
0
0
Max Step
FFFF
-
FFFF
FFFF
2N
-
2N
2N
Default
Value
-
-
-
-
Units
3.3.5
Boolean Equation
Equation A Operator 0
Equation A Operand 0
Equation A Operator 1
Equation A Operand 1
Equation A Operator 2
Equation A Operand 2
Equation A Operator 3
Equation A Operand 3
Equation A Operator 4
Equation A Operand 4
Equation A Operator 5
Equation A Operand 5
Equation A Operator 6
Equation A Operand 6
Equation A Operator 7
Equation A Operand 7
Equation A Operator 8
Equation A Operand 8
Equation A Operator 9
Equation A Operand 9
Equation A Operator 10
Equation A Operand 10
Equation A Operator 11
Equation A Operand 11
Equation A Operator 12
Equation A Operand 12
Equation A Operator 13
Equation A Operand 13
Pages 5h and 6h: Boolean Equation
Modbus Description
0502
0503
0504
0505
0506
0507
0508
0509
Modbus
Address
Start End
0500
0501
0500
0501
0502
0503
0504
0505
0506
0507
0508
0509
0511
0512
0513
0514
0515
0516
0517
050A 050A F84
050B 050B F83
050C 050C F84
050D 050D F83
050E 050E F84
050F 050F F83
0510 0510 F84
0511
0512
0513
0514
0515
0516
0517
0518
0519
0518
0519
F84
F83
051A 051A F84
051B 051B F83
F83
F84
F83
F84
F83
F84
F83
F84
F83
F84
F83
F84
F83
F84
F83
Cell
Type
F84
F83
Address Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
Max
3
61
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Units
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Default
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-27
(GC) 7 Communications
Modbus Description
Equation A Operator 14
Equation A Operand 14
Equation A Operator 15
Equation A Operand 15
Equation B Operator 0
Equation B Operand 0
Equation B Operator 1
Equation B Operand 1
Equation B Operator 2
Equation B Operand 2
Equation B Operator 3
Equation B Operand 3
Equation B Operator 4
Equation B Operand 4
Equation B Operator 5
Equation B Operand 5
Equation B Operator 6
Equation B Operand 6
Equation B Operator 7
Equation B Operand 7
Equation B Operator 8
Equation B Operand 8
Equation B Operator 9
Equation B Operand 9
Equation B Operator 10
Equation B Operand 10
Equation B Operator 11
Equation B Operand 11
Equation B Operator 12
Equation B Operand 12
Equation B Operator 13
Equation B Operand 13
Equation B Operator 14
Equation B Operand 14
Equation B Operator 15
Equation B Operand 15
Equation C Operator 0
Equation C Operand 0
Equation C Operator 1
Equation C Operand 1
Equation C Operator 2
Equation C Operand 2
Equation C Operator 3
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
Address Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
0520
0521
0522
0523
0524
0525
0526
0527
Modbus
Address
Cell
Type
Start End
051C 051C F84
051D 051D F83
051E 051E F84
051F 051F F83
0520
0521
0522
0523
0524
0525
0526
0527
F84
F83
F84
F83
F84
F83
F84
F83
052F
0530
0531
0532
0533
0534
0535
0528
0529
052A
0528
0529
F84
F83
052A F84
052B 052B F83
052C 052C F84
052D 052D F83
052E 052E F84
052F F83
0530 F84
0531
0532
0533
0534
0535
F83
F84
F83
F84
F83
053E
053F
0540
0541
0542
0543
0544
0545
0546
0536
0537
0538
0539
0536
0537
0538
0539
F84
F83
F84
F83
053A
053B
053A F84
053B F83
053C 053C F84
053D 053D F83
053E F84
053F F83
0540
0541
0542
0543
0544
0545
0546
F84
F83
F84
F83
F84
F83
F84
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
Max
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Units
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Default
Page (GC) 7-28 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
Modbus Description
Equation C Operand 3
Equation C Operator 4
Equation C Operand 4
Equation C Operator 5
Equation C Operand 5
Equation C Operator 6
Equation C Operand 6
Equation C Operator 7
Equation C Operand 7
Equation C Operator 8
Equation C Operand 8
Equation C Operator 9
Equation C Operand 9
Equation C Operator 10
Equation C Operand 10
Equation C Operator 11
Equation C Operand 11
Equation C Operator 12
Equation C Operand 12
Equation C Operator 13
Equation C Operand 13
Equation C Operator 14
Equation C Operand 14
Equation C Operator 15
Equation C Operand 15
Equation D Operator 0
Equation D Operand 0
Equation D Operator 1
Equation D Operand 1
Equation D Operator 2
Equation D Operand 2
Equation D Operator 3
Equation D Operand 3
Equation D Operator 4
Equation D Operand 4
Equation D Operator 5
Equation D Operand 5
Equation D Operator 6
Equation D Operand 6
Equation D Operator 7
Equation D Operand 7
Equation D Operator 8
Equation D Operand 8
(GC) 7 Communications
Address Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
Modbus
Address
Start
0547
End
0547
Cell
Type
F83
0548
0549
0548
0549
F84
F83
054A 054A F84
054B 054B F83
054C 054C F84
054D 054D F83
054E 054E F84
054F 054F F83
0550 0550 F84
0551
0552
0551
0552
F83
F84
0553
0554
0555
0556
0557
0558
0559
0553
0554
0555
0556
0557
0558
0559
055A 055A F84
055B 055B F83
055C 055C F84
055D 055D F83
055E 055E F84
055F 055F F83
0560 0560 F84
F83
F84
F83
F84
F83
F84
F83
0561
0562
0563
0564
0565
0566
0567
0568
0561
0562
0563
0564
0565
0566
0567
0568
0569 0569 F83
056A 056A F84
056B 056B F83
056C 056C F84
056D 056D F83
056E 056E F84
056F 056F F83
0570
0571
0570
0571
F84
F83
F83
F84
F83
F84
F83
F84
F83
F84
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
Max
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Units
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Default
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-29
(GC) 7 Communications
Modbus Description
Equation D Operator 9
Equation D Operand 9
Equation D Operator 10
Equation D Operand 10
Equation D Operator 11
Equation D Operand 11
Equation D Operator 12
Equation D Operand 12
Equation D Operator 13
Equation D Operand 13
Equation D Operator 14
Equation D Operand 14
Equation D Operator 15
Equation D Operand 15
Equation E Operator 0
Equation E Operand 0
Equation E Operator 1
Equation E Operand 1
Equation E Operator 2
Equation E Operand 2
Equation E Operator 3
Equation E Operand 3
Equation E Operator 4
Equation E Operand 4
Equation E Operator 5
Equation E Operand 5
Equation E Operator 6
Equation E Operand 6
Equation E Operator 7
Equation E Operand 7
Equation E Operator 8
Equation E Operand 8
Equation E Operator 9
Equation E Operand 9
Equation E Operator 10
Equation E Operand 10
Equation E Operator 11
Equation E Operand 11
Equation E Operator 12
Equation E Operand 12
Equation E Operator 13
Equation E Operand 13
Equation E Operator 14
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
Address Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
0585
0586
0587
0588
0589
058A
058B
057E
057F
0580
0581
0582
0583
0584
Modbus
Address
Start
0572
End
0572
0573
0574
0575
0573
0574
0575
0576
0577
0578
0579
0576
0577
0578
0579
F84
F83
F84
F83
057A
057B
057A F84
057B F83
057C 057C F84
057D 057D F83
Cell
Type
F84
F83
F84
F83
057E F84
057F F83
0580
0581
0582
0583
0584
0585
0586
0587
0588
F84
F83
F84
F83
F84
F83
F84
F83
F84
0589 F83
058A F84
058B F83
058C 058C F84
058D 058D F83
058E
058F
058E
058F
F84
F83
0590
0591
0592
0593
0590
0591
0592
0593
F84
F83
F84
F83
0594
0595
0596
0597
0598
0599
059A
0594
0595
0596
0597
0598
0599
059A
F84
F83
F84
F83
F84
F83
F84
059B 059B F83
059C 059C F84
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
Max
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Units
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Default
Page (GC) 7-30 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
Modbus Description
Equation E Operand 14
Equation E Operator 15
Equation E Operand 15
Equation F Operator 0
Equation F Operand 0
Equation F Operator 1
Equation F Operand 1
Equation F Operator 2
Equation F Operand 2
Equation F Operator 3
Equation F Operand 3
Equation F Operator 4
Equation F Operand 4
Equation F Operator 5
Equation F Operand 5
Equation F Operator 6
Equation F Operand 6
Equation F Operator 7
Equation F Operand 7
Equation F Operator 8
Equation F Operand 8
Equation F Operator 9
Equation F Operand 9
Equation F Operator 10
Equation F Operand 10
Equation F Operator 11
Equation F Operand 11
Equation F Operator 12
Equation F Operand 12
Equation F Operator 13
Equation F Operand 13
Equation F Operator 14
Equation F Operand 14
Equation F Operator 15
Equation F Operand 15
Equation G Operator 0
Equation G Operand 0
Equation G Operator 1
Equation G Operand 1
Equation G Operator 2
Equation G Operand 2
Equation G Operator 3
Equation G Operand 3
(GC) 7 Communications
Address Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
Modbus
Address
Cell
Type
Start End
059D 059D F83
059E 059E F84
059F 059F F83
05A0 05A0 F84
05A1 05A1 F83
05A2 05A2 F84
05A3 05A3 F83
05A4 05A4 F84
05A5 05A5 F83
05A6 05A6 F84
05A7 05A7 F83
05A8 05A8 F84
05A9 05A9 F83
05AA 05AA F84
05AB 05AB F83
05AC 05AC F84
05AD 05AD F83
05AE 05AE F84
05AF 05AF F83
05B0 05B0 F84
05B1 05B1 F83
05B2 05B2 F84
05B3 05B3 F83
05B4 05B4 F84
05B5 05B5 F83
05B6 05B6 F84
05B7 05B7 F83
05B8 05B8 F84
05B9 05B9 F83
05BA 05BA F84
05BB 05BB F83
05BC 05BC F84
05BD 05BD F83
05BE 05BE F84
05BF 05BF F83
05C0 05C0 F84
05C1 05C1 F83
05C2 05C2 F84
05C3 05C3 F83
05C4 05C4 F84
05C5 05C5 F83
05C6 05C6 F84
05C7 05C7 F83
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
Max
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Units
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Default
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-31
(GC) 7 Communications
Modbus Description
Equation G Operator 4
Equation G Operand 4
Equation G Operator 5
Equation G Operand 5
Equation G Operator 6
Equation G Operand 6
Equation G Operator 7
Equation G Operand 7
Equation G Operator 8
Equation G Operand 8
Equation G Operator 9
Equation G Operand 9
Equation G Operator 10
Equation G Operand 10
Equation G Operator 11
Equation G Operand 11
Equation G Operator 12
Equation G Operand 12
Equation G Operator 13
Equation G Operand 13
Equation G Operator 14
Equation G Operand 14
Equation G Operator 15
Equation G Operand 15
Equation H Operator 0
Equation H Operand 0
Equation H Operator 1
Equation H Operand 1
Equation H Operator 2
Equation H Operand 2
Equation H Operator 3
Equation H Operand 3
Equation H Operator 4
Equation H Operand 4
Equation H Operator 5
Equation H Operand 5
Equation H Operator 6
Equation H Operand 6
Equation H Operator 7
Equation H Operand 7
Equation H Operator 8
Equation H Operand 8
Equation H Operator 9
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
Address Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
Modbus
Address
Cell
Type
Start End
05C8 05C8 F84
05C9 05C9 F83
05CA 05CA F84
05CB 05CB F83
05CC 05CC F84
05CD 05CD F83
05CE 05CE F84
05CF 05CF F83
05D0 05D0 F84
05D1 05D1 F83
05D2 05D2 F84
05D3 05D3 F83
05D4 05D4 F84
05D5 05D5 F83
05D6 05D6 F84
05D7 05D7 F83
05D8 05D8 F84
05D9 05D9 F83
05DA 05DA F84
05DB 05DB F83
05DC 05DC F84
05DD 05DD F83
05DE 05DE F84
05DF 05DF F83
05E0 05E0 F84
05E1 05E1 F83
05E2
05E3
05E4
05E5
05E6
05E7
05E8
05E9
05E2 F84
05E3 F83
05E4 F84
05E5 F83
05E6 F84
05E7 F83
05E8 F84
05E9 F83
05EA 05EA F84
05EB 05EB F83
05EC 05EC F84
05ED 05ED F83
05EE 05EE F84
05EF 05EF F83
05F0 05F0 F84
05F1
05F2
05F1 F83
05F2 F84
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
Max
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Units
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Default
Page (GC) 7-32 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
Modbus Description
Equation H Operand 9
Equation H Operator 10
Equation H Operand 10
Equation H Operator 11
Equation H Operand 11
Equation H Operator 12
Equation H Operand 12
Equation H Operator 13
Equation H Operand 13
Equation H Operator 14
Equation H Operand 14
Equation H Operator 15
Equation H Operand 15
Modbus
Address
Cell
Type
Start End
05F3 05F3 F83
05F4 05F4 F84
05F5 05F5 F83
05F6 05F6 F84
05F7 05F7 F83
05F8 05F8 F84
05F9 05F9 F83
05FA 05FA F84
05FB 05FB F83
05FC 05FC F84
05FD 05FD F83
05FE 05FE F84
05FF 05FF F83
Table 8 - Pages 5h and 6h: Boolean Equation
Address Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
3
61
Max
61
3
61
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Units
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Default
3.3.6
Boolean Equation Timers
Equation A Rising Timer
Equation A Falling Timer
Equation B Rising Timer
Equation B Falling Timer
Equation C Rising Timer
Equation C Falling Timer
Equation D Rising Timer
Equation D Falling Timer
Equation E Rising Timer
Equation E Falling Timer
Equation F Rising Timer
Equation F Falling Timer
Equation G Rising Timer
Equation G Falling Timer
Equation H Rising Timer
Equation H Falling Timer
Reserved
Programmable Intertrip
Programmable Intertrip 1 Function
Allocation Word 1
Programmable Intertrip 1 Function
Allocation Word 2
Page 6h: Boolean Equation Timers, Programmable Inter-trip and CTS
Modbus Description
0602
0603
0604
0605
0606
0607
0608
Modbus
Address
Start
0600
0601
End
0601
Cell
Type
0600 F57
F57
0602
0603
0604
F57
F57
F57
0605 F57
0606 F57
0607 F57
0608 F57
0609 0609 F57
060A 060A F57
060B 060B F57
060C 060C F57
060D 060D F57
060E 060E F57
060F 060F F57
0610 061F
Address Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min Max
60000 1
60000 1
Step
60000 1
60000 1
60000 1
60000 1
60000 1
60000 1
60000 1
60000 1
60000 1
60000 1
60000 1
60000 1
60000 1
60000 1
0620
0621
0620 F85
0621 F85'
0
0
FFFF
FFFF
2N
2N
10ms
10ms
10ms
10ms
10ms
10ms
10ms
10ms
Units
10ms
10ms
10ms
10ms
10ms
10ms
10ms
10ms
-
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Default
-
-
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-33
(GC) 7 Communications MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
Modbus Description
Programmable Intertrip 2 Function
Allocation Word 1
Programmable Intertrip 2 Function
Allocation Word 2
Programmable Intertrip 3 Function
Allocation Word 1
Programmable Intertrip 3 Function
Allocation Word 2
Programmable Intertrip 4 Function
Allocation Word 1
Programmable Intertrip 4 Function
Allocation Word 2
Dwell Timer
CTS
CTS ?
CTS Reset Mode
CTS I1>
CTS I2/I1>
CTS I2/I1>>
CTS TIME DLY
CTS Restrain ?
Reserved
Quick Read Status Byte
Status Byte
Modbus
Address
Start End
0622
0623
0624
0625
0626
0627
Cell
Type
0622 F85
0623 F85'
0624 F85
0625 F85'
0626 F85
0627 F85'
0628 0628 F1
0629 0629 F24
062A 062A F74
062B 062B F1
062C 062C F1
062D 062D F1
062E 062E F1
062F 062F F24
0630
0700
06FF
0700 F23
0
0
0
0
0
0
Address Value
Min
0
5
5
0
0
10
0
0
5
Max
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
Table 9 - Page 6h: Boolean Equation Timers, Programmable Inter-trip and CTS
500
1
1
400
100
100
1000
1
FFFF
Step
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
1
1
1
1
2N
5
1
1
1
-
-
-
-
-
Units
-
Default
-
-
-
-
- -
10ms 10
-
-
0
0
1/100 In 10
-
1%
1%
10ms
-
-
5
40
500
0
3.3.7
MODBUS Text
Page 7h: Quick Read Relay Status (MODBUS 07 Function)
MODBUS
Address
Start End
Cell
Type
Min Max Step
Default
Value
Relay Status
0700 0700 0701 F23 0 7 1 -
Units
Note Page7 is a read only page and the address 0x0700 is the status byte of the relay.
Table 10 - Page 7h: Quick Read Relay Status (MODBUS 07 Function)Page 8h: Time Synchronization
Page (GC) 7-34 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
3.3.8 Page 8h: Time Synchronization
The time synchronization format is set by the date format setting at MODBUS address
134h.
Following successful time synchronization via the rear port communications, an acknowledgement bit is set at address 0700h for a period of 60 s.
3.3.8.1
MODBUS Text
Year (MSB + LSB)
Month (MSB)
Day (LSB)
Hour (MSB)
Minute (LSB) millisecond (MSB + LSB)
Table 11 - Private format
Private Format
MODBUS Address
Start
0800
0801
0801
0802
0802
0803
End
0800
0801
0801
0802
0802
0803
Min
0
0
0
1994
1
1
Max
2092
12
31
23
59
59999
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
Default
Value
1994
01
01
01
01
0
Units
Years
Months
Days
Hours
Minutes
Milliseconds
3.3.8.2
Notes
IEC Time and Date Format
Inverted IEC 870-5-4 CP56Time2a:
MODBUS
Address
7 6 5
0800
0801
0802
0803
4 3
R
R
S R
Millisecond (MSB)
Hours
Month
2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3
R R
Day of Week
IV R
Day of Month
Minutes
Millisecond (LSB)
2
Summer time (SU): Standard = 0, Summer Time = 1
Iv = Invalid value: Valid = 0,
Non valid or non synchronized in system case = 1
The first day of the week is Monday
R = Reserved bit
Table 12 - Private format
1 0
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-35
(GC) 7 Communications MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
3.3.9 Page 24: Group 3 Protection Settings
MODBUS Text MODBUS Address (Hex)
End
Cell
Type
Setting Group 1
Current Differential
Current Diff.?
Is1
Is2
Start
K1
K2
Time Delay Type tIdiff Value
IDMT Curve Type
TMS
Time Dial
PIT Time
PIT I Disable
PIT I Selection
PIT I Threshold
PIT OC Stages
Inrush Restraint
Transient Bias
DIT Alarm
PIT Alarm
Rx DIT Dwell Time
IDiff High Set
Kr
Reserved
Overcurrent
I>
I> Threshold
I> Delay Type
I> Curve Type
2410
2411
2412
2413
I> TMS Value t> TD Value
2414
2415
I> K Value (RI Curve) 2417
2472
240D
2473
2474
2475
240E
240F
2476
2477
2406
2407
2408
2409
240B
240C
2470
2471
2400
2401
2402
2403
2404
2405 tI> Value
I> Reset Type
I> RTMS Value
I> tRESET Value
I>>
I>> Threshold
I>> Delay Type
I>> Curve Type
2418
2419
241A
241B
241C
241D
241E
241F
2410
2411
2412
2413
2414
2416
2417
2418
2419
241A
241B
241C
241D
241E
241F
2406
2407
2408
240A
240B
240C
2470
2471
2400
2401
2402
2403
2404
2405
2472
240D
2473
2474
2475
240E
240F
2476
24FF
Min
F24 0
F1 10
F27 0
F3 0
F1 25
F57 100
F1 100
F1 0
F27 0
F1
F1
25
4
F24 0
F1 50
F27 0
F3 0
F24 0
F1
F1
10
100
F1
F1
0
30
F27 0
F1
F3
0
0
F1 25
F57 100
F1 0
F24 0
F68 0
F1 10
F69 0
F24 0
F24 0
F24 0
F24 0
F1
F1
10
400
F1 3
Max
2
2500
2
9
1500
100000
10000
15000
1
3200
10000
2
4000
2
9
1
200
3000
150
150
1
15000
9
1500
100000
200
1
1
4000
FFFF
1
1
1
1
500
3200
20
Step
Default
Value
Units
1
1
0
1
2
N
1
1
1
5
5
1
1
2
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1 = SI
25 1000
100 100
20
0
0
20
1 = Yes
20
200
30
150
0 = DMT
0
0
0
1
1
10
400
4
-
1/100
1/100
%
%
1/100s
-
1/1000
1/1000
1/100s
-
-
1/100 In
-
-
-
-
-
-
1/100s
1/100 In
1
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
0 = No
100
0 = DMT
1 = SI
25 1000
100 1000
5 100
1
1
25
1
4
0
25
4
0 = No
100
0 = DMT
1 = SI
-
1/100 In
-
-
1/1000
1/1000
1/1000s
1/100s
-
1/1000
1/100 s
-
-
-
1/100 In
Page (GC) 7-36 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
MODBUS Text
I>> TMS Value
MODBUS Address (Hex)
Start
2420
End
2420
Cell
Type
F1
Min
25
I>> TD Value 2421
I>> K Value (RI Curve) 2423 tI>> Value 2424
2422
2423
2424
F57
F1
F1
100
100
0
I>> Reset Type
I>> RTMS Value
I>> tRESET Value
I>>>
I>>> Value tI>>> Value
I>>>>
I>>>> Value
2425
2426
2427
2428
2429
242A
242B
242C
2425
2426
2427
2428
2429
242A
242B
242C
F27
F1
F1
0
25
4
F24 0
F1
F1
50
0
F24 0
F1 50
242D
242E
242F
242F
F1 0
F24 0
F1 10
F1 10 tI>>>> Value
Ie>
Ie> Value (Normal)
242D
242E
242F
Ie> Value (Sensitive) 242F
Ie> Value (V.
Sensitive)
242F
Ie> Time Delay Type 2430
Ie> IDMT Curve Type 2431
Ie> TMS Value
Ie> TD Value
2432
2433
Ie> K Value RI Curve) 2435 tIe> Value 2436
Ie> Reset Type 2437
Ie> RTMS Value
Ie> tRESET Value
Ie> Laborlec
Ie>>
2438
2439
243A
243B
Ie>> Value (Normal) 243C
Ie>> Value (Sensitive) 243C
Ie>> Value (V.
Sensitive)
243C
Ie>> Time Delay Type 243D
Ie>> IDMT Curve Type 243E
Ie>> TMS Value
Ie>> TD Value
Ie>> K Value (RI
Curve) tIe>> Value
Ie>> Reset Type
243F
2440
2442
2443
2444
Ie>> RTMS Value 2445
Ie>> tRESET Value 2446
242F
2430
2431
2432
2434
2435
2436
2437
2438
2439
243A
243B
243C
243C
243C
243D
243E
243F
2441
2442
2443
2444
2445
2446
F1 2
F27 0
F3
F1
0
25
F57 100
F1
F1
100
0
F27 0
F1
F1
25
4
F3' 0
F24 0
F1
F1
F1
F1
F3
F1
F57
F1
F1
F1
F1
50
10
2
0
0
25
100
100
0
F27 0
25
4
1000
Max
3
9
1500
100000
10000
15000
1
3200
10000
2
2
4000
8000
1000
3
9
1500
100000
10000
15000
1
3200
10000
1500
100000
10000
15000
1
3200
10000
2
4000
15000
2
4000
15000
2
2500
1000
1
1
1
5
5
1
1
5
1
25
1
1
Step
25
Default
Value
1000
100 100
5 100
1 4
0
25
4
0 = No
2000
1
0 = No
2000
1
0 = No
10
10
1 2 1/1000 Ion
25
1
1
1
1
5
5
1
1
1
1
0 = DMT
1 = SI
25 1000
100 100
100
4
0 = DMT
25
4
-
-
1/1000
1/1000
1/1000
1/100
-
0 = Curve 1 -
0 = No
100
100
1/1000
1/100s
-
1/100 Ion
1/1000 Ion
Units
1/1000
1/1000
1/1000
1/100 s
-
1/1000
1/100s
-
1/100 In
1/100 s
-
1/100
1/100 s
-
1/100 Ion
1/1000 Ion
1
1
25
1
1 100
1
1
0 =DMT
1 = SI
25 1000
100 100
5 100
1
0 = DMT
25
4
1/1000 Ion
-
-
1/1000
1/1000
1/1000
1/100
-
1/1000
1/100s
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-37
(GC) 7 Communications MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
MODBUS Text
Ie>>Laborlec
MODBUS Address (Hex)
Start
2447
End
2447
Cell
Type
F3' 0
Min
Ie>>> 2448
Ie>>> Value (Normal) 2449
Ie>>> Value (Sensitive) 2449
2448
2449
2449
F24
F1
F1
0
50
10
Ie>>> Value (V.
Sensitive) tIe>>> Value
Ie>>>>
2449
244A
244B
Ie>>>> Value (Normal) 244C
Ie>>>> Value
(Sensitive)
Ie>>>> Value (V.
Sensitive)
244C
244C
244D tIe>>>> Value
Thermal
Ith> 244E
2449
244A
244B
244C
244C
244C
244D
F1
F1
F24
F1
F1
F1
F1
2
0
0
50
10
2
0
Ith> Value
Reserved
Ith> K Value
Ith> Trip Threshold
244F
2450
2451
2452
Ith> Alarm 2453
Ith> Alarm Threshold 2454
Te1
Reserved
2455
2456
244E
244F
2450
2451
2452
2453
2454
2455
2456
F24 0
F1
F1
F1
10
100
50
F24 0
F1
F1
50
1
Negative sequence
I2>
I2> Threshold
I2> Delay Type
I2> Curve
I2> TMS Value
I2> TD Value
I2> K Value (RI) tI2> Value
I2> Reset Type
I2> RTMS Value
I2> tRESET Value
I2>>
I2>> Threshold tI2>>
Undercurrent
I<
I< Threshold tI2< Value
2457
2458
2459
245A
245B
245C
245E
245F
2460
2461
2462
2463
2464
2465
2466
2467
2468
2457
2458
2459
245A
245B
245D
245E
245F
2460
2461
2462
2463
2464
2465
2466
2467
2468
F24
F1
2
2
4000
8000
1
320
150
200
1
200
200
F27 0
F3 0
2
9
F1 25 1500
F57 100 100000
F1
F1
100 10000
0 15000
F27 0
F1 25
1
3200
F1 4
F27 0
F1 10
F1
F24
F1
F1
0
10
0
0
2
0
1000
10000
1
4000
15000
Max
15000
2
4000
8000
1000
15000
1
4000
1
100
15000
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
1
1
5
Step
1
Default
Value
0 = Curve 1 -
0 = No
100
100
Units
-
1/100 Ion
1/1000 Ion
100
1
0 = No
100
100
1/1000 Ion
1/100
-
1/100 Ion
1/1000 Ion
1
1
100
1
1/1000 Ion
1/100
0 = No
100
105
100
0 = No
90
1
-
1/100
-
1/100 %
-
-
%
Mn
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
1
1
25
1
1
1
0 = No
100
1
1
0 = DMT
1 = SI
25 1000
100 100
100
0
0 = DMT
25
4
0 = No
100
0
-
In/100
-
-
1/1000
1/1000
1/1000
1/100s
-
1/1000
1/100 s
-
1/100
1/100s
0 = No
20
0
-
1/100
1/100
Page (GC) 7-38 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
MODBUS Text MODBUS Address (Hex)
2479
Cell
Type
Reserved
Start
2469
End
24FF
Protection Settings - Current Differential (Additional)
Harmonic Ratio 2477 2477 F1
Reserved 2478 2478
CTS Is1 2579 F1
Min
5
20
50
400
Max
3.3.10
MODBUS Text
Setting Group 1
Current Differential
Current Diff.?
Is1
Is2
K1
K2
Time Delay Type tIdiff Value
IDMT Curve Type
TMS
Time Dial
PIT Time
PIT I Disable
PIT I Selection
PIT I Threshold
PIT OC Stages
Inrush Restraint
Transient Bias
DIT Alarm
PIT Alarm
Rx DIT Dwell Time
IDiff High Set
Kr
Reserved
Overcurrent
I>
I> Threshold
I> Delay Type
I> Curve Type
Page 25: Group 4 Protection Settings
MODBUS Address (Hex)
Start End
Cell
Type
2510
2511
2512
2513
250C
2570
2571
2572
250D
2573
2574
2575
250E
250F
2576
25FF
2500
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2506
2507
2508
250A
250B
250C
2570
2571
2572
250D
2573
2574
2575
250E
250F
2576
2577
2500
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2506
2507
2508
2509
250B
2510
2511
2512
2513
Min
F24 0
F1 10
F1
F1
100
0
F1 30
F27 0
F1 0
F3
F1
0
25
F57 100
F1 0
F24 0
F68 0
F1 10
F69 0
F24 0
F24 0
F24 0
F24 0
F1 10
F1
F1
400
3
F24 0
F1 10
F27 0
F3 0
2
2500
2
9
Max
1
1
1
1
1
4000
FFFF
1
500
3200
20
1
200
3000
150
150
1
15000
9
1500
100000
200
1
5
Step
Default
Value
-
Units
1%
1/100 In
1
1
1
1
Step
Default
Value
Units
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
N
1
2
5
5
1 = Yes
20
200
30
5
1
1
150
0 = DMT
0
1
25
1 = SI
1000
100 100
1 20
1
10
400
4
0
0
1
0
0
20
0
-
-
-
-
-
1/100 In
-
-
1/100s
1/100 In
-
-
1/100
1/100
%
%
1/100s
-
1/1000
1/1000
1/100s
0 = No
100
0 = DMT
1 = SI
-
-
-
1/100 In
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-39
(GC) 7 Communications MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
MODBUS Text
I> TMS Value
MODBUS Address (Hex)
Start
2514
End
2514
Cell
Type
F1
Min
25 t> TD Value 2515
I> K Value (RI Curve) 2517 tI> Value 2518
2516
2517
2518
F57
F1
F1
100
100
0
I> Reset Type
I> RTMS Value
I> tRESET Value
I>>
I>> Threshold
I>> Delay Type
I>> Curve Type
I>> TMS Value
2519
251A
251B
251C
251D
251E
251F
2520
2519
251A
251B
251C
251D
251E
251F
2520
F27 0
F1
F1
F1
F3
F1
25
4
F24 0
50
F27 0
0
25
I>> TD Value 2521
I>> K Value (RI Curve) 2523 tI>> Value 2524
I>> Reset Type
I>> RTMS Value
I>> tRESET Value
I>>>
2525
2526
2527
2528
I>>> Value tI>>> Value
I>>>>
I>>>> Value tI>>>> Value
Ie>
Ie> Value (Normal)
2529
252A
252B
252C
252D
252E
252F
Ie> Value (Sensitive) 252F
Ie> Value (V.
Sensitive)
252F
2522
2523
2524
2525
2526
2527
2528
2529
252A
252B
252C
252D
252E
252F
252F
252F F1 2
F57 100
F1 100
F1 0
F27 0
F1 25
F1 4
F24 0
F1
F1
50
0
F24 0
F1 50
F1 0
F24 0
F1 10
F1 10
Ie> Time Delay Type 2530
Ie> IDMT Curve Type 2531
Ie> TMS Value
Ie> TD Value
2532
2533
Ie> K Value RI Curve) 2535 tIe> Value 2536
Ie> Reset Type 2537
Ie> RTMS Value
Ie> tRESET Value
Ie> Laborlec
Ie>>
2538
2539
253A
253B
Ie>> Value (Normal) 253C
Ie>> Value (Sensitive) 253C
2530
2531
2532
2534
2535
2536
2537
2538
2539
253A
253B
253C
253C
F27 0
F3 0
F1 25
F57 100
F1
F1
100
0
F27 0
F1
F1
25
4
F3' 0
F24 0
F1
F1
50
10
1000
Max
3
9
1500
100000
10000
15000
1
3200
10000
2
2
4000
8000
100000
10000
15000
1
3200
10000
2
4000
15000
2
4000
15000
2
2500
1000
1500
100000
10000
15000
1
3200
10000
2
4000
2
9
1500
5
1
1
25
1
25
1
1
Step
25
Default
Value
1000
100 1000
5 100
1 4
0
25
4
0 = No
100
0 = DMT
1 = SI
1000
1
1
1
5
1
1
5
5
100 100
5 100
1 4
1
25
1
1
0
25
4
0 = No
2000
1
0 = No
2000
1
0 = No
10
10
1 2 1/1000 Ion
25
1
1
1
1
5
5
1
1
1
1
0 = DMT
1 = SI
25 1000
100 100
100
4
0 = DMT
25
4
-
-
1/1000
1/1000
1/1000
1/100
-
0 = Curve 1 -
0 = No
100
100
1/1000
1/100s
-
1/100 Ion
1/1000 Ion
Units
1/1000
1/1000
1/100 s
-
1/1000
1/100s
-
1/100 In
1/100 s
-
1/100
1/100 s
-
1/100 Ion
1/1000 Ion
1/1000
1/1000
1/1000s
1/100s
-
1/1000
1/100 s
-
1/100 In
-
-
1/1000
Page (GC) 7-40 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
MODBUS Text MODBUS Address (Hex)
End
Cell
Type
Ie>> Value (V.
Sensitive)
Start
253C
Ie>> Time Delay Type 253D
Ie>> IDMT Curve Type 253E
Ie>> TMS Value
Ie>> TD Value
Ie>> K Value (RI
Curve) tIe>> Value
Ie>> Reset Type
253F
2540
2542
2543
2544
Ie>> RTMS Value 2545
Ie>> tRESET Value 2546
Ie>>Laborlec
Ie>>>
2547
2548
Ie>>> Value (Normal) 2549
Ie>>> Value (Sensitive) 2549
Ie>>> Value (V.
Sensitive)
2549 tIe>>> Value
Ie>>>>
254A
254B
Ie>>>> Value (Normal) 254C
Ie>>>> Value
(Sensitive)
254C
Ie>>>> Value (V.
Sensitive)
254C
254D tIe>>>> Value
Thermal
Ith>
Ith> Value
Reserved
Ith> K Value
Ith> Trip Threshold
Ith> Alarm
254E
254F
2550
2551
2552
2553
Ith> Alarm Threshold 2554
Te1 2555
Reserved 2556
Negative sequence
I2>
I2> Threshold
I2> Delay Type
2557
2558
2559
I2> Curve
I2> TMS Value
I2> TD Value
I2> K Value (RI)
255A
255B
25C
255E
253C
253D
253E
253F
2541
2542
2543
2544
2545
2546
2547
2548
2549
2549
2549
254A
254B
254C
254C
254C
254D
254E
254F
2550
2551
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
255A
255B
255D
255E
F1
F1
F3
2
0
0
F1 25
F57 100
F1
F1
F27
F1
F1
F3'
100
0
0
25
4
0
F24 0
F1
F1
F1
F1
F24
F1
F1
F1
F1
F24
F1
F1
F1
F1
F24
F1
F27
50
10
2
0
0
50
10
2
0
0
0
0
Min
10
100
F1 50
F24 0
50
1
10
1000
3
9
1500
100000
10000
15000
1
3200
10000
2
2
4000
8000
1000
15000
2
4000
8000
1000
15000
1
320
150
200
1
200
200
1
4000
2
Max
F3
F1
0
25
9
1500
F57 100 100000
F1 100 10000
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
1
1
25
1
1
1
1
5
Step
1
Default
Value
100
1
1
0 =DMT
1 = SI
25 1000
100 100
5 100
Units
1/1000 Ion
-
-
1/1000
1/1000
1/1000
1
0 = DMT
1/100
-
25
4
0 = Curve 1 -
0 = No -
1/1000
1/100s
100
100
1/100 Ion
1/1000 Ion
100
1
0 = No
100
100
1/1000 Ion
1/100
-
1/100 Ion
1/1000 Ion
1
1
100
1
1/1000 Ion
1/100
0 = No
100
105
100
0 = No
90
1
-
1/100
-
-
-
1/100 %
%
Mn
1
1
1
0 = No
100
0 = DMT
1
25
1 = SI
1000
100 100
5 100
-
In/100
-
-
1/1000
1/1000
1/1000
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-41
(GC) 7 Communications MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
MODBUS Text tI2> Value
I2> Reset Type
I2> RTMS Value
I2> tRESET Value
MODBUS Address (Hex)
Start
255F
End
255F
Cell
Type
F1 0
Min
15000
Max
2560
2561
2562
2560
2561
2562
F27
F1
F1
0
25
4
1
3200
10000
1
4000
15000
I2>>
I2>> Threshold tI2>>
Undercurrent
I<
I< Threshold tI2< Value
Reserved
CTS Is1
2563
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
2579
2563
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
25FF
2579
F27
F1
F1
0
10
0
F24 0
F1 2
F1 0
Protection Settings - Current Differential (Additional)
Harmonic Ratio 2577 2577 F1
Reserved 2578 2578
F1
5
20
1
100
15000
50
400
3.3.11
3.3.11.1
1
5
1
1
1
Step
1 0
Default
Value
1
1
1
1
25
1
0 = DMT
25
4
0 = No
100
0
Units
1/100s
-
1/1000
1/100 s
-
1/100
1/100s
0 = No
20
0
1%
1/100 In
-
1/100
1/100
-
Diagnostics and Communications Event Counters
The MODBUS Diagnostics and Communications Event Counters can be accessed by the use of MODBUS Functions 8 and 11 respectively. These counters allow users to monitor the performance of the communications system, alongside the aiding in the detection of the communication systems internal error conditions.
Diagnostics Counters (MODBUS Function 8)
The MODBUS sub-functions supported by the MODBUS Diagnostics function are:
12
13
14
15
0
1
Sub-Function No.
(Decimal)
4
10
11
Sub-Function Name
Return Query Data
Restart Communications Option
Force Listen Only Mode
Clear Counter and Diagnostic Register
Return Bus Message Count
Return Bus Communication Error Count
Return Bus Exception Error Count
Return Slave Message Count
Return Slave No Response Count
Table 13 - MODBUS sub-functions supported by MODBUS Diagnostics
Return Query Data:
Data sent in the Information Field is echoed back in the response allowing a loopback test to be performed.
Page (GC) 7-42 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
3.3.11.2
(GC) 7 Communications
Restart Communications Option:
Forces the communications in the slave device to be re-initialized and all event counters to be cleared. This command is the only command that will bring the slave device out of the Listen Only Mode.
Force Listen Mode Only:
Forces the slave device to enter the Listen Only Mode isolating the device from other devices on the network. While in this mode, no actions will be taken to any messages sent to the slave device via the slave or broadcast address. To remove the slave device from this mode, the Restart Communications Option command must be used.
Clear Counters and Diagnostic Register:
Forces all counters to be cleared.
Note All counters are cleared on slave power-up.
Return Bus Message Count:
A response to this request returns the number of valid messages seen on the communications system by the slave device since the counters were previously cleared.
For rear port communications only, a hardware address filter is used to increase the efficiency of the communications processing, therefore the counter value is only valid for messages addressed to the slave device via the slave or broadcast address.
Return Bus Communication Error Count:
A response to this request returns the number of CRC errors that the slave device has detected on the communications system since the counters were previously cleared.
For rear port communications only, a hardware address filter is used to increase the efficiency of the communications processing, therefore the counter value is only valid for messages addressed to the slave device via the slave or broadcast address.
Return Bus Exception Error Count:
A response to this request returns the number of exception responses that have been sent by the slave device since the counters were previously cleared.
Return Slave Message Count:
A response to this request returns the number of processed messages that have been addressed to the slave device via the slave or broadcast address since the counters were previously cleared.
Return Slave No Response Count:
A response to this request returns the number of processed messages that have been addressed to the slave device but no response has been sent to the master.
Communications Event Counter (MODBUS Function 11)
•
•
This counter allows the user to determine the number of successful message completions that have been performed by the slave device. The counter does not include the following message completions:
Exception responses
Poll commands
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-43
(GC) 7 Communications MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
•
Fetch event counter commands
Using the following diagnostics sub-functions the event counter can be reset:
•
•
Restart communications option
Clear counters and diagnostics register
The status word in the response shows the busy state of the relay communications. This value is always zero due to the nature of the communications implemented in the slave device.
Page (GC) 7-44 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
F3'
F4
F5
F6
F2
F3
3.4
Code
F1
Register Format
Description
Unsigned Integer – Numerical Data:
65535
Signed Integer – Numerical Data: -
32768
– 32767
Unsigned Integer
– Curves Type
Unsigned Integer Type Ground
Curves
Unsigned Integer: Rear Port Data
Rate
Unsigned Integer: Parity
Unsigned Integer: Tripping
Configuration
-
-
-
-
0
4
5
6
1
2
3
7
8
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Bit Value
Flag Information
Data
0
1
2
0
7
8-15
0
1
2
3-15
4
5
6
1
2
3
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
STI (IEC)
SI (IEC)
VI (IEC)
EI (IEC)
LTI (IEC)
TI (C02)
MI (ANSI)
LTI (CO8)
VI (ANSI)
EI (ANSI)
Network 1
Network 2
Source 3
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
Reserved
None
Even
Odd
Reserved tI> tI>> tI>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>>
I< tIth>
Broken Conductor Detection
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-45
(GC) 7 Communications MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
F7
F8
F6’
Code
F8'
Description
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Unsigned Integer: Extended Tripping
Configuration
0
Bit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Reserved
Unsigned Integer: Latching
Configuration
0
14
15
Unsigned Integer: Extended Latching
Configuration
0
1
2
3
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12 - 15
Flag Information
Data tAux 1 tAux 2 tI2> tI2>> tI>>>> tIe>>>> tidiff
Trip Direct Intertrip
Trip Current Differential Intertrip
Trip Permissive Intertrip
Trip Circuit Supervision Block
Equation A
Equation B
Equation C
Equation D
Equation E
Equation F
Equation G
Equation H
Reserved
I> Latching
I>>
I>>>
Ie>
Ie>>
Ie>>>
I< tIth>
Broken Conductor Detection tAux 1 tAux 2
I2>
I2>>
I>>>>
Ie>>>>
Idiff
Latch Direct Intertrip
Latch Current Differential Intertrip
Latch Permissive Intertrip
Trip Circuit Supervision Block
-
256
512
1024
2048
2
3
8
16
32
64
128
1
Value
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
1
1
2
4
8
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
Page (GC) 7-46 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
F8''
Code
F9
F8'''
Description
Bit
7
8
9
4
5
6
Unsigned Integer: Blocking Logic
Configuration
10
11
12 - 15
0
Blocking Logic Mapping Part 2
5
6
7
Unsigned Integer: Remote Control 1 0
1
2
3
4
14
15
0
10
11
12
13
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
16
Value
32
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
-
1
2
4
8
32
64
128
1
16
16384
32768
1
2
4
8
16
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
32
Flag Information
Data
Equation A
Equation B
Equation C
Equation D
Equation E
Equation F
Equation G
Equation H
Reserved
I> Blocking
I>>
I>>>
Ie>
Ie>>
Ie>>>
Reserved tIth>
Broken Conductor Detection tAux 1 tAux 2 tI2>
I2>>
I>>>>
Ie>>>>
Idiff
Equation A
Equation B
Equation C
Equation D
Equation E
Equation F
Equation G
Equation H
Tripping Contact De-latched
1st Alarm Acknowledge
All Alarms Acknowledge
Remote Tripping
Remote Closing
Setting Group Change
Note The Change Group Input setting must be set to
EDGE.
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-47
(GC) 7 Communications MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
F13
F10
F11
F12
Code
F14
F15
Description
2 Characters ASCII
Reserved
Unsigned Integer: Logic Input Status 0
12
13
14
15
6
7
8
9
10
11
Bit
1
2
3
4
5 - 15
Unsigned Integer: Logic Outputs
Status
Unsigned Integer: Logic Outputs
Configuration
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 - 15
Unsigned Integer: Logical Input
Allocation
4
5
6
1
2
3
7
8
9 - 15
0
1
2
3
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
-
2
4
8
16
64
Value
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
32-127
32-127
1
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
-
1
2
4
8
Flag Information
Thermal State Reset
Data
Reset Max and Average Current Measurements
Disturbance Record Remote Start
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Acknowledgement
Oldest Event Acknowledge
Oldest Fault Acknowledge
Hardware SRAM Alarm Acknowledge
ASCII Character1
ASCII Character 2
Logic Input Number 1
Logic Input Number 2
Logic Input Number 3
Logic Input Number 4
Logic Input Number 5
Reserved
Logic Output Number RL1 (Tripping)
Logic Output Number RL2
Logic Output Number RL3
Logic Output Number RL4
Logic Output Number RL0 (Watchdog)
Logic Output Number RL5
Logic Output Number RL6
Logic Output Number RL7
Logic Output Number RL8
Reserved
Selection Logic Output Number RL2
Selection Logic Output Number RL3
Selection Logic Output Number RL4
Selection Logic Output Number RL5
Selection Logic Output Number RL6
Selection Logic Output Number RL7
Selection Logic Output Number RL8
Reserved
De-latch Allocation
Allocation 52 a
Allocation 52 b
Allocation External CB Failure
Page (GC) 7-48 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
F17
F16
Code
F15'
Description
Unsigned Integer: Logical Input
Allocation
Unsigned Integer: Threshold Earth
Information Status
0
1
1 - 4
5
6
Unsigned Integer: Threshold Phase
Information Status
7 - 15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 - 15
10
11
12
13
14
15
7
8
9
4
5
6
0
Bit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 - 15
F18 Long Integer: -
16
Value
32
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
-
Flag Information
Data
Allocation External Input 1
Allocation External Input 2
Allocation Logic Blocking 1
Allocation Logic Blocking 2
Allocation Disturbance Start
Allocation Cold Load Start
Allocation Selective Scheme Logic 1
Allocation Selective Scheme Logic 2
Allocation Change of Setting Group
Allocation Re-closer Locked
Allocation Thermal State Reset
Allocation Trip Circuit Supervision
Start tBF
Permissive Intertrip
Direct Intertrip
Communication Reset
Remote Trip via Logic Input
Remote Close via Logic Input
Trip Circuit Supervision Block
GPS Sync
LED Reset
CTS Inhibit
Reserved
1
2
-
32
64
-
Overcurrent start (Ie>, Ie>>, Ie>>>, Ie>>>>)
Reserved
Reserved
Start Information Ie> or Ie>> or Ie>>> or Ie>>>>
Tripping Information tIe> or tIe>> or tIe>>> or tIe>>>>
Reserved
Overcurrent Start (I>, I>>, I>>>, I>>>>) 1
2
4
8
16
Instantaneous IA
Instantaneous IB
32
64
-
Instantaneous IC
Reserved
Instantaneous Information I> or I>> or I>>> or
I>>>>
Tripping Information tI> or tI>> or tI>>> tI>>>>
Reserved
-
2147483648 to
2147483647
Numerical Data
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-49
(GC) 7 Communications MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
F19'
F19''
F19
Code Description
Unsigned Integer: LEDs Allocation 0
1
2
6
7
8
9
3
4
5
Unsigned Integer: Extended LEDs
Allocation
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
Bit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14 - 15
Unsigned Integer: 2nd Extension
LEDs Allocation
0 - 1
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
9
10
11 - 15
Logic Input 1
Logic Input 2
Logic Input 3
Logic Input 4
Logic Input 5
Reserved
Reserved
Aux 1
Aux2 t12>>
I>>>> tI>>>>
Ie>>>> tIe>>>>
Reserved
Reserved
Flag Information
Data
I> tI>
I>> tI>>
I>>> tI>>>
Ie> tIe>
Ie>> tIe>>
Ie>>> tIe>>>
Thermal Overload Trip tI2>
Broken Conductor Trip
CB Failure
Idiff
Idiff Fail
Back-up Protection Enabled
Protection Comms Fail
Direct Intertrip
Current Differential Intertrip
Permissive Intertrip
CB Alarm
Convention Mode
Reserved
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
2
4
8
16
32
64
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
1024
-
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
1
2
4
8
16
32
Value
1
Page (GC) 7-50 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
F20
Code
F19'''
F20'
Description
User Configurable LED Mapping
(Part 4)
Unsigned Integer: Logic Input Data
Status
Unsigned Integer: Extended Logic
Data Status
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
0
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
8
0
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
0
Bit
Flag Information
Data
Equation A
Equation B
Equation C
Equation D
Equation E
Equation F
Equation G
Equation H
Programmable Intertrip A
Programmable Intertrip B
Programmable Intertrip C
Programmable Intertrip D
CTS local CT Alarm
CTS remote CT Alarm
CTS Block
CTS Cdiff Restrain
Selective Scheme Logic 1
Selective Scheme Logic 2
Relay De-latch
CB Position (52 a)
CB Position (52 b)
CB Failure
Aux. 1
Aux. 2
Blocking Logic 1
Blocking Logic 2
Disturbance Record Start
Cold Load Start
Setting Group Change
Reserved
Thermal State Reset
Trip Circuit Supervision
Start tBF Input Energized
Idiff Permissive Input Energized
Idiff Direct Input Energized
Idiff Comms Input Energized
Manual CB Trip
Manual CB Close
TCS Block Input Energized
GPS Sync
LED RESET
Value
1
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
1
256
512
1024
2048
4096
16384
32768
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-51
(GC) 7 Communications MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
F27'
F28
F29
F27
F30
F31
F24
F25
F26
F22
F23
F21
Code Description
Bit
Unsigned Integer: Software Version
9
10-15
Unsigned Integer: Internal Logic Data 0
1 - 15
Unsigned Integer: Relay Status 0
1
2
3
4
Unsigned Integer: Relay Function
Status
Phase Indication Text Selection
IA, IB, IC, IN Measurement Display
(True RMS)
Time Delay Type
Time Delay Type
Reserved
Communications Stop Bits
Communication Availability
Unsigned Integer: Number of
Available Disturbance Records
5
6 - 7
0
-
1
2 - 15
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0
1
2
3
2
3
0
2
0
1
1
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
-
2
3
4
-
0
1
1
16
32
-
2
4
8
1
-
1
64
Value
-
12
Flag Information
CTS Inhibit
Reserved e.g. 12 = Version 1.A
Data
Latching
Reserved
Major Hardware Alarm
Minor Hardware Alarm
Presence of Non Acknowledged Event
Time Synchronization Acknowledgement
Presence of Non Acknowledged Disturbance
Record
Presence of Non Acknowledged Fault Record
Reserved
Function disabled
Function enabled
Reserved
L1, L2, L3 and N
A, B, C and E
R, S, T and O
Y and B
W
IA Measurement Display (True RMS)
IB Measurement Display (True RMS)
IC Measurement Display (True RMS)
IN Measurement Display (True RMS)
DMT Time Delay
IDMT Time Delay
RI Time Delay
DMT Time Delay
IDMT Time Delay
RI Time Delay
Belgium Curves
1 Stop Bit
2 Stop Bits
Communications Not Available
Communications Available
None
1 Disturbance Record Available
2 Disturbance Record Available
3 Disturbance Record Available
Page (GC) 7-52 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
F34
F33
F35
F32
Code
F36
F36'
Description
Unsigned Integer: Disturbance
Record Start Status
Cold Load Start Thresholds
Reserved
Disturbance Record Uploading
Status
Memorized Flags of Non
Acknowledged Alarms:
Memorized Flags of Non
Acknowledged Alarms 2:
Bit
-
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11 - 15
0
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
4
5
0
Value
0
1
1
1
2
4
8
-
16
32
64
128
256
512
1024
1
2
4
8
16
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
Flag Information
Data
4 Disturbance Record Available
5 Disturbance Record Available
Disturbance Record Start on any Instantaneous
Event.
Disturbance Record Start on any Trip Event tI> tI>> tI>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>>
Thermal Overload Trip tI2> tI2>> tI2>>>> tIe>>>>
Reserved
No Disturbance Record Uploaded
Disturbance Record Upload Running
Ie> tIe>
Ie>> tIe>>
Ie>>> tIe>>>
Thermal Overload Alarm
Thermal Overload Trip
Broken Conductor
CB Failure
I2>
I2>> tI2> tAux1 tAux2 tI2>>
CB Open Timer Expired
CB Number of Operations
Summation Amps Exceeded Threshold
CB Supervision
CB Supervision CB Close Timer Expired
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-53
(GC) 7 Communications MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
F40
F41
F42
F43
F38
F39
F37
Code Description
Bit
5
6
7 - 15
Unsigned Integer: Thermal Overload
Information
0
1
2 - 15
Unsigned Integer: CB Alarm/CB
Failure/Broken Conductor Flags
0
Reserved
15
Unsigned Integer: Selective Scheme
Logic Configuration
0
1
2
4
5
6
1
2
3
11
12
13
14
7
8
9
10
3
4
5
6 - 15
Rear Port Allocation for
Communications
Time Window Format
Unsigned Integer: CB Supervision
Flag
-
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
32
Value
64
-
1
1
2
4
8
16
32
-
1
1
2
3
4
2
4
-
0
1
2
-
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
-
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
Flag Information
Data
Ie>>>> Start Alarm
Ie>>>> Trip Alarm
Reserved
Thermal Overload Alarm
Thermal Overload Trip
Reserved
Reserved
CB Failure
Pole A Opening
Pole B Opening
Pole C Opening
Broken Conductor tAux1 tAux2
Broken Conductor Time Delay
CB Failure Time Delay
Cold Load Pickup Time Delay
CB Alarms or Bits 0, 1, 2, 4 of F43
CB In Unknown State (DBI)
Remote Trip Delay
Remote Close Delay
Reserved tI>> tI>>> tIe>> tIe>>> tI>>>> tIe>>>>
Reserved
MODBUS
Reserved
IEC 60870-5-103
Reserved
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
CB Operating Time Expired
Page (GC) 7-54 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
F46
F45
F44
Code Description
Bit
1
2
3
4
5 - 15
Unsigned Integer: Alarm Information
2
0
1
Unsigned Integer: Relay Status
Unsigned Integer: Remote Control
Word 3
9
10
11
12
13
0
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
2
3
4
2
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
3
4
5
6
7
8-15
0
512
1024
2048
4096
8196
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
4
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
8
16
32
64
128
-
1
2
4
8
16
-
Value
1
2
Flag Information
Data
CB Operation Number Expired
Square Amps Sum Exceeded
Trip Circuit Supervision
CB Closing Time Expired
Reserved
CB Operating Time Overreach, Memorized
Alarm
CB Operation Number Overreach, Memorized
Alarm
Square Amps Sum Overreach, Memorized
Alarm
Trip Circuit Self-Test, Memorized Alarm
CB Closing Time Overreach, Memorized Alarm
Ie>>>> Alarm tIe>>>> Alarm
TCS Block
Reserved
Watchdog
User Communication Failure
EEPROM Data Failure
CT Failure
Calibration Failure
Real Time Clock Failure
SRAM Failure
Reserved
Protection Communications Card Failure
Protection Communications Card Recovery in
Progress
Factory Default Settings Restored
Mains Power Supply
Auxiliary Power Supplies
Transformers Offset Failure
Initiate Ie Harmonic Calculation
De-latch Trip Relay Only (RL1)
Acknowledge Oldest Disturbance Record
Reserved
Reset Rolling Demand Measurements
Reset Peak Average Measurements
Clear the Protection Communication Statistics
Cancel Remote Trip Sequence
Cancel Remote Close Sequence
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-55
(GC) 7 Communications
F53
Code
F47
F48
F49
F50
F51
F46A
F52
Description
Setting Groups selection
Change Group Input
MODBUS Date Format
Reserved
Opto Power Supply
Phase Rotation
In Progress Flag for Current
Differential
Current Differential Memory
Protection Flags
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
15
0
1
2
3
0
12
13
14
Bit
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
1
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
9
1
2
3
4
5 - 8
2
4
8
16
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
Value
4096
8192
16384
-
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
32768
1
2
4
8
1
Flag Information
Data
Reserved
Reserved
Erase all records (events, faults, alarms, disturbances, etc)
Reserved
Settings group 1 selection
Settings group 2 selection
Settings group 3 selection
Settings group 4 selection
Edge triggered changes of logic inputs
Level triggered changes of logic inputs
Private Date Format
IEC Date Format
-
DC
AC
Direct Phase Rotation ABC
Inverse Phase Rotation ACB
Disable Current Differential Protection
Protection Communication Fail (Alarm Not
Activated)
Current differential fail
Current differential protection ok
Idiff Trip Any Phase
Idiff A Phase Fault
Idiff B Phase Fault
Idiff C Phase Fault
Back-Up Enabled
Protection Communications alarm (Fail Timer
Expired)
Protection Communications Ok
Idiff Start on any phase
Direct Intertrip Rx
Permissive Intertrip Rx
Idiff Intertrip Rx
Permissive Intertrip Start Rx
Current Differential protection disabled
Reserved
Current differential fail
Reserved
Idiff Trip any phase
Reserved
Page (GC) 7-56 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
F57
F58
F59
F60
F54
F55
F56
Code Description
Intertrip Flags
Reserved
Commissioning Flags
Unsigned Long Integer
Protection Communication Protocol
Protection Communication Data Rate
Protection Communication Relay
Address
Bit
9
10 - 15
0
1
2
3
4-15
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
4
5
6
1
2
3
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
4B
5A
5B
6A
6B
7A
7B
1B
2A
2B
3A
3B
4A
8A
8B
9A
9B
10A
10B
11A
11B
-
4
8
-
1
2
0
1
Value
512
Flag Information
Data
Protection Communications Alarm (Fail timer
Expired)
Reserved
Direct Intertrip R1 Trip
Current Differential Intertrip R1 Trip CH1
Permissive Intertrip Start CH1
Permissive Intertrip Trip CH1
Reserved
Output Contacts Disabled
Protection Communications Loopback Mode
Enabled
1
2
0
1
2 Reserved
4294967295 Numerical Data
0 SDLC
2
3
NRZ
Inverted NRZ
64 kbits/Sec
56 kbits/Sec
19.2 kbits/Sec
9.6 kbits/Sec
0 1A
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-57
(GC) 7 Communications MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
F62
F63
F64
F65
F61
Code Description
Protection Communication Clock
Source
Unsigned Integer : Logic Outputs
Configuration
Unsigned Integer: Manual CB Trip and Close
Latest Fault Record Register
Latest Fault Record Register 2
6
7
8
9
3
4
5
0
1
2
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
1
Bit
0
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
0
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
1
2
1
2
4
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
1
2
0
1
28
29
30
31
22
Value
23
24
25
26
27
Flag Information
Data
12A
12B
13A
13B
14A
14B
15A
15B
16A
16B
Internal
External
Selection Logic Output Number RL1
Selection Logic Output Number RL2
Selection Logic Output Number RL3
Selection Logic Output Number RL4
Selection Logic Output Number RL5
Selection Logic Output Number RL6
Selection Logic Output Number RL7
Selection Logic Output Number RL8
No Operation
Trip
Close
I2> Fault
I2>> Fault
Thermal Fault
Aux. 1
Aux. 2
I<
Broken Conductor
Ie>>>>
Ie>>>
Ie>>
Ie>
I>>>>
I>>>
I>>
I>
Current Differential Intertrip
Current Differential Fault
CB Fail
Page (GC) 7-58 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
Description
Vector Compensation Type
Selective Intertripping
PIT I Selection
PIT OC Stages
F66
Code
F68
F69
F67
P521/EN GC/B93
(GC) 7 Communications
8
9
10
5
6
7
2
3
4
15
0
1
0
11
12
13
14
7
8
9
10
4
5
6
0
1
2
3
Bit
6
7
8
3
4
5
4
8
16
Value
32
64
128
256
512
1024
0
1
2
9
10
11
12
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
1
2
1
13
14
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
Flag Information
Data
TCS Block
Equation A Fault Occurred
Equation B Fault Occurred
Equation C Fault Occurred
Equation D Fault Occurred
Equation E Fault Occurred
Equation F Fault Occurred
Equation G Fault Occurred
Equation H Fault Occurred
Off
Yy0 (0
)
Yd1 (-30
)
Yy2 (-60
)
Yd3 (-90
)
Yy4 (-120
)
Yd5 (-150
)
Yy6 (-180
)
Yd7 (+150
)
Yy8 (+120
)
Yd9 (+90
)
Yy10 (+60
)
Yd11 (+30
)
Ydy0 (0
)
Ydy6 (-180
)
DIT on tI> Trip
DIT on tI>> Trip
DIT on tI>>> Trip
DIT on tI>>>> Trip
DIT on tIe> Trip
DIT on tIe>> Trip
DIT on tIe>>> Trip
DIT on tIe>>>> Trip
DIT on tI< Trip
DIT on tI2> Trip
DIT on tI2>> Trip
DIT on Thermal Trip
DIT on Broken Conductor Trip
DIT on tAux1 Trip
DIT on tAux2 Trip
DIT on CB Fail
Remote
Local
I>
Page (GC) 7-59
(GC) 7 Communications
Description
Inrush Block Control Flags
Inrush Block Control Alarms
CTS Control Flags
CTS Control Alarms
CTS reset mode
Loopback mode
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
FRAME mode
F73
F71
F72
F70
Code
F76
F77
F78
F79
F80
F74
F75
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
0
1
2
7
8
9
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
4
4
5
1
2
3
3
4
5
6
Bit
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
1
1
2
4
128
256
512
8
16
32
64
128
1
2
4
2
4
8
16
32
64
Value
0
2
1
0
1
0
1
8
16
32
64
Flag Information
Data
I>>
I>>>
I>>>>
Ie>
Ie>>
Ie>>>
Ie>>>>
Local Cross Block
Local Phase A Block
Local Phase B Block
Local Phase C Block
Remote Cross Block
Remote Phase A Block
Remote Phase B Block
Remote Phase C Block
Remote Inrush Block Enabled
Inrush Block Configure Error
Inrush Block Configure Error Alarm
Local CTS Fail
Remote CTS Fail
CTS Block
CTS Cdiff Block
CTS Cdiff Restrain
CTS Inhibited
CTS Conf Fail
Local CTS Fail Alarm
Remote CTS Fail Alarm
CTS Block Alarm
Reserved
CTS Cdiff Restrain Alarm
CTS Inhibited Alarm
CTS Conf Fail Alarm
Manual
Auto
Off
Channel 1
Internal
Extension
Convention
Page (GC) 7-60 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
Description
Logic Equation Flag
Programmable Intertrip
Logic Equation Operand F83
F82
F81
Code
P521/EN GC/B93
(GC) 7 Communications
2
3
6
7
0
1
3
4
5
0
1
2
Bit
Flag Information
Data
Equation A
Equation B
Equation C
Equation D
Equation E
Equation F
Equation G
Equation H
Intertrip 1
Intertrip 2
Intertrip 3
Intertrip 4
Null
Any Trip
CDiff Trip
Backup Enable
Comm. Fail
Direct IT
CDiff IT
Permissive IT
I> Start
I> Trip
I>> Start
I>> Trip
I>>> Start
I>>> Trip
I>>>> Start
I>>>> Trip
I0> Start
I0> Trip
I0>> Start
I0>> Trip
I0>>> Start
I0>>> Trip
I0>>>> Start
I0>>>> Trip
I< Start
I< Trip
I2> Start
I2> Trip
I2>> Start
I2>> Trip
Thermal Alarm
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
4
8
0
1
64
128
1
2
1
2
4
8
16
32
Value
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
Page (GC) 7-61
(GC) 7 Communications MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
Description
Logic Equation Operator
Programmable Intertrip Allocation F85
F84
Code
2
3
4
0
1
Bit
Flag Information
Thermal Trip
CB Alarm
52 Fail
Broken Cond.
CB Fail
CB Close
Aux1 Trip
Aux2 Trip
Active Group
TCS Block
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Equ A
Equ B
Equ C
Equ D
Equ E
Equ F
Equ G
Equ H
Prgm IT 1
Prgm IT 2
Prgm IT 3
Prgm IT 4
CTS Local Alarm
CTS Remote Alarm
CTS Block
CTS Restrain
Convention Mode
Cdiff Disabled
OR
OR NOT
AND
AND NOT
I> Trip
I>> Trip
I>>> Trip
I>>>> Trip
I0> Trip
Data
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
41
42
43
44
37
38
39
40
31
Value
32
33
34
35
36
3
0
2
4
8
16
63
0
1
2
59
60
61
62
Page (GC) 7-62 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
Code
F85’
F99
F98
F86
F87
Description
Programmable Intertrip Allocation
Word 2
Message Display
FRAME Mode
11
12
13
14
15
5
6
7
8
9
10
0
Bit
3
4
5
6
0
1
2
7
8
2
3
4
5
1
2
0
1
8
9
10
11
12
0
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
Flag Information
Data
I0>> Trip
I0>>> Trip
I0>>>> Trip
Thermal Trip
I< Trip
I2> Trip
I2>> Trip
CB Fail
Broken Cond.
Aux1 Trip
Aux2 Trip
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Equ A
Equ B
Equ C
Equ D
Equ E
Equ F
Equ G
Equ H
Convention
Reserved
Conf conflict comms
-3V3 out of range
5V0 out of range
3V3 out of range
12V out of range
1V3 out of range
0V out of range
Abnormal offset with transformer 1
Abnormal offset with transformer 2
Abnormal offset with transformer 3
Abnormal offset with transformer 4
Abnormal offset with transformer 5
Abnormal offset with transformer 6
Abnormal offset with transformer 7
Abnormal offset with transformer 8
Abnormal offset with transformer 9
32
Value
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
1
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
4
8
16
32
2
4
1
2
256
512
1024
2048
4096
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-63
(GC) 7 Communications MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
Table 14 - Register format
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.1.1
3.5.1.2
3.5.1.3
Event Record
There are two methods of event record extraction.
1.
Request a specific event record (see section 3.5.1)
2.
Request the oldest non-acknowledged event record (see section 3.5.2)
Specific Event Record Extraction
Page 35h: contains 250 Event Records from 3500h to 35F9h
The events number is extended from 75 to 250 since P521 V12.A.
Prior to P521 V12.A, Page 35h contains 75 Event Records from 3500h to 354Ah.
Since P521 V12.A Page 35h contains 250 Event Records from 3500h to 35F9h.
One event record can be accessed from each address.
Each event is one 3-dimensional MODBUS register (see section 0) that consists of 9 data
words. The format is detailed in section 3.5.1.2.
Event Record Format
Word N
1:
Word N
2:
Word N
3:
Word N
4:
Word N
5 & 6:
Word N
7 & 8:
Word N
9:
MODBUS associated value
MODBUS address
Reserved
Event date (second) number of second since 01/01/94
Event date (millisecond)
Acknowledge
0 = Event Non acknowledged
1 = Event Acknowledged
Table 15 - Event record format
Events and Alarms Table
4
5
6
0
1
2
3
7
8
9
10
Code Event Meaning Type
-
-
-
-
MODBUS
Address
No Event
Remote Close Operation Command Acknowledged
Remote Trip Operation Command Acknowledged
Disturbance Recording Started
Remote De-Latch Latched Contacts Command Acknowledged -
Setting Change Occurred
-
ADDRESS -
Remote Thermal Reset Command Acknowledged - -
Maintenance Mode Enabled/Disabled
Output Contact State Change While in Maintanance Mode
I>
I>>
-
-
-
-
-
F13
F17
F17
-
014H
016H
017H
Page (GC) 7-64 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
Code
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Event Meaning
I>>>
I>>>>
Ie>
Ie>>
Ie>>>
Ie>>>>
Thermal Overload Alarm Threshold Exceeded
Thermal Overload Trip Threshold Exceeded tI> tI>> tI>>> tI>>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> tIe>>>> tI<
Broken Conductor tAux1 Expired tAux2 Expired
CB Failure Occurred
Selective Scheme Logic 1 Activated
Selective Scheme Logic 2 Activated
Blocking Logic 1 Activated
Blocking Logic 2 Activated
Setting Group Change Activated
52a State Changed
52b State Changed
Acknowledgement Of The Latched Output Relays Release
CB Failure Occurred
Cold Load Start Activated
NULL
NULL
NULL
Change of Logic Input State
Trip Relay Activated: Thermal Overload
Trip Relay Activated: tI>
Trip Relay Activated: tI>>
Trip Relay Activated: tI>>>
Trip Relay Activated: tI>>>>
Trip Relay Activated: tIe>
Trip Relay Activated: tIe>>
Type
-
-
F38
F38
F20
F20
F20
F20
F20
F16
F16
F16
F16
F17
F38
F38
F17
F17
F16
F16
F16
F16
F37
F37
F17
F17
F17
F17
F20
F20
F20
F20
F20
-
F12
F37
F17
F17
F17
F17
F17
F17
011H
011H
011H
011H
011H
011H
011H
01CH
01DH
02AH
02DH
02DH
02DH
02DH
011H
011H
011H
-
-
-
010H
029H
016H
017H
018H
019H
01AH
01BH
029H
016H
017H
018H
019H
01AH
01BH
MODBUS
Address
018H
019H
01AH
01BH
01CH
01DH
029H
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-65
(GC) 7 Communications MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
68
69
70
71
63
64
65
66
67
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
Code
60
61
62
Event Meaning Type
Trip Relay Activated: tIe>>>
Trip Relay Activated: tIe>>>>
Trip Relay Activated: tI<
Trip Relay Activated: Broken Conductor
Trip Relay Activated: tAux1
Trip Relay Activated: tAux2
Change of Output Contact State
Front Panel Single Alarm Acknowledgement Command
Acknowledged
Front Panel All Alarms Acknowledgement Command
Acknowledged
Remote Single Alarm Acknowledgement Command
Acknowledged
-
-
-
Remote All Alarms Acknowledgement Command Acknowledged -
Major Hardware Alarms F45
Minor Hardware Alarms
I2> Start
F45
F16
tI2> Trip
CB Supervision Open Timer Expired
Number Of CB Operations Exceeded Threshold
F16
F43
F43
Summation Amps Exceeded Threshold
CB Supervision CB Trip
CB Supervision Closed Timer Expired
CB Status Is In-Determinate
F43
F43
F43
F38
NULL
NULL
NULL
Trip Relay Activated: tI2>
-
-
-
F16
NULL
NULL
NULL
Change of Latched Output Contact State tBF Started
I< Start
I2>> Start tI2>> Trip
Trip Relay Activated: tI2>>
NULL
-
-
-
F13
F20'
F17
F16
F16
F16
Channel 1 Protection Communications Alarm
NULL
Current Differential Trip
Channel 1 Direct Intertrip Occurred
Channel 1 Current Differential Intertrip Occurred
-
F52
-
F52
F52
F52
F17
F17
F17
F38
F38
F38
F13
-
-
-
00FH
00FH
02BH
02BH
033H
033H
033H
033H
033H
02DH
-
-
-
014H
-
-
034H
012H
02AH
02CH
02CH
02BH
-
015H
-
015H
015H
015H
MODBUS
Address
01CH
01DH
02AH
02DH
02DH
02DH
014H
-
Page (GC) 7-66 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
Code
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
Event Meaning
Channel 1 Permissive Intertrip Occurred
NULL
NULL
NULL
Current Differential Protection Fail
Current Differential Protection Disabled
Protection Communications Loopback Mode Active
Output Contacts Disabled
Current Differential Start
Current Differential Phase A Start
Current Differential Phase B Start
Current Differential Phase C Start
Current Differential Phase A Trip
Current Differential Phase B Trip
Current Differential Phase C Trip
Protection Communications Fail
Protection Communications Channel 1 Ok
NULL
Backup Protection Active
Differential Protection Ok
Permissive Intertrip Start
NULL
Trip Relay Activated: Current Differential
Trip Relay Activated: Direct Intertrip
Trip Relay Activated: Current Differential Intertrip
Trip Relay Activated: Permissive Intertrip
Manual Trip Delay Timer Start
Manual Close Delay Timer Start
Reset Protection Communications Statistics Acknowledged
TCS Block Input Energised
Equation A
Equation B
Equation C
Equation D
Equation E
Equation F
Equation G
Equation H
Programmable Intertrip 1
Programmable Intertrip 2
Programmable Intertrip 3
Programmable Intertrip 4 local Inrush Block
Type
-
-
-
-
-
-
F52
F52
-
F52
F52
F52
-
F52
F52
F52
F52
F38
F38
-
F20'
F52
-
-
-
F52
F52
F24
F24
F52
F81
F82
F82
F82
F82
F70
F81
F81
F81
F81
F81
F81
F81
015H
015H
-
015H
015H
015H
-
015H
015H
015H
-
-
-
-
-
-
162H
015H
015H
02DH
02DH
-
012H
03AH
03AH
03AH
03AH
03AH
03AH
03AH
03AH
03CH
03CH
03CH
03CH
0CDH
MODBUS
Address
015H
-
-
-
015H
015H
166H
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-67
(GC) 7 Communications MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
Code
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
163
164
165
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
136
137
138
139
140
Event Meaning
Remote Inrush Block
Inrush Block Config Error Alarm
Local CTS Alarm
Remote CTS Alarm
CTS Block
CTS Cdiff Block
CTS Cdiff Restrain
CTS Inhibit
CTS Config Alarm
LED RESET
Convention Mode
Synchronization
Cortec Mismatch
Conf Conflict Comms main power supply
-3V3 power supply
5V0 power supply
3V3 power supply
12V power supply
0V power supply ground offset offset on transformer 1 offset on transformer 2 offset on transformer 3 offset on transformer 4 offset on transformer 5 offset on transformer 6 offset on transformer 7 offset on transformer 8 offset on transformer 9
Note
0D1H
00FH
00DFH
00DFH
00DFH
00DFH
00DFH
00DFH
00E0H
00E0H
00E0H
00E0H
00E0H
00E0H
00E0H
00E0H
00E0H
0CFH
0CFH
0CFH
0CFH
-
-
-
012H
MODBUS
Address
0CDH
0CDH
0CFH
0CFH
0CFH
The Double Arrow signifies that the Event is Generated on Event
Occurrence (
) and Disappearance (
).
On Event Occurrence, the Corresponding Bit of the Associated Format is
Set to 1.
On Event Disappearance, the Corresponding Bit of the Associated Format is Set to 0.
Type
F98
F99
F99
F99
F99
F99
F99
F87
F45
F98
F98
F98
F98
F98
F99
F99
F99
F72
F72
F72
F72
-
-
-
F87
F70
F70
F72
F72
F72
Note The Event Record consists of 9 Words:
Word Number 1 : Event Meaning
Word Number 2 : MODBUS Associated Value
Word Number 3 : Modbus Address
Word Number 4 : Reserved
Word Number 5 and 6 : Event Time (Number of Seconds Since 01/01/94)
Word Number 6 and 7 : Event Time (Milliseconds)
Word Number 8 : Acknowledge: 0 = Non-Acknowledged or 1 =
Acknowledged
Page (GC) 7-68 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.3.1
3.5.3.2
3.5.3.3
3.5.3.4
(GC) 7 Communications
Table 16 - MODBUS Events and Alarms table
Page 36h: Oldest Event Record
Reading address 3600h using MODBUS function 3 can retrieve the oldest event record.
Event Acknowledgement
There are two ways to acknowledge an event, automatically or manually.
Event Acknowledgement Mode
In order to set the acknowledgement mode for events and faults, bit 12 in remote control
word 1 (0400h) has to be written to with the required mode see ref. [3.5.3.4 Event
acknowledgement control]
Automatic Event Acknowledgement Mode
Acknowledgement of the oldest non-acknowledged event record takes place on retrieval.
Manual Event Acknowledgement
With the acknowledgement mode set to manual, the oldest non-acknowledged event record must be retrieved. Bit 13 of remote control word 1 (0400h) can then be set to 1 to
acknowledge the oldest non-acknowledged event ref. [3.5.3.4 Event acknowledgement
control].
Event Acknowledgement Control
Remote Control Word 1 : 0400h
Bit 12
Bit 13
Function
0 = Automatic event/fault acknowledgement mode
1 = Manual event/fault acknowledgement mode
0 = Event not acknowledged manually
1 = Event acknowledged manually
Table 17 - Event acknowledgement control
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-69
(GC) 7 Communications
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.1.1
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
Fault Record
There are two methods of fault record extraction.
•
•
Request a specific fault record (see section 3.6.1)
Request the oldest non-acknowledged fault record (see section 3.6.2).
Specific Fault Record
Page 37h: Fault Record Mapping
Each fault record is one 3-dimensional MODBUS register (see section 0) that consists of
25 data words. The format is detailed in section 0.
370Fh
3710h
3711h
3712h
3713h
3714h
3715h
3716h
3717h
3718h
3E00h
3700h
3701h
3702h
3703h
3704h
3705h
3706h
3707h
3708h
3709h
370Ah
370Bh
370Ch
370Dh
370Eh
Address Contents
Fault Record N
1
Fault Record N
2
Fault Record N
3
Fault Record N
4
Fault Record N
5
Fault Record N
6
Fault Record N
7
Fault Record N
8
Fault Record N
9
Fault Record N
10
Fault Record N
11
Fault Record N
12
Fault Record N
13
Fault Record N
14
Fault Record N
15
Fault Record N
16
Fault Record N
17
Fault Record N
18
Fault Record N
19
Fault Record N
20
Fault Record N
21
Fault Record N
22
Fault Record N
23
Fault Record N
24
Fault Record N
25
Oldest Non-Acknowledged Fault Record
Table 18 - Page 37h: fault record mapping
Page (GC) 7-70 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
3.6.1.2
(GC) 7 Communications
Fault Record Format
6
7
8
9
Word Number
1
2 & 3
4 & 5
10 & 11
12
13
14
15
16 & 17
18 & 19
20 & 21
22 & 23
24
25
Contents
Fault number
Fault time in seconds since 01/01/94
Fault time (milliseconds)
Fault date (season) 0 = winter 1= Summer 2 = Undefined
Active setting group
Fault value current (see note 1)
Phase A current (see note 2)
Phase B current (see note 2)
Phase C current (see note 2)
Earth current value (see note 2)
IA differential current (see note 3)
IB differential current (see note 3)
IC differential current (see note 3)
Ibias highest current (see note 3)
Cdiff control flags (see F52)
Acknowledge fault : Fault non acknowledged = 0 Fault acknowledged = 1
Table 19 - Fault types
05
06
07
08
09
00
01
02
03
04
4
5
6
0
1
2
3
7
8
None
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Phases A - B
Phases A - C
Phases B - C
Phases A
– B - C
Earth
Table 20 - Fault element meanings
Code
Null event
Remote trip
Thermal overload trip tI> trip tI>> trip tI>>> trip tI>>>> trip tIe> trip tIe>> trip tIe>>> trip
Fault Origin
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-71
(GC) 7 Communications
3.6.1.3
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
25
26
27
Code
Note 1
Fault Origin tIe>>>> trip tI < trip
Broken conductor trip t Aux 1 trip t Aux 2 trip tI2> trip tI2>> trip
Idiff trip
Intertrip
TCS Block
EQU A Trip
EQU B Trip
EQU C Trip
EQU D Trip
EQU E Trip
EQU F Trip
EQU G Trip
EQU H Trip
For trip codes 17 & 18 (in Table 20) refer to note 3 to calculate the value.
For all other trip codes refer to note 2 to calculate the value.
The nominal current value not including any CT ratio settings. Note 2
Note 3 Current differential value calculation.
Table 21 - Fault origin codes
Fault Record Calculation Formulae
Line Current Differential/Bias Value =
Differential or Bias Current (word 16 & 17 or 18 & 19 or 20 & 21 or 22 & 23)
100
Line Phase Current Value =
Phase Sampled Value (word 11, 12, 13 or 14) *Phase Primary CT Ratio (0120h)
Phase Internal CT Ratio (0007h)
Line Earth Current Value =
Earth Sampled Value (word 10 or 15) *Earth Primary CT Ratio (0122h)
Earth Internal CT Ratio (0008h)
The earth internal CT ratio is dependent on the earth current range as shown in the table below:
Page (GC) 7-72 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
3.6.1.4
3.6.2
3.6.2.1
3.6.3
3.6.4
3.6.4.1
3.6.4.2
3.6.4.3
(GC) 7 Communications
Internal CT Value for each Sensitivity Range
Sensitivity Range
Internal CT Value 800
0.1 to 40
en 0.01 to 8
en
3277
Table 22 - Sensitivity Ranges and internal CT values
Line Current Differential/Bias Value =
0.002 to 1
en
32700
Differential or Bias Current (word 16 & 17 or 18 & 19 or 20 & 21 or 22 & 23)
100
Oldest Non-Acknowledged Fault Record
Page 3Eh: Oldest Non-Acknowledged Fault Record
Reading address 3E00h using MODBUS function 3 can retrieve the oldest nonacknowledged fault record.
Fault Record Acknowledgement
Event Acknowledgement
There are two ways to acknowledge an event, automatically or manually.
Event Acknowledgement Mode
In order to set the acknowledgement mode for events and faults, bit 12 in remote control
word 1 (0400h) has to be written to with the required mode see ref. [3.5.3.4 Event
acknowledgement control]
Automatic Event Acknowledgement Mode
Acknowledgement of the oldest non-acknowledged event record takes place on retrieval.
Manual Event Acknowledgement
With the acknowledgement mode set to manual, the oldest non-acknowledged event record must be retrieved. Bit 14 of remote control word 1 (0400h) can then be set to 1 to
acknowledge the oldest non-acknowledged event see section 3.5.3.4.
Remote Control Word 1 : 0400h
Bit 12
Bit 14
Function
0 = Automatic event/fault acknowledgement mode
1 = Manual event/fault acknowledgement mode
0 = Fault record not acknowledged manually
1 = Fault record acknowledged manually
Table 23 - Remote control words, bits and functions
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-73
(GC) 7 Communications
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.1.1
3.7.1.2
Page (GC) 7-74
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
Disturbance Records
In order to extract a disturbance record the following requests need to be sent to the relay.
1. An optional request can be sent to extract a summary of all the disturbance records
in SRAM, the mapping and format of the data returned is shown in section 3.6.1.
2. Read the configuration information for the first set of channel data. The first set is
IA. The MODBUS mapping and format are detailed in section 3.3. Reading the
channel configuration data is required to selects which channel data is available for reading.
3. Read the first 250 words of the selected channel data. The MODBUS mapping
and format is detailed in section 3.3 Channel data.
4. Continue to request configuration information and then channel data in 250 word blocks until all the disturbance record has been extracted. Data words 10 and 11 of the configuration information specify the end of the channel extraction.
5. Read the upload index frame to complete the disturbance record extraction and to
acknowledge the disturbance record extraction. Refer to section 3.3 for the format
and MODBUS mapping details.
Summary Disturbance Records
Page 3Dh: Summary Disturbance Records
The summary disturbance record is one 3 dimensional MODBUS register (see section
3.2) that consists of 36 data words. The format is detailed in section 3.7.1.2.
MODBUS function 3 can be used to read all the summary disturbance records. Note that the disturbance records are not fixed and will be changed according to the different
setting. Please refer to section 3.7.1.2 for details.
Format of Summary Disturbance Records
Word Number
1
2
3 & 4
5 & 6
7
8
9
10 & 11
12 & 13
14
15
Contents
Number of disturbance records available
Oldest disturbance record number
Oldest disturbance record time (seconds)
Oldest disturbance record time (milliseconds)
Disturbance record starting origin
1 = Trip relay (RL1),
2 = Instantaneous threshold,
3 = Remote command,
4 = Logic input
Acknowledge
Oldest disturbance record number +1
Disturbance record time (seconds)
Disturbance record time (milliseconds)
Disturbance record starting origin
1 = Trip relay (RL1),
2 = Instantaneous threshold,
3 = Remote command,
4 = Logic input
Acknowledge
P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
3.7.2
3.7.2.1
(GC) 7 Communications
Word Number
16
17 & 18
19 & 20
21
22
23
24 & 25
26 & 27
28
29
30
31 & 32
33 & 34
35
36
Contents
Oldest disturbance record number +2
Disturbance record time (seconds)
Disturbance record time (milliseconds)
Disturbance record starting origin
1 = Trip relay (RL1),
2 = Instantaneous threshold,
3 = Remote command,
4 = Logic input
Acknowledge
Oldest disturbance record number +3
Disturbance record time (seconds)
Disturbance record time (milliseconds)
Disturbance record starting origin
1 = Trip relay (RL1) ,
2 = Instantaneous threshold,
3 = Remote command,
4 = Logic input
Acknowledge
Latest disturbance record
Latest disturbance record time (seconds)
Latest disturbance record time (milliseconds)
Disturbance record starting origin
1 = Trip relay (RL1),
2 = Instantaneous threshold,
3 = Remote command,
4 = Logic input
Acknowledge
Table 24 - Word numbers and content
Channel Selection and Configuration
Pages 38h to 3Ch: Data Mapping
All channel selection and configuration registers are 3-dimensional MODBUS registers
(see section 3.2) which consist of 11 data words. The format is detailed in section 0.
MODBUS function 3 can be used to read the summary disturbance records.
Address
3800h
3801h
3802h
3803h
3804h
3805h
3806h
3900h
3901h
3902h
3903h
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
Disturbance Record No. Format
IA
IB
IC
IE
Timing
Logic input and output 1
Logic input and output 2
IA
IB
IC
IE
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-75
(GC) 7 Communications
3.7.2.2
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
3B01h
3B02h
3B03h
3B04h
3B05h
3B06h
3C00h
3C01h
3C02h
3C03h
3C04h
3C05h
3C06h
Address
3904h
3905h
3906h
3A00h
3A01h
3A02h
3A03h
3A04h
3A05h
3A06h
3B00h
Disturbance Record No.
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
4
3
3
3
2
2
2
3
5
5
5
5
4
4
5
5
5
Table 25 - Addresses and disturbance records
Format
Timing
Logic input and output 1
Logic input and output 2
IA
IB
IC
IE
Timing
Logic input and output 1
Logic input and output 2
IA
IB
IC
IE
Timing
Logic input and output 1
Logic input and output 2
IA
IB
IC
IE
Timing
Logic input and output 1
Logic input and output 2
Disturbance Record Channel Selection and Configuration Format
Word Number
Word No 1
Word No 2
Word No 3
Word No 4
Word No 5
Word No 6
Word No 7
Word No 8
Word No 9
Word No 10
Word No 11
Number of samples to be extracted
Format
Number of samples in pre-time
Number of samples in post-time
Primary phase CT ratio
Secondary phase CT ratio
Primary earth CT ratio
Secondary earth CT ratio
Internal phase CT ratio
Internal earth CT ratio
Address of the last page of disturbance record data
Number of data words on the last page of the disturbance record for this channel
Table 26 - Disturbance word numbers and formats
Page (GC) 7-76 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
3.7.3
3.7.3.1
3.7.3.2
3.7.3.3
(GC) 7 Communications
Channel Data
Page 9h to 21h: Channel Data Mapping
0900H to 09FAH
0A00H to 0AFAH
0B00H to 0BFAH
0C00H to 0CFAH
0D00H to 0DFAH
0E00H to 0EFAH
0F00H to 0FFAH
Addresses
1000H to 10FAH
1100H to 11FAH
1200H to 12FAH
1300H to 13FAH
1400H to 14FAH
1500H to 15FAH
1600H to 16FAFH
1700H to 17AFH
1800H to 18AFH
1900H to 19AFH
1A00H to 1AAFH
1B00H to 1BAFH
1C00H to 1CAFH
1D00H to 1DAFH
1E00H to 1EAFH
1F00H to 1FAFH
2000H to 20FAH
2100H to 21FAH
Table 27 - Page 9h to 21h: Channel Data Mapping
Contents
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
250 Disturbance data words
Format of the Disturbance Record Channel Data
Channel Name
IA
IB
IC
IE
Timing
Logic channel 1
Logic channel 2
Format
16 bit word equivalent to the ADC count (Ref. Note 1)
16 bit word equivalent to the ADC count (Ref. Note 1)
16 bit word equivalent to the ADC count (Ref. Note 1)
16 bit word equivalent to the ADC count (Ref. Note 2)
Time between two samples in microseconds
16 bit word (see Table 30 for format)
16 bit word (see Table 30 for format)
Table 28 - Channel names and formats
Calculation Formulae
Line Phase Current Value =
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-77
(GC) 7 Communications
3.7.4
3.7.4.1
3.7.4.2
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
Phase Sampled Value (word 11, 12, 13 or 14) *Phase Primary CT Ratio (0120h)
Phase Internal CT Ratio (0007h)
Line Earth Current Value =
Earth Sampled Value (word 10 or 15) *Earth Primary CT Ratio (0122h)
Earth Internal CT Ratio (0008h)
The earth internal CT ratio is dependent on the earth current range as shown in the table below:
Sensitivity range
Internal CT Value 800
0.1 to 40
en 0.01 to 8
en
3277
Table 29 - Sensitivity range and Internal CT Values
0.002 to 1
en
32700
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Format Of Logic Channel 1
Logic
Channel
Content
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Trip Relay (RL1)
Output Relay 2 (RL2)
Output Relay 3 (RL3)
Output Relay 4 (RL4)
Watch Dog Relay 0 (RL0)
Output Relay 5 (RL5)
Output Relay 6 (RL6)
Output Relay 7 (RL7)
Output Relay 8 (RL8)
Reserved
Logic Input 1 (EL1)
Logic Input 2 (EL2)
Logic Input 3 (EL3)
Logic Input 4 (EL4)
Logic Input 5 (EL5)
Reserved
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Format Of Logic Channel 2
Logic
Channel
Content
Cdiff Trip
Cdiff IA
Cdiff IB
Cdiff IC
Cdiff Comms Fail
Cdiff Protection Fail
Direct I-Trip
Permissive I-Trip
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Cdiff I-Trip
CDiff HighSet Element
CDiff Start
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Table 30 - Format Of Logic Channel 1 and Channel 2
Disturbance Recorder Index Frame
Page 22h: Index Frame Mapping
Reading 7 words from address 2200h using MODBUS function 3 obtains the final information of the disturbance record and acknowledges the record.
Index Frame Format
Word Number
1
2 & 3
Contents
Disturbance record number
Disturbance record finish time (seconds)
Page (GC) 7-78 P521/EN GC/B93
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
Word Number
4 & 5
6
7
Contents
Disturbance record finish time (milliseconds)
Disturbance record triggering condition
1: Tripping
2: Instantaneous condition
3 : Remote condition
4: Logic input condition
Start of post time record time stamp
Table 31 - Index frame formats
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-79
(GC) 7 Communications
3.8
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.8.3
3.8.4
3.8.4.1
MODBUS IMPLEMENTATION
Commonly Required Functionality
CB Trip and Close
Remote Control Word 1 : 0400h Write Only
Bit 3
Bit 4
Table 32 - CB Trip and Close
Function
Initiate remote trip
Initiate remote close
As shown in the overview table in section 3.1, page 4 is write only and can be written to
using MODBUS function 5, 6 or 15.
Bit Address
Using MODBUS function 5 to initiate a remote trip, the address of the bit to be written to is made up of the register address then the bit number. That is, in order to access bit 3 at register address 400h the address is 4003h.
Bit Value
The bit value in the message must be FFFF or 0000, which corresponds to setting bit 1 or
0 in the MODBUS register. Any other value results in an exception error 3.
Relay
Address
1-255 5
MODBUS
Function
Table 33 - Bit values
4003
Bit Address Bit Value
FFFF
CRC
Change Setting Group
Remote Control Word 1 : 0400h Write Only
Bit 5
Table 34 - Change Setting Group
Function
Change setting group
As for the previous example, function 5 can be used to write to bit 5 of the control word and change the setting group.
Note The setting group can only be remotely changed if the ‘change group input’ setting is set to edge.
Change Setting Group Request
Relay
Address
1-255 5
MODBUS
Function
4005
Register Address
Table 35 - Change Setting Group Request
Command Data CRC
FFFF
Page (GC) 7-80 P521/EN GC/B93
IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.3.1
(GC) 7 Communications
IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol operates a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave. This protocol is based on the VDEW communications protocol and conforms to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
A detailed implementation of the protocol is provided in Section 4.3, but an
Interoperability statement can be found in Appendix 1.
Technical Characteristics of the IEC 60870-5-103 Connection
•
•
•
The connection parameters are:
•
Isolated two-point EIA(RS)485 connection (2 kV, 50 Hz)
Communications baud rates of 9600 or 19200, configurable via the local interfaces
Communication Parameters of Even Parity, 8 Data Bits and 1 Stop Bit
Address Range of 1 to 255 (255 as the Broadcast Address), configurable via the
local interfaces.
IEC 60870-5-103 Compatible Application Functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The following application functions are supported by this interface:
•
Initialization (reset)
Time Synchronization
Event Record Extraction
General Interrogation
Cyclic Measurements
General Commands
Disturbance Record Extraction
Setting Cell Extraction and Writing
Application Functions
Initialization (Reset)
•
•
Whenever the relay has been powered up, or if the communications parameters have been changed, a Reset Command is required to initialize the communications. The following two reset commands are supported:
Reset CU
Reset FCB
The difference between the two commands is that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the relays transmit buffer and Reset FCB will reset the frame control bit in the connection layer protocol.
The relay will respond to the reset command with the ASDU 5 identification message.
The Cause of Transmission value in the message shall be dependent upon the nature of the reset command. The following information will be contained in the data section of this
ASDU:
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-81
(GC) 7 Communications
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.3.6
IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
Manufacturers Name and Product Type: MiCOM P
The software identification section of the ASDU 5 message will contain the first four characters of the relay model number to identify the type of relay, and the current software version. The breakdown of the information contained in the data and identification sections can be shown as:
“MiCOM P” + 16bit Model + 8bit Major Version + 1 character Minor Version e.g. “MiCOM P” + 521 + 3 + ‘A’
In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered up, a power up event will be generated.
Time Synchronization
Using the time synchronization feature of the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol allows the relay time and date to be modified. The relay will correct for the transmission delay as specified in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
If the time synchronization message is sent as a send/confirm message then the relay will respond with a confirm. If a time synchronization message is sent as either a send/confirm or a send/no reply (broadcast message), a time synchronization message will be returned as Class 1 data.
Event Record Extraction
The events generated by the relay can be transmitted to the IEC 60870-5-103 master station using either standard information numbers or private information numbers. All standard information numbers are transmitted using the standard function types; all private information numbers are transmitted using private function types.
Therefore the events are categorized using the following information:
•
Function Type
•
Information Number
Section 5 contains a complete listing of all events produced by the relay.
General Interrogation
The General Interrogation request can be used to read the current status of the relay.
The status information that will be returned during a General Interrogation cycle is shown
Cyclic Measurements
The relay will produce measured values using ASDU 9 only on a cyclical basis. This can be read from the relay using a Class 2 poll.
It should be noted that the measurements are transmitted as a proportion of 2.4 times the rated value of the analogue inputs.
General Commands
A list of the supported commands is shown in Section 5. The relay will respond to
unsupported commands with an ASDU 1 message with a Cause Of Transmission (COT) of negative acknowledgement. Note that a negative acknowledgement will also be returned if the password is entered on the front panel interface, to prevent multiple access to the relay controls. The timeout for this condition is 5 minutes.
Page (GC) 7-82 P521/EN GC/B93
IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL (GC) 7 Communications
4.3.7 Disturbance Record Extraction
The disturbance records stored by the relay can be extracted using the mechanism defined in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard. The relay also maintains compatibility with the
VDEW control system by transmitting an ASDU 23 with the oldest disturbance record list at the start of every General Interrogation cycle.
4.3.7.1
10
11
12
13
6
7
8
9
14
15
3
4
5
0
1
2
Bit
Number
Extracting Disturbance Records via the MODBUS Front Port
To provide IEC 60870-5-103 rear port compatibility for disturbance records extracted via the MODBUS front port, the following tables should be referred to, for determining the correct descriptions of the values contained in the binary channels of a disturbance record extracted via the MODBUS front port of a P521 model with IEC 60870-5-103 rear port. This does not apply for a P521 model with MODBUS rear port.
Binary Channel 1 Mapping:
IEC 60870-5-103
Reference
Description
INF No: 84
INF No: 67
INF No: 68
General Start
Any IN Start
General Trip
INF No: 85
INF No: 122
INF No: 69
INF No: 70
INF No: 71
INF No: 191
INF No: 192
Breaker Failure
Differential Trip
Differential Trip L1
Differential Trip L2
Differential Trip L3
Idiff Comms Failure
Idiff Protection Failure
INF No: 120
INF No: 121
INF No: 123
INF No: 90
INF No: 91
INF No: 94
Direct Intertrip
Permissive Intertrip Trip
Idiff Intertrip
I> Trip
I>> Trip
I>>> Trip
Table 36 - Binary Channel 1 and 2 Mapping
10
11
12
13
14
15
6
7
8
9
3
4
5
0
1
2
Bit number
Binary Channel 2 Mapping
IEC 60870-5-103 reference
Description
INF No: 95
INF No: 92
INF No: 93
I>>>> Trip
IN> Trip
IN>> Trip
INF No: 96
INF No: 97
INF No: 161
INF No: 162
INF No: 163
INF No: 164
INF No: 165
IN>>> Trip
IN>>>> Trip
Logic Input 1
Logic Input 2
Logic Input 3
Logic Input 4
Logic Input 5
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-83
(GC) 7 Communications
4.3.8
Page (GC) 7-84
IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
Reading and Writing Settings
Table 37 gives information about reading and writing settings.
Type identification
Variable Struct. Qualifier
Cause of Transmission
Device Address
Function byte (FUN)
Information Number (INF)
Value low-byte
Value high-byte
TT (time tag)
17 (Analog protection parameter)
81H
18H, 45H, 46H, (7FH)
Common address of ASDU
Parameter y-Value
Parameter x-Value
MW (low)
MW (high) ms low ms high
IV 0 m m m m m m
SU 0 h h h h h
Table 37 - Information about reading and writing settings
Additional information about reading and writing these settings is shown below:
Private ASDUs Information in Control Direction in EIC103 Setting
Type identification
Variable Struct. Qualifier
Cause of Transmission
140 (Analog protection parameter)
81H
14H
Device Address
Function byte (FUN)
Information Number (INF)
Common address of ASDU
Parameter y-Value
Parameter x-Value
Type identification
Variable Struct. Qualifier
Cause of Transmission
Device Address
Function byte (FUN)
Information Number (INF)
Value low-byte
Value high-byte
144 (Write analog protection param.)
81H
14H
Common address of ASDU
Parameter y-Value
Parameter x-Value
MW (low)
MW (high)
Type identification
Variable Struct. Qualifier
Cause of Transmission
Device Address
Function byte (FUN)
Information Number (INF)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
201 (Write analog protection param.)
81H
14H
Common address of ASDU
Parameter y-Value
Parameter x-Value
Low word (low)
Low word (high)
High word (low)
High word (high)
P521/EN GC/B93
IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
4.3.9
4.3.10
(GC) 7 Communications
Type identification
Variable Struct. Qualifier
Cause of Transmission
Device Address
Function byte (FUN)
Information Number (INF)
Value low-byte
Value high-byte
232 (Write binary protection param.)
81H
14H
Common address of ASDU
Parameter y-Value
Parameter x-Value
BS (low)
BS (high)
Private ASDUs Information in Control Direction in EIC103 Setting
Type identification
Variable Struct. Qualifier
17 (Analog protection parameter)
81H
Cause of Transmission
Device Address
Function byte (FUN)
Information Number (INF)
Value low-byte
Value high-byte
TT (time tag)
18H, 45H, 46H, (7FH)
Common address of ASDU
Parameter y-Value
Parameter x-Value
MW (low)
MW (high) ms low ms high
IV 0 m m m m m m
SU 0 h h h h h
Type identification
Variable Struct. Qualifier
Cause of Transmission
169 (Analog protection parameter)
81H
0BH, 0CH, 14H, 15H
Table 38 - Additional information about reading and writing settings
Blocking of Monitor Direction
The relay does not support the facility to Block Messages in the Monitor direction.
Test Mode
The relay does not support the Test Mode function.
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-85
(GC) 7 Communications IEC 60870-5-103 DETAILED IMPLEMENTATION
5 IEC 60870-5-103 DETAILED IMPLEMENTATION
5.1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
ASDU
TYPE
System Functions
8 10
6 8
COT
1
1
1
1
5
5
5
5
3
4
5
6
Status Indication
12,20,21
9,12
9,12,20,21
9,12,20,21
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
9,12,20,21
9,12,20,21
1,9
1,9
Supervision Indications
1 1,9
Fault Indications
2 1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1
1
1
1
1,9
1
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1
1
1
1
1,9
1,9
Compatible Range Information Numbers in Monitor Direction
FUN INF NO.
25
26
27
28
19
22
23
24
0
0
2
3
4
5
36
85
90
91
92
69
70
71
84
64
65
66
67
68
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
255
255
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
Description
End of General Interrogation
Time Synchronization
Reset FCB
Reset CU
Start/Restart
Power On
LED Reset
Local Parameter Setting
Characteristic 1
Characteristic 2
Characteristic 3
Characteristic 4
Auxiliary Input 1
Auxiliary Input 2
Trip Circuit Supervision
Start /Pickup L1
Start /Pickup L2
Start /Pickup L3
Start /Pickup N
General Trip
Trip L1
Trip L2
Trip L3
General Start
Breaker Failure
Trip I>
Trip I>>
Trip IN>
Trip IN>>
Equation A
Equation B
Equation C
Equation D
Equation E
Equation F
GI Interpretation
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Indications and Latches Reset
Password Entered Locally
Setting Group 1 Changed
Setting Group 2 Changed
Setting Group 3 Changed
Setting Group 4 Changed
Auxiliary 1 Timer Expiry
Auxiliary 2 Timer Expiry
Trip Circuit Supervision Trip
Differential Start L1
Differential Start L2
Differential Start L3
Any IN Start
Any Trip
Differential Trip L1
Differential Trip L2
Differential Trip L3
Any Start
Breaker Failure (tBF)
I> Overcurrent Trip
I>> Overcurrent Trip
IN> Overcurrent Trip
IN>> Overcurrent Trip
Page (GC) 7-86 P521/EN GC/B93
IEC 60870-5-103 DETAILED IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Measurands
9 2
1,9
1
1
1
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
ASDU
TYPE
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1
1
1
1
COT FUN INF NO.
192
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
100
101
102
103
104
105
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
192
148
Description
Equation G
Equation H
Inter-Trip 1
Inter-Trip 2
Inter-Trip 3
Inter-Trip 4
Local Inrush Block
Local Phase A Block
Local Phase B Block
Local Phase C Block
Remote Inrush Block
Remotel Phase A Block
Remotel Phase B Block
Remotel Phase C Block
Inrush Block Configure Error
CTS Cdiff Block
Local CTS Fail
Remote CTS Fail
CTS Block
CTS Cdiff Restrain
CTS Inhibited
CTS Conf Fail
Convention Mode
Time Synchronization reset led cortec mismatch
Conf Conflict Comms
Measurands IL1,2,3,VL1,2,3,P,Q,f
Table 39 - Compatible Range Information Numbers in Monitor Direction
GI Interpretation
Measurement = 2.4 x Rated Value
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-87
(GC) 7 Communications IEC 60870-5-103 DETAILED IMPLEMENTATION
5.2 Compatible Range Information Numbers in Control Direction
20
20
20
20
20
ASDU
TYPE
COT
System Functions
7 9
6 8
General Commands
20
20
20
20
20
FUN
255
255
192
192
192
192
192
0
0
INF
NO.
19
23
24
25
26
Description
Init. General Interrogation
Time Synchronization
LED Reset
Characteristic 1 (must be in Edge Mode)
Characteristic 2 (must be in Edge Mode)
Characteristic 3 (must be in Edge Mode)
Characteristic 4 (must be in Edge Mode)
Table 40 - Compatible Range Information Numbers in Control Direction
GI Interpretation
Reset Indications and Latches
Activate Setting Group 1
Activate Setting Group 2
Activate Setting Group 3
Activate Setting Group 4
5.3
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
ASDU
TYPE
COT
Fault Indications
2 1
1
1
1
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1,9
1
1,9
1
1,9
1
1,9
Private Range Information Numbers in Monitor Direction
FUN
INF
NO.
Description GI Interpretation
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
113
114
120
121
122
123
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
94
95
96
97
98
Trip I>>>
Trip I>>>>
Trip IN>>>
Trip IN>>>>
Start I>
Start I>>
Start I>>>
Start I>>>>
Start IN>
Start IN>>
Start IN>>>
Start IN>>>>
Start I<
Trip I<
Start I2>
Trip I2>
Start I2>>
Trip I2>>
Alarm Thermal
Trip Thermal
Broken Conductor
CH1 Direct Intertrip
CH1 Permissive Intertrip Trip
Current Differential Trip
CH1 IDiff Intertrip
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
I>>> Overcurrent Trip
I>>>> Overcurrent Trip
IN>>> Overcurrent Trip
IN>>>> Overcurrent Trip
I> Overcurrent Start
I>> Overcurrent Start
I>>> Overcurrent Start
I>>>> Overcurrent Start
IN> Overcurrent Start
IN>> Overcurrent Start
IN>>> Overcurrent Start
IN>>>> Overcurrent Start
I< Undercurrent Start
I< Undercurrent Trip
I2> Negative Sequence Start
I2> Negative Sequence Trip
I2>> Negative Sequence Start
I2>> Negative Sequence Trip
Thermal Overload Alarm
Thermal Overload Trip
Broken Conductor Trip
Direct Intertrip Received on CH1
Permissive Intertrip Trip from CH1
Current Diff Trip
Current Diff Intertrip RX on CH1
Page (GC) 7-88 P521/EN GC/B93
IEC 60870-5-103 DETAILED IMPLEMENTATION (GC) 7 Communications
1
1
1
ASDU
TYPE
COT
2 1,9
Relay Indications
1,9
1,9
12,20,21
1
1
1
1
1 12,20,21
Logical Statuses
1
1
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1
1
1
1 1,9
Alarm Indications
1
1
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
1,9
FUN
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
194
INF
NO.
124
140
141
142
143
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
161
162
163
164
165
176
190
191
192
193
195
196
197
198
Description
CH1 Permissive Intertrip Start *
CB Closed
CB Open
Remote CB Trip
Remote CB Close
Logic Input 1
Logic Input 2
Logic Input 3
Logic Input 4
Logic Input 5
Relay Contact 0
Relay Contact 1
Relay Contact 2
Relay Contact 3
Relay Contact 4
Relay Contact 5
Relay Contact 6
Relay Contact 7
Relay Contact 8
IDiff CH1 Comms Alarm
IDiff Comms Failure
IDiff Protection Failure
Backup Protection Active
Output Contacts Disabled
Loopback Mode Selected
IDiff Protection Disabled
CB Status DBI
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
GI
Table 41 - Private Range Information Numbers in Monitor Direction
Interpretation
Permissive Intertrip Start from CH1
CB Change of State - Closed State
CB Change of State - Open State
Remote CB Trip Acknowledged
Remote CB Close Acknowledged
Change of Logic Input 1 State
Change of Logic Input 2 State
Change of Logic Input 3 State
Change of Logic Input 4 State
Change of Logic Input 5 State
Change of Trip Relay State
Change of Relay Output 1 State
Change of Relay Output 2 State
Change of Relay Output 3 State
Change of Watchdog Relay State
Change of Relay Output 5 State
Change of Relay Output 6 State
Change of Relay Output 7 State
Change of Relay Output 8 State
CH1 Protection Comms Alarm
Total Protection Comms Failure
Current Diff Protection Failure
Overcurrent Backup Protection Active
Commissioning Mode
Commissioning Mode
Current Diff Protection Disabled
CB Fail
5.4 Private Range Information Numbers in Control Direction
ASDU
TYPE
COT
General Commands
20
20
20
20
FUN
194
194
INF
NO.
142
143
Description
Remote CB Trip
Remote CB Close
GI
Table 42 - Private Range Information Numbers in Control Direction
Interpretation
Perform a Remote CB Trip
Perform a Remote CB Close
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-89
(GC) 7 Communications
6
6.1
6.2
DNP3.0 INTRODUCTION
DNP3.0 INTRODUCTION
Purpose of this Document
The purpose of this document is to describe the specific implementation of the Distributed
Network Protocol (DNP) 3.0 within P521 MiCOM relay.
P521 uses the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library Version
2.18.
This document, in conjunction with the DNP 3.0 Basic 4 Document Set, and the DNP
Subset Definitions Document, provides complete information on how to communicate with P521 via the DNP 3.0 protocol.
This implementation of DNP 3.0 is fully compliant with DNP 3.0 Subset Definition Level 2, contains many Subset Level 3 features, and contains some functionality even beyond
Subset Level 3.
DNP V3.00 Device Profile
•
•
provides a “Device Profile Document” in the standard format defined in the DNP
3.0 Subset Definitions Document. While it is referred to in the DNP 3.0 Subset
Definitions as a “Document,” it is only a component of a total interoperability guide. This table, in combination with the following should provide a complete interoperability/configuration guide for P521:
•
The Implementation Table provided in Section 6.3 - Implementation Table
The Point List Tables provided in Section 6.4 - Point List (beginning on page 96).
And a description of configuration methods and user-interface.
Page (GC) 7-90 P521/EN GC/B93
DNP3.0
INTRODUCTION (GC) 7 Communications
DNP 3.0
Device Profile Document
(Also see section 6.3 - Implementation Table - beginning on page 93).
Vendor Name: Schneider Electric
Device Name:
SERIAL 20 Platform using the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave
Source Code Library, Version 2.18.
Highest DNP Level Supported:
For Requests:
For Responses:
Level 2
Level 2
Device Function:
✓
Master
Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the highest DNP levels supported (the complete list is described in the DNP 3.0 Implementation Table):
For static (non-change event) object requests, request qualifier codes 00 and 01 (start-stop), 07 and 08 (limited quantity), and 17 and 28 (index) are supported in addition to the request qualifier code 06 (no range (all points). Static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08 will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28.
For change-event object requests, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded 16-bit and 32-bit analog change events with time may be requested. The read function code for Object 50 (time and date) variation 1 is supported
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets):
Transmitted: 292
Received: 292
Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets)
Transmitted: 2048
Received: 2048
Maximum Data Link Retries:
✓
✓
None
Fixed at 2
Configurable
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
✓
Never
Always
Sometimes
Configurable
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
✓
✓
Never
Always
When reporting event data
When sending multi-fragment responses
Sometimes
Configurable
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data Link Confirm:
Complete Appl. Fragment:
Application Confirm:
Complete Appl. Response:
Others:
✓
✓
None
None
✓
None
✓
None
Maximum Application Layer Retries:
✓
None
Configurable
Fixed at 100ms
Fixed at ___
Fixed at 1s ___
Fixed at ___
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Binary input change scanning period: 5ms
Analogue input change scanning period: 1s
Sends/Executes Control Operations:
Write Binary Outputs:
Select/Operate:
✓
Direct Operate:
Direct Operate
– No Ack:
Never
Never
Never
Never
✓
✓
✓
Always
Always
Always
Always
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-91
(GC) 7 Communications DNP3.0 INTRODUCTION
DNP 3.0
Device Profile Document
(Also see section 6.3 - Implementation Table - beginning on page 93).
Count > 1
Pulse On/NUL/Trip/Close
Pulse Off/NUL/Trip/Close
Latch On/NUL
Latch Off/NUL
✓
✓
✓
Never
Never
Never
Never
Never
✓
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
Default Counter Object/Variation:
✓
✓
No counters reported
Configurable
Default object:
Sends multi-fragment responses:
✓
Yes
No
20
Default variation: 5
Point-by-point list attached
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Queue
Clear Queue
✓
✓
Never
Never
Reports Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation requested:
✓
✓
Never
Only time-tagged
Only non-time-tagged
Configurable
Sends Unsolicited Responses:
✓
Never
Configurable
Certain objects only
Sometimes
Enable/Disable unsolicited functions codes supported
Always
Always
Sometimes
Sometimes
Configurable
Configurable
Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation requested:
✓
✓
Never
Binary input change with time
Binary input change with relative time
Configurable
Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
✓
Never
When device restarts
When status flags changes
No other options are permitted
Counters Roll Over at:
✓
✓
✓
No counters reported
Configurable
16 bits
32 bits
Other value: _____
Point-by-point list attached
Table 43 - Device Profile Document
Page (GC) 7-92 P521/EN GC/B93
DNP3.0
INTRODUCTION (GC) 7 Communications
6.3 Implementation Table
The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported by the P521 in both request and response messages.
In the table below the text shaded as: indicates Subset Level 3 functionality
Subset Level 3
(beyond Subset Level 2), and text shaded as: indicates functionality beyond Subset Level 3.
1
1
1
2
2
2
Object
Number
10
10
12
20
20
20
20
20
21
0
1
(default - see
Note 1)
2
0
1
Object
Variation
Number
Description
Binary Input (Variation 0 is used to request default variation)
Binary Input
Binary Input with status
Binary Input Change (Variation
0 is used to request default variation)
1
Binary Input Change without
Time
1
1
1
1
(read)
(read)
(read)
Request
Function Codes
(Dec)
Qualifier Codes
00, 01
06
07, 08
17, 28
00, 01
06
07, 08
17, 28
00, 01
06
07, 08
17, 28
(Hex)
(start-stop)
(no range, or all) limited qty)
(index)
(start-stop)
(no range, or all) limited qty)
(index)
(start-stop)
(no range, or all) limited qty)
(index)
(read)
(read)
06
07, 08
06
07, 08
(no range, or all)
(limited qty)
(no range, or all)
(limited qty)
2
(default - see Note 1)
Binary Input Change with Time 1 (read)
06
07, 08
(no range, or all)
(limited qty)
0
2
(default - see Note 1)
1
0
1
2
5
(default - see Note 1)
6
Binary Output Status (Variation
0 is used to request default variation)
1
Binary Output Status 1
Control Relay Output Block
Binary Counter (Variation 0 is used to request default variation)
32-Bit Binary Counter with Flag
1
7
8
9
10
16-Bit Binary Counter with Flag
1
7
8
9
10
32-Bit Binary Counter without
Flag
16-Bit Binary Counter without
Flag
3
4
5
6
1
7
8
9
10
1
7
8
9
10
1
7
8
9
10
(read)
(read)
(select)
(operate)
(direct op)
(dir. op, no ack)
(read)
(freeze)
(freeze no ack)
(freeze clear)
(frz. cl. no ack)
(read)
(freeze)
(freeze no ack)
(freeze clear)
(frz. cl. no ack)
(read)
(freeze)
(freeze no ack)
(freeze clear)
(frz. cl. no ack)
(read)
(freeze)
(freeze no ack)
(freeze clear)
(frz. cl. no ack)
(read)
(freeze)
(freeze no ack)
(freeze clear)
(frz. cl. no ack)
00, 01
06
07, 08
17, 28
00, 01
06
07, 08
17, 28
00, 01
06
07, 08
17, 28
00, 01
06
07, 08
17, 28
00, 01
06
07, 08
17, 28
00, 01
06
07, 08
17, 28
00, 01
06
07, 08
17, 28
00, 01
06
07, 08
17, 28
(start-stop)
(no range, or all) limited qty)
(index)
(start-stop)
(no range, or all) limited qty)
(index)
(start-stop)
(limited qty)
(index)
(start-stop)
(no range, or all) limited qty)
(index)
(start-stop)
(no range, or all) limited qty)
(index)
(start-stop)
(no range, or all) limited qty)
(index)
(start-stop)
(no range, or all) limited qty)
(index)
(start-stop)
(no range, or all) limited qty)
(index)
0
Frozen Counter (Variation 0 is used to request default variation)
1 (read)
00, 01
06
07, 08
17, 28
(start-stop)
(no range, or all) limited qty)
(index)
Subset Level 3
Response
Function
Codes (Dec)
Qualifier Codes
(Hex)
129 response
129 response
129 response
129 response
129 response
129 response
129 response
129 response
129 response
129 response
00, 01
17, 28
00, 01
17, 28
17, 28
17, 28
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index - see Note 2)
(start-stop)
(index - see Note 2)
(index)
(index)
(start-stop)
(index - see Note 2) echo of request
00, 01
17, 28
00, 01
17, 28
00, 01
17, 28
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index - see
Note 2)
(start-stop)
(index - see Note 2)
(start-stop)
(index - see Note 2)
(start-stop)
(index - see Note 2)
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-93
(GC) 7 Communications DNP3.0 INTRODUCTION
60
60
60
Object
Number
21
21
21
21
30
30
30
30
30
32
32
32
32
32
50
50
1
2
9
(default - see Note 1)
0
1
(default - see Note 1)
2
(default - see Note 1)
3
4
Object
Variation
Number
10
Description
32-Bit Frozen Counter with
Flag
16-Bit Frozen Counter with
Flag
16-Bit Frozen Counter without
Flag
1
Analog Input (Variation 0 is used to request default variation)
32-Bit Analog Input
16-Bit Analog Input
32-Bit Analog Input without
Flag
16-Bit Analog Input without
Flag
1
1
32-Bit Frozen Counter without
Flag
1
1
1
1
1
1
(read)
(read)
(read)
(read)
(read)
(read)
(read)
(read)
(read)
Request
Function Codes
(Dec)
Qualifier Codes
(start-stop)
(no range, or all) limited qty)
(index)
(start-stop)
(no range, or all) limited qty)
(index)
(start-stop)
(no range, or all) limited qty)
(index)
(start-stop)
(no range, or all) limited qty)
(index)
(start-stop)
(no range, or all) limited qty)
(index)
(start-stop)
(no range, or all) limited qty)
(index)
(start-stop)
(no range, or all) limited qty)
(index)
(start-stop)
(no range, or all) limited qty)
(index)
(start-stop)
(no range, or all) limited qty)
(index)
00, 01
06
07, 08
17, 28
00, 01
06
07, 08
17, 28
00, 01
06
07, 08
17, 28
00, 01
06
07, 08
17, 28
00, 01
06
07, 08
17, 28
00, 01
06
07, 08
17, 28
00, 01
06
07, 08
17, 28
00, 01
06
07, 08
17, 28
00, 01
06
07, 08
17, 28
(Hex)
0
1
Analog Change Event
(Variation 0 is used to request default variation)
32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time
1
1
(read)
(read)
06
07, 08
06
07, 08
(no range, or all)
(limited qty)
(no range, or all)
(limited qty)
2
(default - see Note 1)
16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time
1 (read)
06
07, 08
(no range, or all)
(limited qty)
3
4
0
1
(default - see Note 1)
32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time
16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time
Time and Date
Time and Date
1
1
1
1
2
(read)
(read)
(read)
(read)
(write)
06
07, 08
06
07, 08
00, 01
06
07, 08
17, 28
00, 01
06
07
08
17, 28
(no range, or all)
(limited qty)
(no range, or all)
(limited qty)
(start-stop)
(no range, or all) limited qty)
(index)
(start-stop)
(no range, or all)
(limited qty = 1)
(limited qty)
(index)
52 2 Time Delay Fine
60
60
80
0
1
2
3
4
1
Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data
Class 0 Data
Class 1 Data
Class 2 Data
Class 3 Data
Internal Indications
No Object
(function code only)
No Object
(function code only)
1
1
1
1
1
2
13
14
(read)
(read)
(read)
(read)
(read)
(write)
(cold restart)
(warm restart)
06
06
06
07, 08
06
07, 08
06
07, 08
00
(no range, or all)
(no range, or all)
(no range, or all)
(limited qty)
(no range, or all)
(limited qty)
(no range, or all)
(limited qty)
(start
–stop)
(index must = 7)
Response
Function
Codes (Dec)
Qualifier Codes
(Hex)
129 response
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index - see Note 2)
129 response
129 response
129 response
00, 01
17, 28
00, 01
17, 28
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index - see Note 2)
(start-stop)
(index - see
Note 2)
(start-stop)
(index - see Note 2)
129 response
129 response
129 response
129 response
129 response
129 response
129 response
129 response
129 response
129 response
129
129
129 response response response
129 response
129 response
00, 01
17, 28
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index - see Note 2)
(start-stop)
(index - see Note 2)
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index - see Note 2)
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index - see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
17, 28
00, 01
17, 28
(index)
(start-stop)
(index - see Note 2)
00, 01
17, 28
07
17, 28
17, 28
17, 28
17, 28
(index)
(index)
(start-stop)
(index - see Note 2)
(limited qty)
(qty = 1)
(index)
(index)
Page (GC) 7-94 P521/EN GC/B93
DNP3.0
INTRODUCTION (GC) 7 Communications
Object
Number
Object
Variation
Number
Description
No Object
(function code only)
Note 1
Request
Function Codes
(Dec)
23 (delay meas.)
Qualifier Codes
(Hex)
Response
Function
Codes (Dec)
Qualifier Codes
(Hex)
A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans.
Note 2 For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or
08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. (For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.)
Note 3 For P521, a cold restart is implemented as a warm restart
– the executable is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
Table 44 - Implementation Table
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-95
(GC) 7 Communications DNP3.0 INTRODUCTION
6.4 Point List
The tables in the following sections identify all the individual data points provided by this implementation of DNP 3.0.
6.4.1 Binary Input Points
Every Binary Input Status points are included in class 0 polls, because they are included in one of classes 1, 2 or 3.
24
25
26
27
20
21
22
23
28
14
15
16
17
18
19
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
3
4
5
6
0
1
2
Binary Input Points
Static (Steady-State) Object Number:
Change Event Object Number:
Request Function Codes supported:
1
2
1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary input change with time)
P521 Point Index Name/Description
Latched Alarm
(See Note 1)
Initial
Value
Inputs and Outputs
Output Relay 1 (Trip)
Output Relay 2
Output Relay 3
Output Relay 4
Output Relay 0 (Watchdog)
Output Relay 5
Output Relay 6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Output Relay 7
Output Relay 8
Logic Input 1
Logic Input 2
Logic Input 3
Logic Input 4
Logic Input 5
Protection
Current Differential Start
Current Differential Trip
Current Differential Intertrip Received
Permissive Intertrip Start
Permissive Intertrip Trip
Direct Intertrip Received
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Phase Overcurrent 1st Stage Start (I>)
Phase Overcurrent 1st Stage Trip (tI>)
Phase Overcurrent 2nd Stage Start (I>>)
Phase Overcurrent 2nd Stage Trip (tI>>)
Phase Overcurrent 3rd Stage Start (I>>>)
Phase Overcurrent 3rd Stage Trip (tI>>>)
Phase Overcurrent 4th Stage Start (I>>>>)
Phase Overcurrent 4th Stage Trip (tI>>>>)
Earth Overcurrent 1st Stage Start (Ie>)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
Change Event Class
(1, 2, 3, or none)
Page (GC) 7-96 P521/EN GC/B93
DNP3.0
INTRODUCTION (GC) 7 Communications
60
61
62
63
57
58
59
64
54
55
56
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
42
43
44
38
39
40
41
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Binary Input Points
Static (Steady-State) Object Number:
Change Event Object Number:
1
2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary input change with time)
P521 Point Index Name/Description
Latched Alarm
(See Note 1)
Initial
Value
29
30
Earth Overcurrent 1st Stage Trip (tIe>)
Earth Overcurrent 2nd Stage Start (Ie>>)
0
0
Earth Overcurrent 2nd Stage Trip (tIe>>)
Earth Overcurrent 3rd Stage Start (Ie>>>)
Earth Overcurrent 3rd Stage Trip (tIe>>>)
Earth Overcurrent 4th Stage Start (Ie>>>>)
Earth Overcurrent 4th Stage Trip (tIe>>>>)
Undercurrent Start (I<)
Undercurrent Trip (tI<)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
52
Negative Sequence 1st Stage Start (I2>)
Negative Sequence 1st Stage Trip (tI2>)
Negative Sequence 2nd Stage Start (I2>>)
Negative Sequence 2nd Stage Trip (tI2>>)
Thermal Start
Thermal Trip
Broken Conductor
Non-Protection Functions
Auxiliary Timer 1 (tAux1)
Auxiliary Timer 2 (tAux2)
Logic Select Timer Enabled (tSEL1)
Logic Select Timer Enabled (tSEL2)
Blocking Logic 1 Enabled
Blocking Logic 2 Enabled
Cold Load Pick-Up Enabled
Unlatch Contacts (inc. Trip Contact) Initiated via
Logic Input
Main Protection Monitoring
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Protection Communications CH1 Status
Protection Communications Status
Differential Protection Status
Differential Protection Disabled
Backup Protection Enabled
Circuit Breaker Monitoring
CB Failure
CB Open Time Threshold Exceeded
CB Close Time Threshold Exceeded
Number of CB Operations Threshold Exceeded
Summation Amps Threshold Exceeded (SA2n)
Trip Circuit Supervision
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Change Event Class
(1, 2, 3, or none)
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-97
(GC) 7 Communications DNP3.0 INTRODUCTION
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
87
88
89
90
83
84
85
86
77
78
79
80
81
82
70
71
72
73
74
75
67
68
69
Binary Input Points
Static (Steady-State) Object Number:
Change Event Object Number:
1
2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary input change with time)
P521 Point Index Name/Description
Latched Alarm
(See Note 1)
Initial
Value
65
66
52a State
52b State
0
0
Reserved
CB Fail Timer State (tBF)
CB Status DBI
Remote Commands
Unlatch Contacts (inc. Trip Relay) Command
Remote CB Trip Command
Remote CB Close Command
CB Trip Delay Timer State
CB Close Delay Timer State
Thermal State Reset Command
Hardware Status Monitoring
Major Hardware Alarm Present
Minor Hardware Alarm Present
Latched Alarms
Current Differential Trip
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
98
99
100
101
Current Differential Intertrip Received
Permissive Intertrip Trip
Direct Intertrip Received
Phase Overcurrent 1st Stage Trip (tI>)
Phase Overcurrent 2nd Stage Trip (tI>>)
Phase Overcurrent 3rd Stage Trip (tI>>>)
Phase Overcurrent 4th Stage Trip (tI>>>>)
Earth Overcurrent 1st Stage Trip (tIe>)
Earth Overcurrent 2nd Stage Trip (tIe>>)
Earth Overcurrent 3rd Stage Trip (tIe>>>)
Earth Overcurrent 4th Stage Trip (tIe>>>>)
Undercurrent Trip (tI<)
Negative Sequence 1st Stage Trip (tI2>)
Negative Sequence 2nd Stage Trip (tI2>>)
Thermal Start
Thermal Trip
Auxiliary Timer 1 (tAux1)
Auxiliary Timer 2 (tAux2)
Broken Conductor
Protection Communications CH1 Status
Differential Protection Status
Differential Protection Disabled
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Change Event Class
(1, 2, 3, or none)
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Page (GC) 7-98 P521/EN GC/B93
DNP3.0
INTRODUCTION (GC) 7 Communications
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
Binary Input Points
Static (Steady-State) Object Number:
Change Event Object Number:
1
2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary input change with time)
P521 Point Index Name/Description
Latched Alarm
(See Note 1)
Initial
Value
102
103
CB Failure
CB Open Time Threshold Exceeded
*
*
0
0
CB Close Time Threshold Exceeded *
Number of CB Operations Threshold Exceeded *
Summation Amps Threshold Exceeded (SA2n) *
Trip Circuit Supervision
CB Status DBI
Equation A
Equation B
*
*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Equation C
Equation D
Equation E
Equation F
Equation G
Equation H
Inter-Trip 1
Inter-Trip 2
Inter-Trip 3
Inter-Trip 4
Local Inrush Block
Local Phase A Block
Local Phase B Block
Local Phase C Block
Remote Inrush Block
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Remote Phase A Block
Remote Phase B Block
Remote Phase C Block
Inrush Block Configure Error
Local CTS Fail
Remote CTS Fail
CTS Block
CTS Cdiff Block
CTS Cdiff Restrain
CTS Inhibited
CTS Conf Fail
Equation A Alarm
Equation B Alarm
Equation C Alarm
Equation D Alarm
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
Change Event Class
(1, 2, 3, or none)
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-99
(GC) 7 Communications DNP3.0 INTRODUCTION
Binary Input Points
Static (Steady-State) Object Number:
Change Event Object Number:
1
2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary input change with time)
P521 Point Index Name/Description
Latched Alarm
(See Note 1)
Initial
Value
141
142
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
Note 1
Equation E Alarm
Equation F Alarm
Equation G Alarm
Equation H Alarm
Inrush Block Alarm
Local CTS Fail Alarm
Remote CTS Fail Alarm
CTS Block Alarm
CTS Cdiff Block Alarm
CTS Cdiff Restrain Alarm
CTS Inhibited Alarm
CTS Conf Fail Alarm
Led Reset
Convention Mode
Time Synchronization
Conf Conflict Comms
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
3
3
3
3
Change Event Class
(1, 2, 3, or none)
3
3
Points marked as Latched Alarms are latched on when the condition has occurred and not cleared until the alarms are acknowledged (cleared) via the Remote Communications or Front Panel Interface. Note that if the Alarm is an auto-clear type then the alarm will automatically be removed when the condition is cleared (Controlled via the Auto Alarm acknowledgement Setting in the Configuration Menu). Points not marked as Latched Alarms shall follow the state of the relevant condition (real-time value).
Table 45 - Binary Input Points
Page (GC) 7-100 P521/EN GC/B93
DNP3.0
INTRODUCTION (GC) 7 Communications
6.4.2 Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Block
The following table lists both the Binary Output Status Points (Object 10) and the Control
Relay Output Block (Object 12). Binary Output Status Points are not included in class 0 polls.
Binary Output Status Points
Object Number:
Request Function Code supported:
Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested:
Control Relay Output Blocks (CROB)
Object Number:
Request Function Code supported:
P521 Point Index
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
1 (read)
2 (Binary Output Status)
Reset All Latched Contacts (inc Trip
Contact)
Remote CB Trip Command
Remote CB Close Command
Reset Average and Max
Measurements
Reset Protection Communications
Statistics
Name/Description
Acknowledge First Alarm Only
Acknowledge All Alarms
Cancel CB Trip
Cancel CB Close
Setting Group Change
(See Note 2)
Thermal State Reset
0
0
0
12
5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, Nack)
Initial Value
Include in Class
0 Poll
Supported CROB Fields
Yes
Yes
Yes
Pulse On/Trip/Close
/Unpaired
Pulse On/Trip/Close
/Unpaired
Pulse On/Trip/Close
/Unpaired
0
0
0
0
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Pulse On/Trip/Unpaired
Pulse On/Close/Unpaired
Pulse On/Trip/Close
/Unpaired
Pulse On/Trip/Close
/Unpaired
0
0
0
Reset Rolling Average Measurements 0
Reset Rolling Max Measurements
Selection of Group 1
Selection of Group 2
Selection of Group 3
Selection of Group 4
0
0
0
0
0
0
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Pulse On/Trip/Close
/Unpaired
Pulse On/Trip/Close
/Unpaired
Pulse On/Trip/Close
/Unpaired
Pulse On/Trip/Close
/Unpaired
Pulse On/Trip/Close
/Unpaired
Pulse On/Trip/Close
/Unpaired
Pulse On/Trip/Close
/Unpaired
Pulse On/Trip/Close
/Unpaired
Pulse On/Trip/Close
/Unpaired
Pulse On/Trip/Close
/Unpaired
Note 2 Edge Mode must be selected in the Change Input Group Menu Setting.
Table 46 - Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Block
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-101
(GC) 7 Communications DNP3.0 INTRODUCTION
6.4.3 Counters
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object
21). When a freeze function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
Binary Counters and Frozen Counters are not included in class 0 polls.
17
18
19
20
11
12
13
14
15
16
6
7
8
9
10
3
4
5
0
1
2
Binary Counters
Static (Steady State) Object Number:
Change Event Object Number:
Request Function Codes Supported:
Static Variation reported when Variation 0 requested:
Variation reported when Variation 0 requested:
20
Not Supported
1 (Read), 7 (Freeze), 8 (Freeze NoAck)
9 (Freeze and Clear), 10 (Freeze and Clear, NoAck)
5 (32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag) Change Event
None - Not Supported
Frozen Counters
Static (Steady State) Object Number:
Change Event Object Number:
P521 Point
Index
Name/Description
Request Function Codes Supported:
Static Variation reported when Variation 0 requested:
Change Event Variation reported when Variation 0 requested:
Clear Group
Note 3
21
Not Supported
1 (Read)
9 (32-Bit Frozen Binary without Flag)
None - Not Supported
Scaling See
Note 4
Valid Range Units
Max and Average Measurements
Max IA RMS
Max IB RMS
Max IC RMS
Average IA RMS
Average IB RMS
Average IC RMS
1
1
1
1
1
1 x In/100 x In/100 x In/100 x In/100 x In/100 x In/100
0 … 400000In
0 … 400000In
0 … 400000In
0 … 400000In
0 … 400000In
0 … 400000In
A
A
A
A
A
A
CB Monitoring Measurements
Number of CB Operations
IA Summation Amps
2
3
IB Summation Amps
IC Summation Amps
3
3
Rolling Average and Max Measurements
IA RMS Rolling Average 4
IB RMS Rolling Average
IC RMS Rolling Average
IA RMS Rolling Max
IB RMS Rolling Max
4
4
5
5
IC RMS Rolling Max 5
Protection Communications Statistics
Number of Valid Messages 6 x 1 x In x In x In x In/100 x In/100 x In/100 x In/100 x In/100 x In/100
0 … 65535
0 … 4294967295In
0 … 4294967295In
0 … 4294967295In
0 … 400000In
0 … 400000In
0 … 400000In
0 … 400000In
0 … 400000In
0 … 400000In
-
An
An
An
A
A
A
A
A
A
21
Number of Error Messages
Number of Errored Seconds
6
6
Number of Severely Errored Seconds 6
CH1 Propagation Delay
Elapsed Time since Last Protection
Comms Reset
6
6 x 1 x 1 x 1 x 1 x 1 x 1
0 … 4294967295
0
… 4294967295
0 … 4294967295
0 … 4294967295
0 … 200000
0 … 4294967295
-
-
-
-
s s
Page (GC) 7-102 P521/EN GC/B93
DNP3.0
INTRODUCTION (GC) 7 Communications
Note 3
Note 4
A Freeze & Clear Command should only be requested on 1 point within each Group in any 1 request. For a Freeze & Clear All, it is recommended that a List Of Points is used were the list specifies 1 Point in each group.
In' related Counter Values are not Per Unit Values and include the CT Ratio
Factor. The Per Unit Value can be determined by:
PU Value = -Value Output from Slave CT
Ratio Factor
Table 47 - Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21)
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-103
(GC) 7 Communications DNP3.0 INTRODUCTION
6.4.4 Analog Inputs
The following table lists Analog Inputs (Object 30). It is important to note that 16-bit and
32-bit variations of Analog Inputs, Analog Output Control Blocks, and Analog Output
Statuses are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers. Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the maximum positive representation is 32767. For each point, the “Scaling and Units” column indicates the value of a transmitted 32767.
This also implies the value of a transmitted –32767. The entry in the column does not imply a valid value for the point.
Always indicating the representation of 32767 in the tables below is a consistent method for representing scale, applicable to all scaling possibilities.
The “Default Deadband,” and the “Default Change Event Assigned Class” columns are used to represent the absolute amount by which the point must change before an analog change event will be generated, and once generated in which class poll (1, 2, 3) will the change event be reported. Only the default values for these columns are documented here because the values may change in operation due to either local (user-interface) or remote (through DNP) control.
Every Analog Inputs points are included in class 0 polls, because they are included in one of classes 1, 2 or 3.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Analog Inputs
Static (Steady State) Object Number:
Change Event Object Number:
Request Function Codes supported:
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested:
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested:
Change Event Scan Rate:
P521
Point
Index
Name/Description
Scaling see Note 5
Valid Range
30
32
1 (read)
2 (16-Bit Analog Input)
2 (Analog Change Event without Time)
Fixed at 1s
Change Event
Deadband
Change Event
Class (1, 2, 3 or none)
Initial
Value
Active Setting Group
Active Setting Group x 1
Peak (Fundamental) Measurements
IA Modulus
IB Modulus
IC Modulus x In/800 x In/800 x In/800
IN Modulus See Note 6
Negative Sequence (I2) Modulus x In/800
Positive Sequence (I1) Modulus x In/800
RMS Measurements
IA RMS
IB RMS
IC RMS
IN RMS
General Measurements x In/100 x In/100 x In/100 x In/1000
1…4
0 … 40In
0 … 40In
0 … 40In
See Note 6
0 … 40In
0 … 40In
0 … 40In
0 … 40In
0 … 40In
See Note 6
1
0.1In
0.1In
0.1In
See Note 6
0.1In
0.1In
0.1In
0.1In
0.1In
See Note 6
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11 0 … 500 10 3 0
12
13
Thermal State x 1
CB Monitoring Measurements
CB Open Time
CB Close Time x 0.01 x 0.01
0 … 10
0 … 10
01
01
3
3
0
0
14
15
Current Differential Measurements
IA Differential
IB Differential x In/100 x In/100
0 … 40In
0 … 40In
0.1In
0.1In
3
3
0
0 s s
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Units
(None)
%
Page (GC) 7-104 P521/EN GC/B93
DNP3.0
INTRODUCTION (GC) 7 Communications
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Analog Inputs
Static (Steady State) Object Number:
Change Event Object Number:
Request Function Codes supported:
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested:
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested:
Change Event Scan Rate:
27
28
29
30
23
24
25
26
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
P521
Point
Index
Name/Description
IC Differential
IA Remote
IB Remote
IC Remote
IA Bias
IB Bias
IC Bias
IA Local Angle (IA-IB)
IB Local Angle (IB-IC)
IC Local Angle (IC-IA)
IA Differential Angle
IB Differential Angle
IC Differential Angle
Latest Fault Record
Fault Number
Active Setting Group
Scaling see Note 5 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x In/100 x In/100 x In/100 x In/100 x In/100 x In/100 x In/100 x 1 x 1
0 … 40In
0 … 40In
0 … 40In
0 … 40In
0 … 40In
0 … 40In
0 … 40In
180 … 179
180 … 179
180 … 179
180 … 179
180 … 179
-
180 … 179
Valid Range
30
32
1 (read)
2 (16-Bit Analog Input)
2 (Analog Change Event without Time)
Fixed at 1s
Change Event
Deadband
Change Event
Class (1, 2, 3 or none)
5
5
5
5
5
5
0.1In
0.1In
0.1In
0.1In
0.1In
0.1In
0.1In
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Initial
Value
1 … 65535
1 … 4
1 2
Each New Fault 2
0
0
31 Faulted Phase x 1 0 … 8 Each New Fault 2 0
Fault Flags x 1
0 … 19
Fault Magnitude
Fault IA Magnitude
Fault IB Magnitude
Fault IC Magnitude
Fault IN Magnitude
Fault IA Differential Magnitude
Fault IB Differential Magnitude
Fault IC Differential Magnitude
See Note 10 See Note 10 x In/800
0 … 40In x In/800 0 … 40In x In/800 0 … 40In
See Note 6 x In/100 x In/100 x In/100 x In/100
See Note 6
0 … 40In
0 … 40In
0 … 40In
0 … 40In
Fault Max Bias Magnitude
Channel 1 Communications
Status x 1 0 … 1
Each New Fault 2
Each New Fault 2
Each New Fault 2
Each New Fault 2
Each New Fault 2
Each New Fault 2
Each New Fault 2
Each New Fault 2
Each New Fault 2
Each New Fault 2
Each New Fault 2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Units degs degs degs degs degs degs
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
None
None
See Note
7
A
A
A
A
See Note
8
A
A
A
A
A
See Note
9
Note 5 All Analog Input Values are specified as Per Unit Values (i.e. do not consider the CT Ratio Factor).
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-105
(GC) 7 Communications DNP3.0 INTRODUCTION
Analog Inputs
Static (Steady State) Object Number:
Change Event Object Number:
Request Function Codes supported:
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested:
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested:
Change Event Scan Rate:
P521
Point
Index
Name/Description
Scaling see Note 5
Valid Range
30
32
1 (read)
2 (16-Bit Analog Input)
2 (Analog Change Event without Time)
Fixed at 1s
Change Event
Deadband
Change Event
Class (1, 2, 3 or none)
Initial
Value
Note 6 For Normal Earth Fault Sensitivity:
Scaling: x In/800
Valid Range: 0.1 … 40 In
Change Event Deadband: 0.1In
For Sensitive Earth Fault Sensitivity:
Scaling: x In/3277
Valid Range: 0.01 … 8 In
Change Event Deadband: 0.04 In
For Very Sensitive Earth Fault Sensitivity:
Scaling: x In/32700
Valid Range: 0.002 … 1In
Change Event Deadband: 0.005 In
Units
Note 7 4 Phase A B
Note 8
0 None
5 Phase A C
0 Null
5 tI>>>
10 tIe>>>>
15 tI2>
0 Comms OK
1 Phase A
6 Phase B C
2 Phase B
7 Phase A B C
1 Remote Trip 2 Thermal Overload
6 tI>>>>
11 tI<
16 tI2>>
7 tIe>
12 Broken Conductor
17 Idiff
3 tI>
8 tIe>>
13 tAux1
18 Intertrip
1 Comms Failed
3 Phase C
8 Phase N
4 tI>>
9 tIe>>>
14 tAux2
19 TCS Block
Note 9
Note 10
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
Fault Type
(See Note 8)
0 N/A
Fault Magnitude Scaling
N/A
N/A x In/800 x In/800 x In/800 x In/800
See Note 6
See Note 6
See Note 6
See Note 6 x In/800 x In/800
N/A
N/A
Description
N/A
N/A
N/A
Phase Peak (Fundamental) Current
Phase Peak (Fundamental) Current
Phase Peak (Fundamental) Current
Phase Peak (Fundamental) Current
Earth Peak (Fundamental) Current
Earth Peak (Fundamental) Current
Earth Peak (Fundamental) Current
Earth Peak (Fundamental) Current
Phase Peak (Fundamental) Current
Phase Peak (Fundamental) Current
N/A
N/A
Page (GC) 7-106 P521/EN GC/B93
DNP3.0
INTRODUCTION (GC) 7 Communications
Analog Inputs
Static (Steady State) Object Number:
Change Event Object Number:
Request Function Codes supported:
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested:
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested:
Change Event Scan Rate:
P521
Point
Index
Name/Description
Scaling see Note 5
Valid Range
15
16 x In/800 x In/800
30
32
1 (read)
2 (16-Bit Analog Input)
2 (Analog Change Event without Time)
Fixed at 1s
Change Event
Deadband
Change Event
Class (1, 2, 3 or none)
Initial
Value
Units
Negative Sequence Peak (Fundamental) Current
Negative Sequence Peak (Fundamental) Current
17
18
19 x In/100 x In/100
N/A
Differential Current
Differential Current
N/A
Table 48 - Analog Inputs
P521/EN GC/B93 Page (GC) 7-107
(GC) 7 Communications
Notes:
DNP3.0 INTRODUCTION
Page (GC) 7-108 P521/EN GC/B93
MiCOM P521 (CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
P521/EN CM/B93
COMMISSIONING AND
MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 8
Page (CM) 8-1
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
Date:
Software version:
Hardware Suffix:
Connection diagram:
January 2012
13
B
10P52101
MiCOM P521
Page (CM) 8-2 P521/EN CM/B93
Contents (CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
CONTENTS
1 Requirements Prior to Commissioning
2 Setting Familiarisation
3 Equipment Required for Commissioning
4 Product Checks
Current Differential Communications
5 Setting Checks
Apply Application-Specific Settings
Demonstrate Correct Relay Operation
Current Differential Bias Characteristic
Current Differential Operating Time
Backup Phase Overcurrent Protection
6 End to End Tests
Direct Fiber Optic Communications
Direct EIA(RS)485 Communications
Communications using P591 Interface Units
Communications using P592 Interface Units
Communications using P593 Interface Units
Verify Communications between Relays
Communication Checks for Direct Fiber or P59x Connected Relays
Page (CM) 8-
23
10
7
8
9
28
P521/EN CM/B93 Page (CM) 8-3
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance Contents
Communication Checks for Metallic Communications (Direct EIA(RS)485, P595,
EIA(RS)232 and Modem Connected Relays)
7 On-Load Checks
Confirm Current Transformer Wiring
Measure Capacitive Charging Current
Check Consistency of Current Transformer Polarity
8 Final Checks
9 Maintenance
Extracting the Rear Communications Board from the Relay
32
34
35
Page (CM) 8-4 P521/EN CM/B93
Tables (CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
TABLES
Table 1 - Operational range of auxiliary supply Vx.
Table 2 - Rear communications port terminals
Table 3 - Current input connections
Table 4 - P521 Instantaneous operating times
Table 5 - Characteristic operating times for
FIGURES
Figure 1 - Connection for bias characteristic testing
Figure 2 - Application of P520L loopback test box
Figure 3 - Screw locations (front view)
Figure 4 - Screw locations (back view)
Page (CM) 8-
Page (CM) 8-
P521/EN CM/B93 Page (CM) 8-5
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
Notes:
Figures
Page (CM) 8-6 P521/EN CM/B93
REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING
1
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING
The MiCOM P521 relay is fully numerical in its design, implementing all protection and non-protection functions in software. The MiCOM relay employs a high degree of selfchecking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning tests do not need to be as extensive as with non-numerical relays (static or electromechanical).
To commission MiCOM relays it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to the MiCOM relay. It is considered unnecessary to test every function of the relay if the settings have been verified by one of the following methods:
•
Extracting the settings applied to the relay using the appropriate setting software
(preferred method)
•
Via the front panel user interface.
Reminder It is not possible to download a new setting file as long as the programming mode is active (i.e. password entered via key pad).
To confirm that the product is operating correctly once the application-specific settings have been applied a test should be performed on at least one protection element.
Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the customer will be responsible for determining the application-specific settings to be applied to the MiCOM relays and for testing of any scheme logic applied by external wiring.
Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided in chapter P521/EN RS of the
Technical Guide for completion as required.
When P59x interface units are used to convert the optical signal from the P521 relay to an electrical signal for the multiplexer, the P59x units should be commissioned in conjunction with the relay.
Warning Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the Safety and
Technical Data Chapters and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
P521/EN CM/B93 Page (CM) 8-7
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
2
SETTING FAMILIARISATION
SETTING FAMILIARISATION
When commissioning a MiCOM P521 relay for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become familiar with the method by which the settings are applied.
The User Guide contains a detailed description of the menu structure of the P521 relay.
To change any of the settings via the relay key pad the appropriate password must first be entered. When attempting to change a setting the user will be prompted to enter the password if it has not already been entered.
Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as
MiCOM S1 Studio), the menu can be viewed a page at a time to display a full column of data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC software user manual for details. If the software is being used for the first time, allow sufficient time to become familiar with its operation.
Page (CM) 8-8 P521/EN CM/B93
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING
3
3.1
3.2
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING
Minimum Equipment Required
Overcurrent test set with interval timer.
Multimeter with suitable ac current ranges.
Continuity tester (if not included in multimeter)
2 Lengths of 50/125
m fiber optic cable (approximately 1 meter long) terminated at each end with a ST connector
Optical power meter with sensitivity 0 to –50 dBm (to measure the optical signal level)
Note Modern test equipment may contain many of the above features in one unit.
Optional Equipment
Multi-finger test plug type P992 (if test block type P991 installed) or MMLB (if using
MMLG blocks)
An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a dc output not exceeding 500 V (for insulation resistance testing when required).
A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the front or rear communication ports to be tested and will also save considerable time during commissioning).
KITZ K-Bus to EIA(RS)232 protocol converter.
EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 converter (if EIA(RS)485 MODBUS rear port is being tested).
A printer (for printing a setting record from the portable PC).
P521/EN CM/B93 Page (CM) 8-9
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
4
4.1
4.1.1
PRODUCT CHECKS
PRODUCT CHECKS
Product checks cover all aspects of the relay and should be checked to ensure that it has not been physically damaged prior to commissioning is functioning correctly and all input quantity measurements are within the stated tolerances.
If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow their restoration later. This could be done by:
•
Obtaining a setting file on a diskette from the customer (this requires a portable PC with appropriate setting software for transferring the settings from the PC to the relay)
•
Extracting the settings from the relay itself (this again requires a portable PC with appropriate setting software)
•
Manually creating a setting record. This could be done using a copy of the setting record, located in section P521/EN RS , to record the settings as the relay’s menu is sequentially stepped through via the front panel user interface.
With the Relay De-Energized
The following group of tests should be carried out without the auxiliary supply being applied to the relay and with the trip circuit isolated.
Caution The current transformer connections must be isolated from the relay for these checks. If a P991 test block is provided the required isolation can easily be achieved by inserting test plug type P992, which effectively open-circuits all wiring routed through the test block.
Before inserting the test plug, reference should be made to the scheme (wiring) diagram to ensure that this will not potentially cause damage or a safety hazard. For example, the test block may be associated with protection current transformer circuits. It is essential that the sockets in the test plug which correspond to the current transformer secondary windings are linked before the test plug is inserted into the test block.
DANGER Never open the secondary circuit of a current transformer since the high voltage produced may be lethal and could damage insulation.
If a test block is not provided the line current transformers should be short-circuited and disconnected from the relay terminals. Where means of isolating the auxiliary supply and trip circuit (e.g. isolation links, fuses, MCB, etc.) are provided, these should be used. If this is not possible, the wiring to these circuits will have to be disconnected and the exposed ends suitably terminated to prevent them from being a safety hazard.
Visual Inspection
Carefully examine the relay to see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.
The rating information given under the top access cover on the front of the relay should be checked to ensure it is correct for the particular installation.
Page (CM) 8-10 P521/EN CM/B93
PRODUCT CHECKS
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
Visually check that the current transformer shorting switches, fitted on the terminal block inside the rear of the case, are wired into the correct circuit. The shorting switches are between terminals 41 and 42, 43 and 44, 45 and 46, 47 and 48, 49 and 50, 51 and 52, 53 and 54, 55 and 56. Ensure that while the relay module is withdrawn the shorting switches are closed by checking with a continuity tester.
Ensure that the case earthing connections are used to connect the relay to a local earth bar using an adequate conductor. Where there is more than one relay in a tier, it is recommended that a copper bar should be fitted connecting the earth terminals of each case in the same tier together. However, as long as an adequate earth connection is made between relays, the use of a copper earth bar is not essential.
Insulation
Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be done and they have not been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless insulation tester at a dc voltage not exceeding 500 V. Terminals of the same circuits should be temporarily connected together.
•
•
The main groups of relay terminals are:
•
Current transformer circuits
Auxiliary voltage supply
Opto-isolated control inputs
•
•
Relay contacts
EIA(RS)485 communication port
•
Case earth
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100 M
at 500 V
On completion of the insulation resistance tests ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected to the relay.
External Wiring
Check that the external wiring is correct to the relay connection diagram (supplied in the
Connection Diagrams chapter P521/EN CO) or scheme diagram.
If a P991 test block is provided the connections should be checked against the scheme
(wiring) diagram. It is recommended that the supply connections are to the live side of the test block [colored orange with the odd numbered terminals (1, 3, 5, 7 etc.). The auxiliary supply is normally routed via terminals 13 (supply positive) and 15 (supply negative), with terminals 14 and 16 connected to the relay’s positive and negative auxiliary supply terminals respectively. However, check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the customer’s normal practice.
Watchdog Contact
If not already done to perform the insulation tests, isolate the trip contacts and re-insert the relay module. Using a continuity tester, check that the watchdog contact (terminals
35 and 36) is closed when the relay is de-energized and open when the relay is energized.
P521/EN CM/B93 Page (CM) 8-11
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
4.1.5
PRODUCT CHECKS
Auxiliary Supply
The P521 relay can be operated from either a dc only or an ac/dc auxiliary supply depending on the relay’s nominal supply rating. The incoming voltage must be within the
operating range specified in Table 1.
Without energizing the relay measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within the operating range.
Nominal supply rating DC [AC rms]
48
– 250 Vdc
48
– 240 Vac
24 – 250 Vdc 48 – 240 Vac
DC Operating Range AC Operating Range
38.4 - 300 Vdc 38.4 - 264 Vac
19.2 - 300 Vdc 38.4 - 264 Vac
Note
Note
The P521 relay can withstand an ac ripple of up to 12% of the upper rated voltage on the dc auxiliary supply.
Nominal supply rating DC [AC rms] 24
– 60 V/ DC Operating Range 19.2 -
76 V can not be provided.
Table 1 - Operational range of auxiliary supply Vx.
Caution Do not energize the relay or interface unit using the battery charger with the battery disconnected as this can irreparably damage the relay’s power supply circuitry.
Caution Energize the relay only if the auxiliary supply is within the specified operating ranges. If a test block is provided, it may be necessary to link across the front of the test plug to connect the auxiliary supply to the relay.
Page (CM) 8-12 P521/EN CM/B93
PRODUCT CHECKS
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
With the Relay Energized
The following group of tests verify that the relay hardware and software is functioning correctly and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay and, if installed, the P590 interface units.
Caution The current transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay for these checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.
Date and Time
Before setting the date and time ensure that the factory-fitted battery isolation strip, that prevents battery drain during transportation and storage, has been removed. With the lower access cover open presence of the battery isolation strip can be checked by a red tab protruding from the positive side of the battery compartment. Lightly press on the battery to prevent it from falling out of the battery compartment and pull the red tab to remove the isolation strip.
Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using cells “Date” and “Time” in the PARAMETERS menu.
In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted in the compartment behind the bottom access cover, the time and date will be maintained. Therefore when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct and not need to be set again.
To test this remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30 seconds. On re-energization the date and time should be correct.
Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
On power up the green LED should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that the relay is healthy. The relay has non-volatile memory which remembers the state (on or off) of the alarm and trip LEDs when the relay was last energized from an auxiliary supply. Therefore these indicators may also illuminate when the auxiliary supply is applied.
The 8 LED s, on the front of the relay, can be tested selecting “Yes” in the “LED Test” cell
(AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning). The LEDs should remain illuminated for approximately 5 seconds after the LED test is initiated.
Input Opto-Isolators
This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs on the relay are functioning correctly.
The P521 relay has a total of 5 opto-isolated inputs.
The opto-isolated inputs should be energized one at a time, see external connection diagrams (chapter, P521/EN CO) for terminal numbers. Ensuring correct polarity, connect the auxiliary supply voltage to the appropriate terminals for the input being tested.
The status of each optoisolated input can be viewed using the “Input Status” cell, in the
OP PARAMETERS menu, a ‘1’ indicating an energized input and a ‘0’ indicating a deenergized input. When each opto-isolated input is energized one of the characters on the bottom line of the display will change to indicate the new state of the inputs.
P521/EN CM/B93 Page (CM) 8-13
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.5.1
PRODUCT CHECKS
Output Relays
This test checks that all the output relays are functioning correctly. The P521 relay has a total of 8 output relays (not including the watchdog).
Ensure that the commissioning menu is enabled (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning).
The output relays to be tested can be selected in the “Trip Test” cell, 0 = do not close relay and 1 = close relay. Once the output relays have been selected, they can be operated by selecting “yes” in the “Contact Test” cell. The contacts will remain closed until “No” is selected once again.
Note The contact test will be disabled if “Yes” is selected in the “Disable Relays” cell (also in COMMISSIONING menu).
The output relays should be energized one at a time and the appropriate terminals should be checked with a continuity tester. Operation will be confirmed by the continuity tester operating for a normally open contact and ceasing to operate for a normally closed contact.
Reset the output relays by selecting “No” in the Contact Test” cell.
Note Ensure that thermal ratings of anything connected to the output relays during the contact test procedure are not exceeded by the associated output relay being operated for too long. It is therefore advised that the time between application and removal of contact test is kept to the minimum.
Rear Communications Port
This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remote location and will vary depending on the communications standard being adopted.
It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the relay to the remote location, just the relay’s rear communications port and any protocol converter necessary.
Note The rear communications port must be enabled before access can commence. The port is enabled by selecting “Yes” in the “CTRL Comms” cell (COMMUNICATIONS menu).
P521 terminal EIA(RS)485 connection
Screen
+ve
–ve
29
31
32
Table 2 - Rear communications port terminals
MODBUS Communications
Connect a portable PC running the appropriate MODBUS Master Station software to the relay’s EIA(RS)485 port via an EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 interface converter. The
terminal numbers for the relay’s EIA(RS)485 port are given in Table 2.
Ensure that the relay address, baud rate, stop bits and parity settings in the application software are set the same as those in cells “Relay Address”, “Baud rate”, “stop bits” and
“Parity” (COMMUNICATIONS menu) of the relay.
Check that communications with this relay can be established.
Page (CM) 8-14 P521/EN CM/B93
PRODUCT CHECKS
4.2.5.2
4.2.5.3
4.2.6
4.2.6.1
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
IEC 60870-5-103 (VDEW) Communications
IEC 60870-5-103/VDEW communication systems are designed to have a local Master
Station and this should be used to verify that the relay’s EIA(RS)485 port is working. The
terminal numbers for the relay’s EIA(RS)485 port are given in Table 2.
Ensure that the relay address and baud rate settings in the application software are set the same as those in cells “Relay Address” and “Baud rate” (COMMUNICATIONS menu) of the relay.
Check that, using the Master Station, communications with the relay can be established.
DNP3.0 Communications
Connect a portable PC running appropriate DNP3.0 Master Station software to the relay’s
EIA(RS)485 port via an EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 interface converter. The terminal
numbers for the relay’s EIA(RS)485 port are given in Table 2.
Ensure that the relay address, baud rate, stop bits and parity settings in the application software are set the same as those in cells Relay Address”, “Baud rate”, “Stop bits” and
“Parity” (COMMUNICATIONS menu) of the relay.
Check that communications with this relay can be established.
Current Differential Communications
This test verifies that the relay’s current differential EIA(RS)232/EIA(RS)485/fiber optic communications ports and any other peripheral devices (P59x, P595 etc.) used for communications between the P521 current differential relays, at each end of the feeder being protected, are operating correctly.
Direct Fiber Optic Communications
Set the “Loopback Test” cell (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning menu) to “CHANNEL_1”
(=ON).
Using a length of fiber optic cable, terminated with an ST connector at each end, connect the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) ports on the rear of the relay together. The relay will now respond as if it is connected to a remote relay with the current at the remote end equal to and in phase with the current injected at the local end. Reset any alarm indications and check that no further communications failure alarms are raised. As the loopback alarm is still active it will not reset. Check communication statistics (error messages etc.) in the “Protection Comms” column (MEASUREMENTS menu).
Caution When connecting or disconnecting optical fibers care should be taken not to look directly into the transmit port or end of the optical fiber.
4.2.6.2 Direct EIA(RS)485 Communications
Set the “Loopback Test” cell (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning menu) to “CHANNEL_1”
(=ON).
Using 2 short link wires connect the following:
SK1 terminal 4 to SK1 terminal 6
And
SK1 terminal 5 to SK1 terminal 7
P521/EN CM/B93 Page (CM) 8-15
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
4.2.6.3
4.2.6.4
4.2.6.5
PRODUCT CHECKS
The relay will now respond as if it is connected to a remote relay with the current at the remote end equal to and in phase with the current injected at the local end. Reset any alarm indications and check that no further communications failure alarms are raised. As the loopback alarm is still active it will not reset. Check the communication statistics (e.g.
Errored messages etc.) in the “Protection Comms” column (MEASUREMENTS menu).
EIA(RS)232 Communications
The EIA(RS)232 connections would normally be used to connect the P521 to a modem, or similar device, as a direct link between relays would be practically impossible with
EIA(RS)232’s limited transmission distance.
Set the “Loopback Test” cell (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning menu) to “ON”.
Using a short link wire connect the transmit (SK1 terminal 1) and receive (SK1 terminal 2) ports on the rear of the relay together. The relay will now respond as if it is connected to a remote relay with the current at the remote end equal to and in phase with the current injected at the local end. Reset any alarm indications and check that no further communications failure alarms are raised. As the loopback alarm is still active it will not reset. Check the communication statistics (e.g. Errored messages etc.) in the “Protection
Comms” column (MEASUREMENTS menu).
Communications using Modems
Carefully examine the unit to see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.
Check that the external wiring to the modem is correct to the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram, supplied by the modem manufacturer. Ensure that the modem is being supplied with the correct auxiliary voltage.
Initiate a “Local Analog Loopback” test following the modem user manual.
Return to the P521 relay and select “CHANNEL_1” (=ON) in the “Loopback” cell
(AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning). The relay will then respond as if it is connected to a remote relay with the current at the remote end equal to and in phase with the current injected at the local end.
Reset any alarm indications and check that no further communications failure alarms are raised. As the loopback alarm is still active it will not reset. Check channel status, propagation delays and communication statistics in “Protection Comms” column
(MEASUREMENTS menu).
Communications using P595 Interfacing Device
Carefully examine the unit to see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.
Check that the external wiring to the P595 is correct to the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram. Ensure that the applied auxiliary supply voltage corresponds to that stated on the rating label. The rating label is located on the underside of the unit and on the lower side face in front of the terminal strip.
Set the “Loopback Test” cell (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning menu) to “ON”.
Using 2 short link wires connect the following:
-X9 terminal 4 to –X9 terminal 1
And
-X9 terminal 5 to –X9 terminal 2
The relay will now respond as if it is connected to a remote relay with the current at the remote end equal to and in phase with the current injected at the local end. Reset any alarm indications and check that no further communications failure alarms are raised. As the loopback alarm is still active it will not reset. Check the communication statistics (e.g.
Errored messages etc.) in the “Protection Comms” column (MEASUREMENTS menu).
Page (CM) 8-16 P521/EN CM/B93
PRODUCT CHECKS (CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
4.2.6.6 Communications using P591 Interface Units
The P591 converts the optical output of the P521 relay to an electrical signal for a PCM multiplexer with G.703 interfaces. The unit is housed in a size 20TE case and should be located near to the multiplexer.
Before loopback testing can begin some other checks must be completed.
P591 Visual Inspection
Carefully examine the unit to see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.
The rating information given under the top access cover on the front of the unit should be checked to ensure it is correct for the particular installation.
Ensure that the case earthing connection, top left-hand corner at the rear of the case, is used to connect the unit to a local earth bar using an adequate conductor.
P591 Insulation
Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be done and they haven’t been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless insulation tester at a dc voltage not exceeding 500 V. The auxiliary dc supply terminals should be temporarily connected together.
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100 M
at 500 V.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected to the P591.
P591 External Wiring
Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram. The connection diagram number appears on the rating label under the top access cover on the front of the P591. The corresponding connection diagram will have been supplied with the Schneider Electric order acknowledgement for the P591.
Note It is especially important that the dc supplies are wired with the correct polarity.
P591 Auxiliary Supply
P591 units operate from a dc only auxiliary supply within the operative range of 19 V to
65 V for a 24 – 48 V version and 87.5 V to 300 V for a 110 – 250 V version.
Without energizing the P591 units measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within the operating range.
Note The P591 interface unit is designed to withstand an ac ripple component of up to 12% of the normal dc auxiliary supply. However, in all cases the peak value of the dc supply must not exceed the maximum specified operating limit.
Warning Do not energize the P591 using the battery charger with the battery disconnected as this can irreparably damage the unit’s power supply circuitry.
Energize the P591 only if the auxiliary supply is within the specified operating ranges. If a
P991 test block is provided, it may be necessary to link across the front of the test plug to connect the auxiliary supply to the P591.
P521/EN CM/B93 Page (CM) 8-17
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance PRODUCT CHECKS
P591 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
On power up the green ‘SUPPLY HEALTHY’ LED should illuminate and stay on, thus indicating that the P591 is healthy.
Loopback Test with P591
Remove any external wiring from terminals 3, 4, 7 and 8 at the rear of each P591 unit.
Loopback the G.703 signals on each unit by connecting a wire link between terminals 3 and 7, and a second wire between terminals 4 and 8.
Measure and record the optical signal strength received by the P591 by disconnecting the optical fiber from the receive port on the rear of the unit and connecting it to an optical power meter. The mean level should be in the range –16.8 dBm to –25.4 dBm. If the mean level is outside of this range check the size and type of fiber being used.
Measure and record the optical output power of the transmit port of the P591 using the optical power meter and length of 50/125 mm optical fiber. The mean value should be –
19.8 dBm ±3 dBm.
Ensure that the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) optical fibers between the P521 relay and
P591 units are connected.
Return to the P521 relay and select “CHANNEL_1” (=ON) in the “Loopback” cell
(AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning). The relay will then respond as if it is connected to a remote relay with the current at the remote end equal to and in phase with the current injected at the local end.
Reset any alarm indications and check that no further communications failure alarms are raised. As the loopback alarm is still active it will not reset. Check channel status, propagation delays and communication statistics in “Protection Comms” column
(MEASUREMENTS menu).
Final Checks
If removed, the secondary front cover should now be re-fitted to the P591.
4.2.6.7
P592 Visual Inspection
Carefully examine the unit to see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.
The rating information given under the top access cover on the front of the unit should be checked to ensure it is correct for the particular installation.
Ensure that the case earthing connection, top left-hand corner at the rear of the case, is used to connect the unit to a local earth bar using an adequate conductor.
P592 Insulation
Communications using P592 Interface Units
The P592 converts the optical output of the P521 relay to an electrical signal for a PCM multiplexer with V.35 interfaces. The unit is housed in a size 20TE case and should be located near to the multiplexer.
Before loopback testing can begin some other checks must be completed.
Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be done and they haven’t been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless insulation tester at a dc voltage not exceeding 500 V. The auxiliary dc supply terminals should be temporarily connected together.
Note The V.35 circuits of the P592 are isolated from all other circuits but are electrically connected to the outer case. The circuits must not therefore be insulation or impulse tested to the case.
Page (CM) 8-18 P521/EN CM/B93
PRODUCT CHECKS (CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100 M at 500 V.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected to the P592.
P592 External Wiring
Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram. The connection diagram number appears on the rating label under the top access cover on the front of the P592. The corresponding connection diagram will have been supplied with the Schneider Electric order acknowledgement for the P592.
Note It is especially important that the dc supplies are wired with the correct polarity.
P592 Auxiliary Supply
P592 units operate from a dc only auxiliary supply within the operative range of 19 V to
300 V.
Without energizing the P592 units measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within the operating range.
Note The P592 interface unit is designed to withstand an ac ripple component of up to 12% of the normal dc auxiliary supply. However, in all cases the peak value of the dc supply must not exceed the maximum specified operating limit.
Warning Do not energize the P592 using the battery charger with the battery disconnected as this can irreparably damage the unit’s power supply circuitry.
Energize the P592 only if the auxiliary supply is within the specified operating ranges. If a
P991 test block is provided, it may be necessary to link across the front of the test plug to connect the auxiliary supply to the P592.
P592 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
On power up the green ‘SUPPLY HEALTHY’ LED should illuminate and stay on indicating that the P592 is healthy.
The four red LEDs can be tested by appropriate setting of the DIL switches on the unit’s front plate. Set the data rate switch according to the communication channel bandwidth available. Set all other switches to 0. To illuminate the ‘DSR OFF’ and ‘CTS OFF’ LEDs, disconnect the V.35 connector from the rear of the P592 and set the ‘DSR’ and ‘CTS’ switches to ‘0’. The ‘OPTO LOOPBACK’ and ‘V.35 LOOPBACK’ LEDs can be illuminated by setting their corresponding switches to ‘1’.
Once operation of the LEDs has been established set all DIL switches, except for the
‘OPTO LOOPBACK’ switch, to ‘0’ and reconnect the V.35 connector.
Loopback Test
With the ‘OPTO LOOPBACK’ switch in the ‘1’ position the receive and transmit optical ports are electrically connected together. This allows the optical fiber communications between the P521 relay and the P592 to be tested, but not the internal circuitry of the
P592 itself.
Measure and record the optical signal strength received by the P592 by disconnecting the optical fiber from the receive port on the rear of the unit and connecting it to an optical power meter. The mean level should be in the range -16.8 dBm to -25.4 dBm. If the mean level is outside of this range check the size and type of fiber being used.
P521/EN CM/B93 Page (CM) 8-19
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance PRODUCT CHECKS
Measure and record the optical output power of the transmit port of the P592 using the optical power meter and length of 50/125 mm optical fiber. The mean value should be –
19.8 dBm ±3 dBm.
Ensure that the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) optical fibers between the P521 relay and
P592 units are connected.
Return to the P521 relay and select “CHANNEL_1” (=ON) in the “Loopback” cell
(AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning). The relay will then respond as if it is connected to a remote relay with the current at the remote end equal to and in phase with the current injected at the local end.
Reset any alarm indications and check that no further communications failure alarms are raised. As the loopback alarm is still active it will not reset. Check channel status, propagation delays and communication statistics in “Protection Comms” column
(MEASUREMENTS menu).
Final Checks
If removed, the secondary front cover should now be re-fitted to the P592.
4.2.6.8
P593 Visual Inspection
Carefully examine the unit to see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.
The rating information given under the top access cover on the front of the unit should be checked to ensure it is correct for the particular installation.
Ensure that the case earthing connection, top left-hand corner at the rear of the case, is used to connect the unit to a local earth bar using an adequate conductor.
P593 Insulation
Communications using P593 Interface Units
The P593 converts the optical output of the P521 relay to an electrical signal for a PCM multiplexer with X.21 interfaces. The unit is housed in a size 20TE case and should be located near to the multiplexer.
Before loopback testing can begin some other checks must be completed.
Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be done and they have not been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless insulation tester at a dc voltage not exceeding 500 V. The auxiliary dc supply terminals should be temporarily connected together.
Note The X.21 circuits of the P593 are isolated from all other circuits but are electrically connected to the outer case. The circuits must not therefore be insulation or impulse tested to the case.
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100 M
at 500 V.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected to the P593.
P593 External Wiring
Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram. The connection diagram number appears on the rating label under the top access cover on the front of the P593. The corresponding connection diagram will have been supplied with the Schneider Electric order acknowledgement for the P593.
Note It is especially important that the dc supplies are wired with the correct polarity.
Page (CM) 8-20 P521/EN CM/B93
PRODUCT CHECKS (CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
P593 Auxiliary Supply
P593 units operate from a dc only auxiliary supply within the operative range of 19.5 V to
300 V.
Without energizing the P593 units measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within the operating range.
Note The P593 interface unit is designed to withstand an ac ripple component of up to 12% of the normal dc auxiliary supply. However, in all cases the peak value of the dc supply must not exceed the maximum specified operating limit.
Danger Do not energize the P593 using the battery charger with the battery disconnected as this can irreparably damage the unit’s power supply circuitry.
Caution Energize the P593 only if the auxiliary supply is within the specified operating ranges. If a P991 test block is provided, it may be necessary to link across the front of the test plug to connect the auxiliary supply to the P593.
P593 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
On power up the green ‘SUPPLY’ LED should illuminate and stay on indicating that the
P593 is healthy.
Set the ‘X.21 LOOPBACK’ switch to ‘ON’. The green ‘CLOCK’ and red ‘X.21
LOOPBACK’ LEDs should illuminate. Reset the ‘X.21 LOOPBACK’ switch to the ‘OFF’ position.
Set the ‘OPTO LOOPBACK’ switch to ‘ON’. The red ‘OPTO LOOPBACK’ LED should illuminate. Do not reset the “OPTO LOOPBACK’ switch as it is required in this position for the next test.
Loopback Test
With the ‘OPTO LOOPBACK’ switch in the ‘ON’ position the receive and transmit optical ports are electrically connected together. This allows the optical fiber communications between the P521 relay and the P593 to be tested, but not the internal circuitry of the
P593 itself.
Measure and record the optical signal strength received by the P593 by disconnecting the optical fiber from the receive port on the rear of the unit and connecting it to an optical power meter. The mean level should in the range –16.8 dBm to –25.4 dBm. If the mean level is outside of this range check the size and type of fiber being used.
Measure and record the optical output power of the transmit port of the P593 using the optical power meter and length of 50/125 mm optical fiber. The mean value should be –
19.8 dBm ±3 dBm.
Ensure that the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) optical fibers between the P521 relay and
P593 units are connected.
Set the ‘OPTO LOOPBACK’ and ‘X.21 LOOPBACK’ switch to ‘OFF’ and ‘ON’ respectively. With the ‘X.21 LOOPBACK’ switch in this position the ‘Receive Data’ and
‘Transmit Data’ lines of the X.21 communication interface are connected together. This allows the optical fiber communications between the P521 relay and the P593, and the internal circuitry of the P593 itself to be tested.
Return to the P521 relay and select “CHANNEL_1” (=ON) in the “Loopback” cell
(AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning). The relay will then respond as if it is connected to a
P521/EN CM/B93 Page (CM) 8-21
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
Final Checks
4.2.7
PRODUCT CHECKS remote relay with the current at the remote end equal to and in phase with the current injected at the local end.
Reset any alarm indications and check that no further communications failure alarms are raised. As the loopback alarm is still active it will not reset. Check channel status, propagation delays and communication statistics in “Protection Comms” column
(MEASUREMENTS menu).
If removed, the secondary front cover should now be re-fitted to the P591.
Current Inputs
This test verifies that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
All relays will leave the factory set for operation at a system frequency of 50 Hz. If operation at 60 Hz is required then this must be set in the “Frequency” cell in the OP
PARAMETERS menu.
Apply current equal to the line current transformer secondary winding rating to each
current transformer input of the corresponding rating in turn, see Table 1 or external
connection diagram, see chapter P521/EN CO for appropriate terminal numbers, checking its magnitude using a multimeter. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the MEASUREMENTS/Current/General column and value displayed recorded.
Note Some of the relay protection elements may operate during this test, depending upon the relay setting.
CT Rating (Amps) Terminals
1
5
5
1
1
1
5
5
N
A
B
A
B
C
C
N
49 and 50
51 and 52
53 and 54
55 and 56
41 and 42
43 and 44
45 and 46
47 and 48
Table 3 - Current input connections
The measured current values displayed on the relay LCD, or a portable PC connected to the front communication port, will be in primary amperes, providing the CT ratio has been set. The values displayed should be equal to the applied current multiplied by the corresponding current transformer ratio set in the “CT Ratio” column (CONFIGURATION menu).
The measurement accuracy of the relay is typically ±0.2% at rated current. However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
Page (CM) 8-22 P521/EN CM/B93
SETTING CHECKS
5
5.1
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.1.1
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
SETTING CHECKS
The setting checks ensure that all of the application-specific relay settings (i.e. both the relay’s function and programmable scheme logic settings), for the particular installation, have been correctly applied to the relay.
If the application-specific settings are not available, ignore sections 5.1 and 5.2.
Note
Note
The trip circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.
For additional security the P521 output contacts can be disabled using the commissioning menu. For more information on this feature refer to section
3.5.4.1 of the User Guide, see chapter P521/EN FT.
Apply Application-Specific Settings
There are two methods of applying the settings to the relay:
•
Transferring them from a pre-prepared setting file to the relay using a portable PC running the appropriate software via the rel ay’s front EIA(RS)232 port, located under the bottom access cover, or rear EIA(RS)485/K Bus communications port.
This method is preferred for transferring function settings as it is much faster and there is less margin for error.
•
If a setting file has been created for the particular application and provided on a diskette this will further reduce the commissioning time.
• Enter them manually via the relay’s user interface.
Demonstrate Correct Relay Operation
•
•
Test 4.2.7 has already demonstrated that the relay is within calibration, therefore the purpose of these tests are as follows:
•
To determine that the primary protection function of the relay, current differential, can trip according to the correct application settings.
To verify correct setting of any backup phase overcurrent protection.
To verify correct assignment of the trip contacts, by monitoring the response to a selection of fault injections.
Current Differential Bias Characteristic
To avoid spurious operation of any overcurrent, earth fault, negative sequence overcurrent, thermal overload, broken conductor, under current or breaker fail elements these should be disabled for the duration of the differential element tests. Refer to the
User Guide for information on how this can be done. Make a note of which elements need to be re-enabled after testing. The relay should also be set to loopback mode
isolating it from the remote end. Refer to section 4.2.6.1.
Connect the Test Circuit
The following tests require a variable auto transformer (variac) and two resistors
connected as shown in Figure 1. Alternatively an injection test set can be used to supply
Ia and Ib.
P521/EN CM/B93 Page (CM) 8-23
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance SETTING CHECKS
5.2.1.2
Page (CM) 8-24
Figure 1 - Connection for bias characteristic testing
A current is injected into the A phase which is used as the bias current and another current is injected into the B phase which is used as differential current. Ia is always greater than Ib.
Lower Slope
Make sure that the relay is in loopback mode as described in 4.2.6.1.
Adjust the variac and the resistor to give a bias current of 1 pu in the A-phase.
Note 1 pu = 1 A into terminals 49-50 for 1 A applications; or 1 pu = 5 A into terminals 41-42 for 5 A applications). The relay will trip and any contacts associated with the current differential protection will operate, this will be accompanied by the “I DIFF” and “I DIFF I-TRIP” alarms. Some LEDs may illuminate and the yellow alarm LED will start to flash. Acknowledge the alarm by pressing the
key followed by
key. The yellow LED will stop flashing and become continuously illuminated.
Operation of the A Phase element will be indicated by an “A” appearing in the “IDiff Trip
Flags” cell, (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Commissioning) as shown below.
IDiff Trip Flags
TRIP: A
This indication will remain until the A-Phase differential current exits the tripping region of the biased differential characteristic.
When the current in the A Phase is established, close the switch and slowly increase the current in the B phase from zero until Phase B trips. This will be indicated by a “B” appearing in the “IDiff Trip Flags” menu, in addition to “A” that is already indicated, as shown below.
IDiff Trip Flags
TRIP: A B
Record the phase B current magnitude and check that it corresponds to the formula below.
Switch OFF the ac supply, read and clear all alarms.
The formula below can be used to calculate the B phase operate current (enter slope ‘k1’ in pu form, i.e. percentage/100).
B phase operate current = 0.5 x ( s1 + k1) pu +/- 10%
P521/EN CM/B93
SETTING CHECKS
5.2.1.3
5.2.2
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
Upper Slope
Repeat the test in 5.2.1.2 with the bias current set in the A-phase to be 3 pu.
When the current in A Phase is established, close the switch and slowly increase the current in the B phase from zero until phase B trips. Record the phase B current magnitude and check that it corresponds to the information below.
Switch OFF the ac supply and reset the alarms.
The formula below can be used to calculate the B phase operate current (enter slope ‘k1’ in pu form, i.e. percentage/100).
B Phase operate current = 0.5 x [(3 x k2) – {(k2 – k1) x Is2 } + Is1] pu +/- 20%
Note: For 5 A applications the duration of current injections should be short to avoid overheating of the variac, resistors or injection test set.
Current Differential Operating Time
Retaining the same test circuit as before, prepare for an instantaneous injection of 3 pu current in the A phase with no current in the B phase (B phase switch open). Connect a timer to start when the fault injection is applied and to stop when the trip occurs. The operating time of the relay should be recorded. Repeat the test for phases B and C, reconfiguring the test equipment accordingly.
The average of the recorded operating times for the three phases should be less than the
values shown in Table 4. Switch OFF the ac supply and reset the alarms.
Baud rate (Protection Comms)
9.6 kb/s
19.2 kb/s
56 kb/s
64 kb/s
100 ms
80 ms
45 ms
45 ms
Table 4 - P521 Instantaneous operating times
Maximum Operating Times
Note Where an IDMT or DMT delay is set, in the PROTECTION G1/G2/G3/G4
/[87] Current Diff menu column, the expected operating time is typically within +/- 5% of that for the curve equation plus the “instantaneous” delay quoted above.
Warning On completion of the tests any overcurrent, earth fault, negative sequence overcurrent, thermal overload, broken conductor, under current or breaker fail elements which were disabled for testing purposes must have their original settings restored in the appropriate menu columns.
5.2.3 Backup Phase Overcurrent Protection
If the overcurrent protection function is being used, the I> element should be tested. If
To avoid spurious operation of any other protection functions, such as current differential, breaker fail etc. these should be disabled for the duration of the overcurrent tests. Make a note of which elements need to be re-enabled after testing.
P521/EN CM/B93 Page (CM) 8-25
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
5.2.3.1
5.2.3.2
5.2.3.3
SETTING CHECKS
•
•
Note If the
> element is set to be enabled on “Backup” only (i.e. when the protection communications fail), it will be necessary to deliberately force a communications channel failure in order to test it. This can be achieved by removing the loopback test, and ensuring that the relay cannot communicate with the remote end relay.
Set “Loopback” cell (AUTOMAT. CTRL /Commissioning) to “OFF”
Observe that the relay raises a COMMS FAIL alarm. This may take up to 10 seconds depending upon the setting of the “Comms Fail Timer”
(COMMUNICATIONS menu).
Connect the Test Circuit
Determine which output relay has been selected to operate when an > trip occurs by viewing the “tI>” cell in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Output Relays menu.
The associated terminal numbers can be found in the external connection diagram
(chapter P521/EN CO).
Connect the output relay so that its operation will trip the test set and stop the timer.
Connect the current output of the test set to the ‘A’ phase current input of the relay
(terminals 49 and 50 where 1 A current transformers are being used and terminals 41 and
42 for 5 A current transformers).
Ensure that the timer will start when the current is applied to the relay.
Perform the Test
Ensure that the timer is reset.
Apply a current of twice the setting in “I>” cell (PROTECTION G1/G2/G3/G4/[50/51]
Phase OC) to the relay and note the time displayed when the timer stops.
Check that the red trip LED has illuminated.
Check the Operating Time
Check that the operating time recorded by the timer is within the range shown in
Note
Except for the definite time characteristic, the operating times given in Table
5 are for a time multiplier or time dial setting of 1. Therefore, to obtain the
operating time at other time multiplier or time dial settings, the time given in
Table 5 must be multiplied by the appropriate TMS or TD setting.
In addition, for definite time and inverse characteristics there is an additional delay of up to 0.02 second and 0.08 second respectively that may need to be added to the relay’s acceptable range of operating times.
For all characteristics allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
Characteristic
DMT
IEC STI (Short Time Inverse)
IEC SI (Standard Inverse)
IEC VI (Very Inverse)
Operating Time at Twice Current Setting and Time
Multiplier/Time Dial Setting of 1.0
Nominal (Seconds) t
>1 setting
1.78
10.03
13.50
Range (Seconds)
Setting ±2%
1.60 – 1.96
9.00
– 11.0
12.2
– 14.5
Page (CM) 8-26 P521/EN CM/B93
SETTING CHECKS
5.3
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
IEC EI (Extremely Inverse)
UK LTI (Long Time Inverse)
CO2 (Short Time Inverse)
IEEE MI (Moderately Inverse)
CO8 (Inverse)
IEEE VI (Very Inverse)
IEEE EI (Extremely Inverse)
RI
Characteristic
Operating Time at Twice Current Setting and Time
Multiplier/Time Dial Setting of 1.0
3.80
9.52
Nominal (Seconds)
26.67
120.00
1.73
2.16
7.03
4.52
Table 5 - Characteristic operating times for
>
Range (Seconds)
24.0 – 29.3
108
– 132
1.56
– 1.90
3.42 – 4.18
1.94
– 2.38
6.33
– 7.73
8.57
– 10.5
4.07 – 4.97
Warning On completion of the tests any current differential, negative sequence overcurrent, thermal overload, broken conductor, under current or breaker fail elements which were disabled for testing purposes must have their original settings restored in the appropriate menu columns.
Check Application Settings
The settings applied should be carefully checked against the required application-specific settings to ensure that they are correct, and have not been mistakenly altered during the injection test.
There are two methods of checking the settings:
•
Extract the settings from the relay using a portable PC running the appropriate software via the front EIA(RS)232 port, located under the bottom access cover, or rear communications port (with an appropriate protocol converter connected).
Compare the settings transferred from the relay with the original written applicationspecific setting record. (For cases where the customer has only provided a printed copy of the required settings but a portable PC is available).
•
Step through the settings using the relays user interface and compare them with the original application-specific setting record.
P521/EN CM/B93 Page (CM) 8-27
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
6
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
END TO END TESTS
END TO END TESTS
In section 4.2.6 a loopback test was initiated on the relay fiber optic communications
channels, together with the P59x/modem interface units, if installed, to verify correct operation of the communications channel local to the P521 relay whilst completing the remaining tests. In this test the loopback is removed and, if possible, satisfactory communications between P521 relays in the same group will be confirmed.
Note The trip circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.
Remove the Loopback Test
Caution As well as removing the loopback, this section checks that all wiring and optical fibers/pilots are reconnected. If modems,
P592 or P593 interface units are installed the applicationspecific settings will also be applied.
Check the relay alarms to ensure that no communications failure alarms have occurred whilst the loopback test has been in progress.
Set cell the Loopback cell to ‘OFF’.
Restore the communications channels as per the appropriate sub-section below.
Direct Fiber Optic Communications
Remove the loopback test fiber and reconnect the fiber optic cables for communications between relays, ensuring correct placement.
Warning When connecting or disconnecting optical fibers care should be taken not to look directly into the transmit port or end of the optical fiber.
Direct EIA(RS)485 Communications
Remove the 2 short link wires between SK1 terminals 4 and 6 and SK1 terminals 5 and 7.
Caution Ensure that all external wiring that has been removed to facilitate testing is replaced in accordance with the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram.
EIA(RS)232 Communications
Remove the short link wire between SK1 terminals 1 and 2.
Caution Ensure that all external wiring that has been removed to facilitate testing is replaced in accordance with the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram.
Page (CM) 8-28 P521/EN CM/B93
END TO END TESTS
6.1.3.1
6.1.3.2
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.1.6
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
Communications using Modems
Remove “Local Analog Loopback” test following the modem user manual.
Communications using P595 Interfacing Device
Remove the short link wires between –X9 terminals 1 and 4 and –X9 terminals 2 and 5.
Caution
Caution
Ensure that all external wiring that has been removed to facilitate testing is replaced in accordance with the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram.
If isolation transformers are not used between long communications wires, these should be handled as pilot wire circuits to avoid the risk of electric shock.
Communications using P591 Interface Units
Return to the P591 units.
Caution Ensure that all external wiring that has been removed to facilitate testing is replaced in accordance with the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram.
If applicable, replace the secondary front cover on the P591 units.
Communications using P592 Interface Units
Return to the P592 units.
Caution Ensure that all external wiring that has been removed to facilitate testing is replaced in accordance with the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram.
Set the ‘V.35 LOOPBACK’ switch to the ‘0’ position.
Set the ‘CLOCK SWITCH’, ‘DSR’, ‘CTS’ and ‘DATA RATE’ DIL switches on each unit to the positions required for the specific application and ensure the ‘OPTO LOOPBACK’ switch is in the ‘0’ position.
If applicable, replace the secondary front cover on the P592 units.
Note V.35 Loopback on the remote P592 can be selected to check the communications between the local relay, the local P592 and the communication link itself.
Communications using P593 Interface Units
Return to the P593 units.
Caution Ensure that all external wiring that has been removed to facilitate testing is replaced in accordance with the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram.
P521/EN CM/B93 Page (CM) 8-29
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
6.2
6.2.1
END TO END TESTS
Set the ‘X.21 LOOPBACK’ switch to the ‘OFF’ position and ensure the ‘OPTO
LOOPBACK’ switch is also in the ‘OFF’ position.
If applicable, replace the secondary front cover on the P593 units.
Note X.21 Loopback on the remote P593 can be selected to check the communications between the local relay, the local P593 and the X.21 communication link itself. This setting on the local P593 can also be used to check the communications between the local relay and the local P593 if required.
Verify Communications between Relays
Check for correct communications between relays as per the appropriate sub-section below.
Communication Checks for Direct Fiber or P59x Connected Relays
The following communication checks confirm that the optical power at the transmit and receive ports of the local relay are within the recommended operating limits. However, these checks can only be performed with the relays (and P59x interface units if installed) at the other end of the feeder known to be functional and energized.
Measure and record the optical signal strength received by the local P521 relay by disconnecting the optical fiber from the Channel 1 receive port and connecting it to an optical power meter. The mean level should be in the range –16.8 dBm to -25.4 dBm for an 850 nm port. For relays delivered from December 2008 (optical fiber interface card marked with “43 dB”), the mean level should be in the range -6 dBm to -49 dBm for a
1300 nm port. For relays delivered pre-December 2008, the mean level should be in the range –7 dBm to – 37 dBm for a 1300 nm port. If the mean level is outside of this range check the size and type of fiber being used.
Caution When connecting or disconnecting optical fibers care should be taken not to look directly into the transmit port or end of the optical fiber.
Measure and record the optical power of the Channel 1 transmit port using the optical power meter and length of optical fiber. The mean value should be in the range - 16.8 dBm to -22.8 dBm for an 850 nm port. For relays delivered from December 2008 (optical fiber interface card marked with “43 dB”), the mean level should be in the range -3 dBm to
-9 dBm for a 1300 nm port. For relays delivered pre-December 2008, the mean level should be in the range -7 dBm to -13 dBm for a 1300 nm port.
Ensure that all transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) optical fibers are reconnected to the P521, ensuring correct placement.
Reset any alarm indications and check that no further communications failure alarms are raised. Check that the number of valid messages is increasing and that the number of errored messages stops increasing. These cells can be found in the
MEASUREMENTS/Protection Comms column.
To reset the protection comms statistics, press
in the “Comms Stats RST” cell.
Page (CM) 8-30 P521/EN CM/B93
END TO END TESTS
6.2.2
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
Communication Checks for Metallic Communications (Direct EIA(RS)485,
P595, EIA(RS)232 and Modem Connected Relays)
Caution If isolation transformers are not used between long communications wires, these should be handled as pilot wire circuits to avoid the risk of electric shock.
Ensure that all transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) leads are reconnected to the P521.
Note For EIA(RS)232 communications it must be ensured that the SK1 terminal 3 is also connected. Failure to do this may result in unreliable communications.
Reset any alarm indications and check that no further communications failure alarms are raised. Check that the number of valid messages is increasing and that the number of errored messages stops increasing. These cells can be found in the
MEASUREMENTS/Protection Comms column.
The protection comms statistics can be reset, if necessary, by pressing
in the “Comms
Stats RST” cell.
P521/EN CM/B93 Page (CM) 8-31
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
7
7.1
ON-LOAD CHECKS
ON-LOAD CHECKS
•
•
The objectives of the on-load checks are to:
•
Confirm the external wiring to the current inputs is correct.
•
Measure the magnitude of capacitive current.
Ensure the on-load differential current is well below the relay setting.
Check the polarity of the line current transformers at each end is consistent.
However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the energization of the plant being protected and the other P521 relays in the group have been commissioned.
Caution
Caution
Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has been removed to allow testing.
If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
Confirm Current Transformer Wiring
Measure the current transformer secondary values for each input using a multimeter connected in series with the corresponding relay current input.
Caution Ensure the current flowing in the neutral circuit of the current transformers is negligible.
Compare the values of the secondary phase currents with the relay’s measured values, which can be found in the MEASUREMENTS/Current/General menu column.
Note Under normal load conditions the earth fault function will measure little, if any, current. It is therefore necessary to simulate a phase to neutral fault.
This can be achieved by temporarily disconnecting one or two of the line current transformer connections to the relay and shorting the terminals of these current transformer secondary windings. However, if a single dedicated current transformer is used for the earth fault function, it is not possible to check the relay’s measured values.
If no CT ratio has been entered (CONFIGURATION/CT Ratios) the currents displayed on the LCD or a portable PC connected to the front EIA(RS)232 communication port of the relay should be equal to the applied secondary current. The values should be within 1% of the applied secondary currents. However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
If a CT ratio has been entered the currents displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied secondary current multiplied by the corresponding current transformer ratio.
Again the values should be within 1% of the expected value, plus an additional allowance for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
Page (CM) 8-32 P521/EN CM/B93
ON-LOAD CHECKS
7.2
7.3
7.4
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
Measure Capacitive Charging Current
With the feeder energized from one end only, compare the local and remote measured currents in the MEASUREMENTS/Current Diff menu column to confirm that the feeder capacitive charging current is similar to that expected on all three phases.
Check that the s1 setting is higher than 2.5 times the capacitive charging current. If this is not the case notify the Engineer who determined the original settings of the setting required to ensure stability under normal operating conditions.
Check Differential Current
With the feeder supplying load current check that the relay measurements in the
“Current/General” menu column are as expected and that the differential current is similar to the value of the capacitive charging current previously measured for all three phases.
Check Consistency of Current Transformer Polarity
The load current should be high enough to be certain beyond doubt that the main current transformers are connected with the same polarity to each relay in the group.
There is a possibility on cable circuits with high line capacitance that the load current could be masked by the capacitive charging current. If necessary reverse the connections to the main current transformers and check that the ‘A’ phase differential current in cell “Differential IA” (MEASUREMENTS/Current Diff) is significantly higher than for the normal connection. If the differential current falls with the connection reversed the main current transformers may not be correct and should be thoroughly checked. Repeat the test for phases ‘B’ and ‘C’ using the “Differential IB” and “Differential IC” cells respectively.
P521/EN CM/B93 Page (CM) 8-33
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
8
FINAL CHECKS
FINAL CHECKS
The tests are now complete.
Caution Remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If you have disconnected any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform the wiring verification tests, make sure all connections are replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
If the relay is in a new installation, or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. These counters can be reset using the “CB Operation RST” and “ Amps (n) RST” cells in the (RECORD/CB
Monitoring).
If a P991/MMLG test block is installed, remove the P992/MMLB test plug and replace the cover so that the protection is put into service.
Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records, alarms and LEDs have been reset before leaving the relay.
Page (CM) 8-34 P521/EN CM/B93
MAINTENANCE
9
9.1
9.2
9.2.1
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Period
It is recommended that products supplied by Schneider Electric receive periodic monitoring after installation. As with all products some deterioration with time is inevitable. In view of the critical nature of protective relays, and their infrequent operation, it is desirable to confirm that they are operating correctly at regular intervals.
Schneider Electric protective relays are designed for a life in excess of 20 years.
MiCOM P521 current differential relay is self-supervising and so requires less maintenance than earlier designs of relay. Most problems will result in an alarm so that remedial action can be taken. However, some periodic tests should be done to ensure that the relay is functioning correctly and the external wiring is intact.
The operation of the P59x interface units, when installed, is continuously monitored by the P521 relay and a communication failure alarm will therefore be given if a P59x should cease to work properly.
Note A communication failure alarm could be caused by the failure of the equipment forming the communication link and can not in itself be conclusive evidence of a faulty P59x interface unit.
•
•
•
•
•
If a Preventative Maintenance Policy exists within the customer’s organization then the recommended product checks should be included in the regular programme.
Maintenance periods will depend on many factors, such as:
Operating environment
Accessibility of the site
Amount of available manpower
Importance of the installation in the power system
Consequences of failure
Maintenance Checks
Although some functionality checks can be performed from a remote location by utilizing the communications ability of the relays, these are predominantly restricted to checking that the relay is measuring the applied currents and voltages accurately, and checking the circuit breaker maintenance counters. Therefore it is recommended that maintenance checks are performed locally (i.e. at the substation itself).
Caution Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the Safety and Technical
Data chapters and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
Alarms
The alarm status LED should first be checked to identify if any alarm conditions exist. If so, press the read key [ ] repeatedly to step through the alarms.
Clear the alarms to extinguish the LED.
P521/EN CM/B93 Page (CM) 8-35
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
9.3
9.3.1
MAINTENANCE
Opto-Isolators
The opto-isolated inputs can be checked to ensure that the relay responds to their
energization by repeating the commissioning test detailed in section 4.2.3 of this
Commissioning and Maintenance Guide.
Output Relays
The output relays can be checked to ensure that they operate by repeating the
commissioning test detailed in section 4.2.4 of this Commissioning and Maintenance
Guide.
Measurement Accuracy
If the power system is energized, the values measured by the relay can be compared with known system values to check that they are in the approximate range that is expected. If they are then the analog/digital conversion and calculations are being performed correctly
by the relay. Suitable test methods can be found in section 7.1 of this Commissioning
and Maintenance Guide.
Alternatively, the values measured by the relay can be checked against known values injected into the relay via the test block, if fitted, or injected directly into the relay
terminals. A suitable test method can be found in section 4.2.7 of this Commissioning
and Maintenance Guide. These tests will prove the calibration accuracy is being maintained.
Equipment Failure
Caution Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the content of the Safety and Technical
Data chapters and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
The MiCOM P521 relay is fully digital and performs constant self-diagnosis. Any failure of software or hardware elements is instantly detected. As soon as an internal fault is detected, depending on its type (minor or major), an alarm message is displayed as a priority on the front panel LCD before the fault LED is illuminated (fixed or flashing) and the watchdog relay is closed (if the fault is a major one).
An equipment failure (major or minor) cannot be acknowledged on the front panel (using the dedicated tactile button keypad). Only the disappearance of the cause will acknowledge the fault and hence reset the fault LED.
Minor Fault
A control communications failure would be regarded as a minor fault by the P521. If the control communications are faulty, the protection and automation modules are not affected.
Message:
"COMM.ERROR": Control communication faulty
Cause:
Hardware or software failure of the control communications module.
Action:
Withdraw the active part and return it to the factory for repair.
Page (CM) 8-36 P521/EN CM/B93
MAINTENANCE
9.3.2
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
Alternative: If the control communication is not used, disable communication in the
COMMUNICATION/ CTRL Comms menu (CTRL Comms
= No).
Message:
“RAM ERROR” : Battery backed RAM faulty
“BATTERY FAIL”: Battery faulty or flat.
Cause:
See section 9.4.3 of this Commissioning and Maintenance Guide. If the message
still remains after restart return the module to the factory for repair.
Protection Comms Fault
As soon as a problem with the protection comms is detected the operation of the main protection is stopped. All other protection elements continue to operate and those selected as backup in the current setting group will be enabled.
Message:
“COMMS ALARM CH1”: communications channel failure detected.
Cause:
Hardware or software failure of the communications card.
Hardware failure of the communications module retained in the case when the active part is withdrawn.
Failure of the relay at the distant end of the communications link.
Failure of a device in the communications path or break in the communications link.
Caution Live parts exposed within the P521 case, when the P521 module is removed.
Action:
Determine the location of the failure using the P520L loopback test box (see
Accessories section).
Initiate a loopback test on the back of each of the relays. If the protection comms alarm resets then the fault is with the communications link not the relays. The relays should assist with diagnosing the location of the fault by indicating the faulty path (Tx, Rx or both). If the protection comms alarm does not reset on one relay it is likely that the relay is faulty.
To diagnose if the fault is in the active (removal) part of the relay or the protection communications card, remove the relay and plug in the P520L loopback test box as
shown in Figure 2. It is recommended that the battery is tested, before inserting
the test box, by selecting battery test and checking that the green LED illuminates.
With the loopback tester inserted select “Loopback Test” using the selector switch and ensure that the green LED illuminates. Initiate a loopback test from the remote relay so that the comms signal passes through the local relay communications card. If the comms fail alarm on the remote relay disappears, then the protection comms card is functioning correctly, hence the problem is with only the active part.
If the comms fail alarm does not reset then the local protection comms card is faulty.
P521/EN CM/B93 Page (CM) 8-37
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance MAINTENANCE
9.3.3
9.3.3.1
Page (CM) 8-38
Figure 2 - Application of P520L loopback test box
If the fault is with the active part of the relay, withdraw the active part and return it to the factory for repair.
If the fault is with the communications module the whole relay, including the case, must be returned to the factory for repair.
If the fault is in any other part of the system the relays will automatically resume communication as soon as the link is restored.
Major Fault
Major faults for the MiCOM P521 relay are all software and hardware failures, except the communication faults. As soon as this type of failure is detected the WatchDog (WD) is closed and all operations are stopped (protection, automation, communication).
Hardware and Software Faults
Messages:
"SETTING ERROR": Data zone in fault
"EEPROM ERROR CALIBR.": Calibration data faulty
"CT ERROR": Analog channel faulty
“DEFAULT SETTING” : Default settings restored
“PROT COMMS FAIL” : Protection Comms card faulty
Cause:
Hardware or software failure.
Action:
Restart the protection software by interrupting the auxiliary supply for approximately ten sec onds. In the case of the “DEFAULT SETTING” and
“SETTING ERROR” alarms the in-service settings should be re-applied. If the software fault still remains after restart withdraw the active part and return the module to the factory for repair.
P521/EN CM/B93
MAINTENANCE
9.4
9.4.1
9.4.2
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
Method of Repair
Replacing the Active Part
The case and the rear terminals blocks have been designed to facilitate removal of the
MiCOM P521 relay without disconnecting the scheme wiring, should replacement or repair become necessary.
Note The MiCOM range of relays have integral current transformer shorting switches which will close when the active part is removed from the case.
Remove the upper and lower flap without exerting excessive force. Remove the external screws. Under the upper flap, turn the extractor with a 3mm screwdriver and extract the active part of the relay by pulling from the upper and lower notches on the front panel of the MiCOM relay.
Then reinstall the repaired or replacement relay following the above instruction in reverse, ensuring that no modification has been made to the scheme wiring.
Note The rear protection communications interface is designed to be retained inside the case to avoid disconnection of the communications.
Replacing the Complete Relay
To remove the complete relay (active part and case) the entire wiring must be removed from the rear connector.
Before working at the rear of the relay isolate all current supplies to the MiCOM relay and ensure that the relay is no longer energized.
DANGER NEVER OPEN THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A
CURRENT TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE
PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE
INSULATION.
Remove all wiring (communication, logic inputs, outputs, auxiliary voltage, current inputs).
Disconnect the relay earth connection from the rear of the relay.
Caution If isolation transformers are not used between long communications wires, these should be handled as pilot wire circuits to avoid the risk of electric shock.
Remove the screws used to fasten the relay to the panel, rack, etc. These are the screws with the larger diameter heads that are accessible when the upper and lower flaps are installed.
Withdraw the relay from the panel, rack, etc. taking care because it will be heavy due to the internal transformers.
To reinstall the repaired or replacement relay follow the above instructions in reverse, ensuring that each terminal block is relocated in the correct position and the case earth and communications are replaced.
Once reinstallation is complete the relay should be re-commissioned using the instruction in sections 1 to 8 of this Commissioning and Maintenance Guide.
P521/EN CM/B93 Page (CM) 8-39
(CM) 8 Commissioning and Maintenance
9.4.3
9.4.4
MAINTENANCE
•
•
Changing the Battery
The MiCOM P521 has a battery to maintain recorded data and the correct time when the auxiliary voltage fails. Starting from Hardware B, disturbance, fault and event records are stored on a flash memory card that doesn’t need to be backed up by a battery. Therefore battery in the front compartment of the relay are no longer needed. The battery compartment is fitted with a blanking cover. The data main